Stenoscop Technical Supplement 1173 PG

e
Medical Systems
Stenoscop Technical Supplement
HOME
GE Medical Systems
STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

Technical Supplement
REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
1-5-4
1-5-5
Day One - Monday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Day Two - Tuesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day Three - Wednesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day Four - Thursday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day Five - Friday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1-7 COURSE/INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
2-5 HAZCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2-6 ENVIRONMENTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7 SAFETY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 6 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1 DSM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-1-1
6-1-2
6-1-3
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-7
DSM 200 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light & Sound Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Managment Controls - Groups 1 & Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Management - Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Processing Functions - Group 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

6-2-1
6-2-2
6-2-3
6-2-4
6-2-5
6-2-6
Pulsed Fluoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Radiography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Imager - film not compatible with paper printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Imager - paper not compatible with video film imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stand Alone - DSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6-4 SYSTEM OPERATION LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
SECTION 7 - THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 HV CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 3A19 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 3A7AD-kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-3
7-5
7-9
7-11
7-13
7-15
7-17
7-17
7-19
7-21
7-23
7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7-12-1 Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-12-2 Rad Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7-14 FLUORO TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
ii
GE Medical Systems

REV 3

SECTION
PAGE
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

7-15-1 6" Single Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-2 6"-9" Dual Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-3 Circular Collimators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-16 3A3 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-18 3A5 TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-19 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

7-20 TV CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IRIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1010 FORMATTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIDEO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-1 Smoothing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-26-2 V Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-3 H Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-4 CRT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-5 Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
7-49
7-51
7-53
7-63
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
FUSES REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
PWB SWITCHES JOB CARDS RG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
TIME COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
RG 21 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

STENOSCOP 2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
STENOSCOP 2 GENERATOR WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
iii
GE Medical Systems

REV 3

SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
iv
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11-1 MONICON 3 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12-1 STENOSCOP CONSOLE REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-2 STENOSCOP LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12-3 REVIEW OF STENOSCOP COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-7
12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11

12-5 DSM 200/600 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12-6 DISTAR PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12-7 DSM 200/600 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-8 STENOSCOP 120V LINE PLUG MEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12-9 SN 4011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12-10 SN 4018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12-11 SN 4024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12-12 LASER TRACK ADD-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13-1 SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-2 MODEL CCM 620 INSTALLATION IMAGE ADJUSTMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-3 FUNCTIONAL CHECK LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16-1 DSM 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16-1-1 Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

16-3 DSM 200 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
16-4 DSM 200 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
16-5 DSM 200 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16-6 DSM 600 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16-7 DSM 600 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
16-8 DSM 600 FUNCTIONAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-79
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 17 - VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
ii
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
This page intentionally left blank.
ii
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
1-5-4
1-5-5
Day One - Monday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Day Two - Tuesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day Three - Wednesday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day Four - Thursday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day Five - Friday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1-7 COURSE/INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION
I,_________________________________________, hereby acknowledge the following with respect to my

(please print)
possession of the GENERAL ELECTRIC PROPRIETARY and/or RESTRICTED SERVICE MATERIALS and I
agree that:
1.
Proprietary materials shall at all times remain the property of the GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
and shall be returned by me to the GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY upon termination of my em
ployment with the company or upon the Company's earlier request for the return of this material.
2.
My possession and use of these materials are governed by the terms of my employment agreement
with the Company.
The undersigned employee has received the indicated proprietary service manual(s) while attending the
XR012 STENOSCOP II Series
class on _____________________.
(date)
Please add these item(s) to your local records of proprietary materials held by this employee.
P/N or Identifier
XR012
Proprietary Course Material Description

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 Series Technical Supplement
I hereby acknowledge receipt of the above item(s) considered proprietary to GE or its vendors.
Student Signature _______________________________________________ Date _____________
(SSAN where appropriate)
(Employee Number)
(Pouch Mail Code)
....................................................................
Signed this ____________ day of _______________, 19_______.
______________________________________
EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE
___________________________________
MANAGER SIGNATURE
REGION/COUNTRY
______________________________________
SERVICE ENGINEERING SIGNATURE
(for Tab Distribution Authorization)
___________________________________
International, Only,
COUNTRY:_________________________
1-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION

PLEASE FILL IN ALL APPLICABLE BLANKS
Please print name as you wish it to appear on your certificate.
CLASS IN WHICH YOU ARE ENROLLED:
DATE OF COURSE:
1-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES
GEMS WORKPLACE
VALUING DIVERSITY"
HARASSMENT RECOGNITION
and
PREVENTION
GEMS COMMITMENT
GE Medical Systems is committed to providing a work environment where all employees can reach their
maximum potential. To achieve this, every employee is required to uphold standards of mutual respect and take
responsibility for workplace behavior.
SEXUAL HARASSMENT DEFINED
Unwelcome behavior of a sexual nature constitutes harassment when:
S
S
S
Submission to such conduct is made, either explicitly or implicitly, a term or condition of an individual's em
ployment.
Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as the basis for employment decisions
affecting such individual.
Such conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual's work performance or
creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive working environment.
EXAMPLES OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT

VERBAL
S
S
S
S
S
S
Referring to an adult as a girl, hunk, doll, babe or honey.

Whistling at someone, cat calls.
Making sexual comments or innuendos.
Telling sexual jokes or stories.
Asking personal questions about social or sexual life.
Repeatedly asking out a person who is not interested.
NONVERBAL
S
S
S
S
Looking a person up and down (elevator eyes).

Staring at someone.
Displaying sexually suggestive visuals.
Making sexual gestures with hands or body movements.
PHYSICAL
S
S
S
S
S
S
Touching a person's clothing, hair or body.

Giving a massage around the neck.
Standing close or brushing up against a person.
Grabbing
Pinching
Caressing
1-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
INTENT vs. IMPACT"

S
S
S
I didn't mean to offend..." is not an excuse for any form of harassment.

The intent of the behavior is not the issue.
We must anticipate the impact a certain behavior will have on a co-worker.
OTHER FORMS OF HARASSMENT WILL NOT BE TOLERATED

S
S
Any forms of harassment involving race, religion, ethnic background, lifestyle, age, etc. will not be tolerated.
Every employee is entitled to a hostile free" work environment.
EXAMPLES OF OTHER FORMS OF HARASSMENT

S
S
S
Displaying or circulating racial or ethnic jokes.

Telling jokes or making comments that are derogatory to a particular group.
Excluding certain employees from work related functions based on race, religion, lifestyle, etc.
ADDRESSING HARASSMENT
If you believe you are the victim of harassment, you are encouraged to come forward without fear of reprisal by:
S
S
Telling Your Manager or Any Member of Management.

Discuss the incident(s) with any supervisor or manager to strategize a course of action to include the Manager
of Cultural Diversity.
S
Telling Your Human Resources Manager and/or the Manager of Cultural Diversity.
S
These individuals are trained in dealing with harassment complaints.
S
We will work to ensure confidentiality as much as possible.
S
After a complete investigation, individuals found to be engaging in any form of harassment will be disciplined.
If you have any questions about work place harassment, please reference GEMS Policy 2.5 and 2.6 or call GEMS
Manager of Cultural Diversity.
1-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION

COURSE TITLE:
XR012 STENOSCOP II Series
DURATION:
5.0
UNIT OF MEASURE:
Days
COURSE OWNER:
PHONE NO.
Richard Fillet - GEMS Education Center

1-414-574-8780
SUMMARY:
A field based course to present the basic operation and theory of the
Stenoscop System. This will include information on the Stenoscop II and the
differents in the 6000/9000 family of products.
COURSEWARE FURNISHED:
Technical Supplement Rev. 1

Instructor Guide Rev. 0
Video Tape - XR012 Stenoscop Technologist Training
WHO SHOULD ATTEND:
Any FE
TOPICS:
Imageur
Stenoscop Generator
Image Quality Tests
PREREQUISITES:
In order for this course to be meaningful to you and to fully comprehend the
new concepts presented , you should be:
Number: 01
Thoroughly familiar with the principles of solid state electronics and
microcomputers by having completed MSI courses IC03 and IC35 or having
equivalent technical training.
Number: 02
Familiar with, and having a working knowledge of, single phase x-ray
generators by having completed MSI Course FC17A or having equivalent field
experience.
Number: 03
Familiar with, and have working experience on, x-ray image intensifiers and
image system film recording by having completed MSI course FC-78 or
having equivalent field experience.
Number: 04
Knowledgeable on closed circuit x-ray TV cameras, monitors and associated
optics by having completed MSI course FC-78 or having equivalent field
experience.
1-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPETENCIES:
Completion of the Stenoscop II Field Training Course should enable you to :

Number: 01
Successfully demonstrate operation of the Stenoscop and its associated DMS
units to your customers' satisfaction as well as achieving quality performance
which meets system expectations.
Number: 02
Describe the major generator operations including: kV, mA, mAs control,
exposure timing & resonant type HV power generation on the Stenoscop and
image processing on the DMS. This will be accomplished by:
performing the class lab exercises.
demonstrating how the block diagram functions relate to the actual
schematics.
Show how well you can do routine and periodic maintenance by:
completing all mechanical and electrical adjustments described in the
Service Manuals.
the satisfactory completion of a system Functional Check to demonstrate
overall performance meeting the design specifications.
Number: 03
Demonstrate your ability to troubleshoot the Stenoscop by completing with
80% success the troubleshooting bug" exercises assigned by your instructor.
Number: 04
Show the overall comprehension and ability to communicate technical data on
the Stenoscop by correctly answering technical questions raised by your
instructor during the classroom presentations and the successful completion
of any written test presented by your instructor.
1-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE
1-5-1 Day One - Monday
Morning
Review Course Objectives and Pre-Req's

General Introductory information on Stenoscop
Installation: Review Mechanical and Electrical Specs
Power Requirements
Space Requirements
Afternoon
Lab Exercise:
Removal of Covers
Functional Check
1-5-2 Day Two - Tuesday

Morning
Operation:
Mechanical Controls
Console Controls on Stenoscop, DSM and Matrix 1010
Operating Modes FL, Rad, ER, HLC, SP
Afternoon
Lab Exercise:
Operation Stenoscop, DSM, Matrix 1010
(Optional)
Theory
Block Diagram Analysis
Module 9, 4 and HV Circuits
1-5-3 Day Three - Wednesday

Morning
Theory (continued)
3A12, 3A19, ABC Hysteresis and Timer
Display Boards
Afternoon
Theory (continued)
3A7, 3A9, 3A26 Boards
1-5-4 Day Four - Thursday

Morning
Theory (continued)
3A3, 1A1, 3A5, 3A1, TV Camera and Imager
Afternoon
Theory (continued)
TV Camera, Iris, DSM
Lab Exercises:
All mechanical and electrical adjustments
required for board replacement
1-5-5 Day Five - Friday

Morning
Theory (continued)
DSM Monitors, Matrix 1010
DSM Diagnostics
Visiplex
Distar Monitor
Afternoon
Lab Exercise:
DSM Operation
DSM Diagnostics
Troubleshooting Exercises
1-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM
NAME/ PAY#:
COURSE: XR012 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000

Series
REGION/COUNTRY:
INSTRUCTOR(S):
SERVICE MANAGER:
COURSE DATE:
Your employee has been evaluated by the instructor(s) on the competencies listed below. An X" in the YES"
column indicates the instructor observed the student completing the competency to his/her satisfaction either
individually or as part of a lab group. An X" in the NO" column indicates the competency was not achieved.
Comments are provided for each competency to provide additional explanations where needed. All NO" answers
require an explanation.
COMPETENCIES
01
Successfully demonstrate
operation of the Stenoscop and its
associated DMS units to your
customers' satisfaction as well as
achieving quality performance
which meets system expectations.
02
Describe the major generator

operations including: kV, mA, mAs
control, exposure timing &
resonant type HV power
generation on the Stenoscop and
image processing on the DMS.
Perform routine and periodic
maintenance.
03
Demonstrate your ability to

troubleshoot the Stenoscop by
completing with 80% success the
troubleshooting bug" exercises
assigned by your instructor.
04
Show the overall comprehension

and ability to communicate
technical data on the Stenoscop
by correctly answering technical
questions raised by your instructor
during the classroom
presentations and the successful
completion of any written test
presented by your instructor.
YES
NO
1-13
COMMENTS
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-7 COURSE/INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK FORM
COURSE START DATE
0
0
0
0
0
0
MONTH
DAY
YEAR
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
MG
2
2
2
MR
3
3
3
NU
4
4
4
RO SS
5
6
5
6
5
6
US
7
7
7
XR
8
8
8
9
9
9
REGION / COUNTRY CODE

0
0
0
1
1
1
COURSE ID#
CM CT
0
1
0
1
0
1
YOUR NAME
INSTRUCTOR
LOCATION
CM = CROSS MODALITY
CT = COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY
MG = MANAGEMENT
MR = MAGNETIC RESONANCE
NU - NUCLEAR
RO = RADIATION ONCOLOGY
SS = SOFT SKILLS
US = ULTRASOUND
XR = X-RAY
Please use this scale in your

answer to the questions listed:
unsatisfactory
1
needs improvement
2
meets expectations
3
exceeds expectations
4
superior
5
COURSE FEEDBACK
1.
Did the course teach the competencies described in the course

description? Comments:
2.
I can perform with minimal assistance the competencies taught in this course
Comments:
3.
How do you rate you instructor's overall performance? Comments:
4.
Was your instructor helpful in providing answers to your

questions? Comments:
5.
Did your instructor appear technically competent? Comments:
6.
All things considered, how do you rate this course? Comments
What did you especially like about this course?
In what way would you improve this course?
1-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
2-5 HAZCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2-6 ENVIRONMENTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7 SAFETY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY
X-RAY MODALITY - REVISED 11/19/91
PURPOSE
The purpose of this document is to ensure that each member of the staff of the GEMS Education Center and that
each student in attendance at GEMS Education Center, be made knowledgeable of the x-radiation requirements
set forth herein. These requirements shall be binding upon all users of x-ray generating devices housed at the
GEMS Education Center.
DEFINITIONS
APRON, PROTECTIVE:
Apron made of radiation absorbing materials, used to reduce ionizing radiation exposure.
ATTENUATION:
The reduction of exposure rate upon passage of radiation through matter.
GLOVE, PROTECTIVE:
A glove made of radiation absorbing materials, used to reduce radiation exposure.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE DOSE EQUIVALENT (MPD):
The maximum dose equivalent that a person, or specified parts of a person, shall receive in a stated period
of time.
RADIATION:
Energy propagated through space; in this document, x-rays.
RADIATION INSTALLATION:
Radiation sources, with associated equipment, and the space in which it is located.
RADIATION, SCATTERED:
Radiation that, in it's passage through matter, has been deviated in direction.
RADIATION, SECONDARY:
Radiation emitted by an irradiated material.
REM:
The unit of dose equivalent. For this document, the number of rems may be considered equal to the number
of roentgens.
ROENTGEN:
The special unit of exposure; the exposure required to produce in air 2.58 x 10-4 coulombs of ions of either
sign per kilogram of air.
SHIELDING, PORTABLE:
A moveable screen, or similar device, constructed of radiation absorbing material used to reduce radiation
exposure.
SHIELDING, STRUCTURAL:
The radiation absorbing qualities of the materials used in the construction of the various parts of a building.
USEFUL BEAM (PRIMARY BEAM):
Radiation which passes through the window, aperture, cone or other collimating device of the source
housing; sometimes referred to as the primary beam".
GENERAL STATEMENT
The generation of x-rays will be made by all persons at GEMS Education Center:
at the lowest KVP,
at the lowest MA,
for the shortest time,
the fewest number of times,
providing the greatest person-to-tube distance,
utilizing the most radiation protection possible,
consistent with the tasks at hand.
The instructors at the GEMS Education Center will ensure that x-rays will be directed at the floor or at the ceiling of a
room, NEVER at a room wall.
2-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
GEMS EDUCATION CENTER LICENSE

The license granted by the State of Wisconsin allowing the GEMS Education Center to function as a radiation
installation is an INDUSTRIAL LICENSE. This license does not provide for the application of x-rays to any part of
any person. Therefore, taking x-rays of any part of a person is ABSOLUTELY FORBIDDEN.
BADGING
The staff and students at GEMS Education Center shall wear radiation badges which are monitored at regular
intervals. The badge is to worn at the neck level. A badge must be supplied to any student who has not brought their
personal badge. The badges monitor Occupational exposure not Medical exposure. Consequently the badge is
removed when x-rays prescribed by your doctor are taken.
SHIELDING
Lead shielding is provided, where needed, in the walls of the x-ray rooms at the GEMS Education Center. In normal
use, consistent with the directives contained herein, occupants of rooms adjoining x-ray rooms are adequately
protected from secondary radiation and scatter.
Protective aprons and gloves are provided in x-ray rooms and will be worn during fluoroscopic or image intensified
observations when the operator is not protected by screens or other shielding.
Some equipment has protective devices built in, such as the longitudinal shield in the RFX table. This additional
protection and any other such protection devices provided on the equipment, will be utilized when possible.
CRITICAL CONTROL
When making x-rays, an indication (can be audio or visual, for example, a sonalert, sign, light, etc) must be present
to warn visitors that x-rays are being made.
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Portable x-ray equipment, such as the AMX will be operated only in areas designated by the Instructor. Adequate
shielding must be provided.
X-RAY BEAM ATTENUATION
During adjustment procedures or demonstrations, it may be necessary to energize an x-ray tube with no intention
of actually making the x-ray. In such cases, you must assume that x-ray will be generated anyway and therefore
attenuate the potential beam by closing the collimator blades when provided on the equipment. If such attenuating
devices are not present, lead aperture caps made of 1/8" lead sheets will be used to absorb the primary beams.
UNATTENDED GENERATORS
The nature of instruction at the GEMS Education Center allows a student to apply power to a generator, perform his
tasks, then leave the generator power on for the next person in line, and so on. It is therefore, impractical to require
the person who turns a generator on to also turn it off, as normal practices usually require. At GEMS Education
Center, the last person using the equipment must turn it off. Lockout/Tagout procedures shall be applied as
required.
CONCLUSION
Each staff member and student at the GEMS Education Center, is required to read this document and is further
asked to sign their name to the form provided, attesting to the fact that they have read and understand this direction.
Routine unscheduled audits will be made by GEMS safety/managerial personnel.
2-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD
THE RULES FOR TOTAL CONTROL:
1.
TRANSPORT ALL STATIC SENSITIVE COMPONENTS IN STATIC SHIELDING CONTAINERS.
2.
HANDLE STATIC SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AT A STATIC SAFEGUARDED WORK AREA.
3.
CONNECT WRIST STRAP AND ESD MAT TO EQUIPMENT GROUND POTENTIAL.
4.
TREAT DAMAGED BOARDS WITH THE SAME ESD PRECAUTIONS AS WITH NEW BOARDS.
DEFINITIONS
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) - the rapid movement of electrons which occurs when an electrically charged object
comes near, or in contact with, another object which has the capacitance to accept or give off electrons.
ESD Susceptible Devices - components or assemblies that contain: semiconductors such as IC's, transistors,
diodes, precision resistor networks, etc ... that may be damaged or degraded by electrostatic discharge.
ESD Damage - the immediate failure or long term degradation of electronic components such as chips.
ESD Protective Bag - is a static shielding bag such as the metalized" layer type. Pink or blue anti-static wrapping
materials are not acceptable.
ESD Work Environment - an established ESD area which includes a conductive attachment to connect the F.E. and
the work mat, to the ground potential of the equipment being serviced.
REMEMBER ! YOU CAN'T:
Feel a static discharge until 3,000 volts
Hear a static discharge until 5,000 volts
See a static discharge until 10,000 volts
EQUIPMENT VERIFICATION:
The current plan is to replace all wrist straps and cords annually.
Wrist strap cords shall have the small tags installed with date of first use visible on it.
The ESD mats contained in the ESD kit will only be replaced when damaged.
The only check for the ESD mat is to visually check for damage and cleanliness, and to ohm out the connecting lead
from the alligator clip to the button on the mat (checking for approximately 1 to 2 Meg ohms). This can be done with
each use, with the minimum requirement being quarterly.
The large ESD kit verification stickers shall be placed on an out of the way area of the mat, and the information
entered on it at the time of each check.
More information on ESD procedures can be found in FSP14.
PART NUMBERS:
ESD Kit (includes mat)
46-194427P231
Wrist Grounding Strap
46-198094P1
Service Vacuum w/wrist strap receptacle
46-194427P278
Floor mat for permanent installation under consoles
TC400136
Sticker for ESD mat verification
F4898X
2-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS
April 26, 1993

To: All Milwaukee Area Employees
Subject: Spill of Blood/Bodily Fluids
In the event of a spill of blood or other bodily fluid, please:
1.
Do not touch or attempt to clean the area unless you have received
specific training on cleaning up this type of spill.
2.
Notify the health clinic or facility safety/maintenance personnel so the

area can be isolated to prevent tracking the material to other areas.
3.
If possible, prevent other employees from touching the fluid until

safety/maintenance personnel arrive to secure the area.
Following these simple procedures is essential to the health and safety of all GEMS
employees. Please be aware of their importance.
Sincerely,
R. S. Monk, M.D.
Medical Director
NOTIFY FRONT OFFICE ABOUT SPILL OF BLOOD/BODILY FLUIDS
2-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER

Purpose
To raise the level of sensitivity and awareness concerning electrical safety.
How
Use LOTO tools as dictated by the conditions encountered during all lab exercises. If a system
is to be locked out and there are three members on the lab team there will be three locks installed.
Tools
Do you have your tools with you? You will need

>
Lock
>
Multiple lockout device
>
Red warning tag
2-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-5 HAZCOM
S
Locations of Right to Know" holders.
DETAILS WILL BE PROVIDED IN CLASS
2-6 ENVIRONMENTAL
S
Aluminum Cans
Please put empty Aluminum cans in the containers set aside for recycling the Aluminum cans.
Paper
Containers for recycling writing paper, etc., are available in the classrooms. When you discard this type
of paper, please put it in the classroom paper recycling container. Plastic 3 ring binders are also
recycled. The instructor will put the binder in the recycling bin located on the dock.
Cardboard
Cardboard boxes are left outside the classroom door for pick up by the cleaners. Please put empty
cardboard containers outside the classroom door.
Heavy Metals
All metal (other than Aluminum Cans), circuit boards, wire, etc., should be given to the instructor, who
will put the items in the recycling bin located on the dock. Films contain heavy metals and a recycle bin
for films is located by each film processor.
Trash
Please use the waste baskets for the biodegradable items. Plastic soda bottles can be put in the waste
basket.
2-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-7 SAFETY PROCEDURES

GENERAL
D
There must be at least two (2) people present during a.m. and p.m. lab exercises.
When connecting test equipment, power MUST be turned off.
Never hold meters in hand when measuring (see LFX Power Unit in lab).
Make sure test equipment is of the proper type, and properly set-up prior to making any measurements.
Jewelry should be removed or taped before working on any equipment.
Radiation Badges
1.
Wear on the collar
2.
Will be worn at all times
Recreational Activities
1.
Type activities
2.
Warmup
3.
Cool down
COURSE SPECIFIC
2-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 3 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION

The Stenoscop II Series line of mobile intra-operative x-ray systems are designed for the widest range of surgical
procedures requiring fluoroscopy, including general surgery, orthopedics and trauma. Available with the latest
advancements in digital processing, the Stenoscop offers the great flexibility in live and digitally stored imaging
along with dose reduction through display of stored images.
Basically the Stenoscop II Series consist of an X-ray Generator, an Image Intensifier System with closed circuit TV
all mounted on a mobile support. Two TV monitors along with a Digital Processor (for processing and storage of up
to 200 images) are supported on a separate mobile cart. The mobile cart can also house Imagers (Format Cameras
- either film and/or paper copy) and a Video Tape Recorder.
The Stenoscop II Series is capable of producing manual or Auto Fluoro Imaging, Standard Radiographic, Electronic
Radiographic, and Pulsed Fluoro Imaging.
3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP

For moving the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
-
vertical C-Arm" - amplifier upwards

zigzag movement centered
C-Arm retracted as far as possible toward the console
column low position
movements locked
blocking system of side wheels in free" position
foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES. FOR DISPLACEMENT ON A
SLOPE, THE OPERATOR MUST GO IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND
MUST GET A SECOND PERSON TO HELP HIM.
3-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 3.2
B
A
3-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
NUMEROS
POS
COMPOSANTS
TYPE
FRAME CONTROL CONSOLE
828 490
ZF0XCST2
X R HEAD
828 520
ZH0HTST2
COLLIMATOR for IMAGER
16 cm (6)
828 751 G 015
Z0A16ST2
22 cm (9)
828 752 G 015
Z0A22ST2
MODELE (USA)
CASSETTE HOLDER for IMAGER 16 cm (6)

24 x 30 cm
830 534 G 015
9,5 x 9,5
830 535 G 015
Z0L16ST2
314
IMAGER
24 x 30 cm
830 536 G 015
9,5 x 9,5
830 537 G 015
Z0L22ST2
16 cm (6)
860 926 P 015
ZI016ST2
22 cm (9)
860 926 P 025
ZI022ST2
16cm (6) CDRH
860 926 P 035
ZI016ST2
22cm (9) CDRH
860 926 P 045
ZI022ST2
MONITORS CART
Travel conditions
To move the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
vertical CArm imager upwards
wigwag movement centered
CArm retracted as far as possible toward the consol
column low position
movements locked
blocking system of side wheels in free position
foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES.
FOR TRAVELLING ON A SLOPE, THE OPERATOR HAS TO BE IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND
THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND, IF NECESSARY A SECOND PERSON MUST BE AVAILABLE TO HELP.
3-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
828 978 G025
3-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
32
CONNECTION THE SUPPLY

The mobile is factory wired for :
228V/50Hz single phase networks (Europe)
OR
321
208V/60Hz single phase networks (U.S.A.)
A frequency adaptation on site requires adaptations in the mobile but also in the imager, memory and monitor
For the mobile, proceed as specified hereunder.
NETWORK ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE
3211 9TR1 TRANSFORMER

The network adaptation is made at the transformer 9TR1 (diagram 110)
Connect wires marked A and B, and jumpers marked C and D as shown in the hereunder chart according to the
mains voltage and frequency.
RESEAU MAINS SUPPLY

Fil marqu
FREQ
240V
228 V
220 V
208 V
200 V
120V
108 V
100V
Marqued wire
BORNES 9TR1 9TR1 TERMINALS

Adaptation
Frequence
50Hz
60Hz
Frequency
Adaptation
Adaptation
Tension
Voltage
Adaptation
Pontage C
Jumper C
45
46
47
46
47
48
48
48
Pontage D
Jumper D
22
22
22
22
22
15
26
37
*For the networks 120, 108 and 100V, it is obligatory to switch the machine over to REDUCED POWER.
The REDUCTION OF POWER is programmed at the CI 3A3 DIAPHRAGMS 2 using the switch S133.B (27)
(diagram 117F)
S133.B OFF
Normal power
S133.B ON
Reduced power
*For the networks 120V 108V and 100V, it is also obligatory to connect in parallel on 9R1 an additional resistor 9R2, see diagram 110b2A
Connect the jumper from 9R2 to 9R1.
Rseau 220V 240V
Rseau 100V 120V
220V to 240V Mains
100V to 120V Mains
1
1
9R1
9R1
2
2
Pontage
Jumper
3-7
9R1
9R1
Pontage
Jumper
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Locking rood
9Sm1
ON / OFF
9PL1
3-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
322

SUPPLY CABLE
For the mobile units wired for 208V(USA), the supply cable is delivered from the factory with its plug.
For the mobile units wired for 228V (Europe), the supply cable is delivered without a plug.
According to local regulations, connect a plug (min 16A single phase + earth) as follows :
blue wire : 228V
brown wire : 228V
33
yellow/green wire : earth

INTERCONNECTION
Connect the cable coming from the mobile unit to the plug 9PL1 situated on the back of the monitor holder.
Screw the fixing device in a clockwise direction.
Connect the supplementary equipotentiality cable to the earth terminal bar (CEI only).
34
Connected the network supply cable to the socket provided at the installation.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
341
Put the apparatus under tension with the switch at the back of the monitor cart.
UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN
For transport, this equipment is fitted with a bar which immobilizes the column. This bar is placed in a sheath
situated under the chassis and accessible from near the right rear wheel.
The bar must be removed to allow the column to move.
To remove the bar, activate for a short instant the button controlling the descent of the column.
This action has the effect of unblocking the bar which can then be removed.
ATTENTION!
It is absolutely necessary to keep this bar and put it back in place if the equipment has to be transported.
To avoid losing it, it is suggested that the bar be fixed on the monitor cart (behind the monitor).
3-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
SECTION 4 - SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
PAGE
4-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Module 8
Module 2
Module 3
Module 7
Module 4
Module 5
Module 6
Module 1
Module 9
9TR1
4-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: OM 826 931 P365, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 5-ii
ILLUSTRATION 11
EG
D
B
F
C
A
Position de transport
Dictionnaire de traduction franaise des plaques

signaltiques
Driving position
A PLAQUES DIDENTIFICATION PRODUIT
Classification
Appareil de type B ayant un degr appropri de
protection contre les chocs lectriques, en ce
qui concerne notamment
. Les courants de fuites admissibles (<2 mA)
. La fiabilit de la liaison de terre de protection
MANUFACTURED
DATE DE FABRICATION
LOCATION
LIEU DE FABRICATION
TYPE
TYPE
S.N
MATRICULE
B PLAQUE DE SPECIFICATION GAINE / TUBE
Type B equipment providing an adequate degree of protection against electric shock particulary regarding
HOUSING
GAINE
NOM. VOLTAGE
TENSION NOM.
INH. FILTR.
FILTR. INHERENTE
. Allowable leakage current (< 2mA)

. Reliability of the protective earth connection
ADD. FILTR.
FILTR. ADDITION
INSERT
TUBE
FOCAL SPOT
FOYERS
Prcautions avant usage
C PLAQUE DE SPECIFICATION GENERATEUR
voir avertissement en tte de ce manuel

Precautions before operation
AMP MOMENTARY
AMP INSTANTANE
AMP LONG TERM
AMP NOMINAL
CONFORMITE AUX NORMES
see the warning front page of this manual

Larceau, le bloc radiogne et limageur sont
certifis AP
Ceci signifie que seuls ces lments de lquipement peuvent tre utiliss entre 5 et 25 cm
dune enceinte gazeuse ferme usage mdical.
The CArm, the XRay tube head and the
imager are AP certified. This means that
only these parts of the equipment can be utilized between 5 and 25 cm of an inclosed medical gaz system
STENOSCOP 828490 CEI 60127/1986

Complies with DHHS radiation performance standards
21 CFR subchapter J (north american)
UL CSA (north american)
NF 74100102111 CEI 60127
Courant de fuite la terre

Conforme avec les normes IEC 60127
(Classe 1 Type B) et NFPA (US)
Earth Leakage Current
Complies with Norms IEC 60127
(Class I Type B) and NFPA (US)
Terre de protection Safety ground
4-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: OM 826 931 P365, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 5-1
5.
CHARACTERISTICS
5.1
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1.1
Certification and identification labels

(see illustration 11)
A
Tube housing assembly
Image intensifier
Xray control
Cassette holder.
5.1.2
Classification, certification, caution : illustration 11
Mobile Unit
Length : 249 cm (98) with full extension of Carm holder.
transit position
Width : 80.4 cm (31.7).
Height : 176 cm (69.4) with 16 cm (6) II (transit position)
178 cm (70) with 22 cm (9) II (transit position)
Rear wheels locking footswitch :
Front steerable wheel : rotate

The unit weighs
complete lock
free wheels
transverse lock
/ 90o.
209 kg (461 Lbs) standard

239 kg (528 Lbs) US version
4-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.1.3

XRay tube head and collimator

The Xray tube HD 281 is in a STENIX housing of the following dimensions:
Width : 16.5 cm (6.5).
Height : 42.5 cm (16.7) with 22 cm skin guard
52.5 cm (20.7) with 32 cm skin guard (USA and CANADA)
Length : 39.8 cm (15.7).
The tube has a double focus, 0.5 x 0.5 mm and 1.8 x 1.8 mm and a stationary anode.
The 0.5 mm focus is selected to provide the best possible resolution in fluoroscopy.
The 1.8 mm focus provides good radiographic resolution
The red point on the Xray tube head shows the localization of the focus.
Leakage technique factor : 110 kVp 1 mA.
Filtration :
HVL = 2.65 mm Al minimum at 71 KV
( ~ equal to 3 mm Al. minimum)

A removable skin guard is provided to increase minimum focal spot to skin distance to 30 cm (available in
some countries.)
5.1.4
Motordriven vertical travel of the CArm

Total travel :
46.4 cm (18.3 ) with 16 cm (6) I.I.
Automatic stop at lower and upper limits.
5.1.5
Wigwag of CArm assembly

Travel : 2 x 12,5 degrees; manual lock.
5.1.6
InOut motion of CArm assembly

Travel : 20 cm + / 1 cm (7.9 + / 0.4); manual lock
5.1.7
CArm
The Carm has a depth of 58.4 cm (23) from the primary beam to the arc and a free space opening of 70 cm
(27.6) from the patient guard to the image intensifier.
4-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.1.8

CArm rotation about the horizontal axis

Rotation viewed from control console side :
290o clock wise.

120o counterclock wise
Manual lock.
5.1.9
Orbital rotation of CArm

Image Intensifier 16 cm (6) and Stenoscop L E
Motion: 115o (25o beyond vertical); manual lock.
Image Intensifier 22 cm (9)

Motion : 105o (15o beyond vertical); manual lock
5.1.10
Dimensions and weight of the TV monitor

45.7 cm (18) width x 36.8 cm (14.5) high x 35.6 cm (14) depth screen diagonal 48 cm (19)
20 kg (44 lbs)
5.1.11
Radiographic cassette holder and grid

4 types are available, for all combinations
16 or 22 cm I.I. and for 24 x 30 cm or 9.5 x 9.5 cassettes.
Rem : In some countries, the cassette holder is delivered as an option.
A radiographic grid can be delivered as an option :
For 24 x 30 cm cassettes : ration 8:1, 70 lpi
For 9.5 x 9.5 cassettes : ratio 10:1, 112 lpi
Warning : CDRH compliance requires the use of cassettes 9.5 x 9.5 in the US.
Remark :
The cassette holders are compatible with cassette in compliance with IEC 406 norm.
4-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
5.1.12
Environmental specification :
complete unit, all options included
Operating temperature :
Operating temperature variation :
up to 10oC/HR permissible.
Storage temperature :
10oC to 70oC non condensing
Transportation temperature :
Pressure :
5.1.13
in operation
Storage and transportation :
700 to 1060 mB
500 to 1060 mB
Heat dissipation:
maximum heat dissipation into the surrounding air.
For unit with two TV monitors and a video imager.
Standby :
475W
5.1.14
In fluoroscopy :
(110 kV 4.5 mA) 1250W
In radiography :
5800 W
Transport on inclines
In the most unfavorable conditions of utilization, the mobile surgical unit becomes unstable on inclines
greater than 5o.
4-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.2
5.2.1

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Generalities.
The power supply requirements are 100, 108, 120, 200, 208, 220, 228, 240V (switched at installation).
Tolerance +/ 10%, 50/60 Hz single phase.
MAXIMUM LINE IMPEDANCE
100
108
120
200
208
220
228
240 Volts
0.14
0.16
0.20
0.33
0.36
0.40
0.44
0.48 Ohms
Automatic line voltage compensation.

Typical line current for different conditions of use are as follows (tolerances are in the range of +/ 20%).
Currents listed below are for the basic generator unit equipped with two TV monitors, one memory and a
video imager.
Line current
A) For 208 V, 50 or 60 Hz with a line resistance of 0.36 Ohm (6% line regulation) 20 A
type TT fuses (slow blow).
Fluoro 90 kV/5.5 mA
line I = 8 Amp max
Rad
49 kV/60 mA
line I = 38 Amp max
Rad
110 kV/30 mA line I = 38 Amp max

B) For 120 V, 50 or 60 Hz (reduced power, see para. 5.4.2)
line regulation 6%
line resistance 0.20 Ohm 20 A fuses Type TT(slow blow).
Fluoro 90 kV/5.5 mA
line I = 12 Amp max
Rad
49 kV/37 mA
line I = 46 Amp max
Rad
110 kV/19 mA line I = 46 Amp max
4-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

C) For 100V and 108V 25 A fuses Type TT (slow blow)

The earth leakage current, is in accordance with standard IEC 60127, (class 1, type B).
In the US, earth leakage current complies with 60 NFPA requirements.
Limits of utilization see 5.4.2
Note :
CAUTION
Fuses of a rating higher than recommanded above may be required in some countries.
The unit is furnished with a power cable of adequate length.

The replacement of this cable by a longer cable may produce a non compliance
with standard and increase the earth leakage current.
The use of an extension cable is not recommended : if one must be provisionally
used, the section of wires be 2.5 mm2 minimum and an earth ground wire is
mandatory.
The specified impedance line correspond to the end of the extension cable (female
plug).
Protection fuses
All protection fuses are only accessible by service engineer. See Service manual.
4-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.2.2

Image intensifier
The power supply is a high stability solid state model.
Single field
Specification
Normal 9
Typical conversion factor cd(m) 2

mRs
150
180
Typical contrast ratio
20/1
21/1
22/1
Input field diameter
15 cm
22 cm
16 cm
Typical central resolution

51 lp/cm
44 lp/cm
44 lp/cm
Builtin grid
90L/inch
8:1
Radiation safety
30 kV
TV Camera
Scan rate
525/625 lines (50/60 Hz)
Interlace
2:1
Bandwidth
50 Hz to 7 MHz +/ 1 dB
10 MHz +/ 3 dB
Blanking
Circular
Video output
1 Volt, 75 Ohms, peaktopeak
4-11
Magn 6
90 L/inch
10:1
fully shielded
Anode voltage
5.2.3
dual field
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
5.2.4
TV monitor
Horizontal scan
525/625 lines (60/50 Hz)
Vertical scan
100/120Hz (50/60Hz)
Interlace
2:1 (50.8 cm)
Image tube
19 diagonal
Brightness and contrast controls on rear panel of monitor

Caution :
The video outputs of the unit or options must not be considered as output signals.
It is strictly prohibited to use them for any purposes other that those designed by the manufacturer.
5.2.5
DSM Memory
DSM Processor equipped with storage capacity of 8 (volatile) images or 600 images according
to option.
Power supply (internally provided).

Processing in 12 bits
Analog/digital converter 14.75 MHz
Storage capacity :
eight 576 x 576 volatile images

two held images and six stored images
Mass memory :
600 images (optional) on hard disk.
TV Monitor output :
100Hz / 120Hz
4-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.3

MAXIMUM DEVIATION DATA

DEVIATION DATA OF THIS PARAGRAPH ARE PROVIDED FOR COMPLIANCE TO SOME
STANDARDS
Factor
Range
Deviation
Measurements Basis
Rad kVp
4055 kV
+/
20%
Direct kVp measurement is not
55110 kVp
+/
10%
possible. See 5.3.2
Rad mAs
0.16 to 160 mAs
+/
(10%
Fluoro kVp
40 50 kV
+/
20%
55110 kVp
+/
10%
Fluoro mA
0.16 mA
+/
(10%
Fluoro time
4 min.30
+/
15
+ 0.2 mAs)
mAs meter. See 5.3.2
Direct measurement of kV is not

possible. See 5.3.2
+ 0.2 mA)
mA meter. See 5.3.2

Stop watch.
In the radiographic mode, all mA values are typical.

The tolerance is +/ 20% after an initial transient period of less than 0.2 s.
5.3.1
Conditions for accurate measurement

1.Unit switched on for 15 minutes.
2.Line voltage: see section 5.2.1
3.Unit installed and adjusted in accordance with Service Manual.
4.Preventive maintenance carried out by the owner as specified.
5.3.2
Measurement base
High Voltage : Measurement is carried out with a non invasive kVp meter based on the Xray radiation
wavelength distribution. See service manual.
XRay tube current : Obtained by measuring the rectified secondary current in the high voltage
transformer in the tube head. See service manual.
In fluoroscopy, this current is indicated by the panel milliammeter. In radiography, this current
is used inclosed regulation loop to control tube filament power. Calibration is checked with an
external meter. Measurements must be corrected by applying the procedure in the Service
Manual.
4-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Product of exposure time x current (mAs) : The product of exposure time x current is measured by means of
an mAs meter connected in the secondary circuit of the HV transformer.
A correction must be done to take the high voltage capacitor charge into account (See
service manual).
Fluoro time : the time of a continuous fluoro exposure, between timer reset, until the buzzer switches on.
4-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.4
5.4.1

GENERAL RATINGS
Radiographic mAs meter
0.16 0.2 0.25 0.32 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.8 1 1.3 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8
10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 130 160 mAs.
5.4.2
Radiographic kVp and mA

A.
At full power (line voltage as in 5.2.1 )
Nominal power 3 kW (100 kV 30 mA 0,1s)

40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp.
mA linked to kVp in six steps as follows:
40 to 49 kVp :
60 mA
50 to 59 kVp :
55 mA
60 to 69 kVp :
47 mA
70 to 79 kVp :
41 mA
80 to 99 kVp :
33 mA
100 to 110 kVp :
30 mA
B. At reduced power (line voltage as in paragraph 5.2.1 B and 5.2.1 C)

40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp.
mA linked to kVp in six steps as follows:
40 to 49 kVp :
37 mA
50 to 59 kVp :
34 mA
60 to 69 kVp :
29 mA
70 to 79 kVp :
25 mA
80 to 99 kVp :
20 mA
100 to 110 kVp :
18.5 mA
4-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

C. Reference current time products (mAs)

4 mAs
70 kV
41 mA
0.0975s
3.2 mAs
100 kV
30 mA
0.1067s
3.2 mAs
110 kV
30 mA
0.1067s
N.B. the loading is determined as the result of the mAs product integration.
4-16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COURBES kV mA
kV mA CURVES
ILLUSTRATION 12
7.0 mA
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.85
3.9
3.0
2.
7
2.0
2.3
1.4
1.0
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 kV
Note: in normal mode the curves 3 4 6 are references.

The other curves are rules giving relation between kV and mA
LEGENDES DES COURBES
COURBES
CURVES
MODE
POUR / FOR
STENOSCOP 2
PUISSANCE MAX
MAX POWER
Scopie Auto Mode Normal

Auto Fluoro Normal Mode
D6 + D9
6000 + 9000
253 W
Scopie Auto Mode Haute Qualit

Auto Fluoro High Quality Mode
D6 +D9
6000 + 9000
500 W
Scopie Mode Manuel

Fluoro Man. Mode
D6 + D9
6000 + 9000
500 W
Scopie Scur. Thermique

Fluoro Thermal Safety
D6 + D9
6000 + 9000
154 W
Scopie Auto
Auto Fluoro
LE
300 W
Scopie Mode Manuel

Fluoro Man. Mode
LE
300 W
4-17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Limits of utilization with a 100V mains

If the Stenoscop is configured for a 100 Volts power line, the mains circuit breaker may open during
radiography if technique factors above the following are preset :
110 kV
80 mAs
88 kV 100 mAs
70 kV 125 mAs
50 kV 160 mAs
If technique factors higher than above are required, the unit must be connected to a supply voltage of
120V (at reduced radiographic power) or 200220240V, at nominal power.
5.4.3
Fluoroscopy kVp
Manual : 40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp.
Automatic : Continuously variable between 40 and 110 kVp.
kVp linked to mA according to the curves shown on illustration 12 controlled by the amplitude of the
video level from the TV camera.
The video signal is measured in a circular window having a factoryadjusted diameter.
Two mA levels can be selected, one for normal fluoro, one for high quality fluoro.
Residual ripple : The Xray generator has constant potential residual ripple below 4%, at 100 kVp in
fluoro, at nominal power supply.
5.4.4
mA Fluoroscopy
Manual: in manual mode, the complete ranges of kV and mA values can be selected independently
and are limited independently by the curve 3.
At high kVp, the mA are adapted automatically so as to keep the maximum dose output below
10R/min, and the power below to 500W.
The selection of NORMAL DOSE or HIGH QUALITY mode is often a compromise between the
imager input dose and the background noise. When the HIGH QUALITY mode is selected or
deselected, the kV and mA parameters must be readjusted.
4-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Automatic: The mA values are connected to the kVp values according to the curve in illustration 12.
The selection HIGH QUALITY or NORMAL DOSE has a twofold purpose; it selects the I.I.
entrance dose and switches over the parameters from curve 1 to curve 2.
In the HIGH QUALITY mode, the mA are limited in the same way as in MANUALmode.
When in automatic or manual modes, the technique factors are restricted as shown on the curve 4, if the
temperature limit is reached at.
5.4.5
Fluoroscopic Timer
The fluoro timer is a 05 minute electronic timer with an audible termination signal and reset key.
4-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COURBES DECHAUFFEMENT ET DE REFROIDISSEMENT DE LANODE

HEATING AND COOLING CURVES
ILLUSTRATION 13
K Joules
56
48
40
32
24
16
10
Temps en minutes
Time in minutes
ILLUSTRATION 14
Joules
ECHAUFFEMENT / REFROIDISSEMENT CUVE

HEATING COOLING CURVE X RAY HEAD
800
000
640
000
480
000
320
000
160
000
0
0
25
50
75
4-20
100
Temps en minutes
Times in minutes
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
5.5

GENERATOR RATING AND DUTY CYCLE

illustrations 13 and 14
500W maximum in fluoroscopy, up to maximum tubehead temperature interlock, 150W until bellows
compensation safety.
3.600 mAs per hour at 110 kV maximum allowable rating with 30 sec rest between rad exposures.
Depending on ambient temperature, tubehead position, and sterile drapes, thermal interlock may occur
at this rating.
4-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 4
ILLUSTRATION 5
2
4
5
12
7
8
10
ILLUSTRATION 6
13
11
4-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1.3

TV MONITORS AND MOBILE CART

(See Caution 2.2)
illustrations
4 and 5
The TV monitors are mounted on the mobile cart.

1
XRay emission control lamp.
1.4
1.5
DSM image processor.
Hand held infrared remote control secured on the unit (on a magnetic slide).
Infrared detector.
Alphanumeric keyboard (DSM controls).
VTR (option).
Video imager (option).
Video imager (paper) (option).
ON/OFF power switch (on the rear side of the mobile cart).
CONNECTING CABLES
10
The power supply cable connects the monitor cart to the main power. When not in use, wind the cable
around the drum provided on the back of the cart.
11
The main cable links the monitor cart to the mobile. When not in use wind the cable on the support
secured on the cart.
12
This plug may be used with stand alone TV monitor cart, to review images when hard disk option or
video recorder are present.
13
Additional earth conductor provided for IEC compliance : check local regulations requirements.
STERILE DRAPES
The interior of the Carm, the Xray head and image intensifier can be covered with sterile drapes. The C
arm drapes are fixed with clamping springs.
4-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4-24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: Direction dtp 2103663-102., HD281, Rev. 0, Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1 X-RAY TUBE HD281

SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION
11
General
The HD281 x-ray tube is fitted with xray tube head for Stenoscop II.
The mains characteristics of this tube are given below.
4-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12
Characteristics
Specifications
Reference
Standards (1)
5 kW and 1 kW
IEC 613/1989
Maximum anode heat content
50 000 Joules
IEC 613/1989
Anode heating and cooling curves
See Para 24
IEC 613/1989
Single load rating
See Para 22
IEC 613/1989
Serial load rating
Not applicable
IEC 613/1989
Target material
Tungsten
IEC 601228/1993
Reference axis
See Para 13
IEC 601228/1993
12o
IEC 601228/1993
Nominal focal spot values
0.5 and 1.8
IEC 336/1982
Modulation transfer function
See Para 23
IEC 336/1982
Subject
Nominal anode input power
Target angle with respect to the specified reference axis
Filtration of equivalent quality (2)
0.9 mm Al
equivalent to 80 kV
Nominal high voltage
110 kV
Anode
IEC 613/1989
Stationary
Maximum current filament

Electron emission curves
Covered field at 1 m from focal spot
5.5 A
IEC 613/1989
See Para 21
IEC 613/1989
370 mm
0.65 kg "0.1
Weight
1. Reference standard means that compliance with this standard is stated.

2. Determined according theorical method of calculating from BIRCH and MARSHALL.
4-26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
13

Dimensions
Reference axis
F = Center of focal spots
14
Dimensions in mm
Connections
A Small focal spot

B Seal off
C Common
D Large focal spot
4-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 2
CURVES CHARTS
Electron emission curves
Focal spot : 0.5
Voltage
mA
Anode input intensity
Heating intensity
Focal spot : 1.8

mA
Anode input intensity
21
Heating intensity
4-28
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
22
Single load rating

Focal spot : 0.5
Voltage
Watts
Exposure time
Focal spot : 1.8

Watts
Exposure time
4-29
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Modulation transfer function

These curves show typical performances.
To get minimum values (according to IEC Standard 336/1982), multiply the frequency by
0.9 (width) or 0.85 (length).
Standard magnification : 2
F.T.M.
Focal spot : 0.5

1
Width
.8
.6
.4
.2
Spatial frequency (lp/mm)
F.T.M.
23
1
Length
.8
.6
.4
.2
0
1
4-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
To get minimum values (according to IEC standard 336/1982), multiply the frequency by
0.95 (width and length).
Standard magnification : 1.3
F.T.M.
Focal spot : 1.8

1
Width
.8
.6
.4
.2
F.T.M.
1
Length
.8
.6
.4
.2
0
1
4-31
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Anode Heating and cooling curves
k joules
Stored energy
24
Time in min
Note:
Xray performances can be limited by associated systems.
4-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
PAGE
5-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
5-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 1
10
4
6
8
15
9
2
11
13
5
2
14
12
5-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Please note the original version of this manual was written in French.
1.
DESCRIPTION
1.1
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
see illustration 1
1
Xray head assembly

Comprises the Xray tube, the high frequency Xray generator, a motorized collimator and a patient
guard of clear plastic.
Carm orbital movement brake.
Carm slide handles.
Carm rotation brake
Horizontal movement brake.
Wigwag movement brake

Note: THIS APLLIES TO ALL BRAKES.
To brake, push the brake handles forward ( toward the CArm); to release, draw the brake handles
backward (to the operating console).
Steering handle of the mobile
Front wheel steering handle. Steers the front wheels
Fluoro footswitch with hooks to attach the cable.
10
Image Receptor System.

Image intensifier with TV camera, 16 cm or 22 cm diameter fields (6 or 9).
A cassette holder fits on the top of the image intensifier.
11
Front wheels.
12
Rear wheels.
5-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
13

Rear wheels locking footswitch : see illustration 2
Position A.
Rear wheel brakes locked.
Position B.
Rear wheels moving freely.
Position C.
14
15
Rear wheels locked for lateral movement.

Also turn steering handle (8) 90o.
Interconnecting cable between mobile unit and monitor cart, wound on its support. The plug fits on a
hook under the cable support.
Rad Fluoroscopy handswitch.
ILLUSTRATION 2
ILLUSTRATION 3
Position A
Position B
Position C
5-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: OM 826 931 P365, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page A-1
ILLUSTRATION 3
Stenoscop
5
1
3
44
1
2
21
7
22
9
20
10
11
12
23
14
24
15
16
13
17
18
5-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1.2

CONTROL CONSOLE
illustration 3 back of manual
The controls are ordered logically as follows :
A)
Fluoro and Rad controls (these controls are repeated on both sides of the unit) and
C ARM UP/DOWN motion.
Footswitch and handswitch located on the right hand side of the unit can also be used.
B)
Image system (collimator, camera, TV monitors).
C)
Modes of operation and Xray parameter selection
D)
Fluoro timer and Xray elapsed time totalizator

For detailed description of the controls, see following pages
1.2.1
FLUORO AND RAD CONTROLS

illustration 3
(1)
Xray exposure control .

Fluoroscopy is initiated by pressing this key when a fluoro mode has been selected.
A radiographic exposure is initiated by pressing this key when the radiographic mode has been
selected.
During Xray emission, the key lights up.
A buzzer sounds during radiographic exposure and during high Quality fluoro.
Releasing the key interrupts Xray emission, except in pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography, where the last pulse is maintained until completion. (USA only)
(2)
Xray tube overheating indicator

This indicator does not automatically interrupt XRay emission
(3)
Carm elevator
Controls the motorized up and down movements of the Carm
(4)
Green light
Power ON
(5)
Switching OFF control

Can be used to turn off the unit or as emergency stop
5-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1.2.2
MONITOR AND COLLIMATOR

illustration 3
Note on collimator operation.
In the radiographic mode, the Xray field is limited by a round aperture of either 9.5 or 30 cm, depending
on local regulations.
In the fluoroscopic mode, the XRay field is limited by a round aperture of a size corresponding to the field
of the image intensifier.
Two pairs of rotatable and separately adjustable shutters, one of them semitransparent, are provided.
These shutters are active both in fluoro and in radiography.
WARNING!
With 16cm image field :
Switching from Fluoro to Rad does not change the position of the collimator shutters but the
keys collimator open (22 and 23) start blinking to warn the user.
Touching these commands will open the collimator immediately to the full cassette size and the
keys light up permanently.
With 22cm image field :
Operation is identical, but the keys collimator open should be kept pressed until full opening
of the shutters as intermediate field coverage is authorized.
Commands :
20
Motorized TV image rotation.

Independent controls for two TV monitors.
Not available in 2 images Mode.
21
Stenoscop Serie 9000 : Zoom selection of the 16 cm field with a 22 cm I.I.
22
23
Control of opaque collimator shutters.

Control of the semitransparent collimator shutters.
24
Shutters rotate both clockwise and counterclockwise.
5-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1.2.3

MODES OF OPERATION AND XRAY PARAMETER SELECTION

illustration 3
Modes of operation
9
Standard radiography
10
Singlepulse fluoroscopy .
11
Only one XRay pulse is generated, the duration of which is controlled by the acquisition time
and image processing of the memory.
High quality FLUOROSCOPY.
12
13
18
This operating mode can be used simultaneously with modes 10, 12 or 13 for passing from
NORMAL DOSE fluoroscopy to HIGH QUALITY fluoroscopy.
This operating mode is active when the push button is lit up.
Pulsed fluoroscopy.
Standard fluoroscopy.
Fluoro manual
Key lit :
manual kV/mA selection
Key unlit : automatic kV/mA selection.
When going from automatic to manual fluoro mode, the last kV and mA values in automatic
mode are carried over to manual mode.
Xray parameter selection

17 mA or mAs selection : (keys
15
and
. In RADIOGRAPHIC mode : mAs selection in 31 steps.

. In FLUORO mode :
mA selection
. These keys are inactive in AUTOMATIC FLUORO MODE
kVp selection : (keys
and
)
. Selection in both radiographic and fluoro modes.
. These keys are inactive in automatic fluoro mode.
If FLUORO and RAD exposures are alternated, a memory retains the values of the previously
selected kVp and mA for FLUORO and kVp and mAs for RAD.
1.2.4
TIMER AND XRAY TOTALIZATOR

7
Xray time totalizator
Xray emission time is shown in minutes and seconds up to a maximum of 99 minutes. In the
pulsed fluoroscopy mode and rad mode, only the actual elapsed Xray emission time is shown.
Fluoro timer 5 min reset
Will flash (with buzzer) to indicate that a fluoro period of 4 minutes and 30 seconds has
elapsed. The timer is reset by pressing the key. If the timer is not reset, fluoro is interrupted
after 5 minutes.
XRay totalizator reset
Xray total time reset. Automatically reset when unit is switched ON.
5-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 4
ILLUSTRATION 5
2
4
5
12
7
8
10
ILLUSTRATION 6
13
11
5-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1.3


(See Caution 2.2)
illustrations
4 and 5

1
1.4
1.5
Infrared detector.
VTR (option).
CONNECTING CABLES
10
11
12
13
STERILE DRAPES
5-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TELECOMMANDE DSM
ILLUSTRATION 9
MODULE 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
ILLUSTRATION 10
PUPITRE MEMOIRE DSM

MODULE 4
MODULE 3
2
11
3
5
MODULE 2
5-12
A 12 B
13
14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 6 - OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
SECTION 6 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE
6-1
6-1 DSM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-1-1
6-1-2
6-1-3
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-7
DSM 200 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light & Sound Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Managment Controls - Groups 1 & Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Management - Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Processing Functions - Group 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

6-2-1
6-2-2
6-2-3
6-2-4
6-2-5
6-2-6
Pulsed Fluoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Radiography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Imager - film not compatible with paper printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Imager - paper not compatible with video film imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stand Alone - DSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6-17
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-18
6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6-4 SYSTEM OPERATION LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 4
ILLUSTRATION 5
2
4
5
12
7
8
10
ILLUSTRATION 6
13
11
6-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
1.3


(See Caution 2.2)
illustrations
4 and 5

1
1.4
1.5
Infrared detector.
VTR (option).
CONNECTING CABLES
10
11
12
13
STERILE DRAPES
6-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 7
ILLUSTRATION 8
6-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2.1
TRANSPORT POSITION
See illustration 7
When moving the unit to or from a room, place the unit in the following position :
Xray axis vertical, with the Image Intensifier up.
Center wigwag movement
Retract the Carm fully toward the console
Bring the Carm to the lowest position (this movement must be accomplished before turning the
power off).
Lock all movements
Turn power off (before disconnecting cables)
Disconnect cables and wind them on their supports
Set rear wheels locking footswich in the free position (pedal horizontal).
WARNING !
This unit weighs approximately 500 lbs.
Care must be used when transporting from one area of use to another. Failure to follow these precautions
could result in uncontrolled motion and injury to the operator or others.
ALWAYS :
1
Be sure the pathway is clear.
2.2
Limit the movement to a slow careful walk.
Dont do it alone when moving on inclines.
PREPARING THE UNIT FOR USE
IMPORTANT
Insert the rectangular plug of cable number 11 (illustration 6) into the socket on the back of the
monitor cart.
Turn the red screw fully clockwise (approx. 7 turns)
The plug may suffer abnomal wear when this screw is not turned tight.
The cable outlet should be facing the floor.
Additional equipotential conductor (I.E.C.).
This conductor must be connected between the additional protective earth terminal and an
external protective system (illustration 6.13).
6-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
THE MONITOR CARTS OF STENOSCOPS OF THE 6000 AND 9000 SERIES

ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THOSE OF THE STENOSCOP LE.
IN CASE OF INTERCHANGE OF MOBILE CARTS (POSSIBLE IF TWO
DIFFERENT UNITS WERE ON THE SAME SITE), NO DAMAGE WILL
OCCUR, BUT IT WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE TO SWITCH THE UNIT ON.
WARNING
Plug mains supply cable no 10 (illustration 5) from monitor cart into suitable mains outlet.
Press the power ON switch on the TV monitor cart (item 9 illustration 5).
The green READY indicator light comes on showing that power is on (item 4 illustration 3).
REMARKS : PREHEATING TIME

When the unit is powered ON, a delay of about 1 minute is required by the memory to execute its boot
sequence.
During this delay, XRay emission is not possible.
The monitors also require a delay of about 1 minute in order to display a workable image.
The video imager preheating delay is about 1 minute during which time making a hard copy is not possible.
A buzzer is actuated at the end of this delay.
Generally, a warm up time of 15 minutes provides maximum system performance.
WARNING
Raise Carm as required (illustration 7).
Rotate Carm as required for the examination, either tube in down position, or tube in up
position.
Position the unit as required using steering handle.
Attach sterile drapes as required.
If a radiographic exposure is required during the examination : fix the cassette holder on the
image intensifier. (illustration 8) The cassette holder can be fixed directly on the Image
Intensifier or above sterile drapes.
AVOID ANY CONTACT OF A PATIENT IN NARCOSIS WITH THE XRAY

TUBE HEAD, THE TEMPERATURE OF THE XRAY TUBE HEAD CAN
REACH A VALUE OF 60O C.
6-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 3
Stenoscop
5
1
3
44
1
2
21
7
22
9
20
10
11
12
23
14
24
15
16
13
17
18
6-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TELECOMMANDE DSM
ILLUSTRATION 9
MODULE 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
ILLUSTRATION 10
PUPITRE MEMOIRE DSM

MODULE 4
MODULE 3
2
11
3
5
MODULE 2
6-9
A 12 B
13
14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2.3
2.3.1
FLUOROSCOPIC MODES OF OPERATION

FLUOROSCOPY WITH AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
See illustration 3 end of manual
Personnel should wear protective lead aprons and gloves, and should remain, as much as
possible, behind suitably positioned mobile lead protective screens during the examination.
Select fluoro mode (illustration 3 key 13). The key lights up.
Check that the manual fluoro selector is released. (illustration 3 key 18 is off).
Fluoroscopy can be initiated in 3 different ways :

press the fluoroscopy footswitch
press XRay control keys on the control console (illustration 3 key no 1)
press XRay handswitch.
An orange coloured lamp secured on the monitor cart comes on during XRay emission.
kV and mA are adjusted automatically for consistent image quality.

Releasing the control key interrupts the fluoro sequence. The last image remains on the TV screen.
mA and kV are permanently displayed on the operator console.
The last mA and kV parameters remain displayed when fluoroscopy is interrupted and are retained.
If required, collimate the image by pressing the opaque and semitransparent shutters control
(illustration 3 keys 22 and 23), .
Rotate the collimator shutters to align them with the object to be examined (illustration 3 key
24).
Invert the image on the TV screen, updown or leftright, if required either on the infrared
pad
or
or on the DSM operating console (illustration 10)
Press key 20 illustration 3 to rotate the Image on the TV screen. Both TV monitors have
independent image rotation controls.
Reset the fluoro timer control (illustration 3 key 6) to zero after 5 minutes of fluoroscopy.
Flashing light and buzzer warns the user 30 sec. before the end of 5 minutes of X ray fluoro
emission. Fluoro is interrupted after 5 minutes if the timer is not reset.
A red light flashes when the heat capacity of the tube housing is about to be reached.
NORMAL DOSE fluoroscopy is still permitted till the tube housing safety be activated.
Total Xray emission time is displayed permanently (illustration 3 display 7).

Reset by pressing key 8.
In case of emergency or to cut off power, press the OFF key (illustration 3 key 5).
The ON/OFF switch on the TV monitor cart also serve as an emergency stop.
6-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 9ILLUSTRATION 10
2.3.2
FLUOROSCOPY WITH MANUAL kV/mA CONTROL

See illustration 3
Select the fluoro mode of operation (illustration 3 key 13); the key lights up.
Press MANUAL (illustration 3 key 18); the key lights up
Reset fluoro timer (illustration 3 key 6) to zero.
Select kV (illustration 3 key 15). kV is displayed on the console.
Select mA illustration 3 (key 17). mA is displayed on the console.
Start fluoroscopy with key no 1, with footswitch or with handswitch and adjust kV and mA to
obtain the best image.
Follow the procedure outlined in the previous paragraph for the rest of the operation.
To return to the automatic brightness control mode, again press the manual selector key.
In manual mode, the cameras automatic gain control does not operate.
The manual mode may thus not be appropriate to view very large objects with heavy Xray
attenuation.
6-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2.4
RAD
BEFORE USING THE STENOSCOP IN THE RADIOGRAPHIC MODE OF
OPERATION, THE OPERATOR SHOULD VERIFY :
WARNING
1.
That the cassette holder be correctly attached.
2.
That there is a film present in the cassette, appropriate to the intended use.
3.
That the cassette be appropriate to the intended use and inserted into the
cassette holder before the exposure.
See illustration 3
Fix the cassette holder to the face plate of the image intensifier (with or without grid).
See illustration 8.
Introduce a cassette with film in the cassette holder.
Select the RAD mode of operation illustration 3 key 9.
The mAS display lights up.
Select kV (illustration 3 key 15).
Select mAs (illustration 3 key 17).
Open the collimator shutters completely by pressing the flashing keys (illustration 3 keys 22
and 23) until they stay ON.
Exposure is not inhibited when the collimator is not fully open.
Press Xray control (key 1, footswitch or handswitch).
Hold the exposure switch until the end of the exposure (signalled by the extinction of key 1
illustration 3).
6-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-1 DSM OPERATION
6-1-1 DSM 200 Console
The Stenoscop Console enables the operator to select the desired acquisition mode - radiography, standard
fluoro, high quality fluoro, pulsed fluoro & electronic radiography (ER). (Illustration 6-1)
Refer to Illustration 6-2 and Illustration 6-3.
The DMS Console allows the operator access to all the DMS Memory functions. (Illustration 6-3)
The Infra-red remote control permits the operator to select many of the major DMS Console functions.
(Illustration 6-2)
6-1-2 Light & Sound Signals
When a function key on the DMS is lit this indicates an active mode.
A flashing function key indicates either a question or information request to the operator.
An operating error is signaled by a buzzer.
6-1-3 Restrictions
X-ray emission is not permitted:
During the start-up initializing phase
If a key is flashing
When in the film hard copy formatter mode
In the maintenance mode, except for (QI) image quality
During x-ray emission, all further operator requests will not be validated except for Keys B + (13-16) and
image reversal Keys (5&6). Image acquisition has priority. The requests will activate a buzzer and will be
memorized and processed at the end of the exposure interval.
6-1-4 Types of Images
A dynamic image is that which is visualized during x-ray emission and displayed on Monitor A. It can be stored and
displayed on Monitor B. When the memory is empty it will be observed on both Monitors A & B.
A frozen image is produced on Monitor A at the end of the x-ray exposure and identified by an open eye" symbol.
The image can be displayed on Monitor B. A second type of frozen image is that which is automatically transferred
to Monitor B and is identified by a closed eye" symbol. The image can be obliterated by pressing Key B-(16).
(Illustration 6-2)
All stored images are assigned a file or identifying number. These can be displayed on Monitors A or B.
A x2 enlargement Zoom Image" can be visualized on Monitor A. The image cannot be stored but can be
photocopied on the Formatter.
6-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-1-5 IMAGE MANAGEMENT CONTROLS - GROUP 1 & GROUP 2 (Illustration 6-2 & 6-3)
GAMMA CORRECTION
Key 1
2-3
Selects the GAMMA correction mode:

The keys GAMMA - and GAMMA + enable changing the gamma correction accordingly.
ANTI-BLOOMING
This function lowers the level of white saturation outside the useful field. The correction can be
combined with the gamma corrections.
5-6
IMAGE REVERSAL
Key 5 enables vertical image reversal while Key 6 permits horizontal reversal. They can be activated at
any time.
FILTER (Noise Reduction)

The nature of the filter chosen depends on the acquisition mode:
In fluoro, recursive filtering is used.
In pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography, filtering is by integration.
The operator has 5 possible filter coefficient selections. (Group 2, Illustration 6-3)
Coefficient 1 - key 7 lit. (Group 1, Illustration 6-2)
Coefficients 2, 4, 8 or 16 selected by keys N2, N4, N8 or N16 in (group 2) of the memory console.
The higher coefficient results in more image noise reduction, but motion blurring also increases.
8-9
IMAGE SHIFT
This function makes it possible to transfer a frozen or stored image from monitor A to monitor B. The
transfer can be made MANUALLY (key 9) or AUTOMATICALLY (key 8).
When the transfer of a frozen image is made manually, the image is memorized.
10
SPLIT SCREEN MODE

The left part of the screen corresponds to monitor A, the right part to monitor B. The images visualized
are part-images," i.e., half the image centered horizontally. During the emission of X-rays, the
dynamic image is visualized full screen.
11
ZOOM
The zoom is a mode of visualization on monitor A. This function enlarges x 2 the central part of the
image. This enlargement can be photocopied, but not memorized.
The selection ZOOM is temporarily deactivated during x-ray emission.
12
FORMATTER (PHOTOCOPY)
The Formatter mode transfers the image from monitor A to Formatter (Video Imager 1010) with the
corrections of the Gamma and anti-blooming functions.
During the Imager sequence, all the other functions are inactive.
13-16 SCROLLING OF IMAGES
MONITOR A
MONITOR B
This functions makes it possible to search and visualize a frozen or stored image. A stored image
automatically transferred to monitor B is obliterated by a scrolling of images on monitor B.
6-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18
INSTANTANEOUS MEMORIZATION
If key number 18 is pressed during fluoro or pulsed fluoro, it is possible to save a dynamic image. The
image present on monitor A during fluoro or pulsed fluoro is memorized and visualized on monitor B
with a number. Numbering depends on the memory capacity and the mode of memory management.
15-18 SAVING THE FROZEN IMAGE

AUTOMATIC mode - key 15 lit
MANUAL mode - key 18 lit
MANUAL mode
The image present on monitor A is saved by key 18 for INSTANTANEOUS MEMORIZATION.
AUTOMATIC mode
The image present on monitor A is saved automatically at the end of the x-ray emission. The
memorized image is numbered on monitor A.
6-1-6 MEMORY MANAGEMENT - GROUP 3
12A
12B
AUTO DELETE ACTIVE: key 12-A lit.

If the memory is full, the oldest image is automatically obliterated and replaced by the new frozen image
which takes its number.
AUTO DELETE INACTIVE: key 12-A not lit.
If the memory is full, a buzzer sounds and the following keys blink: AUTO DELETE (12A), DELETE
MANUAL (KEY 12B), ALL (13) and MEMORY KEY15 OR 18 (Group 1).
If key 15 or 18 (Group 1) is pressed, the request for MEMORIZATION is canceled.
If the key AUTO DELETE (12A) is pressed, the oldest image is obliterated and replaced by the new
image.
To memorize a new image in the DELETE MANUAL mode the operator must obliterate at least one
image in memory. To do this select the image to be obliterated using Keys A" (14&17) and press
IMAGE DELETE MAN Key 12B. The new image replaces the old image deleted.
13
If the key ALL (13) is pressed, the stored 6 images are deleted and the image frozen on monitor A is
memorized.
OPERATOR ALL
This function makes it possible to wipe out the whole of the memory. This is a function which must be
confirmed before being carried out, VAL key 11 (Illustration 6-3) blinks and asks the operator for
confirmation.
After the function is completed, the configuration of the memory system is the same as after switching
ON.
ANNOTATIONS
The annotations make it possible to identify the images on monitor A, but they are not memorized. They
appear on the film in the Video Imager (Formatter) mode only if they are visualized on Monitor A.
Two ACQUISITION ZONES are provided either side of the image at the bottom of the screen. Each zone
consists of two lines of 35 characters.
6-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
CURSOR
Entry into MESSAGE ACQUISITION MODE is made by pressing the CURSOR key 8.
Keys 8, 9, 10 and 11 blink.
The cursor is displayed on Monitor A on the lower right hand part.
If annotations are already present in the memory, they are visualized.
The display is made character by character during the acquisition.
14
The cursor position is managed by keys 14.

The insert mode does not exist, the system works in typeover" mode.
Passage from one acquisition zone to the other is made by pressing the CURSOR key (8).
11
CONFIRMATION
When the message acquisition has been carried out, press key 11 and the annotations are confirmed in
the memory.
DELETION OF ANNOTATIONS
This key removes all annotations on Monitor A.
10
OBLITERATION OF ANNOTATIONS
Erasing annotations in the memory and passing automatically to the acquisition mode.
6-1-7 IMAGE PROCESSING FUNCTIONS -GROUP 4

The functions defined below are available only with the disk options and the IP module.
1
EDGE ENHANCEMENT
Is used to improve the visibility of small structures and reduce the visibility of large structures.
It acts on monitor A.
Edge enhancement information is not memorized and acts on the dynamic images.
PROGRAMMED SEQUENCE
The programmed sequence makes it possible to acquire 26 images in a time controlled by the memory.
The programmed sequence is valid only in the fluoro mode.
These images are automatically memorized.
REAL TIME IMAGE SUBTRACTION

This process makes it possible to highlight areas where a contrast medium has been introduced.
The mode is active only in the fluoro mode.
Dynamic images can be recursive filtered (according to the filter coefficient chosen)and then subtracted from
the mask.
Acquisition of the mask is made automatically at the start of the fluoro sequence.
6-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4
PEAK OPACIFICATION
This mode makes it possible to visualize the injected vessel at its peak opacification.
It can be activated only in the fluoro mode and with Image Post Processing.
The PEAK OPACIFICATION mode is not active in ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY and PULSED FLUORO.
This mode can be combined with the SUBTRACTION mode.
ROADMAPPING
This mode is used in fluoro with Image Post Processing for following the positioning of a probe or catheter
inside a circulatory vessel.
ROADMAPPING is always associated with the active subtraction mode.
ROADMAPPING is carried out following sequences in fluoro and in association with the SUBTRACTION mode
for the suppression of undesired structures. It cannot be used in ER (Electronic Radiography) or Pulsed
Fluoro.
6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS

6-2-1 Pulsed Fluoro
Permits visualization of the recorded image at the end of each exposure pulse.
The sequence is as follows:
1st Exposure pulse
Minimum duration, sufficent to insure stable automatic exposure level in fluoro and memorization at the
termination of the pulse. The image is retained until the end of the next pulse.
2nd and additional x-ray pulses
X-ray pulses remain at the same exposure factors established for the first pulse. The x-ray image is
memorized and visualized at the end of each pulse, until the end of the following pulse.
6-2-2 Electronic Radiography
This operating mode consists of a single pulse x-ray exposure of approximately 1.2 sec. X-ray termination is
automatic and the image is memorized.
Select Electronic Radiography mode by pressing Key 10. Select auto fluoro" with Key 18. Initiate an x-ray
exposure either by Key 1, the fluoro footswitch or the exposure handswitch (if available). Hold, for at least 1 sec. The
action triggers an exposure for 1.2 sec. The image is stored and displayed at the end of the x-ray exposure.
Repeat, to refresh or renew the image.
6-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-2-3 Video Imager - film not compatible with paper printer
A Video Imager (Formatter) can be used to transfer stored images on radiography film. The Imager is an optional
item. On the Stenoscop D6/D9 a request for a film exposure can be initiated on the DSM keyboard or on the Remote
Control Panel (Key 12). Refer to the manual (on the Video Imager for complete operating details).
6-2-4 Video Imager - paper not compatible with video film imager
A paper Video Imager can be added to the system as an optional item. The request for a paper copy may be made
from the DMS keyboard ( Exp Key 12) or the Remote Control. Refer to the Imager Manual for complete operating
details.
6-2-5 Video Recorder
The DSM has facilities for controlling a VCR. The VCR is an optional item. refer to the VCR Manual for complete
operating details.
6-2-6 Stand Alone - DSM
On the Stenoscop D6/D9 units a special plug is provided to permit operating the DSM and Monitors without the
Stenoscop. The special plug when connected to the cable connector, at the rear of the Monitor Cart, in place of the
cable from the Stenoscop enables examining recorded images from the hard disk, VCR (if used) or the Video
Imagers.
6-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Stenoscop II Console
Illustration 6-1
6-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 3
Stenoscop
5
1
3
44
1
2
21
7
22
9
20
10
11
12
23
14
24
15
16
13
17
18
6-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR

The DSM-200 is a new generation video image processor especially designed for imaging in the operating room
and in radiology applications. It provides for the storage of up to 200 video images.
6-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP II
ONLY
Group 1
Remote Control Keypad

Illustration 6-2
Group 1
Group 4
Group 3
Group 2
DSM Keyboard
Illustration 6-3
6-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TELECOMMANDE DSM
ILLUSTRATION 9
MODULE 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
ILLUSTRATION 10
PUPITRE MEMOIRE DSM

MODULE 4
MODULE 3
2
11
3
5
MODULE 2
6-23
A 12 B
13
14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-4 SYSTEM OPERATION LAB EXERCISE

DESCRIPTION:
This lab will introduce the student to the functions of the Stenoscop System.
S
X-ray Subsystem
DSM
Film Camera
VTR
Video System
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement
Operator Manual supplies with the system (OM 826931P365)
COMPETENCIES:
On completion of exercise the student will be able to demonstrate all functions and options of the Stenoscop
System.
PROCEDURE TIME: 1.0 to 2.0 hr
SAFETY:
Use proper radiation safety as stated in Section 2-1 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement Radiation
Safety Policy.
6-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
PROCEDURE:
Have each student perform the following tasks, using the information discussed under Installation & Operations.
Connect up the Stenoscop & DSM to a power source
Operate manual kV mA, & Timer controls
Operate the unit in fluoro manual
Operate the unit in Rad
Operate the unit in fluoro ABC
Make an exposure using the HLC (HQ) function
Use pulse fluoro functions
Use the Electronic Rad functions
Refer to the DSM Operation and do the following:
Gamma function
Integration (noise reduction)
Image enlargement
Image Transfer
Anti Blooming
Split Screen
Subtraction
Student operate all function of Stenoscop System and gain a understanding of how the function interact. The
student will perform simulated procedures with the system for the following:
Fluoro (low and high level)
Pulse Fluoro
ER Mode
Radiography Mode
Image Management Control
Memory Management
Image Processing Function
Stand Alone Mode for Monitor Cart
Filming
VTR Recording
Remote Control
6-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 7 - THEORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
SECTION 7 - THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 HV CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 3A19 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9 3A7AD-kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE
7-1
7-3
7-5
7-9
7-11
7-13
7-15
7-17
7-17
7-19
7-21
7-23
7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

7-12-1 Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-12-2 Rad Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7-14 FLUORO TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-1 6" Single Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-2 6"-9" Dual Field Image Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-15-3 Circular Collimators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-16 3A3 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-18 3A5 TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-19 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

7-20 TV CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-20-2 Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IRIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1010 FORMATTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIDEO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-1 Smoothing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-26-2 V Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-3 H Defl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-4 CRT Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26-5 Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
7-49
7-51
7-53
7-63
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-69
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
M
K1
9 PL1
Delay
220V to Monitors & DSM
R1 and R2
Power on
275V
230/120
AC
Module 4
Converter
9Sm1
Line Transformer
9TR1
5TR1
Module 3
(Console
stop
buttons)
K3
To LV PS
Panel 1
+ 12v, +5v
X-ray Tube
Filaments
C Arm
Motor
K1
K5
Safety
Interlock (9PL1)
Image
System
9 A4
Module 5
MSI XR 0348
Module 9, Power Circuits (Monitor Cart)

Illustration 7-1
7-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-1 MODULE 9, POWER CIRCUITS (MONITOR CART)
Refer to Illustration 7-1.

Line Transformer 9TR1, input tapped for either 120 or 230v AC, 60Hz operation.
9TR1 supplies 275VAC to the converter on Module 4 and 5TRI on Module 5
5TR1 supplies power to the 12 v and + 5v DC supplies on Panel 1, the x-ray tube filament circuits, C-Arm drive
motor and the image system.
9TR1 also provides power for the TV Monitors and the Memory System.
Power to 9TR1 is applied by depressing the 9Sm1 Power ON button (back side of Memory Display Cart).
9Sml is released by actuating the Console Stop buttons energizing relay K3 and the auxiliary coil of 9Sml.
On power-up," Line Transformer 9TR1 is energized through R1 and R2 (current limiting) and then through K1 after
the delay M. (R2 used only on 120 VAC operation)
If the interconnecting cable plug, 9PL1, to the Memory Display is removed, relay K5 will be energized and will open
9Sml by energizing its auxiliary coil.
7-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Rectifier
275V AC
&
from
Filter
9TR1
VA
4CR7
C C
1 2
V1
CR2
C3 C4
V2
CR5
VL
CR1
L1
4TR1
HV
L3
CR6
Load
4TR1- TOROIDAL TRANSFORMER

TR2- H.V. TRANSFORMER
LOAD- HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIERS, VOLTAGE DOUBLER, FILTER AND X-RAY TUBE.
3A19
1
1R3 2
3PL3
a17
a16
36B
C
B
MODULE 4
CONVERTER
4Tbl
4DS1
4TR2
4A2
PL2
4CR2
4R2
4E10
- +
-1 + 1
+
4C6 4CR7
2
- -- 4Tb1-8 2
4C1
4CR3
4C2
5
6
1
4A1
L1
4C5
4CR4
4CR5
5B
4TR1
E1
4C4
CR7
4C3
R10
5 PL2
7
4E 7
4R 3
4A2
4R4
H.V.
Transfor.
Pri.
L3
4A2
PL2
4CR6
2
6
4A2
4A1
PL1
SELECT. CAPA
AUX.
1
2
16
CAPA PREPO
15
7
MAIN SCR
MAIN SCR
3A19
COMMANDE SCR
6
11
10
MSI XR 0349
Module 4
Illustration 7-2
7-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-2 CONVERTER MODULE 4
Refer to drawing top of Illustration 7-2.

At T=0 assume CR1 is turned on in the RAD mode. Capacitors C1 and C2 discharge through CR1, 4TR1 and HV.
At the same time C3 and C4 are charging up.
When C1 and C2 are discharged CR1 turns off.
Next CR6 is triggered ON. Now C3 and C4 discharge through HV, 4TR1 and CR6.
Current flow through HV primary produces the high voltage in its secondary to the transformer load consisting of
voltage doublers and the X-ray tube.
When C3 and C4 are discharged CR6 turns off and the process is repeated.
Power to the input of HV is proportional to the value of C, the voltage Va and the pulse frequency, or the rate at which
CR1 and CR6 are triggered. Refer to the actual Converter Schematic (lower drawing Illustration 2), minimum
triggering between CR1 and CR6 is 30 sec; and established by the SCR command Board 3A19.
3A19 Board enables selecting capacitors C1 and C4 in the RAD mode by turning on CR4.
3A19 Board enables controlling CR7 to permit presetting capacitors C3 and C4.
4TR1 is used to sense CR1 and CR6 conduction current. The current flow data is used on board 3A19.
In fluoro, only capacitors C2 and C3 are used.
7-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6A1
CI DIVISEUR
8 24 428 G15
PCB Presence Safety

Illustration 7-3
7-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Doubler
From
Converter
Module 4
H. V.
Transformer
LS SS
6A1
1000 / 1
Divider Kv
Measuring
Ckt
Measured Kv
to 3A12
Doubler
6A1
MA / MAS
MEASURING CKT
Rad (+)
5A1
Measured mA Sc
(FL)
Measured mA Gr
(Rad)
Fil.
Trans
FL ()
3A19 Open 6 Sa1
stops converter
Open at 70_C
6 Sa1
Open at 50_C
6 SaTH2
+12V
3A3
TH
3A7
MSI XR 0347
HV Circuits
Illustration 7-4
7-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-3 HV CIRCUITS

Board Interlock Circuit.

The HV Transformer derives its input power from the converter on Module 4
The secondary of the HV Transformer is fed to doubler circuits, the output of which is applied to the x-ray tube.
The 2000/1 divider furnishes the actual measured kV to 3A12.
The MA/MAS measuring circuit provides an indication of the actual MA/MAS during fluoro and rad operation.
If the x-ray Tube Head temperature reaches 70C, 6Sa1 opens and stops the converter.
6SaTH2 opens at 50C head temperature to develop the TH signal used on 3A7. It reduces the fluoro power to
154W, and actuates the temperature indicator on the Console Display. A positive pulsed filament transformer output
energizes the x-ray tube large focal spot for rad operation
A negative pulsed filament transformer output energizes the x-ray tube small focal spot for fluoro operation.
7-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
FL Timer
3A19
SEXP
Op 55, G32,
G33
3A3
PRX
Arc Det Op46

Monostable G32,
G30 ,Counter
G31
3A19
OX
CR4
3A19
PRI
a5 3A19
TROU CLQ
3A19
(Shuts down
Converter
after 4
arcs)
Indicates
shutdown
INT4 CLQ
OSC G79
Integrator Op 97
3A19
Clock
3A9 Selected Kv/20
Op102
6A1
Op180
Measured
Kv
KV* = ( KV 1 ) 1.1
20
20
Compare
Op132
Op114
KV Error
C137
Op122
Adder
3A19
Demx
Compare
Op114
Select KV/20
R232
6A1
Measured mA SC
(FL)
6A1
Measured mA Gr
(Rad)
KV Composite
Op160
Op168
Op 152, 192, 203

(Followers)
3A26 KV85%
3A19
120KV
3A26
Measured mASc
Measured mAGr
MSI XR 0353
Board 3A12 kV/mA

Illustration 7-5
7-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-4 BOARD 3A12 kV/mA

SEXP from 3A19 generates x-ray ON. It is used to produce the PRX signal to 3A3. PRX increments the fluoro time
counter and the total x-ray exposure time counter on 3A3.
Op46 detects arcing in the HV system. A large voltage drop in the high voltage system is considered due to arcing.
Counter G31 after counting four arcs, interrupts x-ray. LED CR4 indicates the x-ray shutdown. The signal indicat
ing any arcing on A5 is used by the hysteresis safety circuit on 3A19.
kV measured and MA fluoro measured are combined to produce the kV composite signal. MA measured corrects
for HV system bleeder current.
The kV composite is stored on capacitor C137 and fed to the comparator Op102. Op102 compares this signal with
the kV/20 selected value. The clock input resets C137 to update the information to the comparator.
Op97 integrates the error output from Op102. G79 activates the integrator Op97 when it is triggered by the PR1
signal . When the exposure starts, the converter is running at maximum frequency to rapidly increase the kV. During
this time the DEMX is present to 3A19. When the kV/20 composite reaches the kV/20* reference at the input to
comparator OP122, the converter frequency is changed to now correct for any OP97 integrator error output. Each
error correction again requires developing the DEMX signal.
PRI monitors the main SCR's current and is used to trigger the monostable osc G79.
Op160 compares the kV/20 Composite with its reference kV/20 selected input. It produces the kV 85 output when
the kV/20 composite reaches 85 of the selected kV/20 level.
Op 168 produces the 120kV output when the kV/20 composite exceeds its reference input.
7-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Signal through
memory
Interface
Xray Button
BPCL
FS
Rad
Sec Bellows
(3A26) Stop MAS
(3A12) INT4 CLQ
(3A12) 120 Kv
Bistable
OX
S76A
TR248
To converter
4CR7 (Preset C3 & C4)
Rad
G118, 113, 117,
115 Logic
G119, 120
Logic
TR313
G128
555 Clock Timer
Clock
3A12 DEMX
3A26 +12V
& SX
SYXSC 3A26
Q235
Q238
G112, 116,118
Logic
SEXP
PRI
3A12 TROU CLQ
SEXP 3A12, 3A5, 3A3

PRE 3A26
Closed if
FlipFlop
memory
G114, G117
interface
is not used. G115, G155
Q303
Q300
Clock
Q256
Q259
Q
G121A
TR269 To converter 4CR6

Main SCR
G122D
_
Q
G122A
G216, G113,
Q189, Q178
To converter 4CR4
(Select all
capacitors in
(Rad)
Q281
Q278
TR291
To converter 4CR1
Main SCR
To Q181, Q259, Q303, Q238

MSI XR 0354
3A19 SCR Command

Illustration 7-6
7-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-5 3A19 SCR COMMAND

The signal OX (command X-ray) is developed by any of the following to the logic circuits:
a)
BPCL - Console X-ray button
b)
FS - Foot Switch fluoro
c)
FS - Foot Switch Rad
OX signal is passed through the Memory System and returned. If Memory is not used, S76A must be closed and
board 3A1 must be removed. OX flips the bi-stable Flip-Flop to momentarily turn on Q238 and Q235 and switch
ON converter SCR CR7. This enables discharging converter capacitors C3 in fluror, and C3 and C4 in RAD.
The action takes place provided:
Sec Bellows
= 1 (x-ray head temperature less than 70C)
Int 4 CLQ
= 1 (no arcing)
Stop MAS
= 1 (not end of Rad exposure)
120kV
=1
(not at 120kV)
The OX signal also enables developing the SEXP, PRE (Rad) and SYX SC (FL) signals.
When SEXP =1 to flip-flop G119Band 120B) , G121A latch Q and Q outputs alternately enable the drive circuits to
TR269 and TR291. Converter SCR's CR6 and CR1 thus cannot be switched ON simultaneously. They will be driven
alternately by the G128 clock output.
The clock G128 is triggered by PRI = 1 and the following input signals:
DEMX = 0
TROU CLQ =1 (no HV leakage )
SEXP = 1
In RAD operation TR313 will switch ON converter SCR CR4. This enables selecting additional converter capacitors.
All drivers Q181, Q259, Q303 and Q238 will be locked out if SX is not present or +12V supply drops below 6.2V.
7-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+12V
+ 6V
Converter
SCRS 1 & 6
R123
D29 Rect.
and
Comparator
A135
4TR1
D133
G115
A137
+
E125
GR
3A7
E172
_
G115
Rad
G115
Rad
3A19 Current Detector
Illustration 7-7
7-14
PRI 3A12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-6 3A19 BOARD

4TR1 senses the Converter current through the main SCR's CR1 and CR6.
The secondary of 4TR1 is rectified and drives the comparator A135. A135 compares the level from 4TR1 with that on
its positive input.
The output of the G115 inverts the A135 output during the SCR conduction interval and switches the input to A137.
This produces the PRI signal to 3A12 to trigger the G79 Timer on 3A12 and G128 on 3A19.
PRI indicates SCR current present.
R123 sets the threshold level for switching A137.
A137 acts as a low pass filter and prevents false triggering due to noise.
GR input develops the RAD and RAD signals.
7-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Sample & Hold

A71 , 82
RX
(From TV
camera)
Gain
R66
A74B
KV/20 Auto
(To 3A7)
+V
Integrator A73
+V
Ref. R65
A121
Comparators
R67
Threshold
(3A12) PRX CP
(50 Hz)
Sm 19
2A1 Module G
Counters G143, 144

158, 159, 160, 161
Decoders G184,
185, 186, 187
Displays
DS 15 (.01)
DS 16 (.1)
DS 17 (1.0)
DS 18 (10.0)
3A7
Console Reset
Counts to 99.99
Timer
Module G
MSI XR 0350
ABC Hysteresis
Illustration 7-8
7-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-7 ABC HYSTERESIS

The purpose of this circuit is to provide a kV/20 reference in the auto mode using the RX control signal from the TV
Camera. This assures correct kV's for an optimum TV image.
The RX signal from the TV Camera is fed to the input sample and hold circuit involving amplifiers A71 and A82. A82
acts as a comparator with a reference set by R65.
The output of A82 is fed through a system gain adjust R66 to integrator A73.
A74B will not pass the RX output of A82 unless it is greater than or less than the threshold determined by hysteresis
adjustment R67.
When the RX signal is not present the output will provide a kV/20 of 2V, equal to 40 RV reference.
7-8 TIMER DISPLAY

PRX CP clock signal of 50Hz is fed to counters G143 and G144 and divided by 50.
G144 drives the 4 bit counter G158.
The output is decoded on G184 which drives the 7 segment DS15 1/100 sec display.
After 10 sec. the Q3 output of G158 drives counter and decoder G159 and G185 to display 1/10 second on DS16.
G159 counts 6 and drives G160 to display minutes on DS17.
Finally G161 receives a pulse from G160 to display tens of minutes on DS18 display.
SM19 on the Console enables resetting the counters and displays.
7-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
(3A19)
OX
1KHz
OJC G148
A>B
WR
A>B
4 bit comparators
G108, 126
Auto= closed
Sm49
Sm31, 32
Kv(Updown)
Logic Ckts
& Latch
G70
Updown
Controls
G48, 31
Latch G69
FL
A/D
G90
Analog
KV/20
from 3A5
& TV Camera
300 KHz
To G150
SC
(3A5)
To 3A9
Clock
Hold Kv
(3A9) 40110Kv
Limits
SC
(3A9)
Clock
3Hz & 30 Hz
OSC &
2Sec delay
Latch G97
Rad
SC
Updown
Counters
G138, 125
MSI XR 0352
3A7 AD-kV
Illustration 7-9
7-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-9 3A7 AD-kV BOARD

The major function of this board is to generate the kV reference in both the auto & manual modes.
Operating mode is selected by console switch SM49. Console buttons SM31 & SM32 increment and decrement
respectively the up-down counters G48 & G31 and set the Latch G69 in fluoro manual.
Counters G138 & G125 and Latch G97 are incremented or decremented in the Rad mode.
The 8 bit Latch output data G69 (fluoro) or G97 (Rad) is transmitted on the kV Bus to 3A9 for kV reference.
If either 40 or 110 kV is reached FC40 or FC110 signals from 3A9 will stop the counters.
In either fluoro or Rad manual, the clock inputs to the counters are driven by the 3Hz & 30Hz oscillators which
provide, first a 2 sec 3Hz slow drive, followed by the 30 Hz fast drive.
Pressing SM49 to select the TV auto mode deactivates SM31 & SM32. kV reference is now generated using the TV
camera RX signal.
In the auto mode the TV Camera analog signal is converted to digital by A/D G90. The G90 digital output is
compared with the kV bus by the digital comparators G108 & G126. The comparators output A>B or A<B activates
the G48 & G31 counters at the frequency of 1 kHz until the TV kV reference & kV bus data agree (A=B).
7-19
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
PL1
+5V
PL1
+5V
45A
Rad
Gr
SC
Clock
Inhibit
10
+5V
16
13
14
300 kHz from G90
Sm26
G150
7
ER
+5V
+
Reset
Sm33
15
HLC
+12V
G137 A to F
Sm35
GR
+12V
3A3, 3A1
Pulsed FL
+12V
ER
Sm48
+12V
FL
3A1
Sm52
SP
+12V
FL
D536 S
+12V
+5V
3A19 Gr
mA(S) +
BP mA(s)
Up
3A9
Sm50
mA(S)
G139 A to F
3A9
Sm51
2A1 MODULE G
1.2 & 12Hz

OSC
G47
3A7 AD/kV Board
Illustration 7-10
7-20
3A9 Clock 1
BP mA(s)
Down
3A9 Clock 2
MSI XR 0344
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-10 3A7 AD/kV BOARD

The circuit enables selection of the operating mode through activation of counter G150.
When power is switched ON, Fluoro mode is automatically selected G150 pins 1 to 9 = 0, except pin 3 = 1,
pin 13 = 1.
When another operating mode is selected, G150 pin 13 = 0 counter counts clock input pulses on pin 14 until the
selected mode output of G150 equals a logic 1.
Counter now locks on selected mode, until another mode is selected.
Counter output turns on the selected mode LED through G139.
Counter indicates the operating mode signal through G137.
Output signals
A.
B.
C.
are as follows:
ER & SP to Memory Interface
+ mAs to kV/mA board 3A9
Gr to SCR control 3A19
Two clock signals enable changing mA/mAs at two different speeds.
7-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA
Sm35
Logic Ckts
G122, Q141
+5v
S140B
To Module 8
TVCamera aperture
FC110
3A7
Logic Ckts
FC40
G21
G20
Lim.110
G18
G19
Lim.40
REFERENCE VOLT.
kV/20
G68
DAC
EPROM
G67
Dis.kV
BCD to 7 Segm. DECODER

G138
G172
U
D
G22
REFERENCE VOLT.
mA Rad
3A26 FIL
EPROM
3A7 K/20 Bus
ER HLC TH
Mod.G
Sm35
3A7
Ther mal Sw.
(3A7) + MA, SC,
HLC
ER
TH
CLOCK
ER HLC TH
Logic
Ckt
mA.mAs
EPROM
G65
5R
500W
mA (s)Up
Mod.8
TV Lens
Aperture
G118
G119
Latch
Latch
SC
SC
(3A7)
mA(s) Up
Clock
Comparators
2A1
MODULE
G
888
EPROM
SC
Clk
G87
G88
B A
G136
G137
G120
G121
BIN
DEC
kV
3A26
REFERENCE VOLT.
G94
mA FL
DAC
EPROM COUNTER
G89
G66
G90
kV/mA
FL
2A1
MODULE
G
888
BCD to DECIMAL DECODER
Comparators
3A12
kV/mA
mA mAs
3A26
FCO
FC01
FCGR
EPROM
G132
Cons.
mAs
G133
DAC
3A26 FIL
G134
G135
mAmAs COUNTER
MSI XR 0357
3A9 kV/mA
Illustration 7-11
7-22
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-11 3A9 kV/mA BOARD

7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode
The kV/20 bus addresses EPROM G66. G66 on its output bus sets an optimum mA value for each kV input. The mA
level depends on the operating mode selected and equipment safety.
Auto Mode
HLC (High Dose Fluoro)
ER (Electronic Radiography)
TH (X-ray tube head safety)
Digital counters G89 and G90 output data is converted to analog by G94. This sets the reference mA level for the
X-ray tube filament control circuits on 3A26.
7-11-2 Manual Fluoro Mode
The counters G89 and G90 start from the EPROM memory data previously established before manual mode
selection.
The counters are then incremented or decremented by the +/- mA input to the value manually selected. The clock
1 & 2 inputs from 3A7, determines the mA change speed.
Counters G89 and G90 outputs are fed to D/A G94 and Latch G118 as in the auto mode.
G87 and G88 compare the EPROM G65 output data with the G89 and G90 counter outputs to set the counters for
A=B. The counters input to the Latch G118 to display the mA level on 2A1, through EPROM G120 and decoders
G136 and G137. Latch G118 is set by the sc input.
G65 output data depends on the operating mode.
Fluoro - MA x 5R (154W)
ER & HLC - MA x 15R (500W)
TH - Reduce Power Operation
When the G65 output data equals the G89, and G90 counters the mA UP counting sequence stops. Counting down
is automatic if A>B.
7-11-3 Rad mAs Reference
The mAs (up) data from 3A7 (up-down) 4 bit counters G134 and G135. The counters address EPROM G132
varying from .16 to 160 mAs in 31 steps.
The digital data drives the D/A converted G133 to provide the analog mAs reference to the x-ray tube filament
circuits on 3A26 in the Rad mode.
7-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
The counter G134,G135 outputs also drive the EPROM G120 and G121 through the latch G119. The latch is set by
the SC input in Rad.
G120 provides data for the 2A1 display through Decoders G136 and G137.
G121 outputs the following:
Information for the 2A1 Display
Logic signals to select the high or low integrators on 3A26
FC01 - Fluoro min mA value (.1 mA)
FC0 - Rad mAs min (.16 mAs)
FCGR - Rad mAs max ( 160 mAs)
kV/20 bus data is fed to the upper & lower kV limit comparators G20 and G21, and G18 and G19 respectively.
At limits the FC40 or FC110 comparator output is fed to the logic circuits on 3A7.
kV/20 bus data is converted to analog by G68 which provides the kV reference signal to 3A12.
Finally the kV/20 bus data addresses the EPROM G67, the output of which is decoded by G138 and G172 to drive
the 2A1 kV Display. BCD to Decimal Decoder G22 outputs additional information to the 2A1 Display and provides
data to the Rad, mA circuits on 3A26 to taper the mA over the kV range of 40 to 110 kV.
When HLC is selected by closing SM35, the logic circuits G122 & Q141 drive the TV camera aperture. The action
closes down the TV camera lens aperture to force increasing the radiation input to the Image Tube to the required
HLC level. S140B must be closed to enable driving the aperture.
7-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A3 Power S133B

reduction
(Closed)
(Reduced Power)
RP
KV/MA Tapes
Q108, 110
3A9
KV/MA
from G22
3A12
Measured MA
(Rad)
3A9
0= .16 to 5mAs
1= 5 to 160 mAs
Pre heat
Q216 (Rad)
Amp
A214
Adder
A152
Q287A 85%KV
& PRE
G188,
184,
187
A180
Compare
A138
Integrator
A284
Amp
3A19
Stop mAs
Integ. Gain
Q83, Q217
mAs Ret 3A9

Pre
RP
Safety Delay (Rad)

Q193, 194, 197,
G184, 187
Pre heat
R3
R7
MEASURED mA
(FL) 3A12
R9
Fil.
Ret
Q26
R8
(FL)
A220 Compare
A222 Low Pass
Filter
Q287B (FL)
SYX (FL) 3A19

MSI XR 0360
3A26 Filament Circuits

Illustration 7-12
7-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS

7-12-1 Fluoro Mode
A220 compares the measured (actual) mA from 3A12 and the reference mA from 3A9. Fluoro rate is set by R9.
The output of A220 is fed through low-pass filter A222 and drives amplifier A214 through FET Q287.
Q287 is ON in fluoro because of the SYX SC to its gate.
R3 also drives A214 through Q216B for pre-heating the x-ray tube filament. Q216B is on in fluoro.
7-12-2 Rad Mode
The Rad mA measured signal from 3A12 through A284 is added to the mA Gr reference at the input of A152. The
reference is selected by the FET's Q108 and Q110. These are switched to taper the Rad mA in six steps over the
range from 40 to 110 kV. The gate signals to the FET'S come from G22 on 3A9.
S133B enables changing the reference mA values for reduced x-ray tube power consumption. S133B must be
closed when the Stenoscop is operated from 120V AC power source (reduced power).
A152 drives A214 to develop the filament reference signal in the Rad mode. Q287 is ON if the 85 kV and PRE signals
are present on its gate.
R4 enables setting the x-ray tube pre-heat level for the Rad mode. It is switched by Q216A
Integrator A138 calculates the mAs. The integrator has two speeds because of the wide range of mAs (.16 to 160
mAs).
Integrator gain is set by Q83 and Q217 using the logic signals from 3A9. (0 = .16 to 5 mAs, 1 = 6 to 160 mAs).
A180 compares the integrator for A138 output with the mAs reference signal. When these are equal, the stop mAs
output to 3A19 is developed. On 3A19, the signal prevents sending trigger pulses to the main SCR's on the
converter, stopping the Rad exposure.
Maximum Rad exposures are limited to two different times, depending on whether reduced power operation is or is
not selected by S133B.
If reduced power is selected ( S133B is closed), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 11 seconds. RP is a logic
0. R8 enables setting the Rad safety delay in this mode.
When reduced power is not selected ( S133B open), maximum Rad exposure time is limited to 7 seconds. RP is a
logic 1 and R7 enables adjusting the safety delay.
When the safety delay time elapses and the exposure is not complete the stop mAs is generated, terminating x-ray
emission.
7-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Rad Rad
G155
180 Hz
OSC
Rad
Selector
Logic
G182,183
Q124
Q206
5A1
Pre amp & Amp
Q176, 129,
162, 122
n2
Low Pass
n
Filter A282
& Multiplier
A278
FL/Rad
Selector
Q213 A & B
Voltage
Source
5TR1, 5CR3,
C3 & C4
RMS
Compare
A237
To Xray
head
Fil. Trans.
Current
Sense
FL
Integrator
A234,
Q265
Q266
Drivers
Q21, 20,
15, 11
Limiters
Q125, 128
Q123, 121
+V
Fil Ref
(A214)
Q20
C3
Voltage
Source
5TR1
5CR3
C4
.5
1.8
Q11
V
3A26 Filament Circuits
Illustration 7-13
7-28
MSI XR 0364
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS

Oscillator G155 generates a positive going 180 Hz square wave pulse.
Q206 inverts the G155 output and drives the selector logic circuit. The pulse output of the selector logic is negative
going in fluoro and positive in Rad depending on the Rad or Rad input.
The selector logic output drives the push-pull complementary amplifier consisting of Q176, Q129, Q162 and Q122.
The amplifier output is finally applied to the x-ray tube filament transformer input drivers on 5A1 consisting of Q11,
15, 20 & 21.
The limiters (Q121, 123, 125, & 128) sense the 5A1 driver outputs. If an overdrive condition is measured, the limiters
ground the push-pull amplifier output at R133.
The RMS current in the 5A1 final driver outputs is measured by A282 through FET'S Q213A in the Rad mode and
Q213B in fluoro. A282 acts as a low-pass filter and drives the multiplier A278. The RMS2 output is now integrated
by A234. The signal output of Q206 is used to reset the integrator through Q266 and Q265.
Finally the integrator output is compared with the filament reference from A124. If the integrator RMS level exceeds
the reference value, A124 inhibits the pulses at Q206.
Referring to the simplified 5A1 output driver circuit, operation is as follows:
C3 charges up to +175V approximate, furnished by the floating DC supply consisting of 5CR3 and 5TR1.
During Rad positive drive pulses to Q20 cause it to conduct and discharge C3 through Q20, and the
filament transformer primary and charging C4.
During fluoro operation positive drive pulses turn ON Q11, allowing C4 to discharge through the filament
transformer and Q11.
Switching the polarity of the current pulses through the filament transformer primary enables selecting the small
focal spot of the x-ray tube in fluoro and the large focal spot in Rad. The energy input to the transformer is controlled
by varying the pulse width.
7-29
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2Hz OSC
G35
(3A5) PRXCP
Timer Display
Counters
G38, 37
G69
50Hz
OSC
R217
Logic
Ckts
G36
G35
4 57
(3A19)
Stop Convt
SCRS
PRX
Timer
Reset
Module G
2A1
Sm14
4 26 LED FLASH
Sm 7
Xray
Exposure
Sm26
PRX
BPCL
(3A19)
Logic
Ckts
G74,75
DS175
Buzzer
G39
RAD
3A12
Module D
2A3
MSI EX 0363
Fluoro Timer/X-ray On Lamp

Illustration 7-14
7-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-14 FLUORO TIMER

Depressing the exposure buttons, either SM7 or SM26, produces the BPCL signal to 3A19. This initiates the
exposure by switching ON the converter main SCR's.
BPCL is further processed on 3A19 to produce the SEXP logic signal to 3A12. 3A12 then develops the PRX signal to
trigger the oscillator G69 and G39.
After the counters G37,38 count 4'57'' the 457 signal goes to 3A19 board to stop the converter SCR's.
At a count of 4'26'' the 2Hz oscillator G35 begins to flash the SM14 Timer reset LED.
PRX also triggers the monostable G39 which enables energizing the DS175 buzzer for .25 seconds, after releasing
the exposure button.
G74 energizes the x-ray exposure buttons LED.
Depressing SM14 resets the timer counters.
Stenoscop 6000/9000 monitor cart x-ray on lamp.
7-31
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Sm11 (CCW)
12V
7M1
Collimator
Rotation
Opaque
Collimators
+12V
Sm12 (CW)
Sm15
FC GR1
(Close)
Sm16
(Open)
Rad
G168, 157,
169,
160, 159,
164, 156
Logic Ckts
Q218
Q211
7M3
G180, 163
181, 179,
164, 166, 158
Logic Ckts
Q249
Q241
7M2
Q189
Q190
7M5
Circular Coll
9 Tube
only
Q191
Q192
7M4
Circular Coll
6 or 9 Tubes
FC Sc1
Sm13
Sm14
(Open)
(Close)
FC GR2
Rad
Sm17
Zoom
G165 Latch
G155 Monostable
Logic Ckts
Semitransparent
Collimators
Z=0= Not zoom
Rad
S501A & B
Open for 6 tube
MSI XR 0362
3A3 Collimators
Illustration 7-15
7-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS
Refer to Ilustration 7-15.
Motor 7M1 rotates the collimator. Depressing Sm11 or 12 energizes the motor for desired direction of rotation.
Either a 6" or dual field 6"-9" image tube can be use on the Stenoscop.
7-15-1 6" Single Field Image Tube
7M3 moves the upper opaque collimator blades. These are controlled by Sm15 and Sm16. Q218 and Q211 enable
reversing the voltage to 7M3 to open or close the blades.
The collimator blades can be moved provided that:
Maximum opening limit switches are not actuated, FC SC1 (Fluoro) FCGR1 (Rad) console settings are compatible with operating mode selected (Fluoro or Rad).
7M2 drives the lower semi-transparent collimator blades. These are controlled by SM13 and Sm14. Q249 and
Q241 enable reversing power to 7M2 to open and close the blades.
Collimator drive is enabled provided that the maximum opening switches are not activated FCSC2 (Fluoro) FCGR2
(Rad).
When the operating mode is switched from Rad to Fluoro all the collimator blades are automatically driven to limit
x-ray emission to the input field size of the image tube 6", (16cm) FCSC1 and FCSC2 actuated.
When changing from Fluoro to Rad, the collimator blades must be manually positioned. LED's for SM14 and SM16
will be flashing. Repositioning the blades for Rad mode stops the flashing.
7M5 is not used with the 6" Image Tube.
7-15-2 6"-9" Dual Field Image Tube
Sm17 Console button enables selecting the desired field size. S501 A&B must be closed.
Opening and closing of the collimator blades is the same as for the 6" Image Tube.
In the 9" mode, the Z signal =0. This changes the limit switch selection for the collimator blades. The maximum
opening now depends on FCGR1 and FCGR2 instead of FCSC1 and FCSC2 in Fluoro.
In the 6" mode, the Z signal = 1. Collimator blades will now be automatically set to the FCSC1 and FCSC2 limit
positions.
Flashing of the control switch LED's is identical to that for the 6" Image Tube.
7-15-3 Circular Collimators
These are driven by 7M5 and 7M4. They function to confine the x-ray beam emission.
In the Rad mode both circular collimators are moved out of the x-ray beam.
In the Fluoro 6" mode 7M5 moves the 6" circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit x-ray emission to the 6" input
field size of the image tube.
In the Fluoro 9" mode 7M4 moves the 9" circular collimator in the x-ray field to limit emission to the 9" Image Tube
input view field.
With a single field 6" image tube, 7M4 is used to move the 6" circular collimator to limit input field size.
7-33
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Module 8 TV Camera
Q145
(3A7)
Auto
(3A7)
ER
(3A5)
Sexp
Auto Gain Control (CAG)

Delay
Logic Ckts
G161, 162,
170, 171
Q148
R239
C235
(3A7)
F110
S133A
S133D
Syx Sc
(3A19)
G166
G166
Q512
Video Blank
Q132
Beam (Max)
S133C
+24v
Zoom (Mag mode)
Q149
Zoom Z1
2A3
Module D
2A1
Module G
Q146
9Sml
Aux Coil
Sm21
G163
Q152
Sm 4
+5V
PRX
(3A12)
Q209
Time
Counter
K233
Time
Counter
K510
SYXSC
Logic Ckts
G162, 176, 177
OX
(3A19)
OX HLC
(3A9)
RAD
3A3 Board
Illustration 7-16
7-34
MSI XR 0361
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-16 3A3 BOARD

TV Camera Automatic Gain Control (CAG) operates during:
Auto Fluoro or Electronic Rad (ER)
During x-ray ON (SEXP)
KV at upper limit (F110 )
S133A permits activating the AGC without the above signals (closed).
The delay circuit inhibits CAG at the start to enable TV camera reaching stability.
S133D enables unblanking the TV camera without x-ray Syx Sc.
S133C enables setting TV vidicon beam current to low beam during x-ray emission Syx Sc.
Depressing either Sm21 or Sm4 energizes the auxiliary coil of 95ml switching the unit OFF.
In High Dose Fluoro (HLC), the OX logic signal generates the OX HLC to 3A9 to close down the TV aperture (iris) in
the HLC mode. The Syx Sc holds the HLC during pulsed Fluoro. OX HLC is defeated in the Rad mode.
With a dual field tube, in the 6" mode Z1 logic signal enables switching the image tube electron optics for the magnify
mode.
PRX logic (x-ray on) activates Time Counter K233 to record x-ray on time. Time Counter K510 is active as soon as
power is turned ON. Therefore it records the total ON time of the Stenoscop.
7-35
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Mod D (2A3)
3A5
1A1 Board
Sm22
Sm23
Logic Ckts
G16, Q17
Q25, Q30
3A7
Mod G (2A1)
Drivers
Q28
K34
Q33
K44
Sm5
Sm9
K6
Trans
5TR1
Power
Supply
+24V
K34, K44
Polarity
Reverse
1M1
Up/Down
Drive Motor
To Module 8
MSI XR 0359
C-Arm Motor Drive

Illustration 7-17
7-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-17 C-ARM MOTOR DRIVE

Up/down motion of the C-Arm is performed by the 1M1 motor.
Depressing either Sm23 or Sm5 produces UP drive.
Depressing either Sm22 or Sm9 produces Down motion.
Depressing any of the above console buttons energizes K6 to enable applying power to the 1M1 motor.
The power supply also furnishes +24v DC to Module 8 (Image Tube and TV Camera).
7-37
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Q195
G140A
Sm10
Sm9
+24V
G140D
Q55
G140E
Q57
G106
Q194
G140F
Sm8
Sm7
H Sweep
24
To Module 8
TV Camera
23
V Sweep
+24V
G163B
Q151
K7
Monitor 1
12V
G163C
Q156
K5
9A1
12V
Sm6
Sm5
G163D
Q171
K7
Monitor 2
12V
G163E
Q176
K5
9A2
12V
MSI XR 0368
3A5 Timer
Illustration 7-18
7-38
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-18 3A5 TIMER

Added to the Timer Board functions already covered, the Board performs the following additional functions:
TV Camera Sweep reversal
Camera sweep reversal is controlled by Sm9 and Sm10 buttons on the control console. Sm9 enables horizontal
image reversal while Sm10 permits vertical reversal of the TV Camera image.
Depressing the console buttons flips the G106 dual bistable. The bistable outputs drive opto couplers Q55 and 57 to
switch +24V to the TV Camera H and V sweep circuits. The Q outputs of G106 also drive transistors Q195 and Q194
to energize the selected button LED'S.
7-18-1 TV Monitor Image Rotation
Console buttons Sm7 and Sm8 switch ON transistors Q156 and Q151 respectively to drive the sweep rotation coil
relays K5 and K7 for Monitor 1. The relays energize the motor drive circuit for image rotation on Monitor 1.
Console buttons Sm5 and Sm6 switch transistors Q176 and Q171 to energize Monitor 2 sweep rotation relays K5
and K7 for Monitor 2.
The 3A5 Board also contains circuitry for Monitor brightness control. The circuits, however, are not used.
7-39
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-40
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-19 LAB EXERCISE
Refer to Stenoscop 2 Manual Part 1, Section 5.

Have the students do the following Lab Exercises as outlined in the above:
Guide Wheel/Adjustment
Handle Position
C-Arm Rotation Brake
Travel Safety
Fluoro mA
Fluoro Pre Heating
Fluoro Timer
Rad Safety
Rad Pre Heating
FL/Rad Switch Verification
mAs Integrators
Auto Fluoro Systems
7-41
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TP2
24V.
+18V
VRI
R1
TP7
AGC Delay
MNI
AGC (On/Off)
To Camera Video Amp
TP9
R9
15V
15V
GI
+24V
DS3
TP8
VR2
+10V
TP3
NOR R2
G3
MAG R3
G3
NOR R5
TP4
G3
MAI
G2
CR3
MX1
TP5
G2
MAI
MAG R6
*MAG R10
G2
CR4
TP6
NOR R8
G1
MA2
MX2
MAG
Mode 1
DH2
IRIS
DH1
To image tube
power supply
CR2
+15V
+15V
To Iris Control
*Only on 45560536
Power Supply (PL1)

Illustration 7-19
7-42
MSI XR 0378
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-20 TV Camera
7-20-1 Power Supply (PL1)

24v input to voltage regulator VR1 provides a +18v output for the TV Camera circuits. R1 enables adj to 18 v .1v.
In fluoro, with CL/ON and x-ray/ON inputs both high, the AGC is active when the kV reaches 110 kV after a delay set
by MN1. R9 enables setting the AGC delay. The delay permits the TV Camera circuits to stabilize before AGC
becomes active.
24v input to Regulator G1 produces the 15v DC output.
The LED, DS3 is energized if the Image Tube current exceeds 1A.
Regulator VR2 furnishes +10v to the image tube electrode adjustment pots R2, R3, R5, R6, R8 and R10. The pots
enable adjusting the Image Tube G1, G2 and G3 electrostatic lens voltages in the normal and magnify modes as
indicated.
External control signals for image tube (normal and +mag) mode switching and iris HQ mode positioning is through
the opto-couplers DH2, and DH1, respectively.
CR3, CR4 and CR2 protect against overvoltage.
7-43
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TP1 ImV=InA
Newvicon
Target
Signal
TP4
Q5, 6, 7
MA11,2
MX11,2,3
Q1,2,3 & 4
To Sync & Mask PL3

RX
(Auto Brightness)
Q8
Hclamp
Black
Window
R1
Black Level
Adjust.
S4
R2 Max Gain
MA3, 4
Q9, 10, 11, 12
Comp
Blanking
Comp
Sync
F110
TP11
Q17, 18, 19
R7
Video Blk
Level (Setup)
Q16
Composite
Video
to Memory DSM
& Monitors
250 mV
B/W
Q20
MA52
MX21, 2, 3
Q15
R6
AGC Gain
Gamma & Edge

enhance Q13,
14, S2, S3
R5
Man. Gain
50 mV Setup
R4 Gamma wht clip

MSI XR 0376
Pre-Amp and Video Board (PL2)

Illustration 7-20
7-44
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-20-2 PreAmp and Video Board (PL2)

The Newvicon target video signal drives the series connected amplifiers Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. At TP1, the level is
1mV = 1nA.
Next we feed the black level circuit consisting of Q5, Q6 and Q7, MA1 and MA2 and electronic switches MX1-1,
MX1-2 & MX1-3. The output is applied to Q8 to provide the (Rx) auto brightness signal.
R1 enables setting the video black level to the Newvicon dark current level.
The black level circuit utilizes the H clamp and black window signal inputs.
The signal at TP4 also drives the MA3 and MA4 attenuator and amplifier. R2 sets the maximum gain and is a factory
adjustment.
The output of Q12 is applied to differential amplifier Q17 and Q18 and an emitter output Q19 for the composite video
output at TP11.
Note that composite sync and blanking are added to form the composite output.
R7 enables establishing the video black level 50 mV above blanking.
The output of Q12 is also fed to the Gamma and white clip and Edge Enhancement circuits formed by Q13 & 14.
Switching S2 enables Gamma and white clip correction by means of R4. S2 permits injecting Edge Enhancement.
The output of MA5-1 drives the AGC circuits consisting of MA5-2 and 3 and electronic switches MX2-1, 2 and 3.
R5 is used for manual gain setting while R6 is for setting the AGC gain in the active mode. The circuit is active in the
auto fluoro and electronic radiographic modes when maximum kV = 110 is reached.
7-45
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
5.04 MHz
(525 line
rate)
Crystal
OSC &
Divider
MNI
Comp Sync & blanking
MN2
MUX
TP6
HD
TP7
MN5
MA3
2X Int
VD
TP11
MA61
MA5
Video Circular
Blanking
R4 Size
R1 H cent
MN6
MA4
2xInt
R3
Roundness
R2
Vcent
MA62
R6 Size
MA 7
TP12
Video Rx
(From Pre Amp
PL2)
Blk Window
Amp
Q2, 3, 4, 5, & 6
MX2 1, 2, 3
ABC Window
R5
Size
Video ABC
(To 3A5)
TP13
MSI XR 0377
Sync and Mask Board (PL3)

Illustration 7-21
7-46
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-21 SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3)

The master oscillator and divider (MN1) is crystal controlled at 5.04 mHz and provides RS170 sync and blanking for
the 525 line rate.
The Mux (MN2) outputs produces the composite sync and blanking and horizontal and vertical drive outputs.
The horizontal and vertical drive square wave signals are each integrated twice to generate the parabola signals
required for the video, black window and ABC window circular patterns.
R1 enables horizontal circular mask centering and R2 centers the circular mask patterns vertically. R3 is adjusted for
circular mask roundness.
Video blanking diameter is set by R4, and the Black Window and ABC window sizes are adjusted by R6 and R5,
respectively.
The Rx signal from the Video Board is passed through the series connected amplifiers consisting of Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5
and Q6 and electronic switches MX2-1, MX2-2 and MX2-3 to produce the ABC window video to the hysteresis
circuit on 3A5. Q6 enables averaging of the video data in the sample window area.
7-47
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
VD
MA11 MA21, 2
MX21, 2, 3
Vsweep
(Defl)
Vcent NOR
R5
V size
R1
R2 Vcent Rev
VD
Q6 ,Q7
HD
HD
R8 H cent
Rev
Q5 ,TRI
R6
H size
R7 H Lin
K1
R9
Cathode
(Newvicon)
H sweep
(Defl)
H cent
NOR
R10
Focus
MA4, Q8
Focus
R12 Target
Target 0 to +80V.
HD
G2 300V
G3 450V
G4 630V
Q3 TR2
MA3
To
Newvicon
R4 Standby
R3
(G 2 ,G 3 , G 4 )
K2
G1 Beam
R11 Normal
+18V
6.3V Filament
VRI
MSI XR 0375
Scan Converter and Focus (PL5)

Illustration 7-22
7-48
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-22 SCAN CONVERTER AND FOCUS (PL5)

Vertical Drive to MA1 and MA2 amplifiers and electronic switching MX2 provides Vertical Sweep to the Camera tube
Vertical Deflection Coil.
R5 permits sweep size adjustment while R1 and R2 enable vertical raster centering on the camera tube target for
normal and reverse presentations, respectively.
Vertical and Horizontal Drive to Q6 and Q7 produces Camera Tube Cathode blanking.
Horizontal Drive to Q5 and Transformer TR1 develops the horizontal sweep to the Camera tube H Deflection coil.
R6 and R7 are for H size and H linearity corrections, respectively. R8 and R9 enable centering the raster horizontally
on the Camera tube target in the normal and reverse modes.
R10 adjustment, fed to MA4 amplifier and driver output Q8 to the Camera Tube focus coil enables focusing the beam
on the Newvicon target.
H Drive to the circuit consisting of Q3, MA3 and Transformer TR2 enables setting Newvicon operating potentials as
follows:
R12 established the required target voltage.
A single adjustment, R3, sets the G2, G3 and G4 Camera tube electrode potentials.
R4 and R11 set the Newvicon G1 beam potentials for STAND-BY (no x-ray exposure) and NORMAL
(x-ray) modes. K2 relay is driven by the control circuits on Board 3A3.
Filament voltage (6.3v DC) for the Camera pick-up tube is obtained from regulator VR1.
7-49
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+24V
From IRIS SIG

3A9
Std FL
P1
B3
B2
B1
M
+
HLC
P2
IRIS
63 mm
(Max open)
B1
+
+V
B2
Servo
Position
MSI XR 0374
Iris Control
Illustration 7-23
7-50
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-23 IRIS CONTROL

The iris, or aperture, has only two positions. One is for setting the standard fluoro light input to the TV Camera
pick-up tube. The second is for the HLC operating mode.
These iris openings are established by adjustment of P1 for standard fluoro and P2 for HLC. In the HLC mode, the
iris is closed down from its fluoro position.
The iris is physically located in front of the TV Camera lens. Its maximum physical opening is 63mm.
Let's consider we are adjusting P1 to establish the iris opening for standard fluoro. Assume we develop a positive
voltage output at X of B3. This is fed through follower B2 applies a positive input to the inverter input of B1 and
develops a negative output voltage across the top side of motor M.
Note that the positive output of follower B2 is also applied to the positive input of the lower B1 on the drawing. Its
output will, therefore, be positive applied to the lower side of motor M. Simply, we have a voltage across the motor
and the iris motor drives and changes the iris opening.
Note that the servo position pot is physically tied to the motor. Thus, we now develop an increasing positive input
position voltage to the remaining inputs of both B1 output drivers. This is applied through the lower follower, B2, as
the position of the servo pot is changed.
When the sum of the inputs to both B1 drivers is zero, their outputs will be zero and the motor stops.
Adjusting P2 will result in the same action, and we will close down the iris opening for HLC operation.
7-51
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
(Sync separator)
H
U4 U3
U2 U1
Q1 Q2
(Sync)
Remote
contrast
V
Q11
Blk Level
Clamp
Q6
Video
In
Q1 0
Q7, 8
Q3,4,5
C17
Diff. Amp
Follower
R29 Gain
Q9
R45
BIAS
Q6
Q1
Follower
HV
blanking control
Ext
blanking
Grid
to CRT
Cathode
Q2, 3, 4, 5
Remote
Brightness
Diff amps
cascaded
Blanking
circuit Q101
to Q105
R32
BIAS
XR0386
Video Preamp and Output Amplifier

Illustration 7-24
7-52
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-24 DSM VMI MONITOR CIRCUITS

The camera video output is fed to series connected buffers Q3, 4 and 5. R29 sets the video level gain. Output buffer
Q5 is capacity coupled to a differential amplifier (Q7 and Q8).
At the output of the differential amplifier, R45 driving Q9 enables setting the video black level to zero as measured on
the collector of Q8. Also, the remote contrast permits establishing the desired contrast setting through Q11.
Q10 follower applies the video to Q1 which in turn drives the differential amplifier (Q2 and Q3). These now drive a
pair of cascade output amplifiers (Q4 and Q5). The collector of Q5 drives the CRT cathode while the Q4 output is
applied to the grid of the CRT.
Remote brightness adjust fed to Q6 enables establishing the desired video brightness level on the grid of the CRT.
The composite signal applied to the sync separator circuits strips the video portion and produces the H and V sync
outputs.
Q6 clamps the video black level.
The blanking circuit will permit blanking the video during H and V retrace periods or upon an external blanking
commands.
7-53
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+V
H hold
B+
Boost V.
R113
OSC PLL
U101, U102
H
Sync
T102 & Reg

U105, U104,
U106
+Video
150V.
+6V.
+5V.
5V.
Q101 Pre Amp

T101
Q104 Output Amp
H Defl
+V
Phase
Delay
R110
L 102 Lin
L 103 Width
To Q303
(Sweep
protect)
L 101
H cent
Simplified H Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-25
7-54
To Q301
dynamic
focus
XR0388
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

The PLL oscillator, U102, driving the preamp, Q101, and output amplifier, Q104, locks the deflection output pulse to
the H sync input.
Q104 feeds the series connected horizontal deflection coil, H linearity L102, width coil L103 and the H centering
L101.
Q104 also switches the current input to T102 primary at the horizontal sweep rate (15.75 kHz). The secondary of
T102 driving the voltage regulators U105, U104 and U103 produces the +6v and 5v regulated outputs. In addition,
T102 supplies the -150v and +video unregulated outputs.
R110 sets the phase of oscillator U102 while R113 enables adjustment of the horizontal hold to within 150 Hz of the
H sync.
L102, L103 and L101 permit adjusting H linearity, width and centering, respectively.
Notice that the H drive current through the width coil L103 is also fed to Q303 for sweep failure protection and to
Q301 for dynamic focus.
7-55
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
V
Defl
Q201 Inverter
U201
OSC,Ramp gen, power amp.
V Sync
+V
V
shape
R207
R219
V cent H sweep Q303
Q304
R205A
V freq.
R212
V size
L 103
H. width
Q202
Q203
R213
V linearity
V sweep
To CRT
(Control Grid)
(Sweep failure
protection)
To dynamic focus
ckt (V parabola)
XR0387
Simplified V Sweep Circuit

Illustration 7-26
7-56
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

U201 is an oscillator, a ramp generator and power amplifier. The oscillator is locked to the V inverted sync input while
the output power amplifier drives the vertical deflection yoke.
R219 enables vertical raster centering.
Q303 and Q304 protect the CRT against either an H or V sweep drive failure. Should a sweep failure occur, the
control grid of the CRT will be driven to cut-off.
Q202 and Q203 furnish a V parabola signal to the dynamic focus circuit.
R205A is the vertical hold adjustment.
R212 enables adjusting the vertical raster size.
R213 adds the parabola signal to the ramp generator section of U201 for setting the top and bottom V raster size to
center size ratio.
R207 enables fine adjustment of V sweep linearity.
7-57
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+V
+300V
Q302
R311
H Focus
C307
CR308
+V
T301
V
Parabola
R310
C309
C304
To CRT
(FOCUS GRID)
C302 &
C303
CR304
Corner
focus
V Focus
+V
+V
L103
Width
R321
To CRT
(G2)
DC Focus
Q301
G2
Adj.
R323
150 V
Simplifed Dynamic Focus Circuit

Illustration 7-27
7-58
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Transformer T301 and capacitors C302 and C303 form a tuned resonant circuit at the H rate. The tank circuit is
excited by the H sweep through Q301.
Thus, the output at T301 is a sinusoid at the H frequency, coupled to the Monitor CRT focus electrode through C304.
The H oscillations are modulated by the V parabola applied to the base of Q301 and controlled by R309. This
particularly effects the focus at the corners of the raster scan.
R311 controls the peak amplitude of the H oscillations and therefore must be set for best focus at the edges of the H
sweep.
R310 controls the amplitude of the V parabola driving Q302 and enables adjusting the V focus at the top and bottom
edges of the vertical sweep.
The DC focus potential is set by R323. It is set to provide best center focus.
The final resultant signal output to the CRT focus grid is a sinusoid at the H frequency, amplitude modulated by the V
parabola and added to the DC level set by R323.
R321 enables adjusting the CRT, G2 electrode potential.
7-59
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
T2
LC
Filter
T1
CR9
Reg +
24V.
R5&6
220V
AC
HV Supply
(sealed)
Nonserviceable
C13
To CRT
Accel
Anode
CR1
CR8
R11
U2
U1
Switcher
Q1 &2
U3 & U4
R33
XR0390
Simplified Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

Illustration 7-28
7-60
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

220v AC is fed to bridge rectifier CR9.
Current through R5 and R6 charges C13 to the threshold level (16v) and starts switcher U1. U1 drives Q1 and Q2
and energizes T1.
T1 output current through T2 feeds the RC filter network to produce the +24v regulated output.
T2 secondary continues to supply the switcher U1 through CR1.
If the T2 supply is too high, the crowbar circuit involving U2 and CR8 is activated for circuit protection.
The feedback voltage across R33 driving the Zener U4 and the opto-coupler U3 determines the duty cycle
(ON-OFF) time of switcher U1. The +24v DC output of the power supply is thus regulated to within +24v .5v.
R11 and R33 are factory set and should require no further adjustment.
7-61
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Rear Panel
Switch Bd.
Light Sensor
Board
Photo Cell
Film Cassette
Main Board
Alpha
Numeric
Display
Lens Plate
Board
Switch
Interface
Board
Shutter
CRT
Monitor
Matrix 1010 (Model 1) Block Diagram

Illustration 7-29
7-62
XR0392
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-25 1010 FORMATTER

The main board performs the following functions:
It accepts operator-selected exposure parameters through the Rear Panel Switch Board and the Switch
Interface Board.
It drives the Alphanumeric Display
The Main Board uses the photocell brightness control signal to control monitor CRT brightness for constant
film exposure density
The Main Board controls opening and closing of the shutter drive motor through the lens Plate Board.
It houses the Z80 microprocessor and memories that control Matrix functions.
7-63
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Mirror
CRT
Shutter
Lens
Photo Cell
Mirror
Mirror
Film cassette
xr0395
Matrix 1010 Optical Path

Illustration 7-30
7-64
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

The folded optical light path is as shown in the drawing.
Note the position of the photocell on the second mirror. The photocell is used to manage monitor CRT brightness.
The shutter remains closed before each film exposure to set-up the brightness loop in a calibration mode. It then
opens for the film exposure.
Actual film exposure time is controlled by unblanking the monitor CRT.
7-65
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
CRT
Photo cell
Integrator
light sensor
board
Monitor
Mux
D/A
Contrast, blanking
& brightness
Compare
A/D
Memory
Operator
Select
Contrast Exposure time
& brightness
XR0393
Brightness Exposure Control Loop

Illustration 7-31
7-66
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

The operator programs the monitor brightness, contrast and exposure time for the desired film density and film to be
used. The operator data is stored in memory. Up to eight sets of values can be stored using four for positive images
and four for negative images.
Using the set exposure parameters, the brightness feedback loop maintains monitor brightness for consistent film
density. The photocell operates in conjunction with the microprocessor and the video monitor. It reads monitor
brightness and produces an output current proportional to brightness.
Before each film exposure, the microprocessor commands the monitor to display a calibration pattern.
The photocell measures the monitor CRT light output with the Cal" pattern and the microprocessor then compares
this with a reference level represented by the brightness number stored in memory. The microprocessor then
adjusts the monitor brightness to match the reference value. When this occurs, the calibration cycle is completed,
the CRT displays the video image, the shutter opens and the exposure takes place.
The block diagram shows the photocell current output integrated on the Light Sensor Board, passed through a mux
and then to a comparator and A/D converter to the microprocessor. The microprocessor looks at the stored memory
exposure data, compares this with the photocell signal and then provides a correction through a D/A to the monitor
brightness circuit to satisfy the loop. Stored memory data with respect to contrast and exposure time is also fed to
the monitor circuits. Exposure timing is controlled by unblanking the monitor.
7-67
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Comp Video
Unblanking
Comp Video & Blanking
Video Amp.
Contrast
Scan & DYN Focus

Brightness
Comp Sync
X
Sync
Smoothing
Board
V Scan &
Blanking
V Sweep
Output Board
CRT
+750V.
V. Defl
CRT
Filament
V Defl. Coil
CRT Board
H Defl. Coil
H Sync
PLL Sync
H Defl
H Scan &
Blanking
150 & +750v
H. V. Power
Supply
Brightness
Scan Fail
XR0394
Matrix Video Monitor Block Diagram

Illustration 7-32
7-68
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

7-26 VIDEO AMPLIFIER
Composite video from the Mother Board is applied to the Video Amplifier. The video signal is amplified and stripped
of sync. Composite video drives the Output Board and is then applied to the CRT cathode. Composite sync is fed to
the V Defl and the Smoothing Board. Contrast signal from the Mother Board sets the gain on the Video Amplifier
while the unblanking input drives the cathode of the CRT to control exposure time.
7-26-1 Smoothing Board
Composite sync from the Video Amplifier is used to develop H Sync and V Sweep on the Smoothing Board. H Sync
is applied to the H Defl while V Sweep is used on the V Defl. PLL sync from the H Defl to the Smoothing board is used
as a line clock. The X Sync output to the external circuits (Mother Board) is for blanking control for photographic
applications.
7-26-2 V Defl
The V Defl produces the V drive the the Vert deflection coil and applies V scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These
are derived from the ramp signal from the Smoothing Board and the composite sync from the Vertical Amplifier.
Adjustable blanking from composite sync is used for dynamic focus on the CRT Board.
7-26-3 H Defl
The H Defl furnishes H scan and blanking to the CRT Board. These are developed by processing the H sync input
from the Smoothing Board. The H sync also produces the H sweep to the Horizontal CRT deflection coil.
7-26-4 CRT Board
The board functions to detect H or V sweep failures. Should such occur, the scan fail signal is developed and fed to
the external control circuits. The brightness signal from the Mother Board controls a brightness amplifier which in
turn drives the G1 electrode of the CRT (through the Output Board). H and V blanking inputs together with the
-150V to +750V potentials from the HV supply are used for static and dynamic focus to the Output Board. The CRT
Board also has a filament regulator for the CRT filament.
7-26-5 Output Board
Summing of the static and dynamic focus signal inputs from the CRT Board enables applying focus control
potentials to the G4 electrode of the CRT. The brightness signal and +750v inputs fed through low pass filters
produce potentials for the G1 (brightness) and G2 electrodes of the CRT.
A regulated filament voltage passes through the Output Board to the filament of the CRT. Finally, the composite
video from the Video Amplifier fed through a final cathode amplifier drives the CRT cathode. Blanking from the Video
Amplifier enables controlling the Output Board cathode amplifier to either blank or unblank the CRT.
7-69
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-70
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE

DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide the student with experience doing the electronic adjustments for the X-ray portion of the
Stenoscop.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 19
COMPETENCIES:
Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:
S
kVp measurement
Travel safety
Fluoro mA adjustment
Fluoro Preheating
Fluoro Timer
Rad Safety
Rad mA Preheating
Rad/Fluoro switch test
mAs Integrators

SAFETY:
Safety Policy.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the adjustments procedures given in Section 19 of XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement. Use
the Service Manual that was received with the equipment to insure that we are using the most current directions.
7-71
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-72
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-28 MONICON 3 LAB EXERCISE

DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide necessary experience for the student for calibration of the Stenoscop Image System.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement - Section 13
COMPETENCIES:
Upon completion student will be able to perform the following:
S
Calibration of the Monicon 3 Camera System
Calibration of the Imageur Image System
Calibration of the Stenoscop Auto Brightness Loop
Use of the DSM Image Quality Tests

SAFETY:
Safety Policy, Static Control - ESD and Energy Control and Power Lock Out.
PROCEDURE:
Follow the calibration in XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement, Section 11 Monicon 3 TV Calibration.
7-73
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
7-74
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
FUSES REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
PWB SWITCHES JOB CARDS RG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
TIME COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
RG 21 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

STENOSCOP 2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
STENOSCOP 2 GENERATOR WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 6.3
62
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
621
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
6211 XRAY PROTECTION

During an operation involving Xray emission, put a lead apron between the Xray head and the image intensifier of the mobile system.
6212 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Differential electrical measurements taken with the oscilloscope (in particular, thyristor trigger voltages) must
be taken with the oscilloscope in differential mode.
Measurements taken in common mode with an earthed oscilloscope may destroy components.
6213 CONNECTOR PL1 OF PWB 3A19 COMMANDE SCR
Never remove this connector while the mobile system is energized.
The thyristor trigger protection currents are on PWB 3A19 and there is a risk of accidental triggering if PL1 is
disconnected.
6214 GROUNDING OF BOARDS ON EXTENDERS
Dont forget to ground the boards (with an extension lead with FASTON terminals).
6215 BOARD REPLACEMENT
Deenergize the mobile system when replacing or extending a board.
622
BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY
6221 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

The standard troubleshooting technique consists in replacing the boards.
The interchangeability criteria for the boards are listed below in three groups:
1) Noninterchangeable boards.
2) Readily interchangeable boards.
Boards without adjustment or boards which have been calibrated in the factory.
3) Interchangeable boards which require adjustments.
NOTE : Make sure that the required procedure is at hand before proceeding with adjustments.
In some instances, it will be necessary to repair the mobile system on site and to recalibrate it.
All the information needed for this is given in the paragraph 4 of this chapter : Adjustments sheet RG...
6222 NON INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
DIVIDER 6A1 PWB
In factory, the divider PWB 6A1 is calibrated with the Xray head, on which it is mounted.
This calibration requires specific tools which are not available on site.
After accidental destruction of the 6A1 circuit, it is, however, possible to recalibrate a circuit with similar characteristics. This can be done in the factory only.
8-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6223 READILY INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS

1A1
MOTEUR ARCEAU PWB (Carm motor)
2A1
MODULE G2 (control console) PWB

Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG40
2A3
MODULE D2 (control console) PWB
3A3
DIAPHRAGMES 2 (collimator) PWB

3A7
AD/kV PWB
Check the presence of bridge W10
3A9
CONSIGNE kV/mA2 (kV/mA reference) PWB

Check the presence of W245 bridge
CAUTION : EPROM
Check agreement: name, position, revision
3A12 kV/mA PWB
Adjustment of kV measurement: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG10)
Adjustment of FLUORO TIMER: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG14)
Check bridges presence W107, W109, W220, W231, W244, W245.
3A19 COMMANDE SCR2 (SCR control) PWB
Check bridge presence W16
4A1
SCR No1 PWB
4A2
SCR No 2 PWB
5A1
PUISSANCE 4 PWB (Heating power)
7A1
FROTTEUR PWB (contact brush)
7A2
DISQUE PWB (Disk) Complete adjustment of collimator
9A1/9A2 Relais PWB (relay)

9A4
PRISE PWB
3A1
INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G 035 STENOSCOP 2

This board is fully factory calibrated.
If an accidental uncalibration occurs, refer to adjustment sheet RG21.
8-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


6224 INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS WHICH REQUIRE ADJUSTMENTS
3A5
Timer PWB (Minuterie 2.)

Adjustment of ABC video (adjustment sheet RG 20).
3A26 Filament heating PWB (Chauffage filament 4)

Adjustment of fluoro mA (adjustment sheet RG 12)
Adjustment of fluoro preheating (adjustment sheet RG 13)
Adjustment of RAD preheating (adjustment sheet RG 16)
8-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
623
FUSES REPLACEMENT
The unit is internally protected by fuses inaccessible by the user.
During corrective procedure, it is OBLIGATORY to replace a blowed fuse by means of the SAME MODEL
OF FUSE.
A plastic bag with spare fuses is provided in the unit in the module 3. See D/R n 01 sheet for access.
This bag countains :
2 Fuses ABC 1A 250V
1 Fuse ABC 3A 250V
1 Fuse ABC 5A 250V
1 Fuse ABC 8A 250V
1 Fuse MDA 3A 250V
1 Fuse FNQ 1A 500V
code 854 352 P 025

code 854 352 P 045
code 854 352 P 055
code 854 352 P 075
code 854 352 P 425
code 854 362 P 315
It is possible to order this Maintenance bag with the code number 828 731 G 015.
6231 FUSES LIST
NAME
MODEL
LOCALIZATION
ACCES
1A1F5
MDA 3A 250V UNIT
see sheet
1A1F8
ABC 3A 250V
MODULE 1
D/R 02
5F2
ABC 3A 250V
UNIT
see sheet
5F3
ABC 8A 250V
MODULE 5
D/R 01
9F1
ABC 1A 250V
MONITOR CART
see sheet
9F2
ABC 1A 250V
9F3
ABC 5A 250V
MODULE 9
D/R 10
9F4
FNQ 1A 500V
6232 REMARKS RELATING TO FUSES REPLACEMENT

Replacement of 1A1 F5 fuse
MODEL MDA 3A 250V
When 1F5 fuse blows, verify the UP/DOWN motion system
Check the wear of the driving shaft and roller plates of the column.
Check cleanliness of the roller plates
Verify that the motor current is lower than 2,5A when column is on mechanical stop.
8-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
63
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
631
GENERAL
There are two categories of disassembly/reassembly sheets : mechanical (numbered from 1) and electronic
(num
bered from 20).
Each sheet gives the list of tools and equipment needed, preliminary precautions and part disassembly and
reas
sembly procedure.
The part numbers of the hardware mentioned in this chapter are given in chapter 9, Renewal Parts.
632
LIST OF DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
6321 MECHANICAL PARTS

Sheet
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Title
Disassembly/Reassembly of mobile system front cover
Disassembly/Reassembly of mobile system rear cover
Disassembly/Reassembly of Xray head upper cover
Disassembly/Reassembly of steering handle
Control console opening procedure
Disassembly/Reassembly of guide cable
Disassembly/Reassembly of gas spring
Releasing the inverter and the board rack
Disassembly/Reassembly of Monitors support rear covers
6322 ELECTRONIC PARTS

Sheet
No.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Title
40
C Arm cable replacement
Disassembly/Reassembly of Xray head

Disassembly/Reassembly of Extender board
Disassembly/Reassembly of Carm motor PWB 1A1
Disassembly/Reassembly of inverter capacitors 4C1 to 4C6
Disassembly/Reassembly of inverter bridge 4CR7
Disassembly/Reassembly of presspack semiconductors
Disassembly/Reassembly of transformer 5TR1
Disassembly/Reassembly of power supply bridges CR2 and CR3
Disassembly/Reassembly of heating power PWB 5A1
Disassembly/Reassembly of main power supply capacitors C2, C3 and C4
Disassembly/Reassembly of control console PWBs
Disassembly/Reassembly of Carm motor 1M1
Disassembly/Reassembly of breaker 9Sm1
8-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000Job Card RG 40

Purpose:
1 of 2
Version No.: 00
PWB SWITCHES PROGRAMMATION.
Date: May 1993

Time:
No et Nom du CI
2A1
PUPITRE MODULE G2
Manpower:
Switch No
Switch Position
EUR.
USA
FONCTION
828 986 G015
S58 14
23
S59 14
23
S60 14
23
(A)
(B)
(A)
(B)
(A)
(B)
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
The 3 switches determine the function of BP 2A1 Sm 35

Stenoscop 2 (D6/D9)
HIGH QUALITY or STANDARD FLUORO mode
selection
Stenoscop LE
BLOCKING OF MEMORIZATION ( DR )
2A2
PUPITRE MODULE D2
S528 14
23
(A)
(B)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON = Possibility of camera sweeps inversions

OFF = No possibility of camera sweeps inversions
S502 14
(A)
ON
ON
23
(B)
OFF
ON
S602 14
(A)
OFF
OFF
23
(B)
OFF
OFF
ON =
OFF =
ON =
OFF =
ON =
OFF =
ON =
OFF =
S133 18
27
36
45
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON = AGC Camera ON
ON if MAINS 100, 108 ou 120VReduced power
OFF = Beam standby mode
OFF = Go to black function inactive
S501 14
(A)
ON
ON
23
(B)
ON
ON
ON = Stenoccop 2 D9
OFF = Stenoscop 2 D6
OFF = Led PB II mode OFF
S140 14
23
(A)
(B)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON = 2A1 Sm35 bistable function

OFF = 2A1 Sm35 instable funcntion
ON = Iris TV camera disconnected
828 984 G025

3A1
INTERFACE DSM
828 988 G035
Stenoscop2(D6/D9)
only
3A3
DIAPHRAGMES 2
828 978 G025
3A9
CONSIGNE kV / mA 2
828 980 G035 (D6/D9)
OR
828 980 G045 (LE)
3A19
COMMANDE SCR 2
828 982 G025
3A26
CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4 829357G035
RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )

No RX Hold in SP and ER mode ( SN )
No RX Hold in SN mode
RX Hold in SN mode
RX Hold in SN mode during T1+T2 (if S502 B OFF)
RX Hold in SN mode during T1 (if S502 B OFF)
ACP delay activated
ACP delay not activated
S246 14
23
(A)
(B)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL mode

ON = Buzzer ON in HIGHT QUALITY FL and ER mode
S76 18
27
36
45
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
S528 14
23
(A)
(B)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON = RAD Exposure at reduced power

ON = Used only in calibration procedure (reduced ma)
X = position indiffrente
8-8
=
=
=
=
Unit without memory

RAD Exposure not autorised from Footswitch
RAD Exposure autorised from RAD?FL handswitch
RAD Exposure not autorised from consol PB
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TIME COUNTERS
Two time counters are provided on 3A3 DIAPHRAGME PCB.
The upper counter (K510) totals the switching ON time.
The lower counter (K233) totals the X-Ray emission time.
The time is displayed in hour and hundredth of hour.
8-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A1 INTERFACE DSM
828 988 G035
8-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB ( 201 210B )
1 of 3
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Time: 30 min.
Manpower: 1
1. TOOLS REQUIRED
Oscilloscope
2. PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
All the potentiometers are FACTORY CALIBRATED.
This procedure will be performed only if accidental uncalibration occures.
3. CONDITIONS
The image system must be completely and correctely adjusted (see corresponding manual).
4. PROCEDURE
NOTE : The waveforms are given for your guidance.
The parameters of the oscilloscope adjustment are different of the parameters given in the procedure.
Switch OFF the unit
Install 3A1 PB on extender card
Connect ground of 3A1 to card rack ground
Power ON the unit.
4.1 T1 DELAY ADJUSTMENT

Connect the scope as follows :
Probe
V/div
Sweep
Trigger
Memory
3A1.E123
5V/div
0,2 sec/div
Int. DC
Memory ON
On the control console, select E.R. (Electron Rad)

Initiate Fluoro sequence
Adjust 3A1R151 in order to obtain a delay of 1000 +/ 20 ms.

Connect the probe to 3A1.E124
On 3A1 connector, connect 3A1.a8 to a20
Initiate FLUORO
Verify that the delay, triggered on the falling edge of T1, is 880 +/ 100 ms.
8-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

8-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 21
4.3 T3 DELAY CHECK

Connect the scope to 3A1.E122
Sweep 10 ms/div
On 3A1 connector, connect 3A1.a8 to a20
Select NORMAL FLUORO MODE
Initiate FLUORO and release RX control
T3 Delay is triggered by the falling edge of the RX control.
Verify that the delay is 62 + /8 ms

Sweep 0.2 s/div
Select PULSED FLUORO on the control console.
Initiate FLUORO sequence.
Delay T4 is generated after the first RX pulse.
Adjust 3A1.R152 in order to obtain a delay of 500 +/ 10 ms.
4.5 T5 MINIMUM DELAY CHECK

Connect the probe to 3A1.E127.
On 3A1 connector, connect 3A1.a8 to a20.
Select PULSED FLUORO mode.
Initiate FLUORO sequence.
Verify that T5 delay is 880 +/ 100 ms.
8-13
2 of 3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

8-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 21
4.6 PULSED FLUORO RATE ADJUSTMENT : T6
Select PULSED FLUORO MODE
Initiate FLUORO sequence
Adjust 3A1.R150 in order to obtain a delay T6 of 1000 +/ 50 ms.
With T4 = 500 ms, the pulse rate is 1 Xray pulse / 1,5 second.
Remove connection between 3A1.a8.a20.
4.7. ANODE COOLING PAUSE SAFETY ADJUSTMENT (not used)

This adjusment is valid only for the PWB INTERFACE DSM.
Code number 828 988 G 035
Sweep
Trigger
0,5 Sec/Div
DCinternal
Position SW 602.2 (B) to ON

Select ER mode (Election Radiography)
Initiate exposure
Adjust 3A1.R604 in order to obtain a delay of 2 sec +/ 0,4 sec.
Position SW 602.2 (B) to OFF
8-15
3 of 3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP 2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS
(with flat field)
KVP
mA & mAs
8-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Kv Converter
Cap
Prep
CR7
Module G(2A1)
FL / RAD
Exposure
+5V
16
Sm7
Add
Cap Main SCRS
CR4 CR16
117
a15
3A7
a34
SYXSC a28
FL Fil.
BPCL
a7
Module D (2A3)
3A9
14
a10
+5V
a12 a18
PRE
3A26
Xray
Fil.
Trans.
a31
Rad Fil.
Sm26
Rad/Rad
FT Sw
Rad/ Rad
Select
Fil preheat
SEXP
3A5
3A12
b8
a14
Activate KV/20
Ref Auto Int.
FL Timer
a13
3A3
b12
Time Counter
FL/RAD Exposure Switch Signal Path

Illustration 8-33
8-19
AGCOff
MSI XR0372
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
b20
High Level +5V
FL (HLC)
Sm35
b21
Module G(2A1)
OX
b33
b6
3A19
a6
3A9
3A7
TV
Camera
14
Lens
Aperture
b29
OXHLC
b28
3A3
Sy XSc
Rad
HLC Switch Signal Path

Illustration 8-34
8-21
MSI XR0371
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-22
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A7
3A9
Sm 33
Electronic +5V
Rad
Module G (2A1)
b31
b29
a32
TV Camera
AGC ON
AUTO+ER F110
3A1
Memory
a31 Interface
Memory DSM
Display
3A9
FL Eproms
b8
G65, 66
Electronic Rad Switch Signal Path

Illustration 8-35
8-23
MSI XR 0370
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A7
3A1
Sm 52
Pulsed
FL
SP
Module G (2A1)
a6 Memory
Interface
DSM
a17 a15
OX
OX
Sm 7
Module G (2A1)
a6
Exp Switches
BPCL
a5
a7 Command
SCR
3A19
Sm 26
Module D (2A3)
MSI XR 0369
Pulsed Fluoro Signal Path

Illustration 8-36
8-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP 2 GENERATOR WAVEFORMS
8-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-28
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-29
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-31
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-33
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-34
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-35
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-37
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
8-38
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
9-4 GENERATOR THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
9-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
Linear IC's like OP Amps, voltage regulators, opto couplers, etc.
Terminal Board
BP
Pushbutton
Capacitor where:
2K2 = 2.2k picofarads = 2.2 nanofarads
500mf = 500 microfarads
CR
Diode*, SCR, etc.
Diode*, SCR, etc.
DS
Indicators like neon lights, led, etc.
Test points including ground which are bolted to the chassis.
Fuse
Non-linear IC's like gates, FF, Eprom, logic circuits, etc.
Relay
Coil
Motor
OP
Linear IC's like Op Amps, voltage regulators, opto couplers, etc.
PL
Plug
Transistor, FET, etc.
Resistance, where:
2E2 = 2.2 ohms
2K2 = 2.2 k ohms
Switch
SM
Circuit Breaker
SW
Switch
TB, B
Terminal Board
TR
Terminal Strip
Jumper
Schottky diodes are used because they are inexpensive, not because they are needed for their special
characteristics.
9-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Value Indicated on Schematics
Actual Value
CAPACITOR VALUES
2K2
= 2.2 kpicofarads
= 2.2 nanofarads
4K7
= 4.7 kpicofarads
100K
= 100 kpicofarads
500mf
= 500 microfarads
4MF7
= 4.7 mf
RESISTOR VALUES
2E2
= 2.2 ohms
2K2
= 2.2 kohms
7K15
= 7.15 kohms
100K
= 100 kohms
4K02
= 4.02 kohms
OTHER
7 x 150E
= 7 resistors with a value of 150 ohms each
9-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON

FRENCH WORD
EQUIVALENT ENGLISH WORD
affichage
display
alim (alimentation)
supply
apres
after
arret
stop
avant
before
balayage
scanning
bobine
coil, spool
bouton
button
cache
hidden
cadrage
centering
chauffage
heating
cliche
exposure
coupure
cut
dalle
area, section
de
of
demarrage
start
disque
record(LP)
droit
right
ecretage
slip
electro
solenoid
fin
end
focalisation
focusing
gaine
tube casing
gauche
left
graphie
rad
gros
course
inferieurs
lower
linearite
linearity
marche
on, start
masse
ground
9-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
FRENCH WORD
EQUIVALENT ENGLISH WORD
minuterie
timer
niveau
level
noir
no
pas
push
prise
plug, connector
pupitre
control panel or desk
puissance
power
repro (reproduire)
copy
reseau
network
scopie
fluoro
si
if, so
sortie
out, exit
superieurs
uppers
sur
on/upon/over/in
terre
earth
verte
green
volets
blades
9-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS
1 inch
= 2.54 cm
3 feet
= 0.9144 meters
1 mile
= 1.609 kilometers
1 fluid quart
= 29.573 milliliters
1 quart
= 0.946 liters
1 ounce
= 28.35 grams
1 pound
= 453.59 grams
1 ton
= 0.907 metric tons
SAMPLE CONVERSION
kilograms per sq. cm to pounds per sq. inch
454 grams = 1 pound
Kg
cm2
(2.54)2
inch2
1 pound
inch
1 pound
0.454 Kg
= (2.54)2 pounds
0.454 inch2
= 14.2 pounds
inch2
= 1 Kg
0.34 cm2
TEMPERATURE
Centigrade = C_
= 5 (F_-32)
9
atto
= a
= 10-18
femto
= f
= 10-15
pico
= p
= 10-12
nano
= n
= 10-9
micro
= u
= 10-6
milli
= m
= 10-3
centri
= c
= 10-2
deci
= d
= 10-1
deca
= da
= 10
hectro = h
= 102
kilo
= k
= 103
mega
= M
= 106
giga
= G
= 109
tera
= T
= 1012
Fahrenheit = F_ =
5
9-7
9 (C_ +32)
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
LINEAR equivalents
10 millimeters
1 centimeter
10 centimeters
1 decimeter
10 decimeters
1 meter
10 meters
1 dacameter
10 dacameters
1 hectometer
100 sq. millimeters
1 sq. centimeter
100 sq. centimeters
1 sq. decimeter
100 sq. decimeters
1 sq. meter
100 sq. meters
1 sq. decameter
100 sq. dacameters
1 sq. hectometer
100 sq. hectometers
1 sq. kilometer
100 cubic milliters
1 cubic centimeter
1000 cubic centimeters
1 cubic decimeter
1000 cubic decimeters
1 cubic meter
10 milliliters
1 centiliter
10 centiliters
1 deciliter
10 deciliters
1 liter
10 liters
1 decaliter
10 decaliters
1 hectroliter
10 hectoliter
1 kiloliter
10 milligrams
1 centigram
10 centigrams
1 decigram
10 decigrams
1 gram
10 grams
1 decagram
10 decagrams
1 hectrogram
10 hectrograms
1 kilogram
100 kilograms
1 quintal
10 quintals
1 ton
SQUARE equivalents
CUBIC equivalents
LIQUID equivalents
WEIGHT equivalents
9-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-4 GENERATOR THEORY
9-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Module 8
Module 2
Module 3
Module 7
Module 4
Module 5
Module 6
Module 1
Module 9
9TR1
9-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
663

IDENTIFICATION
The electronic circuits in the mobile intraoperative radiology system are grouped
together in the modules identified as follows:
. module 1 :
block (item 1),
. module 2 :
control console (item 2),
. module 3 :
card rack assembly (item 3),
. module 4 :
inverter (item 4),
. module 5 :
power supply (item 5),
. module 6 :
Xray head (item 6),
. module 7 :
Xray head, collimator (item 7),
. module 8 :
image intensifier and TV camera (item 8),
. module 9 :
interface installed on the rear side of the monitor cart (item 9).
Examples:
the kV/ma reference board in module 3, position 9, is marked 3A9,
the HV divider board in module 6 is marked 6A1.
the supply transformer in module 5 is marked 5TR1.
664
SCHOTTKY DIODES
Schottky diodes (1N6263), commonly used in the mobile system electronic circuits, are in
fact used as ordinary diodes.
665
LIST OF SYMBOLS
6651 DESIGNATION OF THE COMPONENTS

Examples :
. 3A1 :
. 3A1 R58 :
. 4R29 :
3 is module number (give a location information),

A means PWB (PL for plug, a and b for PWB connector).
1 is order number.
number 58 resistor which is on 3A1 PWB.
number 29 resistor which is in module 4 (not on a PWB).
BP
C
D = CR
DS
E
F
G
K
L
M
A = OP
Q
R
S = SW
B = TB
T = TR
W
PL
Pushbutton
Capacitor
Diode, thyristor or rectifier bridge
Light
Test point
Fuse
Logic circuit
Relay
Coil
Motor
Operational amplifier, FET switch voltage regulator
Transistor
Resistor
Switch
Terminal board
Transformer
Jumper
Plug
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
9-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6652 LIST OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE SCHEMATICS

ABBREVIATIONS
PWB NAME COMMENTS

LOCALISATION
AUTO
3A751A
Automatic FLUORO mode selection
BP01
3A13112B
Upper blades of collimator : opening control
BP02
3A13112B
Lower blades of collimator : opening control
BPF1
3A13112B
Upper blades of collimator : closing control
BPF2
3A13112C
Lower blades of collimator : closing control
BPmA(s) Up
3A1766C
mA or mAs selection : increase control
BPmA(s) Down
3A766C
mA or mAs selection : diminution control
BP OFF
3A3116D
Unit switching OFF Pushbutton
BPCL
2A1102B
2A3102C
Request of XRay emission Fluoro and RAD
BUS kV/20
3A760C
8 bits coded information of kV/20 value
CAG ON/OFF
3A3119A
Gain automatic control switching
CAPA PREPO
trol)
3A1935C
Prepositioning of converter capacitors (C3/C4 discharge con-
Consigne mAs
3A778E
Analog signal of mAs reference for RAD exposure

(mAs integration).
Consigne mA SC
3A978B
Analog signal of mA reference for the regulation of Fluoro

filament heating.
Consigne kV/20
3A997A
Analog signal of kV reference for kV regulation
CLIGN
3A12106A
Square wave signal for display lights and intermittent

operation of the buzzer.
CLOCK
3A1931E
Pulse generated by the control oscillator of the mains

thyristors
DEM X
3A1228D
Signal of kV regulation obtained by comparison of

composite kV (actual kV and kV/20 reference)
DETECTION I
3A1936B
Detection of the presence of current through main thyristors.
ER
3A766B
ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY mode selection
FC01
3A976C
Minimum value of mA : 0,1 mA
FC0
3A976C
Minimum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 0,16 mAs
FCGR
3A976C
Maximum value of mAs (RAD mode) : 160 mAs
FCGR1
3A3114B
Upper collimator blades limit switch : RAD size
FCGR2
3A3114B
Lower collimator blades limit switch : RAD size
FCSC1
3A3114B
Upper collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size
FCSC2
3A3114C
Lower collimator blades limit switch : FLUORO size
9-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

FC40
3A991A
Minimum kV value (40 kV)
FC110
3A991A
Maximum kV value
FL
3A766C
FLUORO mode selection
Fmax
3A1931D
Maximum frequence operation of the converter. Not used
FS
31B
XRay request from foot switch
GR
3A766B
RAD mode selection
HLC
2A171A
High definition fluoro selectionHLC does not refer to Hi level

control operation above 5 or 10 R/min. In both Hi definition
and low dose operation, the entrance exposure rate remains
below 10R/min.
Hold kV
3A1201E
Latching of the kV regulation loop after T1 delay (delay of

automatism kV stabilization)
INT 4 CLQ
3A1228B
Exposure interruption after 4 VHV leakages
kV C0
3A757C
Counter locking when kV bus is at 0
kV 85%
3A1228C
Signal generated when kV reach 85% of selected kV value.
kV 120
3A1228C
Safety : stops the converter if kV value is 120 kV
kV/20 Auto
3A545D
kV reference in automatic Fluoro mode
kV composite
3A1223D
Actual kV value (VA + VC)
Mesure mA Sc
3A1220C
FLUORO mA measure (1 mA = 1V)
Mesure mA GR
3A1220C
RAD mA measure (10 mA = 1V)
OX
3A1931A
Control the XRAY emission bistable (through 3A1 PWB when

a memory is used)
OX.HLC
3A3119F
Hold of HLC selection during pulsed Fluoro mode operation.
PRE
3A1935A
Control of mA reference in RAD mode (delayed signal)
PRI
tors.
3A1940B
Signal present when current is detected in one of main thyris-
PRX
3A1224A
Signal present when XRay are emitted
PRX.CP
3A12106B
Synchronous signal (50 Hz) with XRay emission
RAD
3A1940A
RAD mode selection signal
RP
3A2681A
Reduced power signal in RAD mode when unit is used with the
100, 108 or 120V mains
RX req.
3A1228C
Not used
Sa Th2
MOD 616E
XRay head temperature detection (68[C)Switch ON thermal

overload display
SC
3A1763A
Signal (SC or SC) generated by the RAD or RAD selection.
SEC BELLOW
(6Sa1)
MOD 6 16E
Safety of XRay head temperature

Bellow compensation switch : inhibition of exposure
SEXP
3A1935B
Control signal of main thyristors oscillator
9-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SP
3A766B
PULSED FLUORO mode selection
STOP mAs
3A2685D
RAD exposure end signal (elapsed mAs = selected mAs)
SX
3A1933A
XRay emission safety (BPCL + PWB presence)
SYX SC
3A1935A
Control signal of heating in FLUORO.

Latch Fluoro mA reference.
SYX GR
3A1935B
Control signal in RAD mode : not used
TROU CLQ
3A1228A
Momentary stop of the control oscillator of the main thyristor

when a VHV leakage occurs
Va
6A120C
Actual anodic volts value
Vc
6A120C
Actual cathodic volts value
Z(ZOOM)
3A3111E
ZOOM selection with II 22 cm (2 fields)
0 logic from
0,16 to 5 mAs mAs
3A978C
mas integrator selection : low or High mAs

integrator
426
3A12103B
Warning signal of 426 XRay emission time
457
3A12106B
Stop signal of XRay emission after 4 57 of Fluoro sequence
12V CI
15F18F
Detection of the PWB presence Permit the operation of main

thyristors
9-14
GE Medical Systems

Source: SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1, Page 5.7/5.8(blank)
REV 1
INTERFACE DSM 3A1 828988 G 035

ACP
201C
Anode Cooling Pause : generate a delay between exposures in

ER mode selection if SW602.B is in ON position
HYST
45C
not used
MCH
202B
Mode change : signal generated during the switching of an

operating mode to an other
ON REST + MCH
203B
Reset of the monostable when the unit is switching ON or

during an operating mode switching
OX*
204C
RX emission order generated through the adaptation operating

logic network
OX* R1
but
204D
Signal delayed according to the rising edge of the OX* signal

synchronous with the falling edge of OX*
OX* R2
204D
Signal synchronous with the rising edge of the OX* signal but
delayed according to the falling edge of OX*
RAZ ROTATION
206D
Rotation to the start position of the monitor rotation coils

when mode A/B is selected in the memory
SN
203F
NORMAL FLUORO MODE selection generated by default of

other mode selections
STOP DSM
208D
Signal generated by X PERM from the memory
114F
Signal generated during the field change with a 22 cm (9)

imager
T1 to T5
Control delays of RX emission sequence in the different

operating mode
T6
202A
Control of RX pulses emission in PULSED FLUORO mode.
X PERM
207E
Signal from memo unit : availability of the memory or end

of the image processing
9-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
666

USE OF THE SCHEMATICS

The schematics are in flow chart form.
As much as possible, the relation between control and action has been respected.
Each signal is indexed and addressed in the schematics.
Example : SEXP signal
The SEXP signal is generated on PWB 3A19 commande SCR2 output a18 schematic
reference 35B.
The signal is used on PWB
3A12 input a14

3A5 input b8
3A3 input a17
The index of the signal is marked in front of the use terminal.

3A12.a14 21B
In front of 3A12.a14 terminal, SEXP signal has the index of the terminal where the signal is
generated : 3A19.a1835B
The wiring between terminal is respected and so permits an easier localization of
interconnection default.
9-16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

67
9-17
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
671

GENERAL POWER SUPPLY (DIAGRAM 110)
The general power supply comprises the transformers 9TR1 and

5TR1 which supply the voltage needed by the various subassemblies of the HF mobile unit.
The secundary winding 1920 supply the imager system

(module 8)
POWER ON SEQUENCE
9TR1 TRANSFORMER (Module 9 monitor cart)
The system is switched ON by pressing 9Sm1.
The primary winding of 9TR1 is supplied by the mains through

9Sm1 and 9K1 contacts.
When 9Sm1 is depressed, 9TR1 transformer is supply through

resistor 9R1 (current limiter).
The primary winding has 2 winding with adaptation taps for mains
of 100, 108, 120, 200, 208, 220, 228 and 240V.
9K1 relay is energised through 9F2 fuse, safety plug bridge

9PL13233, delay system (M) and 9F1 fuse.
The secundary windings supply the voltages :
After the delay, 9K1 switch ON and supply 9TR1 through its contacts.
275 V for the inverter
SWITCH OFF SEQUENCE
220V for peripheral unit : monitors, memory, reprograph
When one of the stop pushbutton is actuated on the control console

(2A1.Sm4 or 2A3.Sm21116 DE) relais 9A1.K3 is energized.
5TR1 TRANSFORMER (module 5 mobile unit)

Its contact apply a 110V on the auxiliary coil of 9Sm1.
9Sm1 switches OFF
5TR1 primary winding is supplied by 9TR1 through the 9F4 fuse

The secundary winding 67 supplies the +/ 12V and + 5V regulated power supply.
If 9PL1 plug is removed, 9K1 relais is deenergized.
The secundary winding 1617 supply filament heating circuit..
If the plug 9PL1 is removed , 9K1 relay is deenergised.
The secundary winding 3123 supply Carm up/down motion

circuit.
The contact 2122 (3D) of 9K1 supplies 9A4K5. The contact of

9A4.K5 apply 110V on the auxiliary coil of 9Sm1 which opens.
CONNECTOR SAFETY.
9-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
672

OPERATION OF INVERTER (DIAGRAM 1120)
THEORY
In alternate operation, capacitors C1 and C2 are in parallel, as they
have a common terminal and the two other terminals are separated
by a DC voltage Va.
For a description of operation, (see figure 2), where C is equal to
the sum of C1 and C2.
Suppose at the start that capacitance C has a charge voltage Va (0 V
at terminal 2 and Va at terminal 1) and capacitance CF has a charge
voltage Vz, which must respect 0 < Vz < Va/2.
The value of CF will be very high in relation to C.
Suppose that the HV transformer ratio is 1 and that Va = 500 V and
Vz = 100 V.
At t0, CR1 is made to conduct; capacitor C therefore discharges
through the HV transformer primary, coil L2 and CR1.
Capacitor CF voltage remains almost constant throughout conductance of CR1.
If the power supplied to the secondary is less than that absorbed by

charge RL, the voltage at CF terminals decrements.
To respect the operating condition 0 < Vz < Va/2, the only way to
change the HV is to change the inverter control pulse rate frequency.
REALISATION :
Capacitance C will be selected so that the inverter can supply its
nominal power under any circumstances.
However, this has a disadvantage: at low consumption levels, inverter control frequency is low, which generates high residual HV
ripple.
To get around this, two groups of capacitances are used, selected as
function of the charge.
The polarity of this voltage is therefore positive at terminal 1 and

negative at terminal 2.
Capacitor discharge is consinusoidal and corresponds to equation
Vc = Vz + (Va Vz) cos t/LC.
At t1 (figure 3), capacitor voltage tends to invert, diode CR4 conducts and keeps voltage from reaching the capacitor terminals.
Through conductance of CR4, voltage Vz is applied directly to the
terminals of coil L2, and since Vz is practically constant, current
decrement in CR1 will be linear. At t2, current I stops and CR1
locks.
A sufficient period must elapse (around 20 sec) before CR2 can
be made to conduct, if HV adjustment so requires.
A cycle identical may then start again with CR2, L1 and CR3.
As current I crosses the HV transformer primary, it develops a secondary voltage. Since the rectifier bridge also conducts, it will
allow the current to charge capacitor CF.
At low charge, group 4C2 and 4C3 of 2 x 2 F is always selected.

If the charge increments, a second group, 4C1 and 4C4 (2 x 5 F),
selected by 4CR4, is added to the first. These two groups offer the
choice between 4 F and 14 F.
In practice, capacitance C is replaced by two capacitances C1 and
C2, enabling better adjustment of Va supply consumption (figure1).
Control of capacitance selection thyristor 4CR4 is always in synchronism with 4CR1.
Thyristor CR7 makes it possible to preset capacitances at energization.
A core is used to detect current crossing thyristors 4CR1 and 4CR6
(PRI).
This data is taken into account by SCR control PWB 3A19, which
synchronizes triggering of 4CR4, CR7, 4CR1 and 4CR6.
In particular, 4CR1 and 4CR6 must not conduct simultaneously.
The inverter is supplied by a DC voltage, approx. 380 V.
This DC voltage is filtered by capacitances 4C5.
The energy supplied at each cycle of HV capacitor CF is therefore
Vz.Idt
t2
equal to :
CAUTION :
t0
i. e. 1/2 C. Va2
Lamp 4DS1 comes on when the inverter is energized.
If the modulator is deenergized, lamp 4DS1 remains on while the
capacitances discharge into resistor1R3, indicating that the voltage
at the terminals of these capacitances is still dangerously high.
The power supplied to the secondary is therefore equal to :

1/2 C.Va.f (f is the pulse rate frequency)
9-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
673

OPERATION OF THE XRAY HEAD (DIAGRAM 1120)
PRESENTATION
KILOVOLT MEASUREMENT
Anode and cathode kilovolt measurement (VA and VC) is made by
a largeratio divider bridge approx. 1/1000) whose high value resistor is located in the Xray head (special 2 x 100 megaohm resistor) and whose low value resistor is located on PWB 6A1. This
low value resistor is in fact made up of fixed resistors (R/18 and
R17) and adjustable resistors (R12 to R15).
Capacitances C19 and C11 filter voltages VA and VC whereas
capacitances C28 and C27, parallel coupled to adjustable capacitances C9 and C16, carry out frequency compensation.
The Xray head consists mainly of the following elements:

. a VHV transformer with its filter and a rectifier circuit
. a filament heating transformer,
. an Xray tube,
. two heat switches,
. overvoltage protection spark gaps.
These components are inside the XRay head and are lubricated in
an oil bath.
The assembly also includes divider circuit 6A1 outside the head.
NOTE:
Potentiometers and adjustable capacitors of 6A1 PWB are factory
adjusted according the XRay head.
VHV TRANSFORMER OPERATION :

The VHV transformer primary is supplied by the inverter (mod 4).
It has two secondary windings, one of which supplies the Xray
tube anode and other the Xray tube cathode.
The two secondaries are each connected to a voltage doubler comprising 2 diodes (CR1 and CR2 for the first, CR3 and CR4 for the
second) and two 2500 pF capacitances.
The cathode of CR1 is connected to the Xray tube anode and the
anode of CR4 is connected to the Xray tube cathode.
The anode of CR2 and the cathode of CR3 are connected by a low
value resistor (R4 and R5) used to measure anode/cathode current.
As the CR3 cathode is connected to the ground, its potential is
approximately 0 V, and it may be assumed that the anode and cathode voltages are opposed.
ANODE / CATHODE CURRENT MEASUREMENT

This measure is performed by measuring the voltage across a resistor.
The current in RAD mode is more important than in FLUORO
mode, so current measure in RAD mode is performed across a low
value R5 resistor and in FLUORO mode accross R4 + R5 resistors
in order to have the same level of measure.
Jumper between Tb24.1 and Tb24.2 permits the connection of a
mA, mAs meter for maintenance operation.
The measures VA, VC, mASc et mAGR are used on 3A12 kV/mA
PWB.
SAFETY
HEATING :
The filament heating transformer primary is supplied by the heating
power PWB 5A1.
It has a secondary winding with a middle point.
The entire winding supplies the radiography filament (1,8) through
2 diodes, when pulses are positive.
The lower part of the winding supplies the fluoroscopy filament
(0.5) through one diode, when pulses are negative.
The radiography or fluoroscopy filament is therefore selected by
the filament heating transformer power supply as a function of
pulse polarity.
The transformer primary is highly isolated from its secondary because its secondary is brought to the negative potential of the X
ray tube cathode.
Spark gaps are provided in the XRay head in order to short circuit
the VHV if 6A1.PWB (Diviseur) is disconnected or if a default of
ground continuity appears.
Damages of VHV propagation are so avoided if connexion failure
or error of maintenance operation occurs.
The 6Sa1 switch opens its contact when temperature rises up to 70o
C.
SEC BELLOW signal is connected to 3A19 PWB (SCRcontrol)
and stops the inverter operation.
The 6SaTh2 Thermal switch opens its contact when temperature of
the XRay head rises up to 50o C.
The signal TH switch ON the temperature displays on the control
console through 3A7 AD/kV PWB and switches over the FLUORO 500W to FLUORO 154 W on 3A9 PWB consigne kV/mA
(except in E.R. mode).
9-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
674
OPERATION OF THE kV/mA PWB 3A12 (DIAGRAM 2130)
This board has the following main functions :

. HV regulation (very high voltage),
. blow safety,
. differential/common mode conversion of mASc and
mAGr measurement values,
. low voltage divider compensation,
. 05 min. timer.
. This changes the D kV which will be transmitted to the memo
20
ry between two thyristor conductions.

OPERATING SAFETY:
Circuit OP114. A permanently compares the output of OP114 B
with the kV reference.
20
VHV REGULATION
In normal operation, the output of amplifier OP114.B must always
When selecting the KV data, Op 114.8 (B) supplies a voltage refeto the input of compararence kV *
kV
20
+ (consigne
20
* 1) x1.1
tor Op 122.
be less than the kV reference.
20
If a fault in the regulation circuit causes the opposite to occur comparator OP114.A flips and blocks OP114 B, i.e. DEM X.
The composite KV signal is generated by the measurement of Vc/

Va (cathode/anode) at the input of Op 180.
The output in common mode of the Op 180 is linked to potentiometer R216, adjusted by the latter (KV regulation), is transmitted to
the input of Op 122.
LEAKAGE SAFETY :
. The signal kV * and KV composite being different, the signal
Counter G31 counts to 4 VHV leakages and then sends the INT
4CLQ signal, used to shutdown the inverter by SCR PWB 3A19.
20
DEM X permits the oscillator to operate.
Diode CR4 also comes on, showing the technician the cause of
inverter shutdown.
. When the HV increases to reach kV * = KV omposite, the Op
20
122 switches and the signal DEM X generated is transmitted to the
card 3A19 SCR to request the first oscillator operation cycle stop.
. Comparator Op 102 compares the KV composite and the
DIFFERENTIAL/COMMON MODE CONVERSION OF

mASC AND mAGR MEASUREMENTS
This conversion is performed by OP192 for the mASc measurement and by OP203 fo the mAGr measurement. Diodes mounted
in headtotail configuration at the input of these amplifiers protect
them against overvoltage. These two measurement signals are sent
to PWB 3A26 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENT (HEATING).
actual kV
20
A KV therefore appears at the output of the Op 102.
This is transmitted to the memory Op 97 when signal PRI is active
and after the time constant 1.1 x R81 x C82 c.a.d. 13 s after a
current thyristor stops.
COMPENSATION OF DIVIDERS IN FLUOROSCOPY

MODE :
. The D kV then supplements the kV * , which results in the refe-
20
20
The output of OP180 is input to OP46, which detects a sudden

VHV variation. The output of OP46 then triggers monostable G32.
The output of G32 sends signal TROU CLQ used by the hysteresis safety of SCR PWB 3A19 and SCR control.
rence at the input to Op 122 being increased.

There is disequilibrium and the signal DEM X disappears, which
authorises the oscillator to function until the new equality KV com-
This is achievied out by the coupling carried out by R232 between

the mASc measurement and the output of OP180 to make up the
COMPOSITE kV signal.
posite = kV * ) D kV
GENERATION OF 85% KV AND 120 KV SIGNALS :
. Each reduction in KV composite due to consumption of the tube

appears on the memory C 134 at the input to Op 102.
85% is generated by comparing COMPOSITE kV with 85% of the

value of the kV/20 reference (OP160).
120 kV is obtained by comparing the COMPOSITE kV to a 6 V
reference (OP313 / OP314).
20
20
9-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
675

OPERATION OF SCR CONTROL PWB 3A19 (DIAGRAM 3135, 3640)
This PWB performs the following functions :

. preset of inverter capacitance 4C3,
. generation and synchronization of the control pulses of main
thyristors 4CR6 and 4CR1,
. selection of auxiliary condensators,
. control the status of the 12 V safety PWB,
. control the stop signals (temperature, VHV leakages, mAs refe
rence reached),
. current detection in main thyristors 4CR1 and 4CR6,
. generation of SEXP, PRE, SYX GR and SYX SC commands
for regulation PWBs 3A5, 3A12 and3A26,
. generation of clock (CLOCK) of the inverter,
. generation of signal fmax (not used),
. hysteresis safety of HV transformer.
SELECTION OF AUXILIARY CAPACITORS (4C1 AND

4C4) :
When a radiography is requested, signal GR from PWB 3A7 is
converted into signal RAD which is then applied to amplifier
(Q300) and isolating transformer TR313 of the trigger of inverter
thyristor 4CR4.
PWB 12V SAFETY
A +12 V continuity line crosses the PWBs in the mobile system,
thus checking the voltage and making sure that the PWBs are properly plugged in. The feedback from this line is input into a safety
circuit (Q189,Q178) where it is checked. If the feedback is incorrect, a lock command is sent to the all driver amplifiers of the isolating transformers (TR248TR313TR269TR291).
The lock command of the drivers operates also if :
SX signal is not present : signal generated by BPCL or FS
POWER SUPPLY (+12V) voltage is lower than 6,2V
(Q185D180)
PRESET OF INVERTER CAPACITOR 4C3 :

Logic circuit OX (G116A) generates command OX using the
following signals:
. BPCI, generated by the Xray PB on the control console,
. FS, generated by the footswitch,
. RAD, generated by GR on PWB 3A7 when radiography
mode
is selected.
Command OX is sent to memory interface PWB 3A1 (in memory
option configuration) if switch S76.A is opened.
If this is the case, command OX returns via PWB 3A1 to command
bistable (G114G117B).
The bistable flips and sends a preset command via amplifier
(Q235) and isolating transformer (TR248), provided that the following conditions exist:
120 kV =1,
INT 4CLQ = 1,
STOP mAs =_ 1,
SEC BELLOW = 1.
CONTROL OF THE STOP SIGNALS

The signals should be as follows:
. SEC BELLOW = 1 (if the Xray housing temperature is less than
70o C),
. STOP mAs = 1 (switches to 0 when the mAs reference on the
control console is reached.
. INT 4CLQ = 1 (switches to 0 when four successive VHV leakage
have been detected by PWB 3A12),
. 120 kV = 1 (switches to 0 if a high voltage of 120 kV is detected
by PWB 3A12).
If any of these signals changes value, bistable 114AG117B flips
and inverts the state of signal SEXP, which switches to 0, thereby
inhibiting oscillator G128.
When signal SEXP switches to 0 bistable G119B is also locked,
which means that flipflop G121.A cannot be validated. A second
safety device is thus provided.
GENERATION OF SEXP, PRE, SYX GR AND SYX SC
COMMANDS :
4CR6 AND 4CR1 SCR CONTROL
These signals are generated by a selection logic made up of

G114115 :
. SEXP is used by PWBs 3A5, 3A12 and 3A19, delayed accor
ding to PRE and SYC.GR
. PRE switches to 0 when G114.AG117.B bistable flips.
PRE is used by PWB 3A26 to valide the transfer of the
RAD current regulation differential.
. SYX SC is used by PWB 3A26 to validate the transfer of the
Fluoro current regulation differential,
. SYX GR (not used).
Bistable (G119B120B) enables flipflop G68 when signal SEXP

switches to 1.
G121A output Q is applied to amplifier (Q278) followed by isolating transformer (TR291) which controls the trigger of thyristor
4CR1. G121A complementary output Q controls the trigger of
second thyristor 4CR6 in the same way. herefore, 4CR1 and 4CR6
cannot operate simultaneously. If the signals are as follows, oscillator G128 operates:
DEMX = 0,
PRI = 1,
TROUCLQ = 1,
SEXP = 1.
GENERATION OF CLOCK :
The output signal of G128 constitutes the basic clock used in the
synchronization of inverter operation, i.e. thyristors 4CR1, 4CR6
and the voltage regulation carried out by PWB 3A12.
9-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERATION OF SIGNAL FMAX :
RAD AND RAD SIGNALS
not used
RAD and RAD signals are generated from GR signal and set the
different circuits in RAD mode.
When the kV/mA PWB 3A12 regulates the high voltage, if the
displayed reference is not reached, signal DEMX is generated and
charges capacitance C209. If DEMX remains active too long
(which means that the inverter cannot reach the reference on display), capacitance C209 is sufficiently charged to generate fmax.
CURRENT DETECTION IN MAIN THYRISTORS 4CR1

AND 4CR6
HYSTERESIS SAFETY OF HV TRANSFORMER

The thyristor current is detected by core 4TR1, located behind the
inverter.
The current is rectified by D29 and amplified by A135 then the
detection threshold is adjusted by R123.
The output signal of lowpass filter A 137(protection against triggering by interference) goes to make up signal PRI which is used
by the regulation circuit of kV/mA PWB 3A12 and to validate
bistable.
If a VHV leakage occurs during thyristor 4CR1 is being validated,

data TROU CLQ which is generated by kV/mA PWB 3A12, validates the second monostable in circuit G155B.
Thyristor 4CR6 can then restart during a short time. When TROU
CLQ disappears, inverter cycle can be restarted with thyristor
4CR1, i.e. with right direction of HV transformer hysteresis.
This safety protects HV transformer against overcurrent generated
by hysteresis.
9-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
676

OPERATION OF TIMER PWB 3A5 (MINUTERIE) (DIAGRAM 4150)
TIMER DISPLAY
ABC HYSTERESIS OR AUTO KV/20 REFERENCE

. The purpose of this ABC hysteresis is to make an AUTO kV refe-
20
The reference clock signal PRX CP is supplied by kV/mA PWB

3A12.
The 50 Hz frequency is at first divided by 50 (counters G143 and
G144), which gives a 1 Hz signal, input to 4bit counter G158.
The output of counter G158 is decoded by G184 to supply the
7segments display DS15. This is how seconds are displayed.
rence by using the RX control signal output from the TV camera in

order to use the correct kV to obtain an optimum TV image.
. The RX control signal output from the TV camera is connected to
the + input of A82 comparator. The input of A82 is connected
to potentiometer R65 (video image reference).
After 10 seconds, G158 sends a pulse to G159, counting tenths of

seconds. G159 counts to 6 (corresponding to 1 minute) and sends
a pulse to G160, which totalizes minutes.
After 10 minutes, G161 receives a pulse from G160, and totalizes
tens of minutes.
Zero reset is by pressing key Sm19 of the mobile system control
console. This generates an active signal to the RESET inputs of the
counters.
9-24
. The output of A82, i.e. RX is connected to A74B through R66

potentiometer (system gain) and after to an integrator circuit A73,
C72 and R60.
. A74.B does not permit the RX to pass unless it greater or lower
than a threshold determined by the hysteresis R67. A121 BC
. When RX control signal is not present, the system is calculated to
provide a kV reference equal to 2V (= 40 kV reference).
20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
677

OPERATION OF 3A7 PWB AD/KV (DIAGRAM 5160)
The main purpose of this board is to generate the kV (kilovolt)

reference in automatic or manual mode.
Key Sm49 (hand symbol) on the control console is used to select
operating mode.
AUTOMATIC FLUOROSCOPY MODE
MANUAL FLUOROSCOPY MODE

Pressing key Sm31 (+kV) or Sm32 (kV) increments or decrements counters G48 and G31. These counters, as well as latch
circuit G69, are selected in fluoroscopy mode (SC = 0).
The 8bit data sent by G69 is transmitted on the kV bus to the kV/
mA reference PWB 3A9.
The kV/mA reference PWB 3A9 compares the kV data transmitted
on the kV bus with min. and max. stops (40 kV and 110 kV).
If one of these stops has been reached, the data FC40 or FC110 is
sent to the logic of AD/kV PWB 3A7. This then inhibits incrementation or decrementation of counters to prevent the kV value
going below 40 kV or above 110 kV.
The clock supplying the counters is obtained by two NAND gate
oscillator circuits. The first, frequency 3 Hz, enables slow reference incrementation as soon as it is commanded.
After approximately 2 seconds, a second oscillator, frequency 30
Hz, takes over and thus accelerates incrementation.
9-25
Pressing key Sm49 activates automatic mode and deactivates keys

Sm31 and Sm32 (+kV and kV).
The kV reference is now generated by the timer PWB 3A5 using
the TV camera reception Xray signal.
This analog reference (called kV/20) is converted to digital form by
G90. The 8bit data thus obtained is compared by two 4bit binary comparators, G108 and G126, with the data on the kV bus.
The resulting comparison signal (A > B or A < B) increments or
decrements counters G48 and G31 until the reference and the value
on the bus are equal.
OPERATION IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE

Pressing keys Sm31 and Sm32 (+kV and kV) increments or decrements counters G138 and G125. These counters, as well as
latch circuit G97, are selected in radiography mode (SC = 0).
As regards the 40 kV and 110 kV stops and the reference incrementation speed (3 Hz and 30 Hz), operation is identical to manual
fluoroscopy mode.
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
678

OPERATION OF 3A7 PWB AD/kV (DIAGRAM 6170)
MODE OF OPERATION SELECTION
Output counter supplies LED corresponding to the pressed BP

through G 139 (A to F) and provides selection informations though
G 137 (A to F) to the unit.
The basic circuit providing this operation is G150 : counter CMOS

4017B.
When power is switching ON, the RC network (C119R117) hold
counter outputs in Reset state : output 0 (pin 3) to 1 logic other
outputs to 0 (outputs 1 to 9).
This counter position corresponds to FLUORO mode selection.
The 300 kHz clock needed for G150 to operate is taken from ADC
converter G90 on the same board.
The following signals are output from the board :
. ER, SP to the memory interface board if present,
. BP mA(s) UP, BP mA(s) DOWN, to the kV/mA reference PWB
3A9,
. GR to the SCR control PWB 3A19.
Pin 13 of G150 (CLOCK INHIBIT) is held to 1 logic through R80

and inhibits the counting sequence.
When a PB selection mode is pressed, logic state of G150 output
(0V) is applied through the PB on pin 13 of the counter (CLOCK
INHIBIT).
This 0V logic state permits the counting sequence : clock pulses on
pin 14 generates counter evolution until the output corresponding
to the pressed BP rises to 1 logic state : clock INHIBITS input rises
to 1 and so inhibits count : the counter is locked on this position
until an other PB is pressed.
1.2 Hz and 12 Hz clock (Clock 1 Clock 2)

These two clocks are for the operation of the kV/mA reference
PWB 3A9. They allow mA and mAs references to be incremented
at two different speeds.
9-26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
679

OPERATION OF THE PWB 3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA (DIAGRAM 7180)
HIGH DOSE FLUORO MODE SELECTION (HLC)
The PB mA(s) UP or BPmA(s) DOWN informations, elaborated

on PWB 3A7 AD/kV, permits operation of the counters through
G128.CD and G128.AB bistables and control logic of speed
(CLOCK signal).
PB Sm35 permits the HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO mode selection.

The validation and the locking of the mode selection is performed
by the OX.HLC signal : 0X.HLC is to 1 logic all the time an exposure is required (BPCl or FS depressed).
The output of G90G89 is converted in analog signal to make up

the FLUORO mA reference.
When PB Sm35 is depressed, 1 logic is present on pin 6 of G122.A

(set).
G122.A pin 1 flips to 1 : switching ON of PB Sm35 light and selection of the opening reference of the camera iris.
The TH signal on G130D.12 pin cancel HIGH DEFINITION
FLUORO mode when the thermal switch of the XRay head
opens.
In ER Mode (ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY) selection the
HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO Mode is automatically selected
through G130B.6.
mAs REFERENCE GENERATION

The mAs UP data from 3A7 PWB AD/kV causes incrementation
(or decrementation) of 4 bits counter G135 and G134.
The output of these counters addresses an EPROM (G26) which
sends a digital value, varying from 0,16 to 160 in 33 steps.
This digital reference is converted in analog form by G133 to make
up the mAs reference varying from 0,16 mAs to 160 mAs used in
the 3A26 PWB chauffage Filament (Filament heating).
The output of G135 and G134 is also connected to G120 and G121
EPROM through G119.
The HLC information is also connected to G66 and G65 EPROM

in order to select the correct kV/mA ratio curve.
G121 provides :
FLUORO MA REFERENCE GENERATION
information for the displays

logic signal for the selection of high or low value integrator
3 signals min or max values
AUTOMATIC MODE
The kV bus addresses the memory G66(EPROM) which sends on
its data bus, an optimal mA value for each kV value.
FC01 : FLUORO minimum mA

value 0,1 mA
FCO : RAD mAs minimum
value 0,16 mAs
FCGR : RAD mAs maximum
value 160 mAs
The data mA value according to kV value depends of mode selection and safety of the unit :
AUTO FLUORO mode
HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO mode
ER mode (Electronic Radiography)
Thermal safety of the XRay head not actuated (TH)
FLUORO RANGE OPERATION AND LIMITATION

The G65 EPROM has 4 data sections access of which depends of
selected operation mode and thermal safety (TH*).
The AUTO signal (1 logic) is present on Preset input (1) of G90

and G89 : G90 and G89 are transparent and data of G66 are converted to analog form by G99 (DAC) to make up the FLUORO
mA reference.
FLUORO 154W limitation

HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC) 500W limitation
ELECTRON RADIOGRAPHY (ER) 500W limitation
MANUAL MODE
TH*=1 = thermal safety : reduced power operation.
When mode operation is switched from AUTO mode to MANUAL
mode, the last mA value according to kV value is memorised in
G90 and G89 counter : preset input from 1 to 0 logic state.
Count up or count down operation is selected by the mA(s) UP
signal :
1 logic count UP
0 logic count DOWN
The data corresponding to this rate operation are compared by G87,

G88 with mA bus (G90G89 outputs counters).
If the two values are equal, counting UP sequence is inhibited and
automatic counting DOWN sequence is automatically operated if
mA bus is upper than the limitation.
9-27
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6710 OPERATION OF FILAMENT 4 HEATING PWB 3A26 (DIAGRAM 8185)

This PWB performs the following functions:
. current regulation in FLUORO mode,
. current regulation in RADIOGRAPHY mode,
. generation of STOP mAs command when the mAs reference is
reached,
. safety in radiography mode 7 an 10 secondes
added to the above difference, thereby providing the mA radiography reference at output A214.
GENERATION OF STOP mAs SIGNAL
CURRENT REGULATION IN FLUORO MODE :

The mA Fluoro measurement sent from PWB 3A12 and the mA
Fluoro reference sent from PWB 3A9 are compared by A220.
The Fluoro rate can be adjusted using R9.
The difference between the reference and the measurement passes
from the output of A220 through the lowpass filter comprising
A222 before transmission to the inverter input of A214 by electronic switch Q287.B when signal kV 85% is present.
If command SYX SC sent by SCR PWB 3A19 switches to 0, the
electronic switch Q287.B conducts.
Adjustable potentiometers R3 and R4 are also connected to inverter
output of A214. These potentiometers used to adjust the current
during the preheat phase, i.e. when no reference is present, in
RAD or FLUORO mode.
CURRENT REGULATION IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE
Integrator A138 calculates mA x s.

Because the mAs reference may vary greatly (0.16 to 160), the
integrator features two integration speeds.
PWB 3A9 splits the mAs reference variation range into two sub
ranges: 0.16 mAs to 5 mAs and 6 mAs to 160 mAs.
The integrator selected by 0 (on a25 connector PWB) comprises
highvalue R6 (100 K) and A138. The integrator selected by 1
comprises lowvalue R5 (5 K) and A138.
A180 compares the integrator output with the mAs reference supplied by PWB 3A9. When the values are equal, the STOP mAs
signal switches to 0 and prevents SCR PWB 3A19 from sending
pulses to the thyristor triggers, i.e. stops the inverter.
RAD SAFETY : 7 AND 10 SECONDS
Two safeties are provided in order to limit the exposure duration in
RAD mode.
The correct safety is selected by 3A3.S133.B : RP power reduction.
If power reduction is not selected, RP is 1 logic.
The capacitor C203 is charges through D248, R247 and potentiometer R7 (7 sec adjustment).
The RAD mA measurement sent by PWB 3A12 is added to the

mA Gr reference at the inverter input of A152.
The reference is selected by the electronic switch (Q108 to Q110)
which has been activated by the kV/mA reference PWB 3A9.
PWB 3A19 attributes an mA value to each of the six high voltage
ranges used.
This value is modified if RP switch 3A3.S133B is switched ON
(power reduction).
When signals PRE and kV 85% are present,the difference between
the reference and the measurement obtained at the output of A152
is transmitted to A214 by switch Q287
The difference in potential supplied by R4 (preheat adjustment) is
If power reduction is selected, RP is 0 logic.

The capacitor C203 is charged through D250, R249 and potentiometer R8 (10 sec. adjustment).
The signal PRE through G184.A starts the delay performed by
Q193 and Q194.
When the delay is elapsed, if the exposure is not completed, the
STOP mAs signal switches to 0 and inhibes Xray emission.
9-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6711 OPERATION OF FILAMENT 4 HEATING PWB 3A26 (DIAGRAM 8690)

FILAMENT HEATING CURRENT REGULATION
The A214 output transmits a reference to A237 for comparison
with the RMS current measured in the final stage of heating power
PWB 5A1, i.e. in the primary of the heating transformer in the
Xray head.
The Xray tube is heated by sending variously spaced pulses.
A237 inhibits the transmission of these pulses if the RMS current is
greater than the reference.
The pulse generator system comprises the following components:
. a 180 Hz oscillator, comprising G155, which sends a square
signal,
. a selection logic comprising G182 and G183. One of the two
output channels (fluoro or graphy) of the logic circuit is acti
vated depending of the state of signal RAD,
. two preamplifiers (Q162 and Q176),
. a pushpull amplifier comprising Q122 and Q129. The Q122
and Q129 output to R133 conveys pulses (negative or positive
depending on the selected mode) to two current limiters.
. two current limiters (Q125Q128 for RAD and Q121Q123 for
Fluoro).
If R25 and R26 detect overvoltage in the final stage of PWB
5A1, the current limiters ground the output of R133.
duct, thereby discharging C4 through the primary of the hea

ting transformer. The current in the primary of the transfor
mer is inverted.
The operating cycle is as follows:
. capacitance C3 is charged by a 175 V (approx.) dc supply,
. the positive segment of the control pulses cause transistor Q20
to conduct, thereby discharging C3 through the primary of the
heating transformer in the Xray head.
. the negative segment of the control pulses cause Q11 to con
duct, thereby discharging C4 through the primary of the hea
ting transformer. The current in the primary of the transfor
mer is inverted.
This assembly is designed to produce +175 V pulses at the terminals of the heating transformer primary (between A and B, A =
ground) in FLUORO mode, and 175 V pulses at the same terminals in RADIOGRAPHY mode.
The polarity is switched (thereby selecting the radiography or Fluoro filament in the Xray head) by varying the polarity and width of
the control pulses.
REALISATION
Capacitances C3 and C4 are located in module 5 of the mobile
system. The +175 V dc supply is generated by the secondary of
5TR1. Protection is provided by an 8 A fuse.
The control pulses are sent by FILAMENT HEATING PWB 3A26
and are transmitted by resistor R27.
The positive peaks are detected by CR25 and cause Q21 and Q20
to conduct.
The negative peaks are detected by CR24 and cause Q15 and Q11
to conduct.
Lowvalue resistors R7 and R8 (O.15 ohm), in the transmission
circuit of the output transistors, are used to retrieve the current data
in the final stage. This data is used as reverse feedback by the current limiters on PWB 3A26 and the control circuits of PWB 3A26.
The output transistors are protected against overvoltage by diodes
CR3 and CR14.
The system which measures the RMS current in the final stage of
PWB 5A1 comprises the following components:
. two circuits measuring the RMS current in the final stage.
These circuits comprise two reverse feedbacks (resistor R26
for FLUORO and resistor R25 for RAD).
One of these circuits is selected by electronic switch Q213B,
RAD = 0 in Fluoro mode.
The other circuit is selected by Q213A, RAD = 0 in RAD
mode,
. a low pass filter, comprising A282.
. a circuit which increases the value of input n to n, comprising
A278,
. an integrator comprising Q265 and A234.
The integrator receives a cyclic reset pulse at a frequency of
180 Hz.
Output A234, which represents the RMS current, is injected
into the inverter input of A237, which compares the measure
ment and the reference sent by A214.
SAFETY
Two safety network are provided in order to prevent abnormal
operation of tube heating during +/ 12V.power supply variation
(switching ON or OFF sequence of the unit or default on +/ 12V
V+
power supply)
OPERATING PRINCIPE
The operating cycle is as follows:
. capacitance C3 is charged by a 175 V (approx.) dc supply,
. the positive segment of the control pulses cause transistor Q20
to conduct, thereby discharging C3 through the primary of the
heating transformer in the Xray head.
. the negative segment of the control pulses cause Q11 to con
Q20
Control pulses
A
Heating transformer
primary
B
C3
C4
Q11
9-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6712 OPERATION OF THE CONSIGNE kV/mA PWB 3A9 (DIAGRAM 91100)
KV/20 REFERENCE GENERATION
G22 (BCD/decimal decoder) to make up the mA/radiography references for filament heating PWB 3A26.
These references correspond to the 6 mA values allocated to 6 voltage ranges.
FLUORO OR RAD MODE

The kV data generated by the ADkV PWB 3A7 on the kV bus is
converted to analog form by circuit G68. This voltage is called
kV/20 and is sent to the kV/mA regulation PWB 3A12.
Two groups, of two 4bit comparators each, monitor of the kV
reference on the bus:
DECODING AND DISPLAY KV/MA/MAS

The following circuits (EPROM) carry out decoding :
G138, G172 for kV display,
G137, G136 for mA and mAs display.
. one group (G18 and G19) has an input B wired for 40 kV.
The kV bus value is sent to input A. If A < B, comparator
output A < B is activated and used to generate the FC40 signal.
This signal then inhibits kV reference decrementation by
ADkV PWB 3A7,
kV DISPLAY
. the second group of comparators (G21 and G20) has an input B

wired for 110 V.
The kV bus value is sent to input A. If A > B, the comparator
output A > B is activated and is used to generate the FC110
signal.
This signal then inhibits kV reference incrementation by ADkV
board 3A7.
GENERATION OF RADIOGRAPHY MA REFERENCE
The kV bus addresses the kV value decoding memory G67
(EPROM). The four data bits of G67, 04 to 07, are decoded by
9-30
G67 transforms the kV bus into two BCD buses (for unit and tens
display).
G22 detects the 1 of the 100th and the kV ranges.
mA/mAs DISPLAY
The G120 output is divided into two BCD buses, which assume
mA or mAs reference display according to the mode selection :
FLUORO or RAD.
The decimal point (range of displayed value) and upper value of
the display are controlled by G121 output through transistors network according to the mode operation selected : FLUORO or
RAD.
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6713 EXPOSURE PB FLUORO TIMER (DIAGRAM 101110)
EXPOSURE PB
G35 to supply both the LED of key Sm14 (05 min.) and buzzer
DS 175.
The Xray request is performed by 2 PB : 2A1.Sm7 and

2A3.Sm26.
The PB leds are switched ON by 3A12.G74, 3A7.Q140, R154 and
R155.
G69 is triggered by PRX = 0, i.e. when Xrays are present.

PRX = 0 also triggers monostable G39, validating buzzer operation
after approximately 0.25s.
05 MIN. TIMER
The 2A1.Sm14 PB resets the timer.
The basic clock signal is supplied by the oscillator G69, adjustable
by R217 to 50 Hz. This signal comprising PRX.CP is directed to
the timer PWB 3A5 to display the timer value, and to the counter
assembly (G37, G36, G38) to increment up to the following values
:
RX LAMP
The lamp 9DS1 is lighting when XRays are generated in RAD or
FLUORO mode.
Signal PRX causes 3A12 Q625 conduction through G74 wich
energises 9A2 K3
9DS1 is supplied through the contact 13 of 9A2 K3.
. 457, which sends a stop signal to SCR PWB 3A19,

. 426, which validates a 2 Hz flash signal generated by oscillator
9-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6714 OPERATION OF THE COLLIMATOR 3A3 PWB (DIAGRAM 111115)
COLLIMATOR ROTATION
The control is ensured by PB 2A3.Sm13 (openingBP02) and

2A3.Sm14 (closing BPF2).
After according, these signals switch the pushpull stage output to
+ 12V or 12V if limit switch are not reached (FCSC2 in FLUORO and FCGR2 in RAD).
The collimator rotation is ensured by 7M1 motor.

A 12V voltage is applied on 7M1 motor by 2A3 Sm11 for CCW
rotation.
These 2 limit switches permit to identify the maximum opening

positions in FLUORO mode and RAD mode.
A + 12V voltage is applied on 7M1 motor by 2A3Sm12 for CW

rotation.
AUTOMATIC PREPOSITIONNING
SHUTTERS OPERATION
When unit is switched from RAD mode to FLUORO Mode, the

shutters of the collimator are automatically positionned in FLUORO mode in order to limit the XRay emission at the FLUORO
size (FCSC1 and FCSC2 actuated).
Two possibilities are available :

. Image intensifier 16 cm : 1 field
. Image intensifier 22 cm : 2 fields
On the other hand, when unit is switched from FLUORO mode to

RAD mode, the shutters opening must be manually controlled.
The LEDS of the 2 PB 2A3Sm14 and Sm16 are flashing and RAD
opening is completed when LEDS flashing is stopped. (FCGR1
and FCGR2 limit switches reached).
16 CM IMAGE INTENSIFIER : 1 FIELD

When unit is provided with a 16 cm I.I, the 7M5 motor is not present on the collimator ASM.
On the 3A3 PWB, the switches S501.A and B are open : Z information is to 1 logic (112.E G165.A pin 6 to 1 and pin 4 to 0)
22 CM IMAGE INTENSIFIER : 2 FIELDS
UPPER SHUTTERS CONTROL
When unit is provided with a 22 cm I.I, an additional function is

available on the control console : ZOOM function PB 2A3.Sm7.
The upper shutters are opaque and are moved by 7M3 motor.
This function is selected with the 3A3.S501A and B on PWB 3A3.
Closing and opening movements are controled by reversing motor

power supply polarity (Q218 = +12V and Q211 : 12V)
Opening and closing shutters sequence are identical with the II 16

cm operation.
The control is ensured by PB 2A3 Sm15 (closing BPF1) and

2A3.Sm16 (opening BPO1).
After decoding, these signals switch the push pull stage output to +
12V or 12V, if the following conditions are present :
. limit switches not reached FCSC1(FLUORO) and FCGR1 (RAD)
. Controls compatible with operating mode selection (FLUORO or
RAD).
When ZOOM function is not selected, Z signal is 0.

Z = 0 changes the limit switches selection in the logic control of the
shutters.
The maximum opening depends of FCGR1 and FCGR2 instead of
FCSC1 and FCSC2 (actuated from FLUORO position to RAD
position).
When ZOOM function is selected, Z signal is 1 Logic and the shutters close automatically until limit switches FCSC1 and FCSC2 are
reached (ZOOM size).
The 2 limit switches permit to identify the maximum opening positions in FLUORO mode (FCSC1) and RAD mode (FCGR1).
LOWER SHUTTERS CONTROL
AUTOMATIC PREPOSITIONNING
The lower shutters are semitransparent shutters.
The opening and closing movements are controlled by 7M2 motor
.
BP LEDS flashing and prepositionning sequence are identical with

16 cm I.I sequence.
9-32
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

XRAY BEAM LIMITATION
FLUORO MODE
16 cm imager
RAD = 0 and RAD = 1 informations control the 7M4 motor : 16
cm field limitation is positionned and limits the XRay beam to the
imager size.
Motor is always supplied in order to maintain the limitation device
in place.
Two limitations are provided :

16 cm controled by 7M4
22 cm controled by 7M5
When unit is mounted with a 16 cm II, only the 16 cm limitation is
present on the collimator.
22 cm imager
RAD = 0 and RAD = 1 informations control the 7M4 motor : 22
cm limitation is positionned and limits the Xray beam to the imager size.
Motor is always supplied in order to maintain the limitation device
in place.
RAD MODE
16 cm or 22 cm imager
ZOOM selection : ZOOM selection controls the positionning of the

16 cm limitation with 7M5
RAD = 1 and RAD = 0 informations, after decoding, control the

motion out the field of the XRay beam limitation device : motors
are always supplied in order to maintain the limitation in place.
9-33
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6715 OPERATION OF THE COLLIMATOR PWB 3A3 (DIAGRAM 116120)

AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (CAG ON/OFF)
ZOOM FUNCTION (22 CM IMAGER)
The signal FC110 controls the CAG ON/OFF sequence in the camera.
When the ZOOM Function is selected (PB 2A3.Sm17111E) a Z1

signal is generated and select in the camera the ZOOM mode
(mode 1) through 3A3Q148.
The CAG function operates in AUTOMATIC FLUORO mode and

in ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY only during the XRay emission (SEXP = 1) and if maximum kV value limit (FC110=0) is
reached.
SWITCHING OFF SEQUENCE
The delay, generated by R239, C235, inhibits CAG operation at the

beginning of the VHV regulation.
The switch S133.A locks camera operation in AGC mode.
When the PB 2A3.Sm21 or 2A1.Sm4 is depressed, 1 logic signal is

applied on Q152 base.
Q152 energizes 9A1.K3 (2C)
9A1K3 contact applies 110V on 9Sm1 auxiliary coil : the unit
switches OFF
REDUCED POWER SELECTION
GO TO BLACK VIDEO OPERATION
When unit is used on a mains voltage of 100, 108 or 120V (USA)

it is necessary to reduce the power : this operation is controlled by
A3.S133.B
The 3A3.S133.D permits a blanking of video signal of the camera

without XRay emission (SYX = 1).
OX.HLC
When unit operates in FLUORO and HIGHT DEFINITION (HLC)
mode the OX signal (from 3A19.a16) is validated by SYX Sc and
RAD and generates the 0X.HLC signal.
The SYX SC signal holds the HLC selection during the XRay
pulses in PULSED FLUORO mode.
BEAM MAX CONTROL

Without Xray emission, the camera is in reduced beam mode.
The 3A3.S133.C permits the selection of BEAM MAX during
XRay emission (SYX SC = 0).
During RAD mode operation, OX HLC is hold to 0 logic.
9-34
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6716 CARM UP/DOWN MOTION (DIAGRAM 121130)

COLUMN MOTORISATION
The column motorisation is performed by a DC motor 1M1.
A motion request energises the relay K6 through D7 or D4 diode

and supplies the motor.
The UP motion is controlled by the BP 2A3.Sm23 or 2A1.Sm5

which energises the relay 1A1.K34
24 VDC POWER SUPPLY
The DOWN Motion is controlled by the BP 2A3.Sm22 or

2A1.Sm9 which energises the relay1A1.K41.
A 24 VDC power supply is provided to supply the imager (VHV

and TV camera).
9-35
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6717 OPERATION OF 3A5 TIMER PWB (MINUTERIE). (DIAGRAM 131140)

This board performs the following functions :
. monitor coil rotation,
Closing one of these relays causes monitor coils to rotate in the

desired direction.
ROTATION OF MONITOR 1 COILS
ROTATION OF MONITOR 2 COILS (OPTIONAL)

This function is identical to rotation of monitor 1 coils and is controlled by keys Sm6 and Sm5.
PWB 3A5 is fitted with the corresponding circuits.
This function is controlled by keys Sm8 and Sm7 on the control

console.
Pressing these keys generates a logic signal which is amplified by
transistors Q151 and Q156.
These transistors control relays K7 and K5 located on the monitor
cart relay PWB 9A1.
9-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Dual MONOSTABLE
16 15 14
Vcc
4538
13 12
11
R/C
CD
+TR TR
R/C
CD
+TR TR
10
T = RX X CX
4
GND
8
Dual D Flip Flop

14 13
Vcc
4013
CL
12
11
10
GND
7
1 : High level
0 : Low level
no change
X : Dont care
RA
7
Pin
RB
555
5
2
C
1
2
3
4
8
: Ground
: Trigger
: Output
: Reset
: Vdc
Borne 4
T = T1 + T2 = 0.693 ( RA + RB ) C
T1 = 0.693 ( RA + RB ) C
T2 = 0.693 ( RB ) C
3
T1
T2
9-37
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

6718 WORKING OF THE INTERFACE BOARD DSM 3A1 (DIAGRAM 201205)
GENERAL
SELECTION OF THE MODE OF WORKING
Integrated circuit CMOS 4538
The information of selection of RAD, SP and ER mode condigurate the control logic RX and the memory management.
The 4538 circuit includes 2 independent monostables whose time

constants are determined by an external RC circuit
The information NORMAL FLUORO is obtained as a default if no

other mode of working has been selected.
MEMORY SIGNALS
Each monostable can be triggered on the rising or falling dege of a

pulse, according to the input chosen.
outputs 4 and 12 rising edge
inputs 5 and 11 falling edge
Signals MG+ and MF+

The signals MG+ and MF+ manage the technique of working of
the memory (FLUORO, PULSED FLUORO, E.R.).
Signal MEMO +
Each monostable has 2 outputs :

outputs 6 and 10 generate a positive pulse
outputs 7 and 9 generate a negative pulse
This signal indicates the end of digitalization or the authorization of

treatment (filtering).
Inputs 3 and 13 reset the monostables.RAZ = logic 0
The signal is maintained at 0 logic during the time of establishment

and stabilization of the video signal.
Integrated circuit CMOS 4013
This time is generated on the circuit 3A1 by G117.8 (T1).

In PULSED FLUORO, the signal is also managed by the times T2
and T5.
The 4013 circuit includes 2 identical D FLIPFLOPs each having independent inputs of set, reset, clock, data and 2 outputs Q
and Q.
Signal VISU +
This signal indicates to the memory the presence of RX or of a
sequence during which RX pulses are emitted.
The logic level present at the input D (5 or 9) is transferred to the

output 0 (1 or 13) during the positive transition of the signal clock
(inputs 3 or 11).
The signal is at 1 logic for the whole time of an RX request in

NORMAL FLUORO or PULSED FLUOTO, but will return to 0
logic in E.R. mode at the end of the single RX pulse.
Resetting is carried out by a signal at 1 logic on the reset (4 or 10).
Signal X PERM
Integrated circuit 555 (Timer)
The signal at 1 logic indicates that the memory is available.

By its return to 0 logic it generates an end of exposure via the logic
of the 3A1 PWB (STOP DSM).
As long as the input 4 (Reset) is at 0, the output 3 is at 0.

When input 4 passes to 1, output 3 passes to 1 for the whole of the
time generated by the RC circuit (T1 constant of charge) then
falls back to 0 during the time T2 (constant of discharge).
Since the inputs 2 (Trigger) and 6 (threshold) are connected, the
circuit works as multivibrator until input 4 (reset) is at 0.
This end of exposure generated by the memory reduces the time of

RX emission to the minimum necessary to obtain a correct picture.
Signal A/B
This signal indicates that the memory is in mode 2 pictures and
makes the rotation of the monitors return to the initial position.
9-38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERATION OF OX OUT ORDER
of the PULSED FLUORO sequence onwards

It can be shortened by the signal X PERM.
It is not influenced by the release of the order OX, so as to permit
the memory to acquire a correct picture.
The OX order OUT depends on :

the mode of working selected
the signal X.PERM from the memory.
PULSED FLUORO CADENCER
MONOSTABLES
5 monostables are present on the PWB 3A1
T6 (202AQ110A)
T1 (206AG117B)
The time T6 is generated by a multivibrator type 555. This time

determines the cadences of the RX pulses in PULSED FLUORO
mode.
This time allows the picture to stabilize in AUTO mode. It can be

adjusted by R151.
It can be shortened by the signal HYST (not active in this version).
T1 is deleted if the RX control is released.
The multivibrator is triggered at the end of the time T1 and synchronized by each pulse T4 this makes it possible to have a constant time between each pulse.
T2 (207AG117.A)
The integrated circuits G119.A and G82.8 (203A) prevent the
emission of an additional impulse when the BP RX is released.
This time is fixed and is used as safety timer of the duration of RX

necessary for processing the picture (16x40 ms = 640 msec).
It is shortened by the signal X PERM from the memory.
T2 is used in ER Mode and during the first impulse in PULSED
FLUORO mode.
T2 is deleted if the RX control is released.
SIGNALS OX AND OX*

The treatment of the signal OX and OS* is prvbided by the D
FlipFlop G103.B (204C).
The purpose of this circuit is to :
wait for the state of permission X PERM
prevent the release of OX* during the sequence of PULSED
FLUORO and ensure that the end of each impulse of RX
is generated by the signal X PERM.
Take account of the signal T
T3 (207BG115.A
This time is fixed and is used to prolong the RX emission in NORMAL FLUORO so as to allow the memory to finish the acquisition
of a correct picture.
It is generated each time the order OX is delete by an origin other
than that of the signal X PERM of the memory.
T : this signal is generated at the level of the PWB 3A3 DIAPHRAGM if a change of field occurs in the 22 cm ampli (normal
field to magnify or vice versa).
T4 (204AG120A)
This time is adjustable and is used from the second impulse of
PULSED FLUORO onwards.
It can be shortened by the signal HYST (not active in this version)
and remains active after the release the signal 0X to permet the
acquisition of a correct picture given by the last impulse of R
This signal is used to drop the order OX and recommence the sequence with a new phase of automatic search for the kV/mA instructions.
T5 (205AG120B)
The signal HOLD kV frees the automatic mechanism during the

time T1.
This time is fixed and is used as safety timer for the duration of RX
necessary for the processing of the picture from the second impulse
The purpose of the D FLIPFLOP G 103.A (202C) is to maintain the RX emission if the signal T occurs during the pulse.
9-39
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ORDER X OUT
S 502.A in position CLOSED
NORMAL FLUORO MODE
The RX emission is generated as soon as BP OX is pressed.

If the BP OX is released during the RX emission, the emission is
not interrupted, and the end of exposure will be given by the signal
STOP DSM coming from the memory.
As soon as BP RX is pressed, OX OUT passes to 1 logic.

When the BP RX is released, OX OUT is released when the time
T3 has expired.
PULSED FLUORO MODE
ELECTRON RAD MODE
As soon as the BP OX is pressed, the PULSED FLUORO sequence starts off with a first pulse identical to that generated in ER mode
(T1 + T2).
At the end of the time T1, the cadencer T6 is triggered and synchronized by each pulse of T4 so as to maintain an equal time between the RX pulses. The second and following pulses are generated by the monostables T4 and T5.
The working depends on the position of S502.1 (205B).

S 502.A in position OPEN
The RX emission is generated as soon as the BP OX is pressed and
maintained during the time T1 and T2.
The end of exposure is given by the memory : the signal STOP
DSM makes T2 return.
HOLD KV
The purpose of this signal is to free the search kV/mA circuit during the time T1 in PULSED FLUORO mode.
In the other modes of working, automatic radioscopy is active all
the time.
If the BP OX is released before the end of the sequence, the signal

OX OUT returns and interrupts the RX emission.
SCOPIE PULSEE PULSED FLUORO

OX IN
3A1.a17
T1
E123
E124
E121
T2
T6
T4
E126
T5
E127
OX OUT
3A1.a15
T1+T2
T4+T5
STOP DSM
E49
VISU
E58
MEMO
E59
9-40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: SM 826 921 P425, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. 1
9-41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-42
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
For Monicon Camera Version of Steno
24v
F18 to Monicon & I.I.

(See page 9-87)
9-43
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-44
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
CCD Version of Steno Camera
Safety plug needed

to turn on unit.
Will keep unit from

turning on
If bad connection or shorted to

chasis can cause disk drive problems on DSM
Surge resistor
275VAC
Inverter
Time delay
remove for demo mode
monitor
& accessories
230V
Emergency off
buttons on
Console
Opens after time delay (turn on)

If cable disconnected (9PL1), it closes and trips
breaker by energizing K5.
C-ARM vertical
1A1
Bd.
Keeps K5 from energizing

& tripping 9SM1 until
time delay is resched &
K1 opens
(See pg. 9-89)

not used
9-45
fuse to
CCD
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-46
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Bleeder
Inverter
current
sense
Board on tube head.

Factory matched to
tube HV transformer
voltage doubler caps
275v
AC
HV transformer
fluoro (x10)
adds 4C4 & 4C1

for Rad
Discharges 4C3 & 4C4
just priot to Exp.
Rad (x1)
Insert mA
meter here
Charge 4C3
Discharge 4C3
>70_
>50_
9-47
Inhibits Exp.
Lights warning light &
disables high dose fluoro
All boards plugged in before you can

fire HV inverter
(Exception is 3A1 digital interface.)
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-48
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Presence of X'
Start
Exposure
Tube arc. Int & restarts

expl to 4 times) goes
low at 4+ tube arce to
terminated ex for good
switched at 10 kV
Tube spit
counter
1v - 20 kV
desired kVp
(kVp command)
If kV drops below
30 kV = tube arc
Order x-ray
(start in steno &
goes to digital &
then back here)
Presence of
current in
inverter
1V = 20KV
1v-1 kV
40 kV=1.1v
110 kV=4.95v
Anode
Real time kVp
feedback
Cathode
Pulse stream
fire inverters
1v - 1kV
desired
actual
kVp
Exceeded mA
(kVp has reached)
Fluoro mA
1v = 1mA
Rad mA
1v = 10 mA
9-49
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-50
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Fluoro fiament
goes high at 5.
Fluoro time on.
XPERM
Digital
3A1
open if have digital

close to bypass
Rad filament
order X-ray
If closed, then
FL disabled
from H.S.W.
when RAD
selected
Start exp
If closed, then can

only FL - no RAD
One pulse at
Exp. start
Pule stream to regulate

inverter firing rate via
C. Loop kV control
Tube arc interrupts

exp momentarily
Presence of inverter
current to prevent
SCR cross firing
FF
Alternately fires
main SCRs
Off if missing
+12v (cannot fire SCRs)
on if missing
+12v
12v daisy chain

interlock through
all boards
9-51
Don't hook scope here. It

may trigger SCR unintentionally.
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-52
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
Job Card Rg11 or RG203

See pg 8-34
30 msec to ensure main SCR is off

before firing the other main SCR.
Current sense
from inverter
9-53
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-54
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: SM 826 921 P545, STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000
9-55
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-56
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-57
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-58
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
50 Hz (not 60 Hz)
free running oscillator
Divide by 10
Fluoro Time
Totalizer
Divide by 6
60 sec/min
Reset total time
Divide by 10
Adj So Cde RX
= 2.1v CCD
=2.35v monicon
12 volt
interlock
0v if ABC
satisfied
2.1v DC for CCD

2.35v DC for monicon
at proper ABC brightness
(=250 mV flat field video at
monitor)
damping of
loop gain"
High if
error
> 0.87v
Pulsed FL selected
9-59
Analog 1v = 20 kV
+.87
1.75v
ABC deadband" Adj'd for
1.75v across R67.
-.87
mA is function of kVp (via
EPROMS).
This circuit prevents oscillation
if on edge of EPROM step.
Start Exp.
Sample & hold

integrator
High if error
more neg.
than -0.87v
Goes low when kVp is satisfied
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-60
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Order X-ray
ABC needs more kVp
ABC needs less kVp
Preset to start
at 40 kVp
Low = ABC
satisfied
Desired kVp from

ABC circuit
On" = manual
mode
Momentary
switch
Comparitor
chips
goes high at 110KV selected
Fluoro = 0v
Disables manual
kv up/down con
trol in auto mode
25 sec.
delay
3Hz to drive manual

kVp up slowly for 2 sec.
Rad = 5v
30 Hz to drive kV quickly manually

after hyolding down switch for > 2 sec.
2 Hz Sq. wave
Ready light
on = 5v ok
>50_c
9-61
Digital kVp
demand signal
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-62
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-63
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-64
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Rad
Order X-ray prevents

change modes during
X-ray
ER = Extended
Radiography
= single pulsed
fluoro snapshot.
HLC = High Level Fluoro
= 2 times mA/dose
Pulsed Fluoro
Normal fluoro dose
S" LED in mAs diaplay
1.2 Hz slow change mA/mAs
12 Hz fast change mA/mAs
9-65
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: SM 826 921 P615, STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D - M.D.A, Rev. 1, Page A20
DUAL 4 BIT LATCH
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 828 980 G035 / G045

2 G65
G132
Voir tableau
Voir tableau
TRUTH TABLE
4508
24 23 22
Vcc
21 20 19
Q3B D3B Q2B D2B
Out.
disa Stro. Reset
D0A Q0A
A
A
A
17 16
18
Q1B D1B Q0B
13
Reset
Disable
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
X
D1A Q1A D2A Q2A D3A Q3A
10
GND
11 12
1 : High level
Strobe
D input
Q output
G66
0
Latched
0 : Low level X : Dont care
CL
14 13 12 11 10
Vcc
8
S
GND
7
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
X
X
X
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1 : High level
Voir tableau
See chart
16 15 14 13
VCC
CLOCK Q3
Preset
enable Q4 P4
G120
Z : H. Impedance
Voir tableau
See chart
0 : Low level X : Dont care
12
11 10
CL
CI
PE
ACTION
1
0
No Count
Count UP
0
X
0
X
0
1
0
0
Count DOWN
Preset
Reset
P3
P2 Q2 UP / Reset
Down
Carry
P1 IN
Q1 Carry OUT
GND
7 8
1 : High level
U/D
0 : Low level
3A9 CI Consigne kV / mA
3A9 Consigne kV / mA
PCB
X : Dont care
828 980 G035

4 Bit Magnitude Comparator
4585
1
6
15 14 13 12 11 10
B3 A > B A B A < BA = B A1
INPUTS
COMPARING
Eprom
G65
OUTPUTS
CASCADING
A3 B3 A2 B2 A1 B1 A0 B0 AB3 X
Cascading Inputs
B2
B A
Voir tableau
See chart
Binary UP / DOWN Counter

4516
See chart
See chart
G121
Dual D Flip Flop

4013
15 14
D0B Out. Stro. Reset

disa B
B
B
A=B
X
A>B
1
AB
1
G66
X
X
X
X
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
G67
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0>B0
G120
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0=B0
G121
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0=B0
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0=B0
A3=B3A2=B2 A1=B1A0<B0
A3=B3A2=B2 A1<B1 X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
0
0
0
0
A3=B3A2<B2
A3<B3 X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
0
0
0
0
A3=B3A2>B2 X
A3=B3A2=B2 A1>B1
1 : High level
X
X
X
X
X
X
0 : Low level
X : Dont care
G132
5R 500W
828 230 P605
F kV / mA2
828 232 P605
Dis. kV
828 229 P305
mA / mAs
828 234 P305
BIN DEC
828 233 P305
Cons. mAs
828 231 P305
PROGAMMATION CI 2A1 PUPITRE MODULE G

Fonction de Sm35
Sm35 function
Sm58. 14 (A)
23 (B)
9-66
ON
ON
ON
ON
Sm59. 14 (A)
23 (B)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Sm60. 14 (A)
23 (B)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PL1
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
In U.S. when hit 50_C, can stay in high dose FL. Europe drops to normal dose.
Iris Controls dose

(norm & HL)
CLosed for
U.S.
Order X-ray & High

level dose selected
Fluoro mA demans based

on Kv selected/current
using
Electronic Rd.
(single pulse FL)
>50v
EPROM
High
level
FL
Min. FL mA = 0.1 mA
Min. RAD mAs = 0.16
Max. RAD mAs = 160
Digital
Desired kVp signal
Selects mAs integration

scale range.
EPROM
mA;mAs
up & down
Desire mAs as selected

at console
9-67
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-68
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
120 v AC
Reduced power = closed
derates available mA at
selected kVps
Reduced
power
68 Kr with CCD
40kV = 24 mA
110 kV = 12 mA
RAD
Preheat
Selected RAD mA based

on kVp
See pgs. 9-97, 4-15 or
12-33
Rad 1v = 10mA
FL 1v = 1mA
Selected RAD mA
based on selected kV
Rad mA feedback
If closed, allows fluoro

on large filament for
tube alignment.
RAD
1v = 10mA
FL
Controls mAs integrator gain

Selected/desired mAs
Stop Rad Exposure

at selected mA
(no phototiming)
Reduced power 120v AC

backup timer = 15 sec
Presence of X-ray
220 v power backup

set for 7 seconds
FL
Preheat
Actual FL mA feedback
Closed loop fluoro mA Control
Desired FL mA (EPROM
based on kVp)
FL mA adjust
9-69
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-70
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
See waveforms on page 8-35

RAD
Remove aluminum
filter on collimator
to see filament
switching
RAD
Free running
180 Hz
1.8 mm XL (Rad only)

0.5 mm XS (FL only)
XS, XL Selector
180_
phase
shift
180_
phase
shift
Current
feedback
resistors
Current
safety
FL
FL
Fuse
Rad fil I.
feedback
RSM current
feedback
FL current
feedback
If actual current feedback > desired

current, then comparitor goes high &
interrupts 180 Hz inverter.
9-71
Filament drive to
achieve desired mA
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
14
4011
13
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
VCC
4023
40106

Source: SM 826 921 P615, STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D - M.D.A, Rev. 1, Page A22
3A26 CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS 4
9-72
829 357 G045
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-73
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-74
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-75
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-76
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
max kV limit 110 kV

Desired/select kVP
1v = 20 kV
min kVp = 40
Rad mA determined
by kVp
digital
selected/desired
kVp
EPROM
EPROM
9-77
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-78
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
2Hz Osc.
5 min timer
accuracy
For flashing 50_C

thermal thermometer
light
Pot is R217
(see Job
Card RG14
or RG206)
Low = stop HV Inverter
X-ray on indicator
2Hz
Presence of x-ray - lights lamps on console & on top of

monitor cart.
Console
X-ray switches
Monitor
cart
Sonalert tone
9-79
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-80
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Slip ring
continuous turn
+ = CW
- = CCW
Rotate
collimator
+12 = close
-12 = open
Lead
Blades
Close
6" FL
Lead
blades
(opaque)
Lead
Open
Limit switches close

when reach open
blade limit
AL
Aluminum
blades
(Radio-translucent)
Causes blades to flash

on console if blades
need to be opened.
+12 = close
-12 = open
Aluminum
Blades
Low for 9"
high for 6" = zoom
Circular lead
aperature for 6"
FOV selected on
9" bottle (not used
w/6" bottle)
6" FOV
Toggle Sw.
for 9" Systems
9" II normal FOV

or
6" II normal FOV
9-81
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-82
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Start & Exp.

(Ft. Sw.)
Close to turn on
AGC for service mode
Fluoro selected
AGC on/off
monicon = max kV
+ automode
+ making x-ray
CCD: AGC is always on
(dynamic)
Electronic radiogr.
(single pulse fluoro = snapshot)
ABC mode
Unblank TV when logic high
Max kV
Low during Fluoro
Open to UNBLANK
TV w/o X-ray
Emergency off
switches on C-ARM
console
120v AC
9-83
Open = down = off

to set up camera stand
by beam (400nA) when
fluoroing.
See pg. 11-57
Monicon only
High sets max beam = 1500 nA
Low = standy beam
= 400 nA
Mag to 6" FOVE
on 9" I.I.
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-84
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-85
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-86
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Up/down
switches
Switches drive
direction
Check F18
if camera
loses power
Monicon
See next page
for CCD
Vertical Drive
9-87
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-88
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
CCD
camera
Not used for

CCD
24v DC comes from
LVLE supply
See Coord. 6, C for
SM826921P545
Pg 9-45 in this book
9-89
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-90
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
DSM uses monitor yoke rotation,

MDA does not.
Monitor A
Rotate
Monitor B
A/B selection (Split Screen) forces both

monitors to drive fully CCW when split screen
selected on DSM 200. (DSM 600 did not ro
tate.) MDA digital uses electronic rotation
9-91
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-92
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
Goes to DSAD J7
Monitor cart to C-ARM interface
Not used
See also pg. 9-45 for completion of connections
Monitor
Curt
C-ARM
simply =12v used

to generate X PERM
Memory available, end of

image processing
9-93
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-94
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
3A1 Interface DSM
(MDA version, See Volume 3 of Technical Supplement)
See pages 9-38 and 16-16 for theory and
signal names of this board.
Norm FL
Pulsed
Fluoro
Electronic Rad
(single pulse fluoro)
Rad.
norm closed
OX manager
From 3A19 board

3A19S76.A switch used to
bypass digital if it is down.
(DSMs have bypass"
mode if it is down)
Pulsed
Fluoro
Not used
2 sec. delay for andoe

_____ing between ER pulses.
To 3A5 Hysteresis
to maintain kV
between FL pulses
Schematics jump fro Coord. 150 to 201 = Normal!
9-95
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9-96
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
DSM has bypass. If it fails,

can switch 3A19 S76.4 at
steno to enable fluoro.
Timing signal from steno

that indicates ABC should
be stabilized. Allows digital
acquisition & processing
X-ray present
Used by digital to indicate

pulsed fluoro or electronic
radiograph (single pulsed
fluoro) is selected.
OX = order X-ray
when digital ready
for next exposure
To 3A19.a5
EXPERM"
+ enables x-ray emission
- stops x-ray
End of Exp.
9-97
XPERM indicates memory is

available. Used in pulsed FL
& E.R. Used for integrating
images (frame averaging) &
then allows x-ray when aver
aging complete.
(See pg 16-16)
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
9-98
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-2
GE Medical Systems

Source: 45559811 Imageur 22 Stenoscop 2, Rev. 3
REV 1
10-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: sm 36003153, Advantx Imageur Schematics, Rev. 0, Page 1-2
ILLUSTRATION 1-2
IMC2 BOARD LOCATIONS
ILLUSTRATION 1-3
IMC2 BOARD LOCATIONS
R1
R2
10-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
SW in one pos display C.blank window
other pos Black (Perimeter blank windwo)
mus_____ usually open windows to view I.I.
POWER SUPPLY (PL1)
5.04 MHz
(525 line rate)
SCAN CONVERTER & FOCUS (PL5)
MN3, MN4
Focus
R10
FOCUS
MX4, Q8
CRYSTAL
OSC &
DIVIDER
COMPOSITE BLANKING
Strap for 60Hz
when replace Bd.
H cent
TR1 & Q5
HD
S2
MA5
BLK
WINDOW
Image Tube
Power Supply
R5 Size
CATHODE
VParabola
Gen
CAMERA
TUBE
(NEWVICON)
Czicon
MUX MX1
DH2
(MAG)
6 FOV on 9 II
SYNC & MASK BOARD (PL3)
Camera Tube
Electrode Voltage
Control
Q3, TR2 & MA3
Beam
From/To
Generator
ABC
(AGC)
WINDOW
MN8
630V
450V
300V
TV Camera
Aperature
MA7
R2
Vcent
G2,G3,G4
Adj R3
TargetV
R12
R3 adjusts
all
DH1
DS4
MA6
MN6, MA4
Q6, Q7
(IRIS)
REGULATOR
G1
R6 Size
H Parabola
Gen
MN1
&
MN2
DS2
S1
MA6
Hdef
fused from CARM ____tor drive Bd.

Logic on/off
(3A9)
R1
MN5 MA3
DS1
REGULATOR
VR1
dose control
Video
Circular
Blanking
R4 Size
MX1 & MX2
Vdef
Look like metal

can transistors
COMPOSITE SYNC
(Not Used)
DS3
used on Advantx
TP63
LOW PASS
AUTO BRIGHTNESS
(VIDEO RX)
Q5
No. Adj.
blank/unblank camera ff.sw. CR SW 133.D on 3A3 Bd.
Q6
S1
FILTER
(Not Used)
Q2,3,4
VIDEO RX
Target Sig
18v
(3A5)
Beam Control (K2)

R4Standby
R11Normal
FIL REG
VR1
Sweep reverse on
Monicon only
CCD uses digital
(from Generator)
Test Switch to
set up beam
3A3 S133.C
Target Voltage
Edge Enhancement
Q8
PREAMP
Q1,2,3,4
Jumper
Q5,6,7
Q11
MA3
HCLAMP
MA1, MA2
1mV = 1nA
TP1
150
mV
FF
BLK LEVEL
ADJ.
R1
See pg. 1163, Ill. 6
LOW PASS
MA4
Adj. pg 1167
enablegamma
Q15
MA5 1,2,3
MX2 1,2,3
Adj. pg 1163 done first (higher gain)
10-12
GammaWht clip
R4 & S3
R3
Factory adj.
R6
R5
AGC Gain Manual Gain
(PL2)
Q13,14
System
Blanking
Q16,17,18
Q19
FILTER
R2
Max Gain
Factory adj.
Q12
S2
F110
150 in
250 out
pg. 1165
TP10 250 mV
Composite video
(ROI 94114 on DSM)
VIDEO OUT
TO DSM
OR
TV MONITORS
To J8 os DSM
250mV comp.
video
50 mv
R7
BLK LEVEL
If video is low and

AGC is on, (110 kVp)
variable gain is active
AGC on/off from 3A3
Active = 110 kV and in
Automatic Fluoro
and making xray
CCD>AGC always active
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLSTRATION 10-2
IMC2 PL5 SCAN AND CONVERTER BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
VCIBLE
K1
R5
10-13
R2
R1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
PL5 Scan Converter & Focus (TV)
Vertical Center Normal
Vertical Center Reverse
Adjust R3 for 300vDC (VG2)

R3 adjusts VG2, VG4, VG3
VCIBLE" Target Voltage = 18v
Beam Current
(If adj. R3 then beam must be
readj.
Normal = 1500ma
Stdby = 400 mA
Cathode blanking
Sweep
Focus
Sweep Reverse
from 3A5 to Moni
can PL1 to here
Syx SC" from C-arm

3A3 S133.C used to set
standby beam (See pg.
11-57 for Adj. Proc.
10-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-19
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 8-2
IMC2 PL3 SYNC AND MASK BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
10-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
PL3 Sync & Mask (Strapped for 5v Hz from France)
View (size = 1/2 diam. of image)
View ABC/AGC window
Blank/unblank
From foot Sw or
3A3 S133.D
Circle Blanking
Normal
Service
Permieter blanking
(remove flyback)
H/V Blank Comp

H/V Comp Sync
Composite sync
H drive
V drive
H&V drive
H drive
Remove for
60Hz 525 line
NOTE: New Board
This jumper is la
beled S1 on back
of board (solder)
V drive
soldered wire
jumper
ABC sindow for sampling
Jumper for 60Hz

S2 on New Board
Composite
Parabola
Switch from standby

beam 400mA to normal
beam 1500 mA
Perimeter Balnking
5mm smaller than
P.U.T. target
10-22
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
PL3 Sync & Mask Board
Parabola Roundess
ABC Window
(Fixed, Non-Adj.)
2.35v + .15v dc
H. Parabola
APB
Goes to C-arm 3A5
ABC Board
Composite
Parabola
150 mv F.F. APB

ABC video from
preamp
Video RX
(vedeo ! monitor = 250 mv)
V. Parabola
10-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-25
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 7-2
IMC2 PL2 VIDEO AND PREAMP BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
AGC ON/OFF
R6
10-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
PL2 Video Board
from PL3
60Hz rate
from PL3
perimeter blanking"
only allows video w/in
window to pass. Elimi
nates P.U.T. flyback ulses.
Preamp video
150 mv Flat
Field
*
AGC
variable
gain
amp
To PL3 TP12
Sync & Mask
Board
AGC
Control voltage fixed
for non-AGC
varies for AGC
10-27
Sht. 2
[H,6]
ABC video = 150 mv

at proper brightness
using flat field.
Generates 2-35vdc
which then goes to
Steno to control ABC.
GE Medical Systems

REV 2
AGC gain. Calibrate first.
Manual gain adjusted second.
Adj. for 250 mV F.F.
Normal on = some edge enhancement
Video from
sheet 1 [C, 2]
4.7 v Ref.
250 mV F.F. video At proper brightness (ABC mode).

~ 550 mV F.F. video with CVII (CV + 1 AL) in auto mode
50 mV
setup
Composite
blanking
Composite video
to J8 @ DSM
250 mV
F.F. video
= 50 mV
300 mV
sync
Comp
Sync
10-28
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-29
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 6-2
IMC2 PL1 POWER SUPPLY AND INTERFACE BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
10-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Coax from
video board
AGC on/off
Adx
To J8 on DSM
3A5 (41, D) 2.35v=ABC ck

3A3S 133.D (120, B)
blank/unblank
ABC stabilize before

AGC kicks in
Sweep Rev.
3A3S133.C (120,C)
to set stdby
Max beam
beam=400mA switch
+0.2v
to 1500 mA
Factory
adj.
from 1A1
elevator Bd.
I.I. Size
3.43S133.A (120, A) AGC on/off
I.I. Center focus
HLC (high level

dose) (78,A)
+0.75
Edge focus
(120, C) Z" = zoom
mag 1 - 6" mode
on 9" bottle
See also pg.

10-36.
New board
has 3 pots
used on Adx
Vacuum DS3 lights
when too much leakage
in image tube (Getter I)
(>1mA of II gas current),
Normall lights at
power up and goes out
To/from C-ARM
To Camera
To Iris Control Bd
To II Supply
Not used
10-33
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-34
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-35
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-37
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 11-2
IMC2 PL6 IRIS AND LIGHT SENSOR BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
10-38
GE Medical Systems

REV 3
Iris motor
logic for dose

control
Norm
1.8 mR/min
.108 R/hr.
Iris opening
pots for dose control
3.6 mR/min
.216 R/hr.
HLC (High level definistion)
10-39
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-40
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-41
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
10-42
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11-1 MONICON 3 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
11-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
11-1 MONICON 3 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

TEST
EQUIPMENT:
OSCILLOSCOPE
DVM
CV PHANTOM KIT
STANDARD FIELD SERVICE TOOL KIT
METRIC ALLEN WRENCHES
SIZING GAUGE FOR 9" IMAGE INTENSIFIER - PART # 46-286485P1
INITIAL CONDITIONS: FOR DSM 600 SYSTEMS (FLICKER FREE MONITORS) THE DSM SYSTEMS MUST BE
ON FOR ALL ADJUSTMENTS
2mm of Copper (2mm of Copper equal 3 Copper from CV Kit)
Adjust PL-2 R4 fully clockwise removes gamma.
Remove generator trim cover.
Place 3A3 board on extender in Stenoscop chassis.
Position C-arm so that the image tube is on the top and the x-ray tube is on the
bottom.
Remove image head trim cover to expose camera head and image tube.
Remove rear trim cover on monitor cart to get at the back of the DSM.
Turn off the DSM with the switch above the power cord. (only on DSM-200 systems)
Get at the video preamp by swinging out PL1 power supply board.
Allow the unit to warm up for 30 minutes.
Unblank TV camera with switch 3A3S133-4 in the Stenoscop, to OPEN (DOWN)
position.
PROCEDURE
POWER SUPPLY ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: CERTAIN VIDEO MODULE SETTINGS DEPEND ON THE POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE. IF THE 18V SUPPLY IS ADJUSTED, A COMPLETE TV SYSTEM CALIBRATION
MAY HAVE TO BE PERFORMED.
1.
Turn on Stenoscop and allow to warm up 30 min.
2.
Check that three green LEDS on the PL1 Power Supply Board are on:
DS1 +18v
TP-2
(TP-1=GND)
DS2 +15v +/-0.75v
TP-8
DS3 -15v +/-0.75v
TP-9
3.
Connect digital meter between TP2 and TP1 of Power Supply board PL1.
Voltage should read +18volts +/-0.1v.
4.
If not, adjust PL1-R1 for +18volts +/-0.1v.
11-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
J1
J1
TP
11
TP1
TP
10
TP
10
TP1
TP8
TP8
J6
J6
TP2
J3
TP2
TP9
R1
J3
TP9
R1
J2
R11
R8
TP3
R10
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
J2
R9
R8
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R9
TP3
TP4
TP4
TP5
J4
TP5
TP7
TP6
J4
TP7
TP6
PL1 (HP) POWER SUPPLY

45560563
PL1 (F1) POWER SUPPLY

45202778
R7
TP10
TP11
TP8
R6
R9
R8
R10
R5
R2
R1
TP1
R3
TP2
TP9
TP3
TP12
TP13
TP4
J2
TP6
R12
R4
R11
TP5 TP7
PL5 SCAN & FOCUS BOARD

11-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
VG2 ADJUSTMENT
1.
For D9, unbolt image tube high voltage power supply from image tube casting
(3 screws) to get at the bottom of the PL5 board. (DO NOT DISCONNECT WIRES
FROM IMAGE TUBE).
2.
Image reversal module should be in the NORMAL mode on Stenoscop control.
3.
Connect meter between TP5 of Scan/Converter/Focus board PL5 and ground.

Voltage should be 300VDC +/-10v.
4.
If required, adjust PL5-R3 for 300VDC +/-10v. R3 is located in the center of the
board.
5.
Reinstall HV power supply.
NOTE: The power supply may be removed again for the beam alignment check.
TARGET ADJUSTMENT
1.
Connect meter to PL5-TP6 of Scan/Converter/Focus board and chassis ground.
2.
Check that the target voltage is equal to the target voltage supplied with the pick-up
tube.
NOTE: CURRENTLY, THE NEWVICON TUBE IS BEING USED IN THE STENOSCOP. THIS
IS A CZICON TUBE BY ANOTHER MANUFACTURER. THEREFORE THE TARGET
VOLTAGE IS APPROXIMATELY 18V.
THE RANGE FOR THE TARGET ADJUSTMENT IS 5 VOLTS TO 80 VOLTS DC.
3.
Adjust PL5-R12 for correct voltage.
11-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R21
R23
R4
R20
R18
R3
R2
R13
R16
DUAL FREQUENCY BOARD

VMI MONITOR
11-6
R1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
VMI MONITOR RASTER ADJUSTMENT
1.
Turn the DSM on and allow to run the power-up sequence.
2.
3.
Enter the maintenance mode by typing G,M,A simultaneously.

Select 2-QI, then M-PATTERN. Then select 1-CENTERING. A centering pattern
will appear on both monitors.
Verify the raster sizing on the monitors with ILL. 1.
If adjustment is necessary, remove the rear cover of the affected monitor(s).
Refer to the tables below and make the following size and centering adjustments to
each monitor, based on the line frequency of your unit.
4.
5.
DUAL FREQ. VERT. DEFL.

BD.
60Hz
50Hz
Vertical Center
R13
R16
Vertical Size
R7
R4
Vertical Hold
R18
R20
#1 DEFL. BD (HORZ
DEFL. BD.)
50 & 60 Hz.
Horizontal Center
L101
Horizontal Size
L103
A non-ferrous `tuning wand' must be used if horizontal adjustments are necessary.
RASTER
270
=
=
ALL DIMENTIONS IN MM
360
ILLUSTRATION 1
11-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP
4
TP
3
J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
R3
R4
TP
12
TP
6
S3
S1
J2
TP
10
S2
TP
11
TP
9
R7
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
PL3 SYNC & MASK BOARD
11-8
GE Medical Systems

Source: SM 2131062-100, 15" and 20" DISTAR MONITORS, Rev. 1, Page 3-1
REV 1
CHAPTER 2 - ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 1
REQUIREMENTS
11
Introduction
This chapter explains how to access and adjust the Monitor for proper operation.
A luminance meter is required to optimise the adjustment of brightness/contrast for ambient
light. However,
D
A luminance meter may not be available. Refer to Job Card RG004 for an alternative
procedure without luminance meter.
The Minolta LS 100 may not be available. Refer to Service Note 3681B for an
alternative procedure IET luminance meter.
Adjustments to the Monitor are limited to procedures specified in this Service Manual.
12
Test Equipment Required

D
Luminance meter, MINOLTA LS100 or equivalent.
Green reflecting screen (Part No. 21 103 60).
Photographic tripod (optional).
For further information on the luminance adjustment procedure, refer to the corresponding
system procedure (for example, ssm DRS) or the specific Image Quality Procedure
(Photometric Measurement of Radioscopy Systems).
All monitors except DLR were preset during manufacturing to the values indicated below:
D
For an ambient light level darkroom:
Black level = 0.4 cd/m2 (black picture),
White level = 125 cd/m2 (at center),
CEL activated (CEL LED ON) for an ambient light level slightly above 64 lux.
For an ambient light level of 200 lux:
Black level = 9 cd/m2 (black picture),
White level = 220 cd/m2 (at center),
CEL LED on.
11-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

The DLR monitor was preset during manufacturing to the values indicated below:
D
For an ambient light: dark room,
Black level = 0.4 cd/m2,
White level = 250 cd/m2.
CEL activated for an ambient light level of 64 lux:
For an ambient light level of 200 lux:
CEL BRIGHTNESS MINIMUM.
White level = 300 cd/m2 (at center).
11-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

15 and 20 DISTAR MONITORS

Purpose:
Job Card RG 001
BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS
GENERAL PROCEDURE
Time:
1 of 6
Version No.: 1
Date: 08/95
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
Luminancemeter type LS 100 MINOLTA or equivalent.
Gray reference card 18% 1% (2110360).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D
None.
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1
General Procedure with Luminance Meter

These controls are located on the back of the monitor and can be accessed by removing the rear door
(Ill. 1). For rear door removal, see Chapter 2, Job Card IST 001.
The purpose of these settings is to ensure that, for any room ambient light level, the dark grays are not
below the monitor cut-off level and the image contrast ratio is satisfactory.
11-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERAL PROCEDURE
5.1.1
Job Card RG 001
2 of 6
Recommendations
D
Power on the monitor and allow a 15- to 20-minute warm-up period before measuring any values.
The light meter should be in the position normally occupied by the operator, and not less than one
meter from the screen.
The procedure and final values will vary slightly between systems (test patterns for digital systems,
or image quality criteria for analog systems, can differ from one system to another). However, the
general DISTAR adjustment procedure described in the following pages should be applied.
ILLUSTRATION 1
REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH REAR DOOR REMOVED
1
3
4
2
ITEM
FUNCTION
LED
CEL Brightness Control
CEL Contrast Control
CEL Threshold Control
11-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERAL PROCEDURE
5.1.2
Job Card RG 001
3 of 6
Definitions used in the Procedure

Luminance (L) expressed in candela per square meter (cd/m2).
1 cd/m2 = 3.42 fL (fL = foot Lambert).
1 fL = 0.29 cd/m2.
LA = Reference luminance (white image).
LB = Luminance at white level (digital pattern).
LO = Zero dose luminance (black pattern).
LP = Phosphorus out luminance (monitor off).
LN = Luminance at point of operation (analog fluoroscopy).
CEL = Cell.
5.1.3
Controls Presentation and Description

See Illustration 1 for a presentation of the controls:
D
Monitor Brightness Control: modifies the tube bias of the monitor (when CEL is not active). Turn
it clockwise to illuminate the raster or increase the black level.
Monitor Contrast Control: modifies the video gain (when CEL is not active). Turn it clockwise to
increase the white level.
LED (DS1) and CEL Threshold Control (Ill. 1, Items 1 and 4). The CEL Threshold Control sets the
threshold level of ambient light at which CEL becomes active; LED DS1 indicates whether CEL
is active:
When LED DS1 in ON, the CEL is active,
When LED DS1 is OFF, the CEL is not active,
Turn the CEL Threshold Control clockwise to increase the threshold level of ambient light,
anticlockwise to reduce it.
5.1.4
CEL Brightness Control (Ill. 1, Item 2): operates as the Monitor Brightness Control when CEL is
active.
CEL Contrast Control (Ill. 1, Item 3): operates as the Monitor Contrast Control when CEL is active.
General Procedure
D
The same procedure is used to adjust Monitor Brightness and Contrast settings or the CEL
Brightness and Contrast settings. Check that CEL is not active during Monitor setting up (LED DS1
is OFF).
Generally, two levels of ambient light can be defined: for example, for Fluoroscopy and for Review,
for two types of examination, for the presence or not of an external light, etc.
11-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERAL PROCEDURE
D
Job Card RG 001
4 of 6
The CEL threshold is set between the two levels (normally at 64 lux).Monitor settings are adjusted
at the lower level of ambient light (normally below 64 lux); CEL settings are adjusted at the higher
level of ambient light.
1. Adjustment at Lower Ambient Light (CEL OFF)

Set the room lighting conditions to obtain the required lower level of ambient light; check that the
CEL LED is off.
Carry out the checks and adjustments described below:
a. Check Ambient Light Conditions
Place a white reflecting screen (GE Medical Systems Part No. 45 066 988) on the front of the
monitor and measure Light Level LA in the center of the screen: the typical value should be
3 to 10 cd/m2.
b. Check Reflected Light
Switch off the monitor and remove the power connector. Measure Light Level LP at the center
of the screen: (LP/LA is about 0.1).
If reflections of room lights appear on the screen, the customer should be asked to change the
position of the monitor.
c. Monitor Brightness Setting
For Digital systems, set the system to a Black Image and measure the Luminance LO at the center
of the screen.
For Analog systems, measure Luminance LO obtained during a totally black fluoro exposure
(Manual Mode, generator HV OFF, mA min, kV min, 2 mm Cu filter).
Adjust the Monitor Brightness control to obtain: 1.3 x
LA
LA
< LO < 2 x
10
10
d. Monitor Contrast Setting

For Digital systems only, present the density test pattern and set it to Level F or 100 % and
measure Luminance LB at the center of the screen: adjust the Monitor Contrast setting to obtain:
60 LO < LB < 100 LO
For Analog Systems only, measure Nominal Luminance LN obtained during a nominal fluoro
exposure (Automatic Mode, 2 mm Cu filter, mA adjusted to give 75 kV); adjust the Monitor
Contrast setting to obtain:
LN > 8 x LO (a good value should be between 2 x LA and 3 x LA).
Check that the black level has not changed (LO). Otherwise return to Para 1.c.
11-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERAL PROCEDURE
Job Card RG 001
5 of 6
e. CEL Threshold Adjustment

Adjust the CEL threshold control R109 (Ill. 1, Item 4) (turn it counter-clockwise) to switch on the
CEL LED DS1 (Ill. 1, Item 1) , then turn it clockwise until the CEL LED DS1 is just extinguished.
2. Adjustments at Higher Ambient Light (CEL ON)
Set the room lighting conditions to obtain the required higher level of ambient light; check that the
CEL LED is on, DS1 (ILL. 1, Item 1).
Carry out the checks and adjustments described below (as described under 251, but using the
appropriate CEL controls and values):
a. Check Ambient Light Conditions.
Place a gray reference card (GE Medical Systems Part No. 2110 360) on the front of the monitor
and measure Light Level LA in the center of the screen.
b. Check Reflected Light.
If reflections of room lights appear on the screen, the customer should be asked to change the
position of the monitor.
c. Monitor Brightness Setting.
For Digital systems, set the system to a Black Image and measure Luminance LO at the center
of the screen.
For Analog systems, measure Luminance LO obtained during a totally black fluoro exposure
(Manual Mode, generator OFF or mA min, kV min, 2 mm Cu filter).
Adjust the CEL Brightness R108 (Ill. 1, Item 2) control to obtain:
LA
LA
< LO < 2 x
1.3 x
10
10
d. Monitor Contrast Setting.
For Digital systems only, present the density test pattern, set it to Level F or 100% and measure
the Luminance LB at the center of the screen. Adjust the CEL Contrast setting to obtain:
60 LO < LB < 100 LO.
Note:
LB must never exceed < 220 cd/m2.

For Analog systems only, measure Nominal Luminance LN obtained during a nominal fluoro
exposure (Automatic Mode, 2 mm Cu filter, mA adjusted to give 75 kV); adjust the CEL Contrast
R107 (Ill. 1, Item 3) setting to obtain:
LN > 8 x LO (a good value should be between 2 x LA and 3 x LA).
Check that each white area is less than 220 cd/m2.
11-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

GENERAL PROCEDURE
Job Card RG 001
6 of 6
3. Cel Pot Adjustments.

The CEL BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST and THRESHOLD pots have been factoryset for typical
room lighting conditions. If satisfactory tracking of room light cannot be attained in the room where
the monitor is installed, the CEL BRIGHTNESS and CEL CONTRAST pots may be readjusted by
following the steps of PART 2 below. PART 1 of this procedure must be done first. When making the
following adjustments, do not obstruct or shade the light paths to the CEL light sensor.
a. Set room lights for lowlight condition and adjust CEL THRESHOLD to just extinguish the
LED located just above the pot. Set room lights for highlight conditions. CEL LED should
be turned on.
b. With room lights at highlight condition, set the CEL CONTRAST pot fully CCW. Adjust
CEL BRIGHTNESS pot to just visualize the blanked portion of the monitor raster. For R&F
rooms, it may be preferable to set this pot to just visualize the collimator blades.
c. Observe the lung field, and set the CEL CONTRAST pot so that the image is a bright as is it can
be with the penetrameter features discernable and the mesh in clear focus.
d. Readjust the CEL BRIGHTNESS pot, is necessary, to just visualize blanking as described in
Procedure 6 above.
11-16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Job Card RG 003
BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS FOR VASCULAR
Version No.: 1
AND CARDIAC APPLICATIONS 20 ROOM MONITOR
Date: 08/95
Time:
1 of 4
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
Luminance meter.
Gray reference card.
2 mm Cu.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D
None.
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1
Extended Procedure
5.1.1
Description
The good perception of all the details of a radiological image on a monitor depends mainly on the
observation conditions and the right operating conditions of the monitor versus the dynamic range of the
video signal.
This procedure helps to measure the observation conditions and adjust the operating conditions.
11-17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS FOR VASCULAR AND CARDIAC APPLICATIONS 20 ROOM MONITOR
5.1.2
Job Card RG 003
2 of 4
When to perform this Procedure

The monitor is the final component on the video chain; and its main contribution to Image Quality is
often forgotten.
We recommended to perform this procedure each time the customer is not perfectly satisfied with its
image quality, or each time you could believe some adjustments has changed in the monitor.
5.1.3
Tools required
D
Luminance meter (recommended model: Minolta LS100) + stand.
Calibrated gray reference surface (RG is often 18%) with known reflection ratio RG.
2 x 0.8 mm Cu or 2 x 1 mm Cu.
5.2
Procedure
5.2.1
SetUp
D
BootUp Advantx Application Software and make the following selections on the Advantx Console:
VASCULAR or CARDIAC,
DLX Fluoro,
75 kVp,
Manual mA at minimum.
Select the Technical Menu on DLX.
The positioner, tabletop, and room monitor must be positioned in the room at the same place they
are in working condition; verify especially:
Monitor positioning,
Height versus floor,
Tilt,
Direction toward the user.
The room lighting must be the same as in working conditions; verify the conditions (during fluoro
if there is an automatic switching of some lights):
Artificial lighting (fluorescent, incandescent lighting),
Adjustment of variable lighting,
If there is a natural lighting, verify if it could be the main lighting (curtains or door opening,
meteorological conditions).
CAUTION
In this case, this procedure is not useful because it is impossible to

guarantee good performance with a room ambient light which is not
stable and which intensity is generally very high.
11-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Note:
Note 1:
3 of 4
In vascular or cardiac rooms, it is specially interesting to have a low level of lighting to get a
good contrast in the blacks, but the physician needs an enough lighter area on the patient,
where he introduces his catheter.
So, it is recommended to have a directional light like a spot, which makes a lighter area with
a diameter of some decimeters (for example 2 to 5).
D
5.2.2
Job Card RG 003
Position the luminancemeter (if possible on its stand, which can stand on the table top) at about the
same height and position the physician eyes are in working conditions (near the table top).
In that case, the monitor screen shall be between 1.1 and 1.9 meter for a high line rate, and twice
this distance for a low line rate.
Procedure
Do not move the monitor during the whole procedure!
1. Reference Luminance (LR)
a. Position the gray reference surface roughly centered on the monitor screen with the gray surface
towards the luminancemeter.
b. Measure the reflected light on the gray surface center: LG.
c. Calculate the reference luminance: LR = LG/RG.
Note 2:
RG is the reflection ratio of the gray surface; this surface shall be clear with no fingerprints.
Note 3:
The measurement can be repeated on the whole surface, so the ratio between the higher and lower
values shall not be more than 2. It could occur when some spot light illuminates the monitor screen.
If it occurs, modify the monitor position or room lighting conditions in agreement with the user.
d. Calculate the ambient illumination: IA: LR x p:
IA is correct only if the gray surface has a lambertian response, so IA shall be between 10 and
50 lux.
e. Record LR and IA on data sheet.
f. Remove the gray surface from the monitor.
2. Luminance of the Switchedoff Phosphore (LP)
a. Power off the monitor, for example by removing its power plug.
b. Measure the phosphor luminance (LP) on the screen center, that means the ambient light diffused
by the screen (see Note 3 above).
CAUTION
This measure concerns only the light which is diffused by the phosphor,
but not the reflection (as a mirror) of light on the CRT glass.
If there are very visible reflection, they MUST be suppressed by
modifying the lighting (suppressing, switching off or moving the lights) or
by moving the monitor (position, tilt).
c. Calculate the monitor screen reflection ratio: RM = LP/LR

Note 4:
RM is a feature of the monitor, it should be less than 10% for a Distar monitor.
11-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 003
4 of 4
d. Power on the monitor and wait some minutes before any other measurement because of the
stabilization time of the monitor.
3. Luminance at Zero Dose (L0) and at Maximum Level (LMAX)
a. Close fully the collimator blades and put a strong filtration in the Xray beam (for example lead
shirt the II entrance plane).
b. Do a short fluoro (1 to 2 s) at manual and minimum mA. Release the fluoro footswitch.
Note 5:
In DLX Technical Menu, the LIH function stores the last fluoro image, so it is not necessary to do
fluoro during all the measurement.
c. Measure the luminance at zero dose (or black level), L0, on the screen center.
d. Adjust the monitor brightness knob to obtain:
L0 = LP x K with:
K = 1.5 for vascular or K = 2 for cardiac.
e. Select the gray 15 (255 LSB) on the DLX Technical Menu and display it.
f. Measure the maximum luminance (LMAX) on the screen center.
g. Adjust the monitor contrast knob to obtain: LMAX = L0 x 150, or, if L0 is less than 1 cd/m2, adjust
LMAX = G x 150 with G = 1.5 for vascular and 2 for cardiac.
h. Repeat steps 2 to 7 you have L0 and LMAX equal to the calculated values.
Note 6:
LMAX can vary between L0 x 120 and L0 x 180 (or G x 120 and G x 180), but must not exceed
360 cd/m2; if that occurs, readjust L0 at a smaller value between LP x 1.2 and LP x 1.5.
i. Record L0 and LMAX on data sheet.
j. Open the collimator blades and remove the filtration from the Xray beam.
4. Luminance at Nominal dose (LN)
a. Place the copper filtration in the Xray beam.
b. Do DLX fluoro in automatic (regulated) mode.
c. Measure the luminance (LN) on the screen center.
Note 7:
If the lighting conditions are good and the monitor has been correctly adjusted, LN should be
between 30 and 40 cd/m2.
If it is not the case, then there might be a misadjustment of video gains.
d. Record LN on data sheet.
11-20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
BRIGHTNESS/CONTRAST ALTERNATIVE
PROCEDURE WITHOUT LUMINANCEMETER
Time:
Job Card RG 004
1 of 6
Version No.: 1
Date: 08/94
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D
None.
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1
Distar Monitor Setup Theory

There are two practical limits to an image displayed on a CRT monitor. One limiting factor is variable,
and is established by the amount of ambient light in the environment surrounding the display. The
amount ambient light reflected from the surface of the display limits how dark black areas of the image
may appear. The BRIGHTNESS control is used to compensate for this limitation.
The other limiting factor is fixed, and relates to how bright you can make white areas of an image
without degrading perceived image clarity. Here, the displayed image is limited by the physics of CRT
technology. The phosphor on the inside surface of the CRT screen can saturate or bloom if it is
driven too hard, and the effect is like using a blunt crayon to draw a picture, as opposed to a sharp pencil.
The CONTRAST control must be set with an understanding of this limitation, to avoid overdriving the
phosphor.
The range of CRT output between the dark and bright limits is called the contrast ratio. The
BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST should be set to achieve the highest overall contrast ratio possible over
a range of room light conditions.
11-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 004
2 of 6
A photocell is used in the Distar monitor to compensate for changes in room lighting by adjusting the
CRT output. This sensor automatically increases the monitor BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST as the
room light increases. Unfortunately, the practical range of control by the sensor is limited by the
saturation point of the CRT phosphor, as described above. Therefore, unless it is properly calibrated, the
automatic sensor cannot compensate for large increases in room light without pushing the CRT beyond
the phosphor saturation limit. The objective of the Distar setup procedure is to find the optimum
monitor settings which take full advantage of the available contrast ratio without allowing the phosphor
to be overdriven.
5.2
Customer Preferences (of displayed images)

Since the BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls on Distar are not easily accessible, it is important to
align them to a setting which will please a majority of users.The set up procedure represents a good
compromise between an ideal (infinite) contrast ratio, and the realworld limitations of the display. Even
so, it may be necessary to deviate from these settings to please the customer.
Generally speaking, there are two categories of customer applications: cardiac/vascular and R&F.
Cardiac/vascular users seem to prefer more overall brightness, so that detail is not lost in dark areas of the
image. They are typically looking at small arteries and guide wires, and want to see detail across all
shades of grey. R&F users seem to prefer higher contrast, even at the risk of losing image detail in dark
areas. They are usually looking at broader parts of anatomy, and want sharp contrast with defined edges.
It is important to get final approval of the monitor settings from actual users at each installation.
5.3
Definitions used in the Procedure

Room Light Conditions:
D
Lowlight: room light dimmed to lowest level for fluoro or other imaging mode.
Highlight: full or maximum room illumination under any circumstances.
Input Signal Conditions (typical values):

D
5.4
A calibrated Xray system will provide 1V pp of terminated video, including 300 mV of sync, 50
mV of blacklevel setup and 650 mV of blacktowhite video.
Adjustments
There are five adjustments used to set up the Distar monitor, located behind the rear door. To simplify
Distar alignment, three of the adjustments have been preset at the factory to accommodate typical
room lighting conditions where the Distar may be installed. If the Distar is installed in a room with an
abnormal lighting situation, site adjustments of all five controls may be necessary. The five adjustments,
and their functions, are described as follows:
D
Site adjustments:
BRIGHTNESS knob:
sets baseline for darkest areas of the displayed image. Set at lowlight conditions so that blanked
monitor raster is just visible.
11-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 004
3 of 6
CONTRAST knob:
sets limit for brightest areas of the displayed image. Set at lowlight conditions for sufficient
(but not maximum) brightness of white areas.
D
Factory preset adjustments:

CEL THRESHOLD post:
establishes a minimum level of ambient light above which the photocell becomes active, to
compensate for changes in room lighting. Set at lowlight conditions so that the LED (located
above the pot) just extinguishes.
CEL BRIGHTNESS pot:
adjusts how accurately the photocell increases the monitor brightness to compensate for a change
in room light. Set at highlight condition so that blanked monitor raster is just visible, and detail
is visible in the darkest areas of the image.
CEL CONTRAST pot:
adjusts the amount of increase in image contrast for a given increase in room light. Set at
highlight condition for brightest image with detail still visible in the brightest areas of the
image.
5.5
Brightness and Contrast Settings

This procedure describes a method for setting the BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST knobs for baseline
performance. Final settings should be based on known customer preference.
1. Fluoro a CV phantom with a screen (#20 mesh) covering part of the lung field. Select 6 field of
view. Locate the apex of the CV phantom near the top of the image, with the abdomen field covering
the central part of the image. Set the Xray system for auto brightness mode, with 80 kV applied.
Be sure that circular blanking is turned on.
Bring in the collimator blades until the displayed image is a square with the corners just touching the
perimeter of the circle.
11-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 004
4 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
MONITOR SCREEN
CV PHANTOM DISPLAYED IMAGE
CTR Screen
Lung
Field
Circular
Blanking
Mesh
Collimator
Blades
Abdomen
Field
Blanked
Raster
2. Set room lights for LowLight. Set CONTRAST knob fully CCW. Adjust the BRIGHTNESS
knob to just visualize the blanked portion of the monitor raster (just outside the perimeter of circular
blanking). In some R&F rooms, it may be preferable to just visualize the collimator blades.
3. Observe the lung field, and set the CONTRAST knob for a sufficient brightness level. The
penetrameter features should remain discernable with the mesh in clear focus. The CONTRAST
should not be set close to the point where the mesh begins to become unclear.
4. Readjust BRIGHTNESS knob, if necessary, to just visualize blanking (or the collimator blades) as
described in Procedure 2 above.
5. Set room lights to Highlight. Verify that the mesh is still in clear focus. Reduce CONTRAST if
necessary.
11-24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

5.6
Job Card RG 004
5 of 6
Cel Pot Adjustments

The CEL BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST and THRESHOLD pots have been factoryset for typical
room lighting conditions. If satisfactory tracking of room light cannot be attained in the room where the
monitor is installed, the CEL BRIGHTNESS and CEL CONTRAST pots may be readjusted by
following the steps of PART 2 below. PART 1 of this procedure must be done first. When making the
following adjustments, do not obstruct or shade the light paths to the CEL light sensor.
1. Set room lights for lowlight condition and adjust CEL THRESHOLD to just extinguish the LED
located just above the pot. Set room lights for highlight conditions. CEL LED should be turned
on.
2. With room lights at highlight condition, set the CEL CONTRAST pot fully CCW. Adjust CEL
BRIGHTNESS pot to just visualize the blanked portion of the monitor raster. For R&F rooms, it may
be preferable to set this pot to just visualize the collimator blades.
3. Observe the lung field, and set the CEL CONTRAST pot so that the image is a bright as is it can be
with the penetrameter features discernable and the mesh in clear focus.
4. Readjust the CEL BRIGHTNESS pot, is necessary, to just visualize blanking as described in
Procedure 6 above.
11-25
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 004
Blank page
11-26
6 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Job Card RG 005
SIZING ADJUSTMENTS FOR LLR LLR VIC

HLR FFD ROT MODELS (15 AND 20)
Time:
Version No.: 1
Date: 08/95
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
Luminancemeter type LS 100 MINOLTA or equivalent.
Gray reference card (2110360).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D
Remove the rear case (see Job Card DR 002).
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
11-27
1 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SIZING ADJUSTMENTS FOR LLR LLR VIC HLR

FFD ROT MODELS (15 AND 20)
Job Card RG 005
2 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
SCAN BOARD - COMPONENT LOCATION
LLR, HLR, FFD ROT, LLR VIC
16
1
15
2
3
14
4
5
13
6
12
11
10
NOTE:
All components may not be
present on all models
11-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Job Card RG 005
3 of 6
TABLE 1
Note:
ITEM
ELEMENT
R25
FUNCTION
HORIZONTAL PHASE (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
R27
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
R35
HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
R31
HORIZONTAL PHASE (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
R48
VERTICAL SIZE (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
R51
VERTICAL FREQUENCY
R60
VERTICAL SIZE (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
R78
HORIZONTAL BLANKING
R74
VERTICAL CENTER LINEARITY
10
R71
HORIZONTAL SIZE
11
R59
NOT USED
12
R45
VERTICAL CENTERING (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
13
R44
VERTICAL CENTERING (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
14
R39
VERTICAL LINEARITY (60 Hz) (120 HZ)
15
R40
VERTICAL LINEARITY (50 Hz) (100 HZ)
16
L1
HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
This monitor has been adjusted at the factory. The adjustments described will normally be
required after a board change.
5.1
LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/FFD ROT. Monitor Adjustments
5.1.1
Sizing Controls Location

Adjustments for positioning, sizing, linearity, frequency, are located on the Scan Board (Ill. 1)
5.1.2
Scan Board Adjustment

See Illustration 1 for component location.
1. Horizontal Blanking:
Connect one probe to TP13 and TP14 and adjust R78 (Table 1, Item 8) so that the pulse on TP14 is
larger than that on TP13 (0.2/0.3 ms) (Ill. 2).
11-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Job Card RG 005
4 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 2
SCAN BOARD (TP13/TP14)
TP 14 CH1
(50V/DIV.)
TP 13 CH2
(2V/DIV.)
1ms/DIV.)
T + 0.2/0.3ms
2. Line Frequency:
Connect the multimeter between TP3 and TP7 and adjust R27 (Table 1, Item 2) (60/120 Hz) or R35
(Table 1, Item 3) (50/100 Hz) to measure 0 mV.
3. Vertical Frequency:
Connect one probe to TP12 and adjust R51 (Table 1, Item 6) to obtain a sawtooth of 4 V
(peaktopeak) amplitude (see Ill. 3).
11-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Job Card RG 005
5 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 3
SCAN BOARD - TP12
TP12 (1V/DIV.)
4V
CH1gnd
4. Horizontal Centering:
Observe the screen so that the image is centered inside the bezel: adjust R31 (Table 1, Item 4)
(50/100 Hz) or R25 (Table 1, Item 1) (60/120 Hz) if necessary.
5. Horizontal Size:
For LLR Boards check if the jumpers are in the right position (TS1/TS2/TS3):
VIDEO FORMAT
4 / 3 or PED
VIC or HLR
JUMPER POSITION
POS. 1
POS. 2
Adjust R71 (Table 1, Item 10) so that the image width equals:
VIDEO
FORMAT
HORIZ. SIZE
(mm)
LLR
LLR-VIC
with graphics
HLR
with graphics
20 50 Hz
360
297
270
337
20 60 Hz
360
297
297
337
15 50 Hz
273
205
205
15 60 Hz
273
225
225
11-31
HLR
DLX
FFDROT
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Job Card RG 005
6 of 6
6. Horizontal Linearity:
a. Adjust L1 (Table 1, Item 16) so that the width of the right half of the image equals the width of
the left half of the image 2 mm.
b. If L1 was modified set the horizontal size again.
7. Vertical Centering:
8. Vertical Size:
Adjust R60 (Table 1, Item 7) (50/100 Hz) or R48 (Table 1, Item 5) (60/120 Hz) to obtain the size
meets the value in the table below:
VIDEO
FORMAT
VERT. SIZE
(mm)
LLR
LLR-VIC
with graphics
HLR
with graphics
20
270
270
270
15
205
205
HLR
DLX
FFDROT
270
205
Adjust R60 (Table 1, Item 7) (50/100 Hz) or R48 (Table 1, Item 5) (60/120 Hz) to obtain the size
meets the value in the table below:
9. Vertical Linearity:
a. Adjust R40 (Table 1, Item 15) (50/100 Hz) or R39 (Table 1, Item 14) (60/120 Hz) so that the
height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom half of the image 1.5 mm.
b. If adjustments were necessary, set the vertical size again.
10. Center Vertical Linearity:
a. Use a cross-hatch pattern.
b. Adjust R74 (Table 1, Item 9) so that the size of a square in the center equals the size of a square
on the sides.
11-32
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Job Card RG 007

Version No.: 1
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Date: 08/95
Time:
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
11-33
1 of 6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Job Card RG 007
2 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
VIDEO BOARD
13
14
12
TABLE 1
ITEM
ELEMENT
R1
HORIZONTAL FOCUS
R2
VERTICAL FOCUS
R5
MAIN FOCUS
R34
G2
R85
POLARIZATION (BLACK LEVEL)
R97
SET-UP COMPENSATION
R96
BRIGHTNESS LIMITATION
R115
MONITOR CONTRAST
R113
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS
10
DS1
LED
11
R109
CEL THRESHOLD
12
R108
CELL BRIGHTNESS
13
R107
CELL CONTRAST
14
R90
CUT-OFF
FUNCTION
11-34
11
10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Note:
5.1
Job Card RG 007
3 of 6
This monitor has been adjusted at the factory.

Video Board Location
Adjustments for set-up level, cut off, G2, focus correction, brightness and contrast limitations, and Cell
correction are located on the Video Board (Ill. 1 and Table 1).
5.2
Video Board Adjustment

1. Input Differential:
Set Switch S1 so that:
DIF position: the video input ground is tied to the chassis ground.
DIF position: the video input ground is insulated from the chassis ground.
2. Set-Up Level (pre-adjustment):
Display a black pattern, connect a probe to TP26 and adjust R97 (Table 1, Item 6) to align the set-up
level pulse in the back porch to the black level (Ill. 2).
Note:
For DLR Monitor, adjust R97 to minimum position (counterclockwise) (Ill. 2).
ILLUSTRATION 2
TP26 - BACK PORCH
For LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/HLR DLX/FFD ROT.

Setup level
Black level
For DLR
Setup level
back porch
Black level
back porch
11-35
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Job Card RG 007
4 of 6
3. Video Amplifier Polarization:

Display a black pattern and verify that the LIGHT SENSOR is not active (LED DS1 (Table 1,
Item 10) OFF). Connect a probe to TP2 and adjust R85 (Table 1, Item 5) to obtain a black level =
69 V (Ill. 3).
Note:
For DLR Monitor, adjust R85 to obtain a black level = 67 V (Ill. 3).
ILLUSTRATION 3
TP2 - BLACK LEVEL
For LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/HLR DLX/FFD ROT.
For DLR
69 V
67 V
4. Set-Up Level (final adjustment) (LLR/LLR VIC/HLR/HLR DLX/FFD ROT only):

Display a black pattern and connect a probe to TP2. Adjust R97 (Table 1, Item 6) and R85 (Table 1,
Item 5) so that the black level stays stable (vary by less than 100 mV) when the Contrast control is
changed from minimum to maximum.
5. G2:
Connect the multimeter in TP19 and adjust R34 (Table 1, Item 4) to obtain 580 V (dc).
6. Cut-Off:
The video cable is disconnecting and the brightness control (Table 1, Item 9) is set to position
3.
In darkroom conditions, adjust R90 (Table 1, Item 14) so that the raster is just visible (0.03 to
0.04 cd/m2).
11-36
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Job Card RG 007
5 of 6
7. Brightness Limit:
The brightness control (Table 1, Item 9) is set to maximumclockwise: in darkroom conditions,
adjust R96 to obtain 10 cd/m2 (Table 1, Item 7).
8. Focus Correction:
It is recommended that the focus be adjusted in low room light condition and a white brightness level
of 250 cd/m2 (Table 1, Item 7).
R1 (Table 1, Item 1) is used to correct horizontal focus.
R2 (Table 1, Item 2) is used to correct vertical focus.
R5 (Table 1, Item 3) provides a global focus correction.
9. Brightness/contrast. Refer to Job Card RG 001, RG 002, RG 003, or RG 004.
11-37
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

VIDEO ADJUSTMENT
Job Card RG 007
Blank page
11-38
6 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Job Card RG 008
1 of 6
Version No.: 1
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY)
Date: 08/95
Time:
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES REQUIRED
D
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D
SECTION 5
TASK DESCRIPTION
5.1
Adjustment for FFD ROT Monitor (Model Number 36004047)

1. Power on the monitor power supply.
2. Execute an image and adjust the deflection unit by hand, to obtain a horizontal image (top edge of
image parallel with top edge of monitor front panel).
3. Move the Rotation Board, to activate Microswitch SW0 (Ill. 1, Item 1).
4. Tighten the three Rotation Board mounting screws (Ill. 1, Item 2).
5. Execute an image rotation command; return the image to the horizontal position (top edge of image
parallel with top edge of monitor front panel).
6. If the image is not horizontal, obtain a horizontal image by adjusting the selflocking screw on
Microswitch SW0 (Ill. 1, Item 1).
7. Repeat these adjustments as necessary.
11-39
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY)
Job Card RG 008
2 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
MONITOR REAR VIEW
5.2
Adjustment for FFD ROT 0 Monitor (Model Number 2126839)
ILLUSTRATION 2
COMPONENT LOCATION
1
2
3
11-40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY)
Job Card RG 008
3 of 6
TABLE 1
Item Component
5.2.1
Function
R+
0 stop, positive direction
0 stop time
R-
0 stop, negative direction
DS1
Negative endoftravel detection
DS2
0 detection
DS3
Positive endoftravel detection
Preliminaries
By convention, when the deflection unit is turned counterclockwise, viewed from the rear of the monitor,
it will be called a positive rotation (R+).
5.2.2
Procedure
D
Power on the monitor.
Turn the deflection unit manually to obtain an image at 0 (top edge of image parallel with top edge
of monitor front panel).
Check that the pulley marker (Ill. 4, Item 1) approximately lines up with the position of the Rotation
Board. If the gap exceeds 5 mm, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the collar screw (Ill. 4, Item 2).
2. Manually hold the Deflection Block.
3. Manually turn the Rotation Board and collar to correct the error.
4. Tighten the collar screw (Ill. 4, Item 2).
Check that Cell DS2 (Ill. 2, Item 5) is located at the center of the disk slot (Ill. 4, Item 3) and
oriented longitudinally. If not, repeat the longitudinal positioning of the Rotation Board using
its mechanical anchoring as follows:
1. Loosen the two screws (Ill. 3, Item 1).
2. Reposition the Rotation Board (Ill. 4, Item 3).
3. Tighten the two screws (Ill. 3, Item 1).
Setting 0 stop (image scanning from right to left):

a. Execute an R+ command for approximately 30 seconds.
b. Execute an R- command, the monitor should stop at 0. If not, turn the R- Potentiometer
(Ill. 2, Item 3).
11-41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY)
Job Card RG 008
Repeat Steps a and b above to optimize the R+ adjustment and obtain a horizontal image.
Setting stop time:
The 0 stop time can be adjusted using Potentiometer 0. Turn and set if necessary.
This stop time is: 1 second.
Setting 0 stop (image scanning from left to right):
4 of 6
a. Execute an R- command for approximately 30 seconds.

b. Execute an R+ command: the monitor should stop at 0. If not, turn the R+ potentiometer (Ill.
2, Item 3).
D
Repeat Steps a and b above to optimize the adjustment and obtain a horizontal image.
11-42
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY)
Job Card RG 008
ILLUSTRATION 3
MONITOR REAR VIEW
ILLUSTRATION 4
MONITOR REAR VIEW
11-43
5 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ROTATION ADJUSTMENT
(FFD ROT ONLY)
Job Card RG 008
Blank page
11-44
6 of 6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
GETTING A USEFUL IMAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Turn off the DSM using the switch above the power cord in the back of the DSM
module. (Do Not Turn Off, on DSM-600 Systems)
Unblank camera by moving switch 3A3S133-4 in the Stenoscop chassis to the
OPEN (DOWN) position, if not already done.
Place video module in manual mode by placing 3A3S133-1 in Stenoscop chassis to
the OPEN (DOWN) position (normal position).
Select manual fluoro mode on Stenoscop console.
Turn off video mask (circular blanking) by moving jumper PL3S1-1 to 2 in the camera
head.
Scope on PL2TP-11 or DSM-J8 (Composite Video). (PL2-TP11 may not be on all
boards).
NOTE: 2VDC offset on video.
Adjust PL2-R7 for black level (set-up) for 50 mV above blanking at PL2-Tp11 or
DSM-J8.
Place 2-mm of copper on the x-ray tube output.
Make fluoro x-rays while adjusting kVp and mA to get approximately 250mV of
video, black level to white at PL2TP11 or DSM-J8.
Place a resolution wedge on the input of the intensifier so that the lines run vertical
(perpendicular to the raster lines).
While making fluoro x-ray, adjust the video focus on the Scan/Converter/ Focus
board PL5-R10 for best resolution on the monitor.
IMAGE MECHANICAL CENTERING

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DSM still off. (Do Not Turn Off, on DSM-600 Systems).

Video Mask (circular blanking) still off (PL3S1-2).
Select 50kV, manual mode.
Adjust mA values to get a non-saturated image.
Check that the image from the II is centered on the pickup tube target. To visualize
this, the black mask must be adjusted outside of the target area.
Adjust PL3-R6 CCW to open the black mask outside of the target.
11-45
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8

R7
TP10
TP11
TP8
R6
R9
R8
R10
R5
R2
R1
TP1
R3
TP2
TP9
TP3
TP12
TP13
TP4
J2
TP6
R12
R4
R11
TP5 TP7
11-46
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6.
The centering adjustment can be made by loosening the 3 screws on 9" sys.;
4 screws on 6" sys., holding the camera body to the camera lens assembly.
Move the camera body so that II output is centered in the pick-up tube target.
See ILL 2.
7.
Tighten screws when aligned.
NOTE: The Black Mask may have to be adjusted out so that the edge of the target can be
seen. This adjustment is PL3-R6.
II TUBE
OUTPUT
PICKUP TUBE
TARGET
ILLUSTRATION 2
8.
Readjust camera size and centering on the Scan Converter/Focus board PL5 for a
useful image (preliminary adjustment)
PL5-R5 Vertical size
R1 Vertical center (normal)
R6 Horizontal size
R9 Horizontal center (normal)
* Note on D6 System may be reverse.
11-47
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
J1
J1
TP
11
TP1
TP
10
TP
10
TP1
TP8
TP8
J6
J6
TP2
J3
TP2
TP9
R1
J3
TP9
R1
J2
R11
R8
R7
TP3
R10
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
J2
R9
R8
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R9
TP3
TP4
TP5
R7
TP4
J4
TP5
TP7
TP6
J4
TP6
PL1 POWER SUPPLY

45560563
PL1 POWER SUPPLY

45202778
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
11-48
TP7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
IMAGE TUBE FOCUS AND SIZE CHECK
1.
DSM still off. (Only on DSM-200)
2.
Select manual fluoro on Stenoscop console, 50kVp, normal field of view for 9" image
systems. PL3-S1 in position 2, (circle blanking still off).
3.
For center focus adjustment and edge focus adjustment, place an RMI resolution
screen or equivalent at the input to the image intensifier. For sizing adjustments, use
the sizing gauge from an IET or Focaligner.
4.
Remove lower intensifier trim cover with grid installed.
CAUTION: THIS WILL LEAVE THE INPUT OF THE INTENSIFIER EXPOSED. TAKE CARE
WHEN WORKING AROUND THE IMAGE TUBE FACE.
5.
Place 1mm of copper on the x-ray tube output.
6.
Press the fluoro footswitch and adjust manual mA just sufficient to visualize the
resolution screen.
G1-G2 EDGE & CENTER FOCUS

7.
Check G2 image tube center focus. If necessary, adjust PL1-R5 for best center
focus
8.
Check adjustment for best edge focus on the monitor by adjusting PL1-R8. Verify by
measuring drive voltage at PL1-TP6.
NOTE: For D9 systems with `HP' image tubes AND power supply board PL1, 45560563, do the
following:
A.
Select MAG mode on Stenoscop console.
B.
Adjust R6 for best center focus as seen on the monitor.
C.
Adjust R10 for best edge focus.
G3-SIZE
NOTE: It will be necessary to readjust G1 edge focus and G2 center focus after adjusting G3 size
as they are interactive.
9.
Select normal FOV (for 9" II)
10.
Place PL3-S1 in position 2 (turns off video mask (circular blanking))
11.
Check image tube sizing with gauge at the II input of grid.

For 9 image tubes; Input should be 210mm.
For 6 image tubes; Input should be 144mm.
Adjust PL1R2 for proper size on monitor, if necessary.
11-49
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
J1
J1
TP
11
TP1
TP
10
TP
10
TP1
TP8
TP8
J6
J6
TP2
J3
TP2
TP9
R1
J3
TP9
R1
J2
R11
TP3
R8
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
J2
R9
R8
R10
TP4
TP5
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R9
TP3
TP4
J4
TP5
TP7
TP6
J4
TP6
PL1 POWER SUPPLY

45560563
PL1 POWER SUPPLY

45202778
11-50
TP7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
FOR 9" IMAGE TUBES.......

12.
Select MAG mode on Stenoscop console.
13.
Sizing gauge still attached to input of image tube.
14.
Check image tube sizing with gauge. Input should be 152mm. Fluoro and adjust
PL1-R3 for correct size.
15.
Recheck center focus. If necessary, adjust PL1-R6 for best center focus.
For units with 'HP' image tubes AND power supply board 45560563, recheck edge
focus (PL1-R10).
NOTE: PL1-R4 and R7 are not used.

Adjustment
9" Normal & 6"
9" Mag Mode
G1 - Edge Focus
PL1-R8
PL1-R10*
G2 - Center Focus
PL1-R5
PL1-R6
G3 - Size
PL1-R2
PL1-R3
*Only on Power Supply Boards 45560563
11-51
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R7
TP10
TP11
TP8
R6
R9
R8
R10
R5
R2
R1
TP1
R3
TP2
TP9
TP3
TP12
TP13
TP4
J2
TP6
R12
R4
R11
TP5 TP7
11-52
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
BEAM ALIGNMENT
1.
For D9 units, unbolt image tube high voltage power supply from image tube casting
(3 screws). (DO NOT DISCONNECT WIRES FROM IMAGE TUBE)
2.
Install a jumper between PL5-TP12 to TP13.
3.
Fluoro. The bright spot should be centered within the larger blurred spot.
4.
Adjust the tabs on the neck of the pickup tube to center the bright spot within
the target. For 9" image systems, it may be necessary to remove the TV camera and
the shield to get at the tabs if adjustment is required. See note below.
5.
Remove the jumper, reassemble the TV camera and image tube power supply.
NOTE: For D9 systems, if it is necessary to remove the camera for the beam adjustment, do
the following;
A.
Turn off power to the Stenoscop. Remove cable at PL1-XJ4 to HV power supply &
PL1-XJ1 main cable from Stenoscop chassis.
B.
Remove 4 cap screws holding the lens assembly and iris to the image head casting.
Lift the camera straight up.
C.
Reconnect main cable to PL1-XJ1.
D.
Turn on power to the Stenoscop.
E.
Carefully adjust the tabs for results in step 3. Make sure jumper is still installed. The
should be enough room light to produce the spot on the monitor.
F.
When complete, remove the jumper and reassemble the camera and connectors.
11-53
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8

R7
TP10
TP11
TP8
R6
R9
R8
R10
R5
R2
R1
TP1
R3
TP2
TP9
TP3
TP12
TP13
TP4
J2
TP6
R12
R4
R11
TP5 TP7
11-54
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SIZE AND CENTERING-NORMAL AND REVERSE
1.
Turn on DSM.
2.
In the camera, place PL3S1 to position 2 VIDEO MASK (circular blanking) off, if not
already done.
3.
Select Vertical and Horizontal NORMAL scan on Stenoscop console.
4.
On DSM console, enter the service mode by pressing G, M, A simultaneously.

Select 2-QI (Image Quality). Then select M-pattern. Then select 1-CENTERING.
A circle and crosshairs will appear. This is used to adjust the camera image position
in relation to the DSM acquisition window. See ILL. 3.
DSM CENTERING
PATTERN
ILLUSTRATION 3
4.
5.
While making fluoro x-rays, adjust the following size and centering pots to coincide
with the circle generated from the DSM:
PL5-R5
Vertical size
PL5-R1
Vertical center (normal)
PL5-R6
Horizontal size
PL5-R9
Horizontal center (normal)
Select Vertical and Horizontal reverse on the Stenoscop console. Adjust the following
pots to center the image with the circle generated by the DSM:
PL5-R2
Vertical Center-Reverse
PL5-R8
Horizontal Center-Reverse
6.
Leave PL3S1 in pos. 2 (circle blanking off), for now.
7.
Turn off the DSM at the back of the DSM module.
11-55
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8

R7
TP10
TP11
TP8
R6
R9
R8
R10
R5
R2
R1
TP1
R3
TP2
TP9
TP3
TP12
TP13
TP4
J2
TP6
R12
R4
R11
TP5 TP7
11-56
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
BEAM ADJUST
Standby Mode
1.
Move 3A3S133-3 to the OPEN (DOWN) position.
2.
1mm copper in x-ray beam.
3.
Select manual fluoro mode on Stenoscop console.
4.
Scope on PL3-TP12 (preamp out), Sync and Mask board.
5.
Fluoro and adjust mA and kVp to get 500mV of video at TP12. (If this cannot be
reached, adjust Standby bias pot PL5-R4, Scan/Converter/Focus board, until video
level is restored).
6.
Adjust PL5-R4 until video is clipped to 400mV at PL3-TP12. Stop fluoro when
complete.
7.
Return switch 3A3S133-3 to the CLOSED (UP) position.
Normal Mode
THESE STEPS MUST BE DONE AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE AS DAMAGE CAN OCCUR
TO THE PICK-UP TUBE.
1.
Set up is same as steps 2-4, above.
NOTE:
Remove copper filter if beam current can be reached.
2.
Fluoro and adjust mA and kVp to 1600mV at PL3-TP12

(preamp video) Sync and Mask board. (If this cannot be reached, adjust
Normal bias pot PL5-R11, Scan/Converter/Focus board, until video level is
restored).
3.
Adjust PL5-R11 so that video is just clipped to 1500mV. Stop fluoro when complete.
FINAL FOCUS
1.
1mm copper on x-ray tube output.
2.
RMI resolution screen at image tube input.
50kVp, manual fluoro mode, normal FOV.
4.
Loosen TV lens locking screw (6" II only) CAUTION: DO NOT MISTAKE IMAGE
TUBE LENS FOR THE TV LENS.
5.
For D9, get access to the lens adjustment by removing 1 screw from the trap door on
lens mount and swing trap door out of the way.
6.
Fluoro and adjust lens for best center resolution.
7.
Touch up camera focus by adjusting PL5-R10 Scan/Converter/Focus board for best

focus as seen on the monitor.
8.
Tighten TV lens locking screw or replace trap door and screw.
11-57
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
11-58
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
MASK ADJUSTMENTS-The following roundness adjustment sets the roundness for all masks.
VIDEO MASK (Circular Blanking)
NOTE: In this procedure, the images may not line up exactly on both monitors with
the pattern on the DSM. This is normal. Align the system using the live monitor.
1.
Turn on DSM , depress `GMA' simultaneously. Select `2 QI'; select `M Pattern' and
select centering pattern 1.
2.
Jumper PL3-S1 to position 1 (circular blanking on).
3.
On the PL3 Sync and Mask board adjust the following pots so that the circle is just
inside the DSM circle by 1-2mm (increasing brightness and contrast on the monitor
will aid in visualizing the video mask.)
R1
Horizontal center
R2
Vertical center
R3
H/V ratio (roundness)
R4
Video mask diameter

(circle size)
X-RAY MASK (ABC & AGC WINDOW SIZE)

1.
Jumper PL3-S1 and S2 to position 2. A black circle will appear in the center of the
image. See ILL. 4.
2.
Adjust PL3-R5, ABC window size, to 40% of image diameter approx. 108mm
+/-5mm (4.25in +/-.2in).
3.
Reset jumper PL3-S2 to position 1 (ABC window off).
108mm
X-RAY MASK ADJUSTMENT

ILLUSTRATION 4
11-59
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
11-60
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
BLACK MASK ADJUSTMENT (Dark Current Clamp)
1.
Turn off DSM. (Only on DSM-200)
2.
Jumper PL3-S1 to position 2 (circle blanking off, dark current clamp on), if not
already done.
3.
Adjust PL3-R6, black mask diameter, so that mask is 5mm from the inside of the
pickup tube edge. To visualize, adjust R6 so that the edge of the pickup tube can be
seen, then adjust 5mm in from pickup tube edge. See ILL. 5.
II TUBE OUTPUT
BLACK MASK
PICKUP TUBE TARGET
ILLUSTRATION 5
4.
Return jumper PL3-S1 to position 1 (circle blanking on).
11-61
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP
4
TP
3
J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
R3
R4
TP
12
TP
6
S3
S1
J2
TP
10
S2
TP
11
TP
9
R7
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
11-62
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
BLACK LEVEL AND GAIN ADJUSTMENT
1.
Eliminate stray light input by covering the image head with a black cloth.
2.
Place 2mm of copper in the x-ray beam.
3.
Connect scope channel 1 to PL3-TP12 (preamp video).
4.
Select manual fluoro approximately 0.3mA & 75 kVp at Stenoscop console.
5.
During fluoro, fine adjust mA for 150mV in at PL3-TP12 (preamp video).
6.
During fluoro, check that back porch is aligned with the black level of the pick-up
tube. If not, adjust PL2-R1 Video Board (offset/black level) for correct alignment.
See Ill. 6, below.
NOTE:
Bring in collimator so you can see setup level easier.
BLACK LEVEL OFFSET

CORRECTLY ADJUSTED
BLACK LEVEL OFFSET

MISADJUSTED
ILLUSTRATION 6
Video Gain
1.
Scope channel 1 on PL3-TP12 (preamp video), scope channel 2 to PL1-TP11 or
DSM-J8 (camera video) in the back of the DSM.
2.
Force camera operation in automatic gain mode by placing 3A3133-1 in

Stenoscop chassis to the CLOSED (UP) position. This places the camera in the
auto mode for AGC (not to be confused with Auto mode for fluoro ABC.).
3.
Select manual mode on console. 2mm copper still on x-ray tube.
4.
Fluoro at 75kVp and approximately 0.3mA to obtain 150mV (if not already done) at
PL3-TP12. Fine adjust video level with mA. See ILL. 7.
5.
Adjust PL2-R6 Video Board for a video output at DSM-J8 (camera video) for
250mV black to white. (DSM Density=102 (94-114)).
6.
Return 3A3S133-1 to the OPEN (DOWN) position.
The DSM can be used to determine correct adjustment of TV camera video levels. In the QI mode, select ROI and
draw a small box in the center of the image. Note that the cursor only moves in the top half of the image. Follow the
ROI prompts on the monitor. The average density is displayed in the upper right corner of the monitor. If an
adjustment is made to the video level, fluoro again for 3 seconds. Then redraw the ROI box to obtain a new density
reading.
11-63
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP
4
TP
3
J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
R3
R4
TP
12
TP
6
S3
S1
J2
TP
10
S2
TP
11
TP
9
R7
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
11-64
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
150mV
250mV
DSM J8
VIDEO
PL3TP12
PREAMP VIDEO
ILLUSTRATION 7
Manual Gain Contrast

1.
With 3A3S133-1 in the OPEN (DOWN) position, fluoro at 75kVp and adjust mA to
obtain 150mV (if not already done) at PL3-TP12.
2.
Video output at DSM-J8 (camera video) , should be approximately 250mV
+/-25mV.
3.
If not, adjust PL2-R5 on Video Board for 250mV +/-25mV black to white at
DSM-J8. (DSM Mean Density=102 (94-114)).
NOTE: With setup of 50mV.
Verify Maximum AGC Gain
1.
Scope channel 1 still at PL3-TP12.
2.
3A3A133-1 in Stenoscop chassis in CLOSED (UP) position.
3.
While still in the manual mode, fluoro and adjust mA to obtain 20 mV at PL3-TP12
(preamp video)
4.
Video output at DSM-J8 (camera video) should be approximately 200mV.
Verify with the DSM Mean Density of 68-92.
Do not adjust max gain pot PL2-R2.
5.
Return 3A3S133-1 to the OPEN (DOWN) position. (This is the normal operating
position for this switch).
Black Level
1.
Scope still on J8 in back of DSM.
2.
Place Stenoscop in manual mode (Min KvP & mA) on operators console.
3.
Turn off circle blanking by moving PL3S1 to position 2.
4.
Adjust PL2-R7 on Video board for a black level of 50 mV.
(DSM Mean Density 17 (13-23) in QI mode).
50 MV
BLACK LEVEL SET-UP

ILLUSTRATION 8
11-65
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TP TP
2 1
R1
TP
4
TP
3
J1
R5
R6
R2
TP
8
TP
7
R3
R4
TP
12
TP
6
S3
S1
J2
TP
10
S2
TP
11
TP
9
R7
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
11-66
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Gamma Correction (white clip & HLDE)
1.
Scope channel 1 on PL3-TP12 (preamp video), channel 2 on J8 in back of DSM

(composite video).
2.
During fluoro, adjust kV and mA for PL3-TP12 output of 1200mV +/- 50mV.
3.
Video level at DSM-J8 should be 625mV +/-25mV black to white. See ILL. 9. If
necessary, adjust PL2-R4. (DSM Mean Density= 238 (230-248).
NOTE: IF THIS ADJUSTMENT DOES NOT PRODUCE THE EXPECTED RESULTS, IT WILL
BE NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE PL2 VIDEO PREAMP SHIELD TO INSPECT JUMPERS
PL2-S2 & S3. Jumpers PL2-S2 to position 1 and PL2-S3 to position 1, Gamma
Correction ON.
625mV
1200mV
PL3TP12
PREAMP VIDEO
DSM J8
Video
ILLUSTRATION 9
11-67
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
R4
TP11
R6
J1
TP12
R5
TP4
TP13
R3
TP9
TP10
TP3
TP2
TP1
R1
J2
TP5
S1
TP6
1
R2
S2
TP7
TP8
P2
R1
P1
R2
XJ1
J1
16CM IRIS (D6 & LE)
22CM IRIS (D9)
11-68
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000 Job Card RG 20

Purpose:
1 of 4
Version No.: 00
AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM

ADJUSTMENT.
Date: May 1993
Time: 2 H.
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
Double beam Oscilloscope, double time base.
3 cm of plastic material (polyamide or polyethylene)
2 mm of Aluminium.
2 mm of copper.
0,8 mm of copper.
1 plastic tray.
2 PRELIMINARY REMARK
This procedure is valid for the 828 970 G 015 MINUTERIE board
3 ADJUSTMENT PREREQUISITE
The image system must be correctly and completely adjusted. (See IMEX of the imager and the monitor) .
The Xray head cover must be in place.
4 ADJUSTMENTS
4.1 XRAY EMISSION REFERENCE

Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the Xray head.
Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.b9 (cde RX)
On the control console :
select FLUORO MANUAL mode
select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)
if unit is equiped with a 22 cm imager, the ZOOM mode must not be selected.
Select 75 kV
Initiate Fluoro and select mA parameters in order to read on the measure device a value of 2,35 +/ 0,15
Volts
(control RX value).
Note mA and kV values :
there 2 values determines the reference rate of Xray emission
4.2 DOSE REFERENCE

Place a 2 mm copper absorption at the outlet of the XRay head.
Connect an oscilloscop on 3A5.A82.6 operational amplifier
On the control console :
select MANUAL FLUORO mode
select HIGH DEFINITION FLUORO (HLC)
select mA and kV values corresponding to the Xray emission reference (see 4.1)
Initiate FLUORO and adjust 3A5.R65 in order to read on the measure device an average value of 0 +/ 10
mV.
11-69
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

11-70
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 20
2 of 4
4.3 LOOP GAIN PREADJUSTMENT

Preadjust the potentiometers :
3A5.R67 fully CCW (zero hysteresis)
3A5.R60 fully CW (min. phase adjustment)
3A5.R66 mid range
Connect an oscilloscop
Probe A 3A5.a7
Trigger Ext. DC + to 3A5b8

Select Automatic Fluoro, standard Fluoro
With an absorption requiring a VHv included between 105 and 110 kV; adjust 3A5.R66 in order to obtain
a rise time of VHV of 0,55 sec.
Observe the analog kV signal at the A7 output of 3A5 by taking only vhv buildup time into consideration and
leaving stabilization problems to a later stage.
4.4 PHASE LEAD AND LOOP GAIN ADJUSTMENT

IMPORTANT remark concerning stability adjustments for the scope regulation loop :
Water and plastic are ideal (polyamide or polyethylene) for phantom absorption.
The regulation loop is less stable when a copper phantom is used.
Variation in image signal output in response to a kV variation will be much ronger for copper than for an
organic tissue equivalent material.
If regulation loop adjustment is carried out under very strict conditions, a weaker loop gain is chosen to
obtain a response with sufficient stability.
This adjustment using copper obtains a slower response speed than that obtained using an organic
substance.
11-71
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

11-72
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 20
3 of 4
PHASE ADJUSTMENT
Connect an oscilloscop
Probe 3A5.b9
Trigger EXT. DC + to 3A5.b8
With the same absorption determined in 4.3, adjust 3A5.R60 in order to obtain image without overshoot of
the control RX signal.
Select absorption in order to obtain a HV regulation of about 60 kV.
Observe control RX signal on 3A5.b9 and correct if necessary gain adjustment (R66) and phase adjustment
(R60) in order to obtain an image without oscillation and with a maximum glare displayed by an overshoot of
33% max.
Then check that high kV regulation takes place in a sufficiently short period : T2 = 1000 msec max.
Check that the value of control RX signal is included between 95 and 105% of nominal value after 1000 msec
of the beginning of the Xray exposure with different absorptions, in FLUORO and HIGH DEFINITION
FLUORO mode and AUTOMATIC mode.
Check that low kV regulation occurs without oscillation.
Only one positive overshoot of the RX control signal corresponding to monitor glare is accepted.
Maximum acceptable glare is characterized by a 50% overshoot of the RX control signal for a regulation
(45 +/ 1) kV.
4.5 HYSTERESIS ADJUSTMENT

Purpose of the Hysteresis circuit
The automatic control finds the kV/mA pair to which the RX control signal (Monicon camera output), equal to
the reference signal (i.e. zero signal error), corresponds.
The kV/mA variations are discrete and in order to avoid continuous flutter around the equilibrium value, a hysteresis defining a zone without corrections of XRays intensity is needed.
Hysteresis values must be limited to those that are truly useful in order to obtain an easily duplicated operating point.
The results of an automatic control mechanism correction are greater at low kV because the increments are
constant over kV, due to the kV/mA linkage principle.
Hysteresis value adjustment :

3A5 R67 will be adjusted to obtain a potential difference of 1.75 Volt at the potentiometer terminals.
11-73
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 20
4 of 4
4.6 AGC DELAY ADJUSTMENT

Remark : the AGC of the TV Chain only works in the automatic mode of fluoroscopy, if the 110 kV limit has
been reached and after one delay adjusted by means of 3A3.R239.
The correct adjustment of this delay (3A3R239) when the AGC circuit is activitated, as soon the video signal
corresponding to the maximum of radiation (110 kV) is stabilized.
Nominal adjustment : 1020 msec +/ 20 msec.
Displayed Auto kV = 110 kV
Cde RX
Absorption = 7 mm Cu
3A5 b9
Displayed kV AUTO = 110

kV
t
AGC
3A3 a32
t0 + t
t0
4.7 OPERATION CHECK

Check the correct operation of the automatic control using different filters and varying amounts of water in the
tray, for different absorption values, characterized by :
appearance of image without abnormal glare (see 4.4) and without apparent oscillation,
the constancy of radiologic stabilization date of the automatic control for successive scope operations with
identical absorption,
modification of radiologic date due to automatic control, for small variations in absorption.
11-74
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
828 978 G025
11-75
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DOSE CALIBRATION
1.
Place 2mm of copper at x-ray tube output.
2.
Center rate meter probe at image tube input against the grid.
3.
Select 75 kVp, manual mode at Stenoscop console.
4.
Scope channel 1 on PL3-TP12 (Sync & Mask bd.) horizontal rate and 10 mV/div. in
center of waveform.
LOW DOSE
HIGH QUALITY
D6
3.4mR/min +/- .3 (203mR/hr)
6.75 mR/min +/- .6 (405 R/hr)
D9
1.8mR/min +/- .25 (108mR/hr)
3.5 mR/min +/- .35 (210 R/hr)
LE
4.5 +/- .4 (270mR/hr)
NOT APPLICABLE
9" (22CM)II Systems

1.
Select normal FOV. Normal fluoro, (low dose) at Stenoscop console.
2.
During fluoro, adjust mA values for 1.8mR/Min +/-.25 (0.108R/HR.+/-0.015).

(Note: 1.8 mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 1.3mR/min (0.076R/HR) behind
the grid if the ratio is 10:1.).
3.
Note the mA value at this dose and remove the probe.
4.
Adjust pot P1 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
High-Quality Fluoro
1.
Select HQ Fluoro at Stenoscop console.
2.
During fluoro, adjust mA values for 3.5 mR/min

+/-.25 (0.21R/HR. +/-0.015.)
(Note: 3.5 mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 2.45mR/min (0.147R/HR.)
behind grid if ratio is 10:1)
3.
Note mA value at this dose and remove the probe.
4.
Adjust pot P2 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
6"(16CM) II Systems
1.
Select normal Fluoro (low dose) at Stenoscop console.
2.
During fluoro, adjust mA values for 3.4mR/Min +/-.25 (0.204R/HR. +/-.015).

(Note: 3.4mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 2.55mR/min
(0.153R/HR) behind the grid if the ratio is 8:1.).
3.
4.
Adjust pot R2 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
High-Quality Fluoro
1.
Select HQ Fluoro at Stenoscop console.
2.
During fluoro, adjust mA values for 6.75mR/min +/-0.3(0.405R/HR
+/-0.018).
(Note: 6.75mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 5.1mR/min (0.306R/HR.)
behind grid if ratio is 8:1)
3.
Note mA value at this dose and remove the probe..
4.
Adjust pot R1 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at
PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask board.
11-76
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP LE
1.
During fluoro, adjust mA values for 4.5mR/Min +/-.3 (0.27R/HR. +/-.018).

(Note: 4.5mR/min in front of the grid corresponds to 3.38mR/min (0.203R/HR)
behind the grid if the ratio is 8:1.).
2.
Adjust pot R2 on the Iris board to obtain 150mV at PL3-TP12 of Sync and Mask
board.
Check jumpers for normal operating position as listed in appendix A.
Reinstall preamp shielding, if previously removed. Close up the TV camera, check that
all connectors and grounds are connected properly and install trim covers.
Blank TV camera with switch 3A3S133-4 in the Stenoscop, to CLOSED (UP) position.
PERFORM AUTOMATIC FLUORO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS IN THE STENOSCOP MANUAL.
11-77
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
APPENDIX A
SWITCHES AND ADJUSTMENTS
*NORMAL POSITION
PL1-POWER SUPPLY AND INTERCONNECTION BOARD
ADJ/SW SETTING
NAME
FUNCTION
PL1-S1
1-4 STENOSCOP
1-3 IMAGEUR R/F
ROUTES ABS VIDEO SIGNAL

DEPENDING ON USE.
R1
SUPPLY ADJUST
ADJUSTS 18VDC SUPPLY
R2
VG3/N
IMAGE SIZE
R3
VG3/L1
IMAGE SIZE-MAG 1 (9" ONLY)
R4
VG3/L2
IMAGE SIZE-MAG2 (NOT USED)
R5
VG2/N
CENTER FOCUS-NORM
R6
VG2/L1
CENTER FOCUS-MAG 1 (9")
R7
VG2/L2
CENTER FOCUS-MAG 2
NOT USED
R8
VG1
EDGE FOCUS
R9
AGC DELAY
R10
VG1/L1
EDGE FOCUS-MAG 1**
R11
VG1/L2
**PRESENT ON PL1 BOARD 45560563 ONLY
EDGE FOCUS-MAG 2**
PL2 VIDEO PREAMP

ADJ/SW SETTING
NAME
FUNCTION
S1
CLAMP ON/OFF
1 - ON*
2 - OFF
S2
HLDE
HIGH LEVEL DETAIL
ENHANCEMENT
1 - ON*
2 - OFF
S3
GAMMA
1 - ON* (WHITE CLIP)

2 - OFF
S4
BLACK LEVEL COMP
OPEN-SERVICE
SHORTED-ON*
R1
OFFSET/BLACK LEVEL
ADJ PICKUP TUBE BLACK LEVEL
R2
MAXIMUM GAIN
R3
GAIN COMP ADJUST
DO NOT ADJUST!!
BANDWIDTH
R4
WHITE CLIP LEVEL &

GAMMA CORRECTION
ADJUST MAX VIDEO OUTPUT TO

MONITORS
R5
MANUAL GAIN
ADJ. VIDEO GAIN IN MANUAL

MODE
R6
AGC OUTPUT LEVEL
ADJ VIDEO GAIN IN AUTO MODE
R7
BLACK LEVEL ADJUST
ADJ. BLACK LEVEL IN

COMPOSITE VIDEO
CG1
BF (STREAK)
CG2
HF (BANDWIDTH)
11-78
DO NOT ADJUST !!
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
*NORMAL POSITION
PL3-SYNC AND MASK BOARD
ADJ/SW SETTING
NAME
FUNCTION
S1
VIDEO MASK
(CIRCULAR BLANKING)
1 - CIRCLE ON*
2 - BLACK MASK ON
S2
ABC/AGC WINDOW
1 - SERVICE WINDOW OFF*

2 - SERVICE WINDOW ON
R1
HORIZONTAL CENTERING
CIRCLE CENTERING H.
R2
VERTICAL CENTERING
CIRCLE CENTERING V.
R3
H/V
CIRCLE ROUNDNESS
R4
CIRCULAR BLANKING SIZE
CIRCLE SIZE
R5
AGC WINDOW SIZE
ABS WINDOW SIZE
R6
BLACK WINDOW SIZE
ADJ. BLACK MASK
PL5-SCAN/CONVERTER/FOCUS BOARD
ADJ/SW SETTING
NAME
FUNCTION
S1
LOW/HIGH BEAM
1 - NORMAL*
2 - TEST
R1
VERTICAL CENTER-NORM
R2
VERTICAL CENTER-REV
R3
G2 ADJUST
R4
BEAM-STANDBY
R5
VERTICAL SIZE
R6
HORIZONTAL SIZE
R7
R8
HORZ. CENTER-REV
R9
HORZ. CENTER-NORM
R10
FOCUS
ADJ. FOCUS COIL CURRENT
R11
BEAM-NORMAL
BEAM DISCHARGE LEVEL
R12
TARGET ADJUST
ADJ. TARGET VOLTAGE

0V TO 80V RANGE
300V ADJUST G2
STENOSCOP CHASSIS - 3A3-S133

S133-A
AGC SERVICE SWITCH
CLOSED-SERVICE CAL
OPEN-NORMAL*
S133-B
REDUCE POWER
CLOSED-REDUCED PWR (120V)

OPEN-NORM. PWR (220V)
S133-C
LOW BEAM SET-UP
CLOSED-NORMAL*
OPEN-TEST
S133-D
VIDEO UNBLANK
CLOSED-NORMAL*
OPEN-UNBLANKS CAMERA
11-79
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
11-80
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 12 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12-1 STENOSCOP CONSOLE REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12-2 STENOSCOP LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12-3 REVIEW OF STENOSCOP COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-7
12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11

12-5 DSM 200/600 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12-6 DISTAR PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12-7 DSM 200/600 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-8 STENOSCOP 120V LINE PLUG MEMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12-9 SN 4011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12-10 SN 4018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12-11 SN 4024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12-12 LASER TRACK ADD-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
12-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-1 STENOSCOP CONSOLE REFERENCE
Exposure
FL & RAD
Power OFF
C" Arm (up-down)
Power
OFF
Exposure
Heat
Indicator
FL-rest
flash 4'30"
FL interrupt
after 5 min.
Rad
ER
HL-fl
(HQ)
Pulsed FL
Standard
FL
Heat
Inidcator
ON (Ready)
FL timer (99 min)
Reset
Opaque
Coll.
NOT ON
6000/9000
KV
Monitor
(FL&Rad) Image H&V
reversal
MAS = Rad
MA = FL
ON = FL (man)
OFF = FL (auto)
Monitor
Image
Rotation
Coll.
Rotation
Stenoscop 6/9
Reduced
Circular
Field
Blocked
Memory
Same Functions as on U.S. Stenoscop

except where indicated
Stenoscop LE Version
12-3
Semi
transparant
Coll.
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Gamma (1,2,3)
Image Reverse H&V (5,6)
Anti Bloom
Noise Red
Filter
Split Screen
Image Transfer (8,9)

Formatter (film copy)
Scroll Monitor A
(14, 17)
Magnify x2
Store Image
(15, 18)
Scroll Monitor B
(13, 16)
Remote Console
Store 26 FL images
Subtraction
Edge Enhance
Annotation
On Monitor A (9)
Memory (10)
Store (11)
Cursor move
Cursor
Peak opacification
Reset
remove 6 stored
images in RAM
Road Map
Filter coeff selection
DSM Console
Illustration 12-1
12-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-2 STENOSCOP LE
The following additional information is provided on the Stenoscop LE Version. The LE System is not sold in the U.S.
but is available in Europe and Asia. Since students from these areas may from time to time participate in Stenoscop
training in the U.S. the following enumerates some of the difference between the LE & U.S. Stenoscop.
Refer to Illustration 12-1
Exposure key 1, when depressed to initiate an x-ray exposure, will not activate an audiable alarm as on the U.S.
Stenoscop.
Key 21 reduces the x-ray field to 11cm. There are no keys available to activate opaque and semi-transparant
collimators as on the U.S. version.
Key 11 selects what is called Blacked Memory". When the Key is depressed the memorized image cannot be
renewed. Therefore the memo image can be compared with subsequent live images.
The LE system does not use the DSM for image processing. It employs what is referred to as a DR Processor". The
Processor is capable of storing only one image. The 200 image hard disk or Image Port Processor used with the U.S.
System cannot be used on the LE. Also the U.S. type Monitor Cart cannot be added to the LE.
The LE has no provision for a video tape recorder, and cannot use a Stand Alone" Monitor Cart as is available with
the U.S. Stenoscop.
The LE has no provision for adding an x-ray exposure handswitch.
Orbital rotation of the C Arm" is 115_ .
With the DR Processor the pixel display format is 768 pixels/line, 576 lines/frame with an 8 bit grey scale.
In the manual mode, kV & mA can be independently selected but limited by curve 6 (On page 12-6)
12-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COURBES kV mA
kV mA CURVES
ILLUSTRATION 12
7.0 mA
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.85
3.9
3.0
2.
7
2.0
2.3
1.4
1.0
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 kV
Note: in normal mode the curves 3 4 6 are references.

The other curves are rules giving relation between kV and mA
LEGENDES DES COURBES
COURBES
CURVES
MODE
POUR / FOR
STENOSCOP 2
PUISSANCE MAX
MAX POWER
Scopie Auto Mode Normal

Auto Fluoro Normal Mode
D6 + D9
6000 + 9000
253 W
Scopie Auto Mode Haute Qualit

Auto Fluoro High Quality Mode
D6 +D9
6000 + 9000
500 W
Scopie Mode Manuel

Fluoro Man. Mode
D6 + D9
6000 + 9000
500 W
Scopie Scur. Thermique

Fluoro Thermal Safety
D6 + D9
6000 + 9000
154 W
Scopie Auto
Auto Fluoro
LE
300 W
Scopie Mode Manuel

Fluoro Man. Mode
LE
300 W
12-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-3 REVIEW OF STENOSCOP COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
12-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP 6000/9000 SERIES PRODUCT MATRIX

6000
6600
9000
9600
9600 ANGIO
16 cm/6 in. II
16 cm/6 in. II
22 cm/9 in. II
22 cm/9 in. II
22 cm/9 in. II
One flicker-free
monitor
Two flicker-free
monitors
Two flicker-free
monitors
Two flicker-free
monitors
Two flicker-free
monitors
8 image RAM
memory
600 image
permanent memory
8 image RAM
memory
600 image
permanent memory
600 image
permanent memory
Rad/Fluoro manual
command
Rad/Fluoro manual
command
Rad/Fluoro manual
command
Rad/Fluoro manual
command
Rad/Fluoro manual
command
Sterile drapes 3 sets
Stand alone device
Stand alone device
Stand alone device
Image Processing
package; edge
enhancement,
peak opacification,
roadmapping
Image Processing
package; edge
enhancement,
peak opacification,
roadmapping
Image Processing
package; edge
enhancement,
peak opacification,
roadmapping
Sequential
acquisition and
cine review
SONY S-VHS VCR
OPTIONS
6000
6600
9000
9600
9600 ANGIO
2nd flicker-free
monitor
Sequential
acquisition and
cine review
SONY S-VHS VCR
Sequential
acquisition and
cine review
Visiplex
CCM620-1
hardcopy imager
SONY S-VHS VCR
SONY S-VHS VCR
Visiplex
CCM620-1
hardcopy imager
SONY S-VHS VCR
SONY UP910
thermal printer
Visiplex
CCM620-1
hardcopy imager
Visiplex
CCM620-1
hardcopy imager
SONY UP910
thermal printer
Visiplex
CCM620-1
hardcopy imager
SONY UP910
thermal printer
SONY UP910
thermal printer
SONY UP910
thermal printer
12-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION
12-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-5 DSM 200/600 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
on temps:
625 lignes - 50 Hz 25 i/s
Frequence pixel
Periode pixel
525 lignes - 60 Hz 30 i/s
14.750 MHz
67.80 ns
Periode ligne (H)

Frequence ligne
Visible ligne
944
576
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
Horizontal
14.868 MHz
67.26
ns
944
64.00 ms
15.625 KHz
39.05 ms
576
63.49
ms
15.750 KHz
38.74
ms
22
70
85
177
p
p
p
p
1.49
4.75
5.76
12.00
ms
ms
ms
ms
22
70
85
177
p
p
p
p
1.48
4.71
5.72
11.90
ms
ms
ms
ms
From last pixel to leading edge of horizontal synchro

From loading edge of horizontal synchro to first pixel
118
250
p
p
8.00
16.95
ms
ms
118
250
p
p
7.94
16.81
ms
ms
Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
3
3
19
25
H
H
H
H
192
192
1216
1600
ms
ms
ms
ms
3
3
14
20
H
H
H
H
190
190
889
1270
ms
ms
ms
ms
22
3
287.5
312.5
H
H
H
H
1408
192
18400
20
ms
ms
ms
ms
17
3
242.5
262.5
H
H
H
H
1079
190
15397
17
ms
ms
ms
ms
2
625
40
50
ms
Hz
2
525
front porch
synchro
back porch
blanking
front porch
synchro
back porch
blanking
FIELD
From loading edge of vertical synchro to first ligne
From last line to leading edge of vertical synchro
Number of visible ligne
Total
FRAME
Number of field
Number of ligne
12-13
33
60
ms
Hz
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-14
GE Medical Systems

DSM 200/600
DSM 600 FFD
REV 1
12-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-19
Horizontal front porch

22 p 1.49 m s
Pixel frequency: 14.75 MHz

Pixel duration: 67.8 ns
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
625 lignes 50 Hz
Horizontal back porch

85 p 5.76 m s
12-20
Horizontal synchro
70p 4.75 m s
From leading edge of horizontal synchro to first pixel

250 p, 16.95 m s
Ligne time (H)
944p, 64 m s
Horizontal blanking
177p, 12 m s
Visible ligne
576p, 39.05 m s

From last pixel to leading

edge of horizontal sunchro
118p, 8 m s
field 1
312.5H
vertical
front
porch
3H
field 2
312.5H
vertical
front
porch
3H
12-21
vertical back porch

19H
vertical back porch

19H
voir details
voir details
vertical synchro
3H
vertical synchro
3H
from leading edge of

vertical synchro
to first line
22H
vertical blanking
25H
287.5H
from last line
to leading
edge of vertical
synchro
3H

vertical synchro
to first line
22H
vertical blanking
25H

287.5H
from last line
to leading
edge of vertical
synchro
3H
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Line duration: 64 m s
625 lignes 50 Hz
Pixel Frequency: 14.75 MHz

field 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
625 lignes 50 Hz
field 1
1H=944p
0.5H = 472p
1H=944p
12-22
35p
70p
0.5H = 472p
Vertical Blanking
field 2
field 1

Vertical Blanking
Horizontal front porch

22 p 1.48 m s
Pixel frequency: 14.868 MHz

GE Medical Systems
REV 1
525 lignes 60 Hz
Horizontal back porch

85 p 5.72 m s
12-23
Horizontal synchro
70p 4.71 m s
From leading edge of horizontal synchro to first pixel

250 p, 16.81 m s
Ligne time (H)
944p, 63.49 m s
Horizontal blanking
177p, 11.9 m s
Visible ligne
576p, 38.74 m s

From last pixel to leading

edge of horizontal sunchro
118p, 7.94 m s
field 1
262.5H
vertical
front
porch
3H
field 2
262.5H
vertical
front
porch
3H
12-24
vertical back porch

14H
vertical back porch

14H
voir details
voir details
vertical synchro
3H
vertical synchro
3H

vertical synchro
to first line
17H
vertical blanking
20H
242.5H
from last line
to leading
edge of vertical
synchro
3H

vertical synchro
to first line
17H
vertical blanking
20H

242.5H
from last line
to leading
edge of vertical
synchro
3H
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
Line duration: 63.49 m s
525 lignes 60 Hz
Pixel Frequency: 14.866 MHz

field 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
525 lignes 60 Hz
field 1
1H=944p
0.5H = 472p
1H=944p
12-25
35p
70p
0.5H = 472p
Vertical Blanking
field 2
field 1

Vertical Blanking
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-6 DISTAR PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Model numbers are on a Rating Plate located at the back of the DISTAR Monitor
(see Ill. 13) and on the bottom side of the chassis base.
To determine the model of the Monitor you are working with, refer to Table 11.
TABLE 11
NAME
SIZE
MODEL
NUMBER
20
36004057
LLR
FFD ROT
0
15
2116937
20
2126839
VIDEO
FORMAT
DEFLECTION
BOARD
525/625 - 60/50 Hz 4/3
45562121
20
LOW VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
YOKE ASSY.
45067369
2127942
45067372
2119237
2129457
525/625 120/100 Hz 4/3
FFDROT
CRT
36004234
45067372
45067369
36004047
36007137
* Monitor can be adjusted on site to the other format:

50 Hz to 60 Hz or 60 Hz to 50 Hz.
** Monitor can be adjusted on site to the 525/625 60/50 Hz 4/3 video format.
FOR ALL MONITORS
Video Board:
210 1865
HV Power Supply: 45 067370
Cell Board:
212 1334
LLR = Low Line Rate
FFD-ROT = Flicker Free Display - ROTation (from 0_ to 240_)
DLR = Dual Line Rate
FFD-ROT 0_ = Flicker Free Display - ROTation (from 170_ to 0_ to +170_)
DISTAR
MONITOR
12-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-7 DSM 200/600 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:
Maintenance operations are prohibited on equipment under power.
Preliminary Steps:
If both of the power supply units are identical, you must follow the job card DR005 instructions of t6he service
manual. Otherwise proceed as follows:
Removal - Installation Procedure:

Remplacement of the LFQ26 LAMBDA power supply unit by NFS 200-7608 COMPUTER PRODUCTS power
supply unit.
*To remove the LFQ26 Lambda" power supply unit:
1 - Remove the power supply to the DSM board.
2 - Disconnect the power supply cable from J2 of the DSAD board.
3 - Disconnect the three AC supply wires and the ground (yellow/green) wire from the disk unit.
4 - Disconnect the two wires from the fan.
*To connect the NFS 200-7608 Computer Products power supply unit:
1 - Crimp the two terminals on the AC supply wires. See Illustration A.
2 - Crimp the three terminals with the yellow/green and the blue and red wires of the fan. See Illustration B.
3 - Connect the wirees as shown on Illustration C.
4 - Replace the power supply unit in the DSM board.
5 - Connect the power supply cable to J2 of the DSAD board.
6 - Check the 5.1V between the pin 2 and 3, and adjust if necessary. See Illustration C.
Final Steps:
1 - Follow the job card VF001 instructions of the service manual.
2 - Follow the job card DR001 paragraph 6 instructions.
12-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1
2
3
AC SUPPLY CABLE
CRIMP THESE
TERMINALS
ILLUSTRATION A
CRIMP THESE TERMINALS

6
RED
BLUE
7
YELLOW/GREEN
ILLUSTRATION B
12-28
POWER SUPPLY CABLE

5.1V ADJUST
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
GROUND WIRE
FROM DISK
12-29
8-9 NOT CONNECTED
AC SUPPLY CABLE
ILLUSTRATION C
TO FAN

YELLOW/GREEN
GE Medical Systems

12-30
11
10
17
6 7
12
16
15
13
4 5
REV 1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-31
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-8 STENOSCOP 120V LINE PLUG MEMO
12-33
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-34
GE Medical Systems

Source: SN 4011, December 30, 1994, Page 1 of 2
REV 1
12-9 SN 4011
12-35
GE Medical Systems

Source: SN 4018, November 24, 1994, Page 1 of 1
REV 1
12-10 SN 4018
12-36
GE Medical Systems

Source: SN 4024
REV 1
12-11 SN 4024
DSAD/DSMP P.W.B. SUBSTITUTION
The DSAD and the DSMP boards from the DSM memory are no more in production
line fro some time.
These boards will be replaced by the DSAD2 and the DSMP2 couple.
So ordering one of the old board, you will automatically received the two boards with their
product locator in order to trace the updated old memory.
The DSAD2 board has two different video signal outputs, one in 50/60 Hz
and the other in 100/120 Hz, in this case the 50/50 Hz must be selected.
The DSM emulation is selected by the juumper X2. (Powerup as DSM 200 & disables FFD outputs).
The selection 50/100 and 60/120 Hz is done by the jumper X3.
For more details see the drawing here joined.
12-37
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: Add-on 832 604 P065, STENOSCOP CCD Series 6000 and 9000, Rev. A
12-12 LASER TRACK ADD-ON
12-39
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

12-40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

12-41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

12-42
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

12-43
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12-44
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 13 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13-1 SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-2 MODEL CCM 620 INSTALLATION IMAGE ADJUSTMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-3 FUNCTIONAL CHECK LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-1 SYSTEM CHECK
TEST EQUIPMENT:
OSCILLSCOPE
DVM
CV PHANTOM KIT
METRIC ALLEN WRENCHES
STANDARD TOOL KIT
1. Center DASI on the x-ray tube.

2. Press GMA on the DSM simultanteously. (This will get you into service mode).
3. Select 2 (QI) press M (patterns).
4. Select 1 for image centering.
5. DASI pipe should be centered in image cross hairs.
6. Select manual mode - 2mm of cu
1. Min ma & KVP
2. Select GMA and select R0I. Using the directional arrors center a 1 inch by 1 inch box on the monitor. Close
collimator blades and cover with lead apron.
3. Fluoro (image should be balck just setup).
4. ROI density is 17(15-22).
5. Set KVP & ma to max, open collimator blades remove apron.
6. ROI denisty - 238(220-250)
7. Select Auto, then Fluoro
8. ROI density is 102(95-108).
9. Auto mode, low dose, CV type 2 centered, 12 inches from grid prefrom a ROI on the phantom. Since the
lower half of the phantom can not be measured, use vertical reversal to measure the other half. Make the
ROI box as close as possible to the size of the slug (+/- 10% on all ROI values).
ROI of Phantom
MODE
Slug
H
74KVP-2ma
Low
27
130
73KVP-4.1ma
HQ
27
130
Values of Ma and KVP are approximate.
A
33
50
M
46
46
13-3
L
195
195
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
FLAT FIELD TEST
Setup
Auto mode
2mm of Copper in the beam
Collimator is fully opened
FOV
Low Dose
High Dose
6"
kV 64-68
64-68
mA 1.6-2.0
3.2-3.6
kV 68-72
6.8-7.2
mA 1.8-2.2
3.7-4.1
kV 70-74
70-74
mA 1.9-2.3
3.9-4.3
9"
6" (Mag 2)
13-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
13-2 MODEL CCM 620 INSTALLATION IMAGE ADJUSTMENT GUIDE

This document is intended as a quick reference instruction for performing minor image adjustments that may be necessary during installation. Due
to variations between video sources, image blanking, position or size may need fine tuning. Exaggerated representations of these image symptoms
are shown in the table at the end of this document, along with the adjustments necessary to correct them. The diagram below shows the physical
layout.
If your image exhibits any of the symptoms as shown you will need to:
Physical Layout Of Monitor Circuit Boards
1. Power the imager on and allow it to go through it's warm-up sequence.
2. Remove the top cover of the camera. (If you need instructions on this process
refer to Chapter 3 of the Installation and Service Manual).
3. Access the CRT for viewing. (If you need instructions on this process, refer to
Monitor
Chapter 3 of the Installation and Service Manual).
Vertical
Horizontal
Mother
4. Unblank the monitor by doing the following:
Deflection
Deflection
Board
S
Press the RESET and PROG keys simultaneously for longer than 2
Board
Board
seconds. This accesses the Service Mode.
AIM
S
Press the key until the display shows VW B>xxxx C xxx (P or N)".
Video
Board
CRT Circuit
S
Using the or keys, set the B (brightness) value to approximately 200.
Amplifier
Board
S
Press the key until the display shows VW B 200 C>xxx (P or N).
Board
S
Using the or keys, set the C (contrast) value to approximately 300.
S
Press the key until the display shows VW B 200 C 300> (P or N).
S
Use the or keys until the display shows VW B 200 C 300>P".
Rear Of CCM 620
5. Make adjustments as necessary.
6. Blank the monitor by pressing the PROGRAM key.
IF YOUR IMAGE LOOKS LIKE ...
...IS MISADJUSTED
ON THE ...
ADJUST ...
SUCH THAT ...
Vertical Deflection Bd.
R50
All active video at the bottom of the

image is just displayed.
The image is properly ad

justed.
Vertical Blanking
R38
-thenAll active video at the top of the image

is just displayed
Horizontal Blanking
Horizontal Deflection Bd.
R25 (LLR)
R23(HLR)
R27 (LLR)
R25 (HLR)
NOTE:
All active video at the right side of the

image is just displayed
-thenAll active video at the left side of the
image is just displayed
Image Position
(Vertical)
R4
The image is centered top-to-bottom

within the CRT
bezel
Image Position
(Horizontal)
R30 (LLR)
The image is centered left-to-right

within the CRT bezel.
Image Size
(Height)
R3
The image height just fills the CRT be

zel.
Image Size
(Width)
R6 (LLR)
The image width satisfies the proper

image aspect ratio.
R11 (HLR)
R9 (HLR)
LLR - Low Line Rate (e.g., RS170)

HLR - High Line Rate (e.g., RS343)
13-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-3 FUNCTIONAL CHECK LAB EXERCISE

DESCRIPTION:
This lab will provide the student with exposure to an alternative method on system calibration.
REFERENCES:
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement
COMPETENCIES:
Students will receive a in-depth knowledge of the DSM Image Quality Tests.
PROCEDURE TIME: 1.5 hrs.
SAFETY:
Safety Policy and Static Control - ESD and Energy Control and Power Lock Out.
PROCEDURE:
Perform the functional test in XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement.
Record film exposure of Globe pattern from image quality test in DSM and record values on Page 13-5 of the
XR012 Stenoscop II Series Technical Supplement.
13-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 14 - VISIPLEX CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
14-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

CCM620 Video Imager Installation and Service, Document Number 20-29-1004, Rev. 3, Page 2-1
14-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
14-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
14-24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-25
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-27
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 15 - 841-S DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
15-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DAPS - BLOCK DIAGRAM
SGNL
ELECTRONICS BOX
CHAMBER
+24V
-24V
HT
SGNL
DISPLAY
PWER SUPPLY
15-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DOSE AREA PRODUCT METER
SPARE PARTS
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE GE
ION CHAMBER
86137P025
ELECTRONIC MODULE
86137P035
DISPLAY MODULE
86137P045
OVERLAY
86137P055
CABLES
86137P065
SPACER
86137P075
DRILLING TEMPLATE
86137P085
15-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: 841-S Dose Area Product Meter User Manual, Version 1.0, April 1994, Page 1
1. About the Dose Area Product Meter Model 841-S DAP-S

1.1 Product Background
The Model 84 range of Dose Area Product Meters has been designed in response to worldwide requests from
Radiologists, Radiographers and Medical Physicists. The meters have been designed to meet the following
objectives:
a.
to be capable of simple measurement on a wide variety of X-ray equipment.
b.
to provide easy to read real time information on patient dose.
c.
to allow for simple manual transcription of this information into patient records.
d.
to offer a means of checking the X-ray equipment without the need for additional instruments.
e.
to include models which can relay this information to a computer for storage and analysis.
It was necessary that the resulting instruments achieved the above criteria while remaining completely unobtrusive
during the examination.
Until the introduction of the DAP-S Model 841-S the problem of overcoming a variety of local installation difficulties
frequently deterred X-ray equipment manufacturers and hospital managements from fitting dose area product
meters to all X-ray machines. The DAP-S Model 841-S design specification addresses these problems and has
resulted in an instrument which is economic to purchase, minimizes installation problems and is easy to use.
15-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

In some cases all that is necessary is to mount the chamber and connect the electrical supply cable to a convenient
supply rail found within the X-ray equipment.
When a remote display is used it is connected to the chamber by simple telephone type cable and, due to its small
size display can be mounted in a wide choice of locations.
When in use the dose area product (DAP) is measured throughout the examination and can be monitored on either
the integral or remote display. On completion of the examination the total DAP can be transcribed into the patient's
notes and the display reset ready for the next patient.
Gammex-RMI offers a range of product enhancements such as a system control module with computer interface
and a large in-room display. These can be added to the DAP-S at the time of the initial installation or they can be
retrofitted.
Having a simple indication of DAP has been shown to influence changes in working practice which can result in
patient dose reductions of 50% without any deterioration in image quality.
15-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

1.2 Principle of Operation

The aim of diagnostic radiology is to obtain patient images with the minimum absorption of radiation within the
patient. The radiation risk to the patient is related to various dose quantities including organ dose, effective dose
equivalent and the total energy imparted to the patient by the radiation field. However, none of these can be
measured directly.
It is possible to make simple, direct measurement of surface dose from the product of dose in Grays and the
exposed body surface area in cm2. Current research may eventually allow this quantity to be translated into
absorbed dose in the patient. In the meantime measuring the dose area product and finding ways to minimise it are
the most practical ways of reducing patient risk. Figure 1 shows that dose area product is a constant regardless of
where it is measured between the collimator face and the patient.
15-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 1: Principle of Operation
The dose area product of an x-ray beam is equal for all planes normal to the beam axis.
x2
x1
y2
y1
DAP Chamber
Patient Location
x 1 y1 D1 = x 2 y2 D 2
Where D1 = Dose1 and D2 = Dose2
15-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

1.3 Product Description

The Chamber
The DAS-P uses a full field ionisation chamber consisting of a collector plate sandwiched in a cavity between two
energizing plates. All the plate are made of a transparent insulating material with the appropriate surfaces having a
thin conductive coating.
The chamber is mounted perpendicular to and centered on the X-ray beam axis so that its area always exceeds the
beam area. The dose area product must be measured after all field size collimation and beam attenuation. These
are usually carried out in a single collimator unit which offers a rigid mounting surface for a radiation sensor. The
X-ray beam will then interact with the air within the chamber cavity producing electrically charged ions. The effect of
this ionisation is a flow of electrons from the polarization plates which are energized with a high 500 volt potential to
the collector plate which is at approximately ground potential. The ensuing current is proportional to the product of
the beam area and the dose which is the same for all planes normal to the beam axis (see Figure 1).
It is therefore possible to measure the dose area product remote from the patient which avoids movement
restrictions. In addition, the chamber may be mounted close to the focal point of the X-ray tube where the beam
area is relatively small and the dose rates are high.
The chamber assembly includes an 8 digit LCD display, power on indicator, test and reset push buttons (see Figure
2).
15-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 2: Chamber Front Panel
POWER ON LED
TEST
RESET
DAP-S
WINDOW CLEAR SIZE 37 MM x 15 mm
1. Test Button
This injects a small charge to the front end electronics. The result is shown on the
local display and Remote Display where fitted.
2. Reset Button
Resets both the local display in the chamber and the Remote Display.
15-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Signal Processing
The current flow is extremely small, making it necessary to use very sensitive electronic circuitry with minimum noise
and drift. The first stage of signal processing which is part of the chamber assembly, converts the small charge into a
dose equivalent signal of sufficient amplitude to drive the display which is mounted within the same protective
housing. The dose area product is transmitted to a remote display where fitted. Also mounted close to the chamber
is the 500 volt energizing supply which eliminates the hazard of feeding such a potential along lengths of cable.
General System Configuration

The DAP-S is a stand alone Dose Area Product Meter with an integral display. A remote display is also included with
the system. The various system configuration which can be produced by using different combinations of the
components supplied as standard are illustrated in figure 3. It can be seen from these diagrams that the chamber
has a number of unique features not usually associated with ion chambers which lack in-built electronics.
15-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 3: General System Configuration

A.
Chamber & Power Supply
CHAMBER
B.
Chamber, Remote Display & Power Supply
CHAMBER
C.
Chamber & Local Lamp Supply
CHAMBER
D.
Chamber, Remote Display & Local Lamp Supply
CHAMBER
15-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

1.4 Specifications
841-S DAP-S:
S
Type: Full Field Ion Chamber
Chamber Active Area: 140mm x 140mm
Dose Area Product Rates: 1 mGycm2s-1 to 400000 mGycm2s-1
Energy Range: 50 kVp to 150 kVp
Chamber Sensitivity: 130 pC/mGycm2
Absorption: Less than 0.5mm Al
Signal Processing: Assembly contains integrated electronics
Connection: 3m Cable with integral plug
Warm Up Time: 8-10 minutes
Calibration and Offset Adjustment: user accessible controls
Transparency: Greater than 75%
Physical Size: 195mm x 157mm x 23.5mm
Weight 0.75kg
Integral Display:
S
Display: 8 Digit LCD with reset and test function
Display Units: mGycm2
Dose Area Product Range: 1 mGycm2 to 99,999,999 mGycm2
Free Running Rate: 10kHz
Response Time: Dose rate dependent 1 ms - 5 seconds
15-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

(Specification Continued)
Remote Display:
S
Display: 8 Digit LCD with reset
Display Units: mGycm2
Dose Area Product Range: 1 mGycm2 to 99,999,999 mGycm2
Response Time: Dose rate dependent 1 ms - 5 seconds
Power Input: <50 mA at 24 V dc
Power Input Range: 15-28 V dc
Size: 82mm x 33mm x 28.5mm
Weight: Approximately 100g
Power Supply:
S
Local Supply at Collimator Head: 24 V dc, 50mA (Tolerance 15-28 V dc)
Power Adaptor: Output power 18 V dc, 500mA

Input power
100 V ac +/- 10%, 60Hz
or
230 V ac +/- 10%, 50Hz
Cable:
S
Type: 6mm Oval cross section, pvc insulated 4 core
Length: 30m supplied (40m maximum)
15-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

(Specification Continued)
Extension Options:
S
Special purpose chambers
The 841-S chamber is compatible with Gammex-RMI's full range of DAP display and processing products.
15-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

1.5 Operation
These instructions assume that the DAP-S has been installed correctly.
a.
Apply electrical power by plugging in the power supply to the AC outlet or by switching on the X-ray machine if
a local supply is being used.
b.
Ensure the powering up sequence proceeds as normal, ending with zero indicated on the display/s after
pressing `RESET'. Note that the DAP-S has an 8-10 minutes warm up period.
c.
Use the X-ray machine as normal.
d.
Dose area product reading will be seen on the display/s.
e.
On completion of the examination, the total dose area product should be noted and transcribed according to
local policy.
f.
Reset the display/s by pressing `RESET' on either the integral or remote display.
The system is now ready for the next examination.

NOTE:
The chamber `TEST' function confirms the system operation. Please check the value of test display
against the number recorded on the test certificate and test record sheet.
15-16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Do not press the test button during a patient examination without first recording the display reading and pressing
`RESET'. Recording of the examination can resume after using the test function only after a further reset of the
display. The total examination DAP is obtained by adding the DAPs prior to and after using the test function.
NOTE:
The buttons must be presses for about 1 second for the instrument to respond.
NOTE:
The chamber is not waterproof. During interventional procedures where fluids are used in close
proximity to the chamber, the use of waterproof drapes for protection of the chamber is necessary.
Operation Summary
The following table shows when the buttons are pressed on the chamber or remote display.
Button
Integral & Remote Display Indicates
Reset
Resets integral display and Remote
(Integral & Remote Display) Display unit to zero.
Test
(Integral Display only)
Places a test charge on the chamber input,

which is displayed on both the integral and
remote display.
15-17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3. Calibration
3.1 Introduction
The DAP-S is delivered having been nominally calibrated as shown in Appendix A.
Although an extensive calibration carried out by an independent laboratory is available as an optional extra, there
are advantages in carrying out final calibration on site following the installation. If this is done, compensation can be
made for the radiation beam quality and any absorbing material between the DAP-S chamber and the patient.
The principle of DAP-S calibration is shown in figure 8. Diagrams 1a and 2a show the importance of correct offset
adjustment prior to calibration.
This can be confirmed after the warm up period by ensuring the display remains at zero for 30 minutes following
pressing the reset button. If this is not the case please refer to the positive offset adjustment procedure in the service
section of this manual. The test for negative drift requires the test button to be pressed and the result noted. The
display can then be reset. After 30 minutes press the test button again, the reading should be no lower than 5 digits
compared with the recorded reading. If it is, refer to the negative offset adjustment procedure in the service section
of this manual.
15-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

The process of calibration is illustrated in figure 3a and 3b. The transfer function between the reference
measurement and the indication on the DAP-S will be a straight line as the instrument is inherently linear over a
400,000 : 1 dynamic range. Assuming the offset adjustment is correct, calibration involves adjustment of a scaling
factor within the DAP-S to obtain correspondence between the reference instrument and the DAP display.
Therefore a single dose rate measurement is all that is required to achieve the correct calibration as indicated in
figure 3b.
Some Useful Information Related to Calibration

Energy Response
Inspection of the specifications will confirm the DAP-S chamber has a flat energy response from 50kVp to 150kVp
to within 1.5%. Calibration can therefore be carried out at any energy and 80kVp has been selected. However, this is
not the case when the energy response is modified by absorbing or scattering material within the beam path. In
these circumstances it is recommended that calibration is carried out at the most frequently used energy or the
average energy used. After completing a calibration it is wise to repeat the measurement at several energies to
ensure variation of DAP readings are within expected tolerances.
Dose Rate Used
It has been stated that the DAP-S chamber has a linear response with dose rate, nevertheless it is advisable to use a
total dose and dose rate towards the upper limit of expected values for the calibration.
15-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Units
This model displays mGycm2 only.
cGycm2 can be obtained by dividing by 10. This is also the factor used for Rcm2.
15-20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 8: Calibration and Offset Graphs

1a
1b
Display
Display
Error due to
positive
offset.
Positive offset
corrected following
adjustment procedure
outlined in section 4.1
Actual
2a
Actual
2b
Display
Display
Negative offset
error corrected
following procedure
in 4.2
Actual
Error due to
negative
offset.
3a
Actual
3b
Display
Calibration
Y1
error.
X=Y+
Y1
Display
X=Y
No error
Y
X
Actual
(ref. dosemeter reading)
X
Actual
(ref. dosemeter
reading)
Correction applied to calibration control as stated

in section 3.2
15-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3.2 Calibration Procedure

The aim of calibration is to equalize the displayed DAP reading to that of a reference instrument located at a typical
patient examination distance as illustrated in Figure 9. The DAP-S is mounted on the face of the X-ray tube
collimator unit. If a couch top or other radiation absorbing obstruction is normally between the collimator and
patient, it should remain in situ during calibration.
A reference chamber must be placed in such a position that it is totally within the radiation beam. To evaluate this,
follow the procedure listed below:
Place a film cassette on the reference dosemeter as shown in Figure 9. Expose with radiation and process the film.
An image similar to that in Figure 10 should be visible. For this, confirmation can be obtained that the reference
chamber is now within the radiation beam and the total field size may be measured from the image on the film.
The collimator is set to give a defined field size at the patient plane (ie at the reference dosemeter). If the field size is
for example, 100 cm2 and the reference dosemeter gives a point source reading, (i.e. 1cm2), the DAP-S DAP
reading should be 100 times the reference dosemeter reading. This is to say; the DAP-S should display the
reference dosemeter reading multiplied by the field area (Field size is 100 cm2).
Many reference dosemeters present the results in Roentgens (R). To convert to mGycm2 multiply by 8.7.
i.e. DOSE AREA PRODUCT = Reading on reference meter * field area * 8.7.
15-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 9: Calibration Diagram
Optional phantom to
apply Backscatter
correction (see text)
Ref. dose meter

with Chamber
Cassette with Film

to establish size
correction factor
Couch top or
other in beam
absorber (see text)
Set Field size

smaller than
DAP chamber,
larger than
Ref. dose
Chamber
Typical patient/
examination
distance
DAP Chamber
Collimator
All measurement
equipment
symmetrical to
central axis
15-23
X-Ray Tube
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 10: Typical Reference Chamber
Field
Image
Chamber
Image
X-Ray Film
15-24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3.3 Calibration Adjustment

A.
Set the X-ray machine to 80 kVp and the field size to 100 cm2 at the reference chamber.
B.
Access to the calibration control is gained via hole A of the chamber electronics cover (See below).
CHAMBER
C.
Reset the reference dosemeter and the DAP-S, then take an X-ray exposure.
Record the result of the reference dosemeter and the DAP-S. Calculate and record the DOSE AREA
PRODUCT.
D.
Compare the calculated dose area product with the displayed value on the DAP-S. Reset the DAP-S. Adjust
calibration control using the precision screwdriver provided, anticlockwise to increase or clockwise to
decrease the displayed value. This change will be apparent after the next X-ray exposure.
E.
Repeat sections XC & D again until value on DAP-S is equal to or within 5% of the calculated value. The unit is
now calibrated.
15-25
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

F.
The unit is now ready for use.
G.
Press the `TEST' button. Record the new test number on the TEST RECORD sheet found in appendix B.
15-26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

4. Service
4.1 General
The DAP-S has been designed to provide trouble free measurements of dose area product for many years.
Should the instrument fail to meet the QA testing criteria outlined in section 1 of this manual a fault may require
correction.
The fault finding section of this manual is a guide to locate and correct faults.
The only adjustments that may be required are calibration as previously outlined and offset adjustment.
The offset adjustment procedure as outlined in this section of the manual is carried out following production of the
instrument and should not normally require attention. If adjustment is necessary the procedure outlined should be
carefully followed.
CAUTION: The chamber assembly includes a 500V dc supply, if for any reason the cover is removed care
should be exercised.
15-27
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

4.2 Positive Offset Drift (See Figure 11)

Drift in the chamber electronics will cause readings to occur when no radiation is present. The following procedure
must be followed to correct this offset drift. It is assumed that there will be no radiation events during this procedure
and adjustment will be carried out using a precision screwdriver (1.4mm flat blade type).
a.
Access to the offset control is gained via hole B of the chamber electronics cover. (See below).
CHAMBER
1.
Reset the display.
2.
Adjust offset control anticlockwise 1/4 turn via hole B, the rate of drift will slow down. When the display
has stopped counting, `REST' the display from the front panel.
3.
Leave the chamber for 10 minutes.
4.
If there are numbers still appearing on the display, repeat sections 1 to 3 again, adjusting offset control
1/4 turn anticlockwise.
15-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
b.
c.
d.


1.
If the chamber display has not remained on zero, `RESET' the display.
2.
Adjust the offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise.
3.
4.
If the chamber has not remained on zero, repeat section 1 to 3 again.
If the chamber has remained on zero, `RESET' the display.

1.
Press `TEST' button. Record the result as T1, and reset the display.
2.
3.
Press `TEST' button. Record the result as T2.
4.
If T2 is greater than T1 by 10, adjust the offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise and repeat sections 1 to 3
again.
5.
If T1 is greater than T2 by 10, adjust the offset control 1/4 turn clockwise and repeat sections 1 to 3 again.
The unit is now ready for routine use.
15-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 11: Flow Chart for Positive Offset Correction
15-30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

4.3 Negative Offset Drift (See Figure 12)

Negative drift is defined as the electronics drifting in such a manner as to cause the reading from an X-ray exposure,
or from the `TEST' function to be lower than expected.
To test for negative drift, follow the procedure below:
1.
Press `TEST' and then `RESET'.
2.
Press the `TEST' and record the result. `RESULT' the display and leave the chamber for 10 minutes.
3.
Press `TEST' and record the result. `RESET' the display and compare the test results. The test values should
be the " 5 counts. If the second value is smaller, then the difference is negative offset drift.
To correct this negative offset drift, the procedure below:

It is assumed that there will be radiation events during this procedure, adjustment will be carried out using a
precision screwdriver (1.4mm flat blade type).
a.
Access to the offset control is via hole B on the chamber electronics cover (See section on Positive Offset Drift).
1.
Adjust offset control clockwise.
2.
Press `TEST' and record result as T1. `RESET' the display.
3.
Leave the chamber for 10 minutes. Press `TEST' and record result as T2.
4.
If T2 is still less than T1, repeat sections 1 to 3.
15-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

5.
If T2 is greater than T1, adjust offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise and repeat sections 2 and 3.
6.
Repeat sections 1 and 3 until no difference is found between T1 and T2.
b.
If the chamber display has not remained at zero, adjust offset control 1/4 turn anticlockwise and repeat
sections 1 and 3.
c.
The unit is now ready for routine use.
15-32
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Figure 12: Flow Chart for Negative Offset Correction
15-33
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

4.4 Faultfinding
Fault
Possible Causes
Suggested Actions
No display or green power

indication on switch on.
Power supply failure.
Try running the unit from an

alternative supply.
No Reset from chamber.
Switch board disconnected in Remove chamber cover and

chamber housing.
refit the switch board.
No Reset from Remote

Display.
Cabling fault.
Dose Indication without

radiation.
Offset Drift.
Disconnected plugs.
Check the wires are

connected in plugs at
couplers and at the chamber.
See previous section of user
manual. Remove chamber
and dry at 50_ Max
overnight. If problem still
persists contact your local
representative.
Chamber leakage.
All other faults should be reported to your Hospital in house service

organization or your local representative.
15-34
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

APPENDIX B: TEST RECORD SHEET

Chamber Serial Number.........................................
DATE
TEST NUMBER
15-35
SIGNATURE
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
15-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 16 - DSM 200/600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16-1 DSM 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16-1-1 Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

16-3 DSM 200 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
16-4 DSM 200 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
16-5 DSM 200 DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
16-6 DSM 600 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
16-7 DSM 600 THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-49
16-8 DSM 600 FUNCTIONAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-79
16-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-1 DSM 200
4
5
6
7
12
11
10
9
DSM (200 + IP)
Illustration 16-1
16-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-1-1 Component Location
(See Illustration 16-1)
1.
DSAD
2.
DSIP (DSM 200 + IP)
3.
Line SW, fuses and line filter
4.
Fan
5.
Power Supply ( + 5V, " 12V)
6.
Hard Disc
7.
DSID (interfaces hard disk)
8.
DSMP
9.
DSKB Keyboard
10.
RECIR (infrared board)
11.
Infrared receiver
12.
Technical Data Label
16-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION

Processes the TV analog video data to digital form providing a 576 x 576 x 12 bit digital format.
Provides for eight image RAM storage including two frozen images & 6 saved images.
Capable of display and processing images on up to two independent monitors.
Has provisions for driving a formatter (Imager) for either film or paper copy reproduction. The DSM can also drive a
VCR if such is added to the system.
Employs a 68000mp for DSM management including interface functions with the Stenoscop.
Digital to analog conversion of image data.
DSM (Configurations)
Basic:
An electronic assembly with a control console as shown in Illustration 16-1 but without the 200 image hard disk
storage and the Image Postprocessor (IP).
An Infra-red remote control which enables remotely performing all the functions on the left-most DSM
operator console panel.
DSM (200 + IP) :
With the addition of the 200 image hard disk and the IP the following additional processing functions are
available.
1.
Storage of up to 200 images on the hard disk.
2.
Programmed acquisition sequence
3.
Real-time subtraction in fluoro and pulsed fluoroscopy
4.
Peak opacification techics for improved visualization of opacified vessles in the patient anatomy.
5.
Road mapping for following catheter insertion.
6.
Edge enhancement for better imaging of small anatomical structures.
16-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
VIDEO
IMAGER
DSM Block Digram

Illustration 16-2
16-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Acquisition, Display and CPU Management
The Image Acquisition, Display and CPU management functions are assigned to the DSAD board. These include
the following:
Acquisition
1.
Amplification and A/D conversion of the TV Camera signal.
2.
Synchronization of the DSM functions to the TV camera composite video signal (PPL) phase lock loop.
3.
Generate the system clock at 14.75 MHz.
4.
Generate sequencing signals for memory.
Display
1.
D/A conversion of the image data.
2.
Image graphic overlay.
3.
Data multiplexing digitized images for display.
4.
Provides access to the DSIP board.
CPU Management
1.
Keyboard and associated LED's.
2.
Exposure control interface signals with the Infrared remote control and the Stenoscop.
3.
Management of the other DSM board functions.
16-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DSAD Interconnects
The DSAD Interconnects with:
1.
The Stenoscop console, generator and TV cameras through the DSM cable connection to the Stenoscop.
2.
The TV Monitors
3.
The DSMP Board
4.
The DSIP Image Processor
5.
Imagers (film or paper copy)
6.
VCR
7.
Power Supplies (+5V, "12V)
The DSAD board includes a frequency selector for operation from a 50 or 60 Hz power source.
The board has a RESET (X11) and a ABORT (X12) button. The ABORT is for factory use.
Nine LED's are located on the board for signal monitoring purposes (See Section 8 under Troubleshooting)
Interface with the (IP) Image Post Processor is through the DSIP.
DSMP Board
The DSMP board is dedicated to Image Processing and memory. Communication is through buses LS1 (reading)
and LS3 (writing). The information transfer is time shared.
RAM memory has a capacity for storing two frozen images and six saved images in a 576 x 576 x 12 bit format.
The board controls access to RAM in real time and enables the zoom and TV camera H&V reversal functions.
Interface to the hard disk is made through the DSID board to increase RAM.
The DSMP enables real-time image processing functions such as; identity, recursive filtering or integration filtering.
Selected pixel filter coefficents from 2 to 16 provide for image noise reduction. Recursive filtering is active in fluoro,
after stabilization of the video image, while integration filtering is used in pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography.
Processing functions also include image subtraction in single fluoro.
DSKB Keyboard
The keyboard DSKB has 82 keys, of which 31 are illuminated keys. An illuminated key signals to the operator that
the selected function is in progress. A flashing key indicates a question or an action request to the operator.
16-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RECIR Infrared Receiver Board
The RECIR Infrared Receiver Board connects to the CPU through serial link RS232C. The transmission rate is 9600
bauds. The board contains an infrared sensitive detector, a serial encoder using Pulse Position Modulation (PPM)
coding.
Interface With The DSID Board
Interface with the hard disk drive is through the DSIS board. The board enables managing the hard disk, but
respects real-time processing constraints. The board includes an image buffer. Addition of the hard disk permits
expansion of RAM enabling an added storage capability of up to 200 images.
DSIP and Image Post Processor
The DSIP connects the Image Post Processor (IP) with the display on the DSAD. In conjuction with the DSMP
processing and memory functions it enables performing the following:
1.
A programmed acquisition sequence.
2.
Real-time subtraction in pulsed fluoro.
3.
Peak opacification to display filling of a vascular body vessel with an x-ray opaque material on only one
image
4.
Road Mapping to facilitate viewing placement of a catheter in the vascular system. It combines with
subtraction and peak opacification imaging technics.
5.
Edge enhancement, to enable improved visualization of vascular vessels.
16-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Internal Connections
The power supply cable connects the power supply to the DSAD board through J2.
The ribbon cable connects the DSKB (keyboard) to connector J1 of DSAD.
The RS232C (with telephone connector) connects the console RECIR board to J6 of DSAD.
The SCSI cable connects the hard disk to XJ3 of the DSIS board (DSM 200 or DSM 200 + IP version).
The hard disk power supply cable interconnects to XJ2 of the DSIS board (DSM 200 or DSM 200 + IP version).
External Connections
These connections are made at the rear terminals of the DSAD board:
J8:
DSM video input coaxial link from the TV camera.
J9:
DSM video output coaxial link to Monitor A.
J10:
START REPRO" coaxial link at DSM output to initiate the video imager.
J11:
DSM video output coaxial link to the video imager. The signal corresponds to the image displayed on
Monitor A.
J12:
DSM video output coaxial link to a VCR. The signal corresponds to the image displayed on Monitor A.
J13:
DSM video output coaxial link to Monitor B.
J4/J5: RS232C serial links only used for system debugging (i.e., a terminal connected at J4 and a computer
connected at J5).
J7:
Link with the console and STENOSCOP for the x-ray control signals. (See Illustration 16-3)
16-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SIGNAL
IN = TO DSM
FUNCTION
OUT = TO STENOSCOP
MF +
IN
Technique coding
MG +
IN
(fluoroscopy, pulsed fluoroscopy and electronic

radiography)
MEMO +
IN
Indicates stable video (acquisition enabling)
VISU +
IN
Indicates the presence of X-rays
SP1 +
IN
Spare
SP2 +
IN
C-arm present
COMMON
IN
OV of above signals
X.PERM +/
OUT
Enables X-ray emission
X.PERM -
OUT
Controls X-ray sequencing (pulsed fluoroscopy

and electronic radiography modes)
A / B +/
OUT
Indicates the two image mode
A/B-
OUT
SP3 +/SP3 -
OUT
Spare
SP4 +/SP4 -
OUT
Spare
Signals Passing Through J7
Illustration 16-3
16-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Remote Control
Illustration 16-4
16-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Remote Control (See Illustration 16-4)
The keys on the Remote Control Unit perform the same functions as the keys on the DMS Console (Group 1).
The keys on the Remote Constrol are active at Stenoscop power-on". This enables the operator to select a
function either on the Remote Control or on the DSM Console.
Keypad Function
Keypad function selection is as follows:
Key 1
2,3
- Selects the variable contrast (gamma) correction.

- Contrast correction.
- Edge enhancement
5,6
- Vertical & horizontal video image reversal
- Selects noise reduction
8,9
- Image transfer from Monitor A to B.
10
- Selects split screen
11
- Zoom image (X2 magnification)
12
- Activates Imager for hard film or paper copy
13-16 - Monitor B image scrolling

14-17 - Monitor A image scrolling
15-18 - Enables image storage
16-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Stenoscop 2
RECIR
CPU
DSAD
DSKB
Option IP
DSIP
Video IN
ACQ
DSAD
ACQ
Video OUT
A
(Monitor A)
PROCESSING
DSMP
DISPLAY
Video OUT
B
(Monitor B)
SCSI
DISK
DSID
MEMORY
DSMP
Option M 200
XR0384
DSM Block Diagram

Illustration 16-5
16-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-3
DSM 200 THEORY
The DSM complete assembly consists of two TV monitors, A and B, the DSM (Dedicated Stenoscop Memory) and a
Video Imager or Formatter for providing a film image hard copy. The latter is an optional item.
The DSM is microprocessor controlled (68000 p), provides for RAM storage of 8 images (576 x 576 x 12). Two
images are frozen and displayed on Monitors A and B and 6 images are saved. On the DSM-200 hard disk,
additional storage is available for up to 200 TV frames. Graphic overlay is provided to indicate operating mode and
parameters selected by the operator.
During real time imaging (x-ray emission), the dynamic image is displayed on the left monitor (monitor A). Upon
termination of x-ray, the last image is frozen on the monitor.
Initiating another x-ray exposure results in transfer of the image from monitor A to the right monitor B (as a frozen
image). Upon x-ray termination, the new last dynamic acquired during the second exposure is displayed and
frozen on monitor A.
Refer to Illustration 16-5
DSAD
The video analog signal coming in is digitized for transmission on the acquisition 8 bit bus.
The DSM
is:
sync locked (PLL) to the video.
generates the clock of 14.75 mHz (60 Hz units)
contains the microprocessor CPU for managing operating mode data from the Stenoscop, the infrared
Remote Control to the the RECIR and operator data from the DSKB alphanumeric keyboard.
Display
Converts the acquisition bus digital information back to analog to drive the TV monitors Video Formatter or VCR (if
used).
Handles the image graphic overlay data to be displayed on the monitors.
DSMP
Enables RAM storage of up to 8 images (576 x 576 x 12 format), 2 freeze TV frames for monitor display and 6 frames
save.
Provides zoom image enlargement (2X), of the central area of the image.
Enables Horizontal and Vertical image reversal.
Provides for real-time Image post-processing, including recursive filtering of 2 to 16 frames in fluoro and
integration filtering of 2 to 16 frames for noise reduction in pulsed fluoro and electronic radiography operating
modes.
DSKB
Interfaces the alphanumeric operator keyboard to the CPU. The keyboard has 82 keys. 31 are LED illuminated.
These indicate function selection and, when flashing, indicate an operator action request.
16-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RECIR
Interfaces the infrared remote control to the CPU. Transmission rate is 9600 baud using a PPM code. (Pulse Position
Modulation).
DSID
Interfaces the hard disk image storage with the DSMP. The disk stores up to 200 frames. Disk management is
designed to respect real-time image processing constraints.
DSIP (IP)
This is an optional item that provides the following:
A programmed acquisition sequence for image post-processing.
Real-time subtraction.
Peak opacification - to display peak opacity in vascular vessels.
Road mapping - for catheter placement
The IP function acts only on Monitor A in real time.

DSM Image Paths
The TV Camera composite video signal is fed directly to the acquisition module on the DSAD. Here the signal is
converted A/D and applied ot the Display and the DSMP processor. The Display performs a D/A conversion and the
resultant analog composite video is then passed to the TV Monitors A or B, and can be passed to the Video Imager
(Formatter) or a VCR if such are used.
DSMP processed images are routed through the DSID for storage on the hard disk and the DSMP volatile RAM
memory.
Stenoscop and DSM Interface Signals
MF+ to DSM
MG+
Used for technic coding, fluoro, pulsed fluoro and ER (electronic radiography)
Memo+ to DSM
Indicates video stable for acquisition and processing.
VISU to DSM
X-ray present
X-Perm to Steno
+ enables x-ray emission

- stops x-ray emission
used to control sequencing in pulsed fluoro (SP) and electronic radiography (ER)
A/B to Steno
Drives monitor display rotation to normal, used for split screen operating mode
Fluoro Operation
When the x-ray exposure is initiated, the DSM monitor A displays the non-filtered dynamic (real-time) image.
When the video is stable (Memo signal), the recursive filter with selected coefficents becomes active on the dynamic
image. When the exposure is terminated, the filtered image is frozen and displayed on monitor A. Initiation of
another x-ray exposure results in transfer of the first image to monitor B while the new dynamic image is displayed
on monitor A. With the IP, post processing of the real time image includes subtraction peak opacification and road
mapping.
16-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Pulsed Fluoro Operation
When the exposure is made in the pulsed fluoro mode, a dynamic image is displayed on monitor A for the duration of
the first x-ray pulse. A refreshed frozen image is displayed at the end of each additional pulse.
The x-ray exposure time is controlled by the DSM (X-PERM) signal for the processing selected. If the x-ray
exposure switch is released before the image is frozen, the x-ray emission is not interrupted, but continues to
enable completing the processing.
The pulsed fluoro mode forces integration filtering.
Road mapping and peak opacification cannot be done in the pulsed fluoro mode. These techniques are
automatically inhibited. Pulsed fluoro mode subtraction is only possible when the IP option is used.
Electronic Radiography (ER)
In this mode, initiation of the x-ray exposure results in a non-filtered real-time image display as in standard fluoro.
When the video signal is stable (Memo to the DSM), the dynamic real-time image is subjected to integration
filtering. X-ray exposure time is controlled by the X-PERM DMS signal to the Stenoscop. In the event the exposure
is prematurely terminated by the operator, before the image is frozen, x-ray emission is not interrupted but
continues to complete the necessary processing.
Road mapping, peak opacification and real time subtraction technics are automatically inhibited.
16-4
DSM 200 OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS
These are initiated from the keyboard or the Remote Control. They require use of the DMS software program. The
Operational Function when selected, perform specific tasks and are therefore useful for failure diagnostics.
Refer to Illustrations 16-6 & 16-7. Shown, are the key-function selections and the modules or boards of the DSM
that are involved. This should prove to be of considerable value when troubleshooting DMS faults.
16-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Key
Module/Board Concerned
IMAGE MEMORY
FUNCTION
- Automatic or manual
image storage
- DSID Memory (DSMP)

ES, LS2, LS3
- Animation rate
S monitor A
S monitor B
- DSID DISK (option), Memory (DSMP),

Display (DSAD)
LS2, LS3
image clearing
- Memory (DSMP)
LS2, LS3
- Programmed acquisition
sequence
- Memory (DSMP)
ACQ DSAD, ES
- Vertical and horizontal

video reversals
- Memory (DSMP)
LS2, LS3
image transfer from
monitor A to monitor B
- Memory (DSMP), Display (DSAD)

LS2, LS3
- Two-image display
on one monitor
- Memory (DSMP), Display (DSAD)

LS2, LS3
- x 2 zoom
- Memory (DSMP)
LS2, LS3
IMAGE POSTPROCESSING
FUNCTION
- Noise reduction
filtering coefficient
- Processing (DSMP)
ACQ, LS2, LS3, ES
- Variable contrast
correction (Gamma)
- Display (DSAD)
LS2, LS3
Operational Functions
Illustration 16-6
16-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DSM 200
Key
IMAGE MEMORY
FUNCTION
- Antiglare
correction
- Display (DSAD)
LS2, LS3
- Real time
subtraction
- Processing (DSMP) ACQ, LS2, LS1
- Peak opacification
- Road Mapping
- Edge enhancement
- DSIP board
HARD-COPY
REPRODUCTION FUNCTION
- EXP reproduction
- Display (DSAD)
CPU
ANNOTATION
FUNCTION
- Annotation display
- Display (DSAD), CPU (DSAD)
- Annotation extinction
- Annotation clearing
- Alphanumeric keyboard
- DSKB, CPU (DSAD), Display (DSAD)
OTHER
- Arrows (cursor
displacement)
- CPU (DSAD)
- Function enable
- CPU (DSAD)
- DSM reset
- CPU (DSAD)
Operational Functions (continued)
Illustration 16-7
16-19
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-5 DSM 200 DIAGNOSTICS

The following diagnostics tests should prove helpful to identify and locate malfunctions when troubleshooting the
DSM-200. The diagnostic tests include a SELF-TEST, a general ACCEPTANCE test, INDIVIDUAL MODULE tests
and an IMAGE QUALITY test.
Self-Test
Determines Power Supply malfunctions
Detects data transmission faults
Detects mP problems
In the event of a DSM malfunction the system will automatically switch to a by-pass" mode to enable continued use
of the Stenoscop.
1.
Memory is inhibited and the VIDEO IN signal is applied directly to the VIDEO A OUTPUT to TV MONITOR
A (See Illustration 16-8).
2.
X-Ray is enabled via X-PERM signals transmitted through J7 of the DSM to the Stenoscop.
To perform the Self-Test, snap the Power Switch to ON. If operation is normal the TV Monitor screen will display:
GENERAL ELECTRIC CGR - logo
Software references
System configuration (DSM 200 or DSM 200 + IP)
If no malfunction occurs, at the end of the Self-Test, one beep is generated, application starts and the TV Monitor
displays the last stored image with its identifying numbers.
The following keys will be lit:
Noise Reduction ON/OFF (Key 7)
Noise Reduction level coefficient (Key 4- Group 2)
Auto image clear (Key 12A - Group 3)
Infrared I/O Remote Control active
If a fault be detected during the self-test the POWER-UP TEST FAILED" message will be displayed. If a fault
inhibits application during use, RESET by means of the DSAD push-button or the OFF/ON Power Switch. The
Self-Test will re-run and indicate the fault.
Power Supply problems and TV Camera signal loss can be determined by reading the LED's on the DSAD board.
Normal operation will be indicated when LED #1 is OFF and LED's #2 to 9 are lit. (See Illustration 16-9).
A non-formatted disk will display UNFORMATTED DISK" on the Monitor. The disk must then be formatted in the
Maintenance Mode" by a FORMAT command.
Finally if problems are encountered refer to the START-UP" tables (Illustration 16-11 & 16-12).
16-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Power Switch - ON
DSM
SELF TEST
checks Power Supply
checks data transmission
checks mP
Video IN Looped
to Video OUT to
Monitor A
X-ray enabled by
x-perm signals - J7
Failure
X-Ray Ready
Auto
NR
Remote
I/O
Filter-4
Lights
ON
Simultaneously Press GMA

Keys to transfer to Manual mode
Screen Displays
0
1
2
3
4
Function Tests
Illustration 16-8
16-22
Exit
Acceptance test
Image Quality Test
Bug
Disk Formatting
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
LED function Indicators on the DSAD Board
DS1
RESET (push button x11)
DS2
VIDEO IN signal
DS3
phase-lock loop
DS4
system clock
DS5
+ 5V (analog)
DS6
- 12V
DS7
+ 12V
DS8
+ 5V
DS9
- 5.2V
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
J7
X11
Reset
DS5
DS6
DS7
DS8
DS9
DSAD
LED Function Indicators

Illustration 16-9
16-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Access To Manual Mode
After the DMS SELF-TEST is completed select the Manual Mode by simultaneously depressing keys G, M and A
(Alphanumeric keyboard). The DSM block diagram will be displayed as shown in Illustration 16-10, except for
statistic window" and error window." X-ray emission is not possible in the manual mode.
The control window at the bottom of Illustration 8-8 provides access to other manual mode functions. Depressing
the corresponding number on the Keyboard selects the function as follows:
0=
Exit - to exit
1=
ALL - performs DMS Acceptance (ALL)
2=
QI -
3=
Bug - Not used
4=
Image Quality Tests, used to check image performance and adjust TV Camera & TV
Monitors
Format - Format the disk
DSM Acceptance Test (ALL)

Depress Key 1. Each module and associated link is sequentially tested. The module under test is displayed in
reverse video (white) for the duration of the test. The test for a faulty link between modules, is performed at the end of
the second module tested.
A failure interrupts the test and the module or link error is registered. Depressing any key after a registered failure
enables continuing the test and the error indicated is deleted.
At the end of the test, STATISTIC WINDOW will be displayed indicating number of errors and number of passes
made. A positive test is indicated if none of the modules are displayed in reverse video (white). To stop the test,
press Z on the alphanumeric keyboard. Depress 0 to exit.
Individual Module Test
Each module contains an identifying letter which is the same as used to identify the component in the Renewal
Parts" listing. Depressing D on the keyboard, for example, starts testing of that module.
Depress keys G, M and A simultaneously. Next, select the module to be tested by typing in its associated identifying
letter. This starts the test program. The module being tested, is shown in reverse video (white).
When completed, the number of bad passes relative to the total performed (99 maximum) will be displayed in the
Statistic Window."
If an error is detected the ERROR WINDOW displays the number of errors with details of the first five showing actual
and theoretical address values from the beginning of the test. In case of an error, refer to Illustration 8-11 to
determine module replacement. The control window displays the error description.
To stop the test, depress any key letter on the Keyboard. To select another module to be tested, depress the key for
the module's identifying letter.
If the test had no errors, the module will be displayed in normal video. Depress 0 to exit.
16-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DSAD
ACQUISITION
D
DSAD
B
DSAD
CPU
BUS ACQ
BUS LS2
BUS LS1
DSMP
PROCESSING
DSAD
DISPLAY
DSMP
MEM LS1
ES LS2
B
LS3
M200
DISK
E
DSIP
F
BUSES
ERROR WINDOW
STATISTIC WINDOW
00 BAD ON 00 PASSES
NB ERRORS
ADDRESS READ THEORETICAL
0 : EXIT
1 : ALL 2: QI
3 : BUG 4: FORMAT
Control window
XR0383
DMS Display
Illustration 16-10
16-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TROUBLE
No beep upon
start-up
PROBABLE CAUSE
No DSM power
CORRECTIVE ACTION
S
S
DSAD board power

supply failure
S
S
No monitor
image
Keyboard
inoperative
Check connection of the line cable between

the distribution system and the DSM power
input.
Set the DSM I/O switch to I.
Check the connections between:
- Line module and power supply unit.
- Power supply unit and J2 of DSAD.
Check that LEDs DS5 to DS9 are ON" if not
check:
- Fuses.
- Filter assembly.
- DSM power supply.
No monitor power
On monitor:
S Connect the line.
S Set the switch to ON.
No video output
signal
If DSM is in by-pass mode, faulty

ACQUISITION module (DSAD).
If DSM is not in by-pass mode, faulity
DISPLAY and ACQUISITION modules (DSAD).
Video input
failure
S DS2 OFF"
(incorrect Video
IN)
S DS3 OFF" (PLL
incorrect)
S DS4 OFF" or dim
(CK 66 incorrect)
Check the camera-to-J8 of DSAD connections.
Check:
- Camera signal.
- ACQUISITION module (DSAD).
- CPU module (DSAD).
No DSAD
connection
Correctly connect the 60-contract cable to

keyboard and J1 of DSAD.
Faulty circuits
Faulty:
- DSKB board.
- 60-contact cable.
- DSAD board (CPU module).
Fault Isolation Upon Start-Up

Illustration 16-11
16-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TROUBLE
Remote
control"
i
inoperative
ti
(with keyboard
I/O key ON"
PROBABLE CAUSE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
No connection
Check connection of telephone connector to

RECIR and J6 of DSAD
Faulty circuits
Faulty:
- RECIR baord.
- Remote control" six-conductor cable.
- Remote control.
Change the remote control battery.
S
Switchover
to maintenance
mode impossible
Faulty keyboard or
CPU
Faulty:
- DSKB baord.
Hard disk
formatting
fault
(DSM 200)
Faulty
connections
Check the connection of SCSI and power

supply cables between hard disk and DSID
board.
Faulty
components
Faulty:
- Disk.
- Cables.
- DSID board.
- DSMD board.
Faulty screen
g
dialog
Faulty graphic
generation
Faulty DSAD board (CPU module) and

screen.
Keyboard board
Replace DSKB board.
CPU dialog
Faulty DSAD board (CPU module)
After the
self-test, a
message is
displayed
See Illustration 16-13
NOTE: In all cases, use the maintenance mode to trace the fault origin.
Fault Isolation Upon Start-Up (continued)
Illustration 16-12
16-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPONENT (S) TO BE
REPLACED in order
MONITOR MESSAGE
DSAD DISPLAY TEST
S DSAD DAC REGISTERS TEST FAILED
S DSAD FM MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSAD GRAPHIC MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSAD VERTICAL RETRACE INTERRUPT TEST FAILED
DSAD board (DISPLAY and

CPU modules)
DSMP MEMORY TEST

S DSMP TRANSVAG MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSMP RANDOM ACCESS DATA BUS TEST FAILED
S DSMP RANDOM ACCESS ADDRESS BUS TEST FAILED
S DSMP F3D Z SELECTION TEST FAILED
S DSMP PARAVAG MEMORY TEST FAILED
S DSMP SEQUENTIAL BUS ES TEST FAILED
S DSMP SEQUENTIAL BUS LS1 TEST FAILED
S DSMP SEQUENTIAL BUS LS2 TEST FAILED
S DSMP IMAGE MEMORY TEST FAILED
DSMP board (MEM module)

DSAD board (CPU module)
DSMP PROCESSING TEST

S DSMP ALU operations test failed
S DSMP F1 multiplications test failed
S DSMP F3 divisions test failed
S DSMP COMPARATOR test failed
DSMP board (PROCESSING

and MEM modules)
DSAD board (CPU module)
ACQUISITION TEST
DSAD DIGITALIZATION TEST FAILED
DSAD board (ACQ and CPU

modules)
S
S
KEYBOARD TEST
KEYBOARD NOT HERE
DSAD REGISTER LED TEST FAILED
DSAD board
DSKB board
60-conductor cable if
most keys are inoperative
DSID HARD DISK TEST FAILED

S DSID RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY TEST FAILED
S UNFORMATTED DISK
S HARD DISK READ TEST FAILED
S DSID SEQUENTIAL ACCESS MEMORY TEST FAILED
S HARD DISK WRITE TEST FAILED
DSIP TEST
S DSIP TEST FAILED
DSID board
SCSI + pwr supply cables
Hard disk
DSMP board
DSMP board
DSIP board
DSAD board
Monitor Messages and Possible Replacements

Illustration 16-13
16-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: sm 2128761-100 DSM (DSM 8 IP, DSM 600 IP, DSM 600 IP SEQ) EMC, Rev. 0, Page 1-1
16-6 DSM 600 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 1 DSM DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION OF OPTIONS

This chapter describes:
D
The DSM (Basic version and options).
The installation schedule for the options.
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
11
Description of Stenoscop 2, Product Line D6 000 or D9 000 CCD

See Illustration 11.
The DSM (Dedicated Stenoscop Memory) forms the memory of the Stenoscop 2, Line 6 000
or 9 000 mobile intraoperative radiology system.
This system consists of the following two mobile units:
D
The C-arm carrier assembly (A) for image acquisition.
The monitor carrier (B) equipped with:
One or two monitors (Item 1) (the second monitor is optional),
DSM unit (Item 2),
Film imager (Item 4) (optional),
Hard-copy printer (Item 5) (optional),
VCR (Item 3) (optional).
This mobile system is delivered with all the power supply and interconnection cables
together with the DSM (Refer to Service Manual of the Stenoscop 2 system).
The DSM is designed for:
D
Temporary image storage,
Display and processing of images on one or two independent monitors, hard-copy

reproduction and connection to a video recorder,
Graphic overlay.
16-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

The DSM exists in three versions:

D
DSM 8 IP comprising:
Electronics Rack and Console.
IR (infra-red) remote control unit, with the same controls as those on the left-hand
side of the console.
IP (Image Processing) module providing the following functions:
Real-time image subtraction,
Peak opacification,
Road mapping,
Edge enhancement.
DSM 600 IP.

This comprises one DSM 8 IP with hard disk (600 images).
DSM 600 IP SEQ comprising:
DSM 600 IP unit.
Memory extension (32 images), enabling the acquisition function to be used,
Dynamic display in Cine-Loop Mode.
16-30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 11
STENOSCOP 2
16-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
12

Description of DSM Rack

121 Labels
The identification and technical data labels (18) are located outside the rack (and can be
seen from the rear on the right).
122 General Arrangement
The Electronic Equipment Rack (17) is housed inside the monitor carrier (11):
D
All the controls are mounted on the console (13) at the front.
The rear panel (1) carries all electrical connections.
123 Electronic Equipment Rack

This rack features:
D
At the top, the following two printed-circuit boards:
DSAD2 (Illustration 12, Item 3) for Acquisition-Display, EMC version.
DSMP2 (Illustration 12, Item 10) for Memory-Processing.
These two boards plug into each other in the horizontal slideways. The boards are locked in
position by the frame on the rear and by the DSAD2 plate.
In the DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ IP versions, the DSID (disk interface) Board
(Illustration 12, Item 9) is secured to Connector XJ1 of the DSMP2 Board (Illustration 12,
Item 10).
In the DSM 8 IP/DSM 600 IP and DSM 600 IP SEQ version, the DSIP (Illustration 12,
Item 4) Board is connected to the J3 connector on the DSAD2 Board (Illustration 12,
Item 3).
In the DSM 600 IP SEQ version, Board DSMP2 has a larger memory module
(Illustration 12, Item 19).
16-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 12
DSM RACK
5
6
7
10
11
18
17
19
15
14
13
12
16-33
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Fixed components including:
Line connection module (Illustration 12, Item 5) provided with a switch, two fuses
and a line filter,
Power supply unit (Illustration 12, Item 7) providing + 5V, + 12V and 12V
rectified voltage outputs. It is connected to J2 of the DSAD Board (Illustration 12,
Item 3),
Fan (Illustration 12, Item 6) supplied with +12 V,
Hard disk (Illustration 12, Item 8) specific to the DSM 600 IP and DSM
600 IP SEQ versions and connected to the DSID Board (Illustration 12, Item 9).
124 Console
Inside the console, the front panel (Illustration 12, Item 13) is provided with the following:
D
The DSKB (keyboard) Board (Illustration 12, Item 12),
The RECIR Board (Illustration 12, Item 14) which receives the infrared rays from the
remote control through the receiver (Illustration 12, Item15).
16-34
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 13
DSM BLOCK DIAGRAM
J4
J5
CPU
J6
MODULE
STENOSCOP
CONSOLE AND
GENERATOR
J7
VCR read
command
J18
1
X3
PUT
CCD
J16
CAMERA
(CCD)
MONITOR
Video IN
J17
Video OUT A
X4
ACQUISITION
MODULE
J9
A (50 Hz)
REPRODUCTION
UNIT
HCC start
J10
HCC video
J11
DISPLAY
VCR video OUT

VIDEO RECORDER
MONITOR
B (50 Hz)
Video IN
VCR command
J12
Video OUT B
J13
J14
J15
Moniteur A
Flickerfree 100 Hz
MODULE
J3
DSAD 2
J19
CCD
Moniteur B
Flickerfree 100 Hz
16-35
DSMP 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

125 Boards
The DSAD2 Board makes the interconnection with:
D
The mobile base (through the cables from the monitor cart).
The console.
The power supply unit.
The DSMP2 Board.
The DSAD2 Board comprises:

D
Two pushbuttons:
S1: Reset.
S2: Abort.
Eight jumpers:
X1: Bus error (configured in plant).

X2: DSAD or DSAD2 functionality.
X3: Frequency selection: 50 or 60 Hz.
X4: PUT (PickUp Tube) or CCD function.
X5: CPU clock (configured in plant).
X6: Watchdog.
X7: Enable automatic detection Read VCR.
X8: Video system adjustment in plant.
Seven LEDs:
DS1 red:
DS2 red:
DS3 yellow:
DS4 yellow:
DS5 green:
DS6 green:
DS7 green:
DSAD2 test failed.

DSM reset.
Video IN OK.
VCR acquisition.
12 V.
+12 V.
+5 V.
The DSAD2 Board is divided into three functional modules assigned to acquisition, display
and CPU:
D
The acquisition module has the following three functions:
Amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the VIDEO IN signal received

from the camera or VCR,
Synchronization of the DSM on the VIDEO IN signal (PLL phase locking loop) and
generation of the system clock (frequency = 14.75 MHz),
Generation of the sequencing signals for the entire memory.
16-36
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

The display module has the following four functions:
Data multiplexing of the digitized images to be displayed,
Digital-to-analog conversion of image data,
Display in flicker-free mode,
Image graphic overlay.
This module also provides access to the DSIP Board in the DSM 600 IP or 600 IP SEQ
version.
D
The CPU module (organized around a 68000-series microprocessor) has the following
functions:
Management of the keyboard and associated LEDs,
Interface with Stenoscop 2,
Serial interface with the IR (Infrared) receiver,
Management of the various boards making up the DSM.
DSMP2 Board
This board makes the interconnection with:
D
DSAD2 Board.
DSID (hard disk interface) Board (optional).
Memory module.
Functionally, it is composed of two modules assigned to memory and processing which

communicate over buses LS1 (sequential reading) and ES (sequential writing), which
operate on a time-shared basis:
The memory module has a capacity of:
D
DSM 8 IP or DSM 600 IP version:

Eight images: 576 x 576 x 8 bits.
(two working images and six saved images)
DSM 600 IP CL version:

32 images: 576 x 576 x 8 bits.
(two working images and 30 saved images)
It controls the access to this memory in real time and enables the zoom (enlargement)
and vertical and/or horizontal sweep reversal functions.
The processing module performs real-time image postprocessing through the following
functions:
Identity function,
Recursive filtering (active during a fluoroscopy transmission once the video signal
is established). It is provided for noise reduction, increasing the reduction as the
selected weighting coefficient is increased (2, 4, 8 or 16),
16-37
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Integration filtering (active during a pulsed fluoroscopy transmission or an

electronic radiography once the video signal is established). It permits the
integration of two, four, eight or sixteen images, pixel by pixel, at the video rate.
Signal-to-noise ratio increases as the number of integrated images is increased.
Substraction in single fluoroscopy.
DSKB (keyboard) Board

The DSKB (keyboard) Board has 82 keys. Of these, 31 are illuminated keys:
D
Illuminated LED, corresponding to a function in progress.
Flashing LED, corresponding to a question or an action request for the operator.
RECIR (Infrared Radiation Receiver) Board

The RECIR Board is connected to the CPU module of the DSAD Board through an RS232C
serial link with a transmission rate of 9600 bauds. The Board comprises:
D
Infrared-sensitive detector,
Serial encoder.
The infrared code is a PPM (Plessey Pulse Position Modulation) coding.

DSID (Hard Disk Interface) Board and Hard Disk (DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ version)
The DSID Board:
D
Permits hard disk management while respecting real-time processing constraints.
Complies with the SCSI standard.
Comprises an image buffer.
The disk forms a 600-images extension of the random-access memory.

DSIP (Image Postprocessing) Board (DSM 8 IP, DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ)
In conjunction with the DSMP Board, the DSIP performs the following functions:
D
Programmed acquisition sequence,
Display of sequence recorded on disk in Video Loop Mode,
Peak opacification to display the peak opacifications of a vascular sequence on only

one image,
Road mapping used to simplify and facilitate the placing of a catheter in the vascular
system. It combines the subtraction and peak opacification functions,
Edge enhancement.
16-38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

126 Internal Connections

These comprise the following items:
D
Power supply cable connecting the power supply unit to Connector J2 of DSAD2,
Ribbon cable connecting the DSKB (keyboard) Board to Connector J1 of DSAD2,
RS232C cable (with telephone connector) connecting the console RECIR Board to
Connector J6 of DSAD2,
SCSI cable connecting the hard disk to XJ3 of the DSID Board (DSM 600 IP or DSM
600 IP SEQ version),
Hard disk power supply cable connected to XJ2 of the DSID Board (DSM 600 IP or
DSM 600 IP SEQ version),
Connector J3 for connection to IP,
Connector J19 not used.
127 External Connections

The connections are made at the following rear connectors of the DSAD Board:
D
J4/J5: RS232C serial links only used for system debugging (i.e., a terminal
connected at J4 and a computer connected at J5),
J7:
Link between console and Stenoscop generator,
J8:
DSM video input coaxial link from camera,
J9:
DSM video output coaxial link to monitor A (not in flicker-free),
J10:
START REPRO coaxial link at DSM output to initiate the imager

(not in flicker-free),
J11:
DSM video output coaxial link to imager; the signal corresponds to

the image displayed on monitor A (not in flicker-free),
J12:
DSM video output coaxial link to video recorder. The signal

corresponds to the image displayed on monitor A,
J13:
DSM video output coaxial link to monitor B (not in flicker-free),
J14:
Video 1 OUT coaxial link in flicker-free mode,
J15:
Video 2 OUT coaxial link in flicker-free mode,
J16:
VCR interface connector,
J17:
Video IN coaxial link between DSM and VCR,
J18:
VCR external read command.
See table below.
16-39
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TABLE 11
SIGNALS PASSING THROUGH J7
PIN
SIGNAL
I/O
FUNCTION
COMMUN
Common return for inputs
MG
X-Ray Mode encoding
MF
X-Ray Mode encoding
10
MEMO
Stable video
VISU
X-rays present
11
CAG
AGC operating
CAG+
AGC operating
12
SPAREOUT
Not connected
SPAREOUT+
Not connected
13
RECORDVCR
VCR recording command
RECORDVCR+
VCR recording command
14
AB
2-image mode
AB+
2-image mode
15
XPERM
Exposure enable
XPERM+
Exposure enable
16-41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 14
REMOTE CONTROL
IR RECEIVER
IR TRANSMITTER
REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
2
1
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
16
18
19
20
21
16-42
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
13

Remote Control
131 General Arrangement

The remote control keypad keys are identical to those located on the console keyboard left
hand side.
The remote control is active at power-on (console I/O key On) and the operator can use
either the remote control or the corresponding console keys as desired.
When the console I/O key is OFF (key depression), the remote control is inactive.
132 Functions
The functions concern the image display:
1
Selection of the variable contrast correction
23
Variable contrast correction
Antiglare correction
56
Vertical and horizontal video reversals
Noise reduction filtering
89
Image transfer from monitor A to monitor B
10
Display of two images on one monitor
11
Zoom (x 2 duplication)
12
Hard-copy reproduction
1316 Monitor A animation rate

1417 Monitor B animation rate
1518 Image storage
19
Acquisition in subtraction
20
Acquisition in road mapping
21
Acquisition in Sequence mode

Video loop in post-processing.
16-43
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
14

Physical Characteristics
Overall dimensions (mm)
Length
Height
Depth
IR remote control
9.6
190.5
25.4
Memory Rack
380
190
460
Console
490
260
100
Maximum weight
D
IR remote control
100 g
(0.22 lb)
Memory Rack
18.5 kg
(40.7 lb)
Console
2.2 kg
(4.8 lb)
Temperature conditions
D
Operating :
10 to 40C without condensation
Storage or transport :
-40 to +70C without condensation
Temperature variation:
up to 10C/h.
Cooling
Fan fitted to rack side.
Relative humidity
Operating: 10 % to 80 % without condensation.
Electrical requirements
D
AC line power supply:
Fuses on line power input: 3.2 A/250 V

(slow-blow).
Consumption:
Overcurrent protection: upstream of line.
Resistance between frame and ground: 0.1 ohm maximum.
207 to 250 V.
50 or 60 Hz.
1 A at line rating
20 A at 5 V.
16-44
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Legal specifications
The DSM complies with the following rules and regulations.
D
EMC 60112.
UL 478.
CSA 222114.
IEC 6011.
The labelling complies with the above standards and with internal rules.
15
Technical Characteristics
151 Characteristics
D
Storage of eight or 32 images in dynamic memory.
Black and white display of two independent video channels.
Two independent contrast windows.
Displayed image matrix: 576 x 576 x 8 bits.
Video-composition.
Graphic associated with image.
Real-time or deferred-time image postprocessing.
Parallel external interface for the controls and synchronization (isolated by

optocouplers).
Modular and expandable application software.
Self-test at power-on or after an initialization.
Connection of an infrared remote control.
Connection of a hard disk.
Image processing module.
Video input: 1 volt peak-to-peak composite signal, 75-ohm impedance.
Video standard (CCIR and RS170 standards):
152 Option
153 Acquisition
625 lines/50 Hz, two interlaced fields (CCIR).
525 lines 60 Hz, two interlaced fields (RS170).
Scanning ratio: H/V = 4/3.
Video bandwidth: 6.5 MHz at 3 dB.
Signal-to-noise ration greater than 54 dB.
16-45
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

D
Analog-to-digital converter (8 bits 1/2 LSB).
Sampling frequency:
50 Hz : 14.75 MHz
60 Hz : 14.89 MHz
Maximum acquisition rate in dynamic memory:

25 images/second (CCIR)
30 images/second (NTSC).
154 Display
D
Two independent black and white composite video outputs complying with same
standards as the input.
Output video signal standard same as that of input video.
Scanning ratio same as that of input.
Hybrid digital-to-analog converters (eight bits).
Matrix displayed according to scanning ratio and video standard:
625 lines/50 Hz
576 pixels x 575 lines
525 lines/60 Hz
Flicker-free display:
625 lines/100 Hz
525 lines/120 Hz
155 Storage
D
32 Mb memory plane in dynamic RAM. (128 Mb in DSM 600 IP SEQ)
4 megaword x 8-bit capacity: eight images.

32 megaword x 8-bit capacity: 32 images.
Image matrix: 576 x 576 x 12 bits.
600 images on the disk.
System controlled by 68000-series microprocessor at 10 MHz.
Watchdog and power supply control.
DSMBUG monitor.
2 Mbytes of static memory.
512 Kbytes of EPROM.
156 System
16-46
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

157 Processing
D
Contrast transformation table
independent
Scroll in increments of 1 on X and Y
on the two
x 2 zoom on X and Y
video outputs
Video multiplexer for mixing two video channels on only one channel, for the
two-image mode.
Programmable screen field defined within displayed matrix with position and
dimension determined as desired.
Min/Max function between two images in real time.
Recursive and averaging filtering to improve signal-to-noise ration of acquired images

by 5 dB (plus movement detection).
Image addition and subtraction on 12 bits (linear and logarithmic).
Constant-value image initialization.
Deferred-time processing by microprocessor.
7 x 5 convolution kernel allowing real time processing (e.g., edge enhancement).
Optoelectronic coupling interface with an external device.
RS232C serial asynchronous interface.
158 Interfaces
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DSM 600 IP, CINE-LOOP, AND IP OPTIONS
21
Description of Installation Sheets

This section describes the installation of the following options in the DSM Rack:
D
M 600 IP comprising:
Hard disk,
DSID Board to be plugged into Connector XJ1 of the DSMP2 Board,
SCSI cable and power supply cable making the connection between the DSID
Board and hard disk.
Set of PROMs.
Cine-Loop option:
Four memory extension modules for the DSMP2 Board.
16-47
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16-48
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

16-7 DSM 600 THEORY
CHAPTER 2 THEORY OF OPERATION

SECTION 1
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
11
DSM in its Environment

The DSM is a digital memory mode integral with the Stenoscop 2 systems, product line
6000 or 9000.
It is installed in series in the image system between the camera and one or two monitor(s) for
the acquisition, processing and saving of images.
It enables several types of image to be displayed:
D
Real-time image (during examination).

The dynamic image, obtained upon emission of the x-rays, is displayed on the first
monitor.
When the x-ray emission is stopped, the image is named type A frozen image.
When the x-ray emission is restarted, and if SHIFTAUTO is selected, the type A frozen
image is transferred on the second monitor. It becomes a type B frozen image, while
the first monitor displays a new dynamic image (for the definition of type A or B
images, refer to Operator Manual/OM, of Stenoscop 2).
12
Saved images selected from six or 30 images in the DSM random-access memory.
Stored images selected from 600 images on the hard disk (M 600 IP or M 600 IP SEQ
option).
DSM Organization
The main functions of the DSM are described in paragraph 125 of Chapter 3, according to
the various boards:
D
DSAD2 Board: Modules
Acquisition,
Display,
CPU.
16-49
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 21
DSM BLOCK DIAGRAM
DSIR
BOARD
CPU
MODULE
DSKB
BOARD
IP
BOARD
CPU BUS
DSAD2 BOARD
CAMERA VIDEO IN
ACQ
MODULE
ACQ
VCR VIDEO IN
VIDEO OUT
A 50 HZ
VIDEO OUT
B 50 HZ
DISPLAY
MODULE
MODULETRAIT
VIDEO OUT
A 100 HZ
ES
LS1
LS2
DSID
BOARD
MEMORY
MODULE
DSMP2 BOARD
16-50
LS3
VIDEO OUT
B 100 HZ
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

13
DSMP2 Board: Modules
Random-access memory,
Processing,
Two options: eight images or 32 images with Cine-Loop.
DSKB Board: Hardware keyboard.
RECIR Board: Infrared detection and PPM coding relative to the remote control.
DSID Board (600 IP or 600 IP SEQ option): Management of hard disk storage.
DSIP Board (Option M 600 IP or M 600 IP SEQ) for image processing.
Power Supply
The DSM:
Note:
Is supplied with 220 V 50/60 Hz power from the Stenoscop 2 220 V terminal block,
Is provided with an individual ON/OFF switch (I/O) mounted on the line input module
(with filter and fuses),
Feeds DC power (+ 5 V, + 12 V, and 12 V) to its various circuits from a low voltage

power supply.
The DSM fan is fed with + 12 V.
ILLUSTRATION 22
LINE INPUT
UNIT
F1
220V
50/60Hz
FILTER
F2
GROUND CONNECTION
+5V
12V
+12V
16-51
POWER
SUPPLY LV
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SECTION 2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
21
X-Ray Techniques and Display

Three x-ray (XR) techniques are used at Stenoscop 2 and concern the DSM:
D
Fluoroscopy,
Pulsed fluoroscopy,
Electronic radiography (ER).
The following signals from Stenoscop 2 and injected at J7 of the DSM are associated with
these techniques:
D
MF (+) and MG (+) : technique coding,
MEMORY (+) : if the video is stable,
DISPLAY (+) : if the XRs are present.
When XRs are present, the images are dynamic and displayed on Monitor A.
A dynamic image postprocessing request (e.g.: filtering) is only serviced when the video
signal is stable (MEMORY active).
The following signals are routed from the DSM to the Stenoscop 2:
D
The A/B (+, ) information of the two-image mode,
The X-PERM signal enabling XR emission or which chops the latter in the pulsed
fluoroscopy and ER modes.
In the event of a DSM failure, do not make an exposure.
16-52
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
211 Fluoroscopy
The DISPLAY signal is activated when the XR footswitch is depressed; the DSM displays
the non-filtered dynamic image on Monitor A.
When the video is stable (MEMORY signal), the recursive filter becomes active on the
dynamic image.
ILLUSTRATION 23
FLUOROSCOPY TIMING DIAGRAM
HT
40ms
min
VIDEO IN
VISU
0.25 s thru 1.6 s
MEMO
XPERM
Digitizing
Frozen image
Display
Filtered
dynamic image*
Filtered dynamic image
Filtered frozen image
Image beeps
40 ms max
40 ms max
40 ms max
* When CCD is on, recursive filtering starts with the VISU signal in a nonsubtracted image
without peakop. In the case of a subtracted or peakop image, the mask is taken from the
moment the MEMO signal starts to rise (xrays stable).
When the XR footswitch is released, the last image is frozen and displayed on Monitor A.
16-53
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
212 Pulsed fluoroscopy

In the pulsed fluoroscopy mode, when the XR footswitch is depressed, a dynamic image is
displayed on Monitor A for the duration of the first pulse. Then, the refreshed frozen image
is displayed at the end of each XR pulse.
Note:
1. The XR emission duration is controlled by the DSM (X-PERM signal) according to

the processing selected. If the XR footswitch is released before the image is frozen,
the XR emission is not interrupted, and continues up to completion of processing.
2. Integration filtering is used with this mode.
3. The road mapping and peak opacification IP modes (option) are not compatible with
this mode; they are automatically inhibited.
ILLUSTRATION 24
PULSED FLUOROSCOPY TIMING DIAGRAM
HT
VIDEO IN
VISU
0.25 s thru 1.6 s
MEMO
XPERM
Digitizing
Frozen
Processing image
Nonfiltered
image
Dynamic image
in integration
Filtered frozen image n
Dynamic image
in integration
Filtered frozen image n+1
Image beeps
40 ms max
Display
Frozen
image
n1
40 ms max
Non-filtered
dynamic image n
40 ms max
16-54
Filtered frozen image n+1
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

213 Electronic Radiography (ER)

In the electronic radiography mode, when the XR footswitch is depressed, a non-filtered
dynamic image is displayed.
When the video signal is stable (MEMORY signal), the dynamic image is subjected to
integration filtering.
The XR duration is determined by the X-PERM signal delivered by the DSM.
Same remarks as in the preceding paragraph.
Note:
1. X-ray emission time is controlled by the DSM (X-PERM signal) according to the
processing selected. If the Exposure footswitch is released before the image is
frozen, x-ray emission is not interrupted (and continues to the end of processing).
2. Integration filtering is used with this mode.
3. The road mapping, peak opacification, and real-time substraction IP modes (option)
are not compatible with this mode; they are automatically inhibited.
ILLUSTRATION 25
ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY (ER) TIMING DIAGRAM
HT
VIDEO IN
VISU
0.25 s thru 1.6 s
MEMO
XPERM
Digitizing
Processing
Frozen
image
Non-filtered
dynamic image n
Dynamic image in integration
Filtered frozen image
Image beeps
40 ms max
Display
Frozen image
n1
40 ms max
Non-filtered dynamic image n
16-55
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
22

Image Routing
221 Real Time

The VIDEO IN signal from the camera is digitized by the acquisition module.
It is then transmitted by the acquisition dynamic bus (8 bits 14.75 MHz) to the display
and processing modules.
The acquisition module also extracts the DSM synchronization from the VIDEO IN signal
and generates the sequencing signals for the entire memory.
The display module performs the D/A conversion (composite video) and displays on
Monitor A or B:
D
The image from the LS2, LS3 or ACQ buses,
The image comprising the graphic overlays generated by the display module,
The image display timing diagrams (according to the various modes described in
paragraph 21).
The processing module performs real time image postprocessing such as:
D
Identity function,
In fluoroscopy mode: recursive filtering with selected coefficient, real-time

substraction, and, if IP option is used, peak opacification and road mapping,
In pulsed fluoroscopy mode: integration filtering according to selected coefficient,
In ER mode: integration filtering according to selected coefficient.
The processed image is routed:

D
On the ES bus (8 bits), to the DSID Board for storage on the hard disk (M 600 IP or
M 600 IP SEQ),
On the sequential writing (ES) 8-bit bus, to the memory module.
The memory has a capacity of eight or 32 images (576 x 576 x 8) including two frozen
images and a maximum of six or 30 saved images. The memory read/write is sequentially
shared in time in four cycles as follows:
D
One ES writing cycle,
Three LS1, LS2 and LS3 reading cycles:
LS1 (8 bits) dedicated to processing.
LS2 et LS3 (8 bits each) intended for display.
The memory module also performs the image zoom and inversion (X, Y) functions.
16-56
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 26
DSM BLOCK DIAGRAM
DSIR
BOARD
CPU
MODULE
DSKB
BOARD
IP
BOARD
CPU BUS
DSAD2 BOARD
CAMERA VIDEO IN
ACQ
MODULE
ACQ
VCR VIDEO IN
DISPLAY
MODULE
VIDEO OUT
A 50HZ
VIDEO OUT
B 50HZ
MODULE TRAIT
ES
LS1
LS2
DSID
BOARD
MEMORY
MODULE
DSMP2 BOARD
16-57
LS3
VIDEO OUT
A 100HZ
VIDEO OUT
B 100HZ
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Hard-Copy Reproduction
If the hard-copy reproduction function is activated, the frozen image displayed on Monitor
A is transmitted with annotations to the imager.
Storage
It is possible to save:
D
A maximum of six or 30 volatile images in the memory module,
600 images saved on the hard disk, with the M 600 IP or M 600 IP SEQ option,
To save, activate the following functions:

D
Manual storage: the frozen image is saved by pressing key MAN,
Automatic storage: when the automatic storage function is active, the last image,
acquired after release of the XR footswitch, is saved,
Storage on the fly: pressing key MAN during x-ray emission stores the current
dynamic image (maximum saving rate: 2 i/s, activable in fluoroscopy or pulsed
fluoroscopy mode, but not in ER mode),
Programmed acquisition sequence (Cine-loop option). This consists of two

sub-sequences during which the acquisition rate (for recording the arterial and venous
phases of a vascular examination) is, for instance:
4 i/s for 8 s,
2 i/s for 4 s,
Each time an image is saved, the new number is displayed after being incremented.
222 Deferred Time
Any image saved in the memory or on the hard disk can be restored on Monitor A and/or B
by actuating the animation rate keys.
The images are routed through:
Note:
The DSID Board and the memory module when they are stored on the hard disk,
LS2 and LS3 buses from the memory module to the display module.
Deferred-time filtering is not possible.
223 Image Display in Cine-Loop Mode

When images have been stored in programmed acquisition mode, the Cine Loop mode
can be used to display the images at their acquisition rate (see above).
16-58
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SECTION 3
DETAILED FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
31
Introduction
This section details the functional description divided into:
32
Operational functions (initialized from the keyboard or the remote control); they use
the DSM software functions. They perform a specific task and are therefore useful for
failure diagnosis.
Technical functions: approach through logistic components (module or board) which

is used to know the basic functions of the DSM.
Operational functions
See Table 21.
The operational functions are initialized by the commands input via the DSM keyboard or
remote control keypad.
They are converted by the DSM application software interpreted in the CPU module
PROM.
According to the keys activated, the table gives the DSM modules and boards directly
concerned by the function.
ILLUSTRATION 27
KEYBOARD
16-59
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TABLE 21
OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS
Symbols
Key
IMAGE MEMORY FUNCTION

Automatic or manual
image storage
DSID-Memory (DSMP2) - DISK

ES, LS1, LS2, LS3
Animation rate
. Monitor A
. Monitor B
DSID DISK (option) - Memory (DSMP2)

Display (DSAD2)
LS2, LS3
Automatic or manual
image clearing
Memory (DSMP2) - DSID - DISK

LS2, LS3
Programmed acquisition sequence Cine

Loop
Memory (DSMP2) - DSID - DISK

ACQ (DSAD2) ES - LSI
Vertical and horizontal

video reversals
Memory (DSMP2)
LS2, LS3
Automatic or manual
image transfer from
Monitor A to Monitor
B
Memory (DSMP2), Display (DSAD2)

LS2, LS3
Two-image display on
one monitor
Memory (DSMP2), Display (DSAD2)

LS2, LS3
x 2 zoom
Memory (DSMP2)
LS3
IMAGE POSTPROCESSING FUNCTION

Noise reduction
filtering coefficient
Processing (DSMP2)
ACQ, LS1, ES
Variable contrast
correction (Gamma)
Display (DSAD2)
LS2, LS3
16-60
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TABLE 21
OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS
Symbols
Key
Antiglare correction
Display (DSAD2) LS2, LS3
Real time substraction
Processing (DSMP2) ACQ, LS1
Peak opacification
Processing (DSMP2)ACQ, LS1
Road mapping
Processing (DSMP2) ACQ, LS1
Edge enhancement
DSIP Board
HARD-COPY REPRODUCTION FUNCTION

EXP reproduction
Display (DSAD2) CPU
ANNOTATION FUNCTION
Alphanum key
New annotation
Display (DSAD2), CPU (DSAD2)
Modification of
annotations of one
image
Visu (DSAD20, CPU (DSAD2)
Alphanum keyboard
Visu (DSAD2), CPU (DSAD2), DSKB
Modification of
annotations of several
images
CPU (DSAD2), Display (DSAD2)
OTHER
Arrows (cursor
displacement)
CPU (DSAD2)
DSM reset
CPU (DSAD2) - DSID - DISK
16-61
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 28
ACQUISITION MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
FFD
Y SIGNALS
RG ACQ 2
HALFLINE
COUNTER
VERTICAL
SIGNAL
GENERATION
FDD
HALFLINE
COUNTER
HORIZONTAL
SIGNAL
GENERATION
FDD
HALFLINE
COUNTER
VERTICAL
SIGNAL
GENERATION
HALFLINE
COUNTER
HORIZONTAL
SIGNAL
GENERATION
FFD
X SIGNALS
XABS
X SIGNALS
Y SIGNALS
SYNC SIGNAL
EXTRACTION
VCO
X2
/2
CK66
VREF
CK33
FFD
RG ACQ 1
OFFSET
COMPENSATION
RAMP
GEN
G=2
CAMERA
G=1
ACQ
8 BIT
ADC
G=2.86
6.5MHZ
VCR
OPTION CCD
CLAMP
VREF
G=2
VCR INTERFACE
16-62
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
33

Technical functions
These functions are described in the following order:
331
Acquisition module (DSAD2 Board).
CPU module (DSAD2 Board).
Display module (DSAD2 Board).
Memory module (DSMP2 Board).
Processing module (DSMP2 Board and IP option).
DSKB (keyboard) Board.
RECIR (infrared receiver) Board.
DSID (hard disk interface) Board and disk (M 600 IP, M 600 IP SEQ option).
DSIP Board.
Acquisition module (DSAD2 Board)

Main functions
D
Amplification and digitization of VIDEO IN signal,
Synchronization of DSM,
Generation of DSM sequencing signals.
Amplification and digitization of VIDEO IN signal

Input signals generated by the camera or the VCR use the following circuit:
D
The differential amplifier (gain = 2), with capacitive couplings, which removes the
common mode components,
A multiplexer which allows either the signal from the camera or the signal from the
VCR to be selected,
The clamp system which aligns the video signal on a DC component,
The 6.5 MHz low-cutoff frequency filter,
The multiplexer which, during test, replaces the video signal with a ramp signal capable
of scanning all the conversion levels,
The amplifier (gain = 2.86),
The converter A/D which numerize the pictures.
A multiplexer which allows the selection of either:
a direct output from the converter to the processing and display modules, or
the insertion of the CCD option on the converter output.
16-63
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Synchronization
DSM synchronization uses a VCO (Voltage Control Oscillator) to provide the DSM basic
clock CK66, and another clock signal CK33 (33 ns) specially for the FFD module, from:
D
The line sync signal extracted from the Video IN signal at the clamp,
The X line signal from the sequencer for frequency and phase comparison (PLL).
When the line sync is not extracted from the input video signal, the VCO receives a
reference voltage VREF and generates a clock signal CK66 close to 14.75 MHz (free
mode).
Sequencer
It generates:
D
Control signals corresponding to the lines and designated YABS (absolute).
Control signals corresponding to the pixels and designated XABS (absolute).
A 9-bit bus XABS for encoding each of the pixels of each half-line between 0 and 471.
Control signals corresponding to pixels XABS and lines YABS for the FFD.
Interrupts
The acquisition module microprocessor interface generates three interrupts which are
active at the low state and indicate:
D
The absence of the video signal at the DSM input (VIDEO IN OK ),
The instant when the current images enter their visible phase on the monitors
(Start-of-image IT),
The instant when the current images enter their invisible phase on the monitors
(End-of-image IT).
Acquisition module programming

It is localized at two registers:
D
One register (write access) enables the microprocessor to control the various operating
modes of the acquisition module as well as the buzzer.
The other register (read access) informs the microprocessor as regards the
instantaneous status of the acquisition module.
A VCR status and the presence of the CCD module.
FFD module test bits.
16-64
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

332 CPU module (DSAD2 Board)

Functions
D
User interface and management:
Interface with the Stenoscop.
Serial interface with the RECIR (infrared reception) Board associated with the
remote control.
Serial dialog with the maintenance and debugging systems (production only).
Management of keyboard, monitoring LEDs and buzzer.
Interpretation of user control inputs and programming of the registers associated with
the various modules (acquisition, display, processing and memory) so as to perform the
task requested.
Random access to the various memories and registers.
Organization
The CPU module is organized around:
D
A 68HC001-series microprocessor sequenced at 10 MHz,
512 Kbyte x 8-bit EPROM for the application, test and maintenance,
User 1 Megabyte dynamic RAM with parity bits,
A DRAM sequencer multiplexes the addresses and refreshes the DRAM data.
A package (LT1232) accomplishes watchdog monitoring and controls the power supply
(By-pass is triggered if the watchdog is not refreshed in less than 500 ms or if the 5 V
power supply drops below 4.75 V).
A package (MFP-68901) performs the following functions:
D
Timer, available for the software.
USART used for the serial reception associated with DSIR.
Interrupt handler.
A package (DUART68681) manages the communications of two RS232C serial links, one
with a debugging monitor dedicated terminal and the other with a host computer.
The CPU module comprises two RESET and ABORT buttons located at the rear of the
DSAD Board.
D
RESET button: used to immediately stop all programs. It reinitializes the

microprocessor and input/output devices.
ABORT button: generates a level 7 non-maskable interrupt. It can be used to stop a

program in progress and return to the debugging monitor control level.
16-65
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Interrupts
The INTER programmable array logic (PAL) encodes the interrupts at seven levels as
follows:
D
Level 7 (ABORT): not maskable.
Level 6: used when a parity error has been detected.
Level 5: generated by package MFP-68901 and resulting from 16 interrupt sub-levels.
Level 4: generated by package DUART-68681.
Level 3: generated by the DMA 68450 controller located on the disk board.
Levels 2 and 1: not used on DSM.
Access control
The validity of accesses to the peripherals and various registers is controlled at the
programmable decoding box level.
The DTACK signal is generated by:
D
Themselves in the case of asynchronous peripherals (MFP, DUART, RAM-CPU, VAG,

IMAGE MEMORY, OVERLAY MEMORY, VIDEO DAC, DISK, IPP).
An external logic depending on their access time for the synchronous peripherals, i.e.:
Between 50 and 100 ns for the high-speed peripherals (registers).
Between 250 and 300 ns for the low-speed peripherals (CPU EPROM, signature
PROM).
333 Display module (DSAD2 Board)

Main functions
D
Multiplexing of digital buses,
Graphic overlay,
Generation of analog video signals to 50/60 Hz outputs,
Generation of analog video signals to 100/120 Hz outputs.
Multiplexing and analog conversion

From the image data arriving on three 8-bit digital buses:
D
ACQ : dynamic image from the acquisition module,
LS2 et LS3 : image from the memory module.
16-66
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

The display module performs multiplexing (MUX) which enables:

D
The digital-to-analog converter DAC A to output an analog video A intended for:
Monitor A,
Video recorder,
Imager.
These video signals come from a same bus and are identical, except for the correction
functions.
D
DAC B to output an analog video B intended for monitor B (this video is identical to
video A, or different depending on the digital bus used).
The two-image display function on a monitor by selecting a different bus for each
half-image.
The image data routing is controlled through a microprocessor interface.

Graphics overlay
The graphic data corresponding to each screen pixel are stored by the microprocessor in two
video RAMs. These memories are controlled by programmable PALs.
The OVERLAY RAMs comprise a serial read/write register which enables reading of data,
at the video rate (14.75 MHz) for application to the inputs of the DACs which perform the
superimposition function with the image data.
Data programming:
D
Is performed according to the graphics or annotations which have to be overlaid.
Also provides access to:
A mode with no overlays.
Three overlay gray levels; each of these levels is previously coded (between 0 and
255) in the overlay registers of each DAC.
16-67
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 29
DISPLAY MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
IP OPTION
RG DISPLAY
8
2
ACQ
LS2
DAC0
MUX
8
LS3
2
DAC1
Graphics Menu
2*512*512*4
8
2
UP
INTERFACE
DAC2
FFD MODULE
8
2
16-68
DAC3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Analog Video Generation 100/120 Hz (FFD Module)

ILLUSTRATION 210
ORGANIZATION OF FFD MODULE
GRAPHICS
CHANNELS 1 & 2
2 * 2 BITS
VCR MODE
Graphics Mem. 2/3
Buffer A
2 x 1M x 4 bits
Graphics Mem. 2/3

Buffer B
2 x 1M x 4 bits
CHANNEL 2
(DAC 0)
8 BITS
2 2
8
Image Mem. 2
Buffer A
2 x 1M x 8 bits
Image Mem. 2
Buffer B
2 x 1M x 8 bits
Demux P/I
graphic
ctrl bits
2
8
DAC 2
2 2
Image Mem. 3
Buffer A
2 x 1M x 8 bits
Image Mem. 3
Buffer B
2 x 1M x 8 bits
8
8
Demux P/I
graphic
ctrl bits
CHANNEL 3
(DAC 1)
8 BITS
CTRL SIGNALS
Acquisition/Display
sequencing
Memory control
Frequency doubler
DAC
loading
16-69
2
8
DAC 3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

This module takes the digital data input to the 50 Hz DACs (DAC0 and DAC1), stores it,
rereads it twice as fast, and converts it into analog video signals.
Each channel has two image buffers and two graphics buffers. While one channel is in
acquisition, the other channel is in display, alternating every 40 ms (33 ms).
Timing is shown in the diagram below:
Image 1
Field 1
WRITE
READ
Image 0
Field 1
Image 0
Field 2
Image 1
Field 2
Image 0
Field 1
Image 0
Field 2
Image 2
Field 1
Image 1
Field 1
Image 1
Field 2
20 ms
The memory buffers are 1 Mbit x 4 DRAMs. To improve the speed, the pixels are placed in
parallel, even pixel/odd pixel, and are then serialized in output from the memory by a PLD,
which also manages the inhibition of the graphics on DAC2 in VCR read mode.
Sequencing is provided by five PLDs:
Pixel counter and generation of FFD X signals (synchronous from 50/60 Hz

module),
Line counter and generation of FFD Y signals (synchronous from 50/60 Hz

module),
Memory address generation,
Generation of memory control signals (refresh cycles and fast page mode),
Fast loading of DACs during 100/120 Hz flyback.
16-70
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 211
MEMORY MODULE ORGANIZATION
1024
CYCLE 1,2,3,4
8i
or
32 i
VAG
TRANSAG
512
RASCAS
ADDRESS
MUX
uP
adresses
16 pixels x 8 bits
uP interface
XABS
FRAME
CYCLE 1,2,3,4
CK66
CTRL
SPPS PROCESSING
Data uP
SPPS DISPLAY
8 bits
8 bits
LS1
LS2
8 bits
LS3
8 bits
ES
8 bits
SOUS
ALU1
ACQ
9 bits
LUT
12 bits
ALU2
8 bits
B
12 bits
12 bits
1 CK
RECURSIVE
MEMORY
16-71
12 bits
12 bits
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

334 Memory module (DSMP2 Board)

See Illustrations 211, 212
Random-access memory
The images are stored in a dynamic RAM (capacity: eight or 32 images of 576 x 576 pixels
on eight bits).
An image occupies 1024 x 512 8-bit words in the memory.
Memory access in read or write mode
D
In sequential access mode, as regards the processing, display and DSID modules, the
DRAM is sequenced on successive 272 ns/pixel cycles as follows:
LS1 (cycle 1), LS2, LS3: each one reads 16 words (i.e., 16 x 8 bits) from memory
during its cycle and serializes them into 16 pixels (8-bit pixel for LS1 or 8-LSB
pixel for LS2 and LS3).
ES (cycle 4): writing of 16 parallelized words into memory (on 16 x 8 bits)

corresponding to 16 pixels on the ES bus. The parallelization/serialization is
performed by SPPS gate arrays.
The image memory addresses are generated by VAG gate arrays.

Address transcoding through TRANSVAG PROM enables the image to be directly
addressed through the X and Y coordinates with no allowance for the 1024 x 512 memory
representation.
D
In random access mode (during the ES cycle, with sequential writing inhibited).
The random mode only concerns the RAM accesses from the microprocessor.
The mP address bus is multiplexed at the VAG outputs. The TRANSVAG PROM is
made transparent such that the whole image memory is accessible to the mP.
16-72
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 212
REPRESENTATION OF STORED IMAGE
512
576
8 or 32
1024
Each stored word (represented on 8 bits) is accessible both for reading and writing.
D
A DRAM controller:
Is used for address multiplexing.
Generates RAS and CAS for the memories.
Controls and generates refreshing in mode CAS before RAS.
Zoom and inversion functions

The VAG and SPPS gate arrays enable:
D
Zooming on bus LS3, i.e., x 2 enlargement of the center portion of the image displayed
on the screen (can be moved by software).
Vertical and horizontal video reversals. At the VAG, the zoom and inversion:
Are achieved by groups of 16 pixels,
Are defined by programming in registers.
At the SPPS arrays, the zoom and inversion configuration:

D
Is achieved by groups of 16 pixels,
Is enabled through the establishment of levels programmed by a VAG register.
16-73
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

335 Processing module (DSMP2 Board and DSIP option)

ILLUSTRATION 213
PROCESSING MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM
8 bits
ACQ
8 bits
8 bits
SOUS
ALU1
LS1
9 bits
A
LUT
12 bits
8 bits
ALU2
8 bits
B
12 bits
12 bits
1 CK
RECURSIVE
MEMORY
12 bits
ES
Functions
D
In DSM 8 version:
Identity filtering: i.e., transfer from the LS1 or ACQ bus to the ES output (filtering
coefficient: 1).
Recursive filtering with movement correction: which can be activated in normal

fluoroscopy mode.
Integration filtering which can be activated in pulsed fluoroscopy or ER mode.
Filtered real-time subtraction.
In DSM IP version:
Peak opacification (min-max).
Road mapping.
Peak opacification with subtraction
Processing Module Main Circuits

D
Prescattered circuit SOUS which can either be transparent for bus ACQ or bus LS1,
after the processing module, or perform a subtraction between these two buses.
Two 16-bit ALUs, performing addition, subtraction or self-bypass operations.
16-74
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

One LUT (Two 4-KB PROMs) containing 16 tables of 256 12-bit words:
Four tables for recursive filtering,
Four tables for integration filtering,
Four tables for peak opacification,
One identity table,
Three tables for the test.
One recursive memory module, which automatically stores, on 12 bits, the last image
output by the processing module (image n1). This stored image is then used in the
various processing operations.
This module comprises:
Six 256K x 4 video RAM triple ports, which can store an image of 1024 x 512 pixels
of 12 bits.
One sequential address generator.
One address multiplexer.
One output data multiplexer.
Sequencing circuits (see Illustration 214).
ILLUSTRATION 214
RECURSIVE MEMORY ORGANIZATION
CMDE_MEM1
CMDE_MEM1
CTRL
CMDE_MEM2
12
ES bus
3X
12
TPRAM
uP addresses
18
9
MUX
MUX
12
3X
SEQUENTIAL
ADDRESS
TPRAM
GENERATOR
CMDE_MEM2
16-75
12
OUTREC
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Functions performed in the processing module:

Identity filtering:
The ACQ or LS1 bus is transferred without modification to the IO output. This mode is
mainly used to initialize the recursive memory before any other processing (recursive
integration).
Recursive filtering with movement detection In =1/N (ACQ In1) + In1
Weighting coefficient N selected at the keyboard among values 2, 4 8 or 16 reduces the
noise: the higher the value of N, the greater is the reduction.
A processing internal hardware algorithm suppresses the filter when it detects movement
f the target exposed to XR.
Integration filtering I display =
i+1
1
Ii.
N
The function integrates 2, 4, 8 or 16 images pixel by pixel at the video rate. The
signal-to-noise ratio is increased as the number of integrated images is increased.
Filtered real-time subtraction
The logarithmic subtraction performed by the SOUS gate and recursive filtering of the
result are sequentially executed in the processing module.
The real time substraction mode is used to enhance and observe a dynamic process (for
instance, progress of a contrast medium in vascular surgery).
The last subtracted image of the sequence remains frozen on the screen.
Peak opacification (minmax) with subtraction
Independently of the contrast medium flux, the peak opacification technique enables the
display on only one image of the maximum opacification of each point of the analyzed
vascular area.
Peak opacification (min-max) without subtraction
Road Mapping I = Log (ACQ) Log (PO)
Road-mapping facilitates placing a catheter in the vascular network. The road-mapping
procedure comprises:
D
Acquisition and storage of a mask image containing the opacified vascular area.
Substraction between the mask and the fluoroscopy images so that only the opacified
vascular area and the catheter are displayed the surrounding anatomic areas are not
visible).
16-76
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

336 RECIR (Infrared Receiver) Board

The RECIR Board mainly comprises:
D
An infrared LED receiving the signals from the control,
A preamplifier,
A decoder (the infrared code is a Plessey PPM). (Pulse Position Modulation) code),
A UART which is programmed at power-on and controlled by a clock CK,
An RS232C serial line interface incorporating the regulators,
The RECIR Board is connected to the DSAD2 Board with a telephone connector,
Characteristics of the RS232C line: 9600 bauds, 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
337 DSID (Hard Disk Interface) and disk (M 600 IP, M 600 IP SEQ Option)
See Illustration 215
The hard disk is considered as a 600 images expansion of the random-access memory.
The DSID Board Complies with the SCSI standard.
D
Complies with the SCSI standard
Incorporates a 256-Kword x 32-bit buffer RAM used to write and read a real-time image
in relation to the DSM.
Upon disk access, a direct memory access controller (DMAC) provides the interface
between this buffer and the SCSI controller connected to the SCSI bus.
The data are parallelized and serialized by a PARSER gate array.
338 DSIP Board
The DSIP Board has a 5 X 7 pixels core to make a real circonvolution on Monitor A, with a
1NMOS IMSA110 integrated circuit.
16-77
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 215
RECIR BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
2,4576 MHz
CK
UART
PPM
INTERFACE
RS232C
J6
DSAD
550 kHz
ILLUSTRATION 216
DSID BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
PA
B
U
F
F
E
R
BUS ES 8
BUS PARSER
PB
PC
DISK
SCSI
CTRL
B
U
F
F
E
R
CPU
18
ADDRESS
UDS
B
U
F
F
E
R
CPU
DATA
DMA
ADDRESS
CPU
BUS C
BUFFER
8
LDS
XABS (8:0)
PARITY HALF/LINE
H_VISIBLE
V_VISIBLE
CPU BUS D
CONFIG.
SEQUENTIAL
CTRL
16-78
DRAM
256K*32
18
CTRL
DRAM
18
DRQ_SCSI
DMA
16
B
U
F
F
E
R
PARSER
PD
BUS SCSI
8
H_VISIBLE
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

16-8 DSM 600 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTIONAL TESTS

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
There are two categories of functional tests:
D
Operational tests to check whether the equipment is in good working order or not,
Fault analysis diagnostic test for use by a qualified service engineer.
SECTION 2
OPERATIONAL CHECKS AND PRE-DIAGNOSTICS
See job card VF001 and Illustration 31.
Job card VF001 applies to start-up of the DSM application.
21
Self-test
The self-test initiated prior to start-up of the application is intended to:
1. Detect malfunctions such as:
Power supply fault,
Data transmission fault (Parity error),
Microprocessor malfunction (no Watchdog reset),
2. Check that the various modules are accessible (quick test of sequential buses,
memories, registers, etc.),
Note:
No x-rays can be obtained and no images can be obtained on the monitor screens,
When a failure is detected during the self-test, the POWER UP TEST FAILED: CALL
FIELD SERVICE message is displayed.
The failure can be confirmed:
22
At the LEDs of the DSAD2 Board.
By performing the corresponding test.
Operation
If a fault occurs during use of the equipment, refer to table 2 (of Job Card VF 001).
If the fault inhibits the application, its origin must be confirmed by means of one of the
following accesses:
D
RESET through the DSAD2 Board pushbutton or switch-off followed by switch-on of

the DSM; the self-test will run as for start-up and will indicate the faulty components.
Diagnostic.
16-79
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 31
ACCESS TO FUNCTIONAL TESTS
SWITCHON MANUAL
RESET
CPU fatal failure
(3 beeps)
SELFTEST
EXPOSURE
INHIBITED
3 beeps
(fault fatal failure)
1 beep
DSM APPLICATION
TESTS
CALL FIELD SERVICE
SIMULTANEOUSLY PRESS
KEYS G, M and A or D, I, A and G.
(MANUAL MODE)
SCREEN DISPLAY
(FUNCTIONAL TESTS)
Control inputs
available:
0 = EXIT
1 = ALL: Acceptance
2 = QI: Image Quality
3 = BUG: Specialized
Maintenance
4 = FORMAT: Disk
formatting
5 = LEVEL: Test screen
replacement
16-80
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DSM (DSM 8 IP, DSM 600 IP, DSM 600 IP SEQ) EMC
Purpose:
Job Card VF 001
1 of 8
Version No.: 1
OPERATION CHECK OF DSM

APPLICATION STARTUP
Date: 07/93
Time: 0 h 10 min
Personnel: User
SECTION 1
RENEWAL PARTS REQUIRED
None.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Illustration 1.
Tables 1 and 2.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
If the LEDs of the DSAD2 Board need to be checked, remove the rear panel, without performing any
work inside the DSM Rack.
SECTION 4
PRELIMINARY STEPS
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Switch-on
Switch on the Stenoscop 2 by setting the monitor carrier (1) ON/OFF masterswitch to ON.
During normal operation, the screen displays:
D
Logo: GE Medical Systems
Software reference.
Configuration:
DSM 8 IP, or
DSM 8 IP or DSM 600 IP (hard disk and IP Board).
DSM 600 IP SEQ (DSM 600 IP with 32-image module).
16-81
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

APPLICATION STARTUP
5.2
Job Card VF 001
2 of 8
StartUp Check
D
Tests performed (at the bottom):

KEYBOARD TEST,
DSAD2
Test display,
DSAD2
Test memory,
DSMP2
Test processing,
DSAD2
Test acquisition,
DSAD2
Test flicker-free display,
IP test,
DSID test,
Hard disk test.
The following malfunctions may occur:
D
Failure of DSM CPU: call in a DSM specialized maintenance inspector.
A fatal failure is detected by the self-test: same effects as the CPU failure (eg: keyboard not present
because cable not connected).
A non-fatal failure occurs. The monitor displays:

The error description (object involved). Example: DSMP2 Test Failed Image Memory, one beep
(displayed for five seconds).
POWER UP TEST FAILED, CALL FIELD SERVICE.
One beep is generated.
For an approximation of the failure diagnostis, see paragraph 53 hereafter.
Then enter the application.
If the M 600 IP, M600 IP SEQ option is used and the disk is not formatted, UNFORMATTED DISK is
displayed. The disk can then be formatted in Maintenance Mode by the FORMAT command.
If the self-test detects no faults:
At the end of the self-test, one beep is generated and the DSM application starts:
D
The monitor displays:

In the case of DSM 8 IP: a black image and two eye symbols at the top of the screen as well
as the active configuration.
In the case of DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ: the latest stored image with its number as well
as the active configuration.
16-82
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

APPLICATION STARTUP
D
Job Card VF 001
3 of 8
The following keys come on:

Filter active and selected with coefficient of 4.
Automatic image clearing.
Infrared remote control active (to deactivate the remote control, press this key which then goes
out).
5.3
Visual Diagnosis of any Failures

See Illustration 1 (location of LEDs DS1 to DS7).
If the DSM is not operational an initial power supply diagnosis can be accomplished at the LEDs of the
DSAD2 Board.
Normal operating status of LEDs
TABLE 1
LED
Function
ON
DS1
Test failed
DS2
Memory reset
DS3
Video present in input
DS4
VCR input selected
DS5
-12 V present
DS6
+12 V present
DS7
+5 V present
16-83
OFF
X
X
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


APPLICATION STARTUP
Job Card VF 001
ILLUSTRATION 1
DSAD 2 BOARD
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
J6
S2
X1
X6
J7
J10
X7
J16
J8
P1
J5
S1
DS5
DS6
DS7
X5
J4
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
J2
J19
X3 X2
J18
X4
X8
J1
J17
J9
J3
J11
J12
J13
J14
P3
J15
16-84
4 of 8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

APPLICATION STARTUP
Connectors
P1
P3
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
J18
Straps
X1
X2
X3
X4
Job Card VF 001
DSMP2 connector
DSMP2 connector
keyboard connector
power supply connector
IP option connector
RS232 debugging connector
RS232 debugging connector
infra-red remote control connector
generator interface connector
camera video input
monitor A video output (25 images/s)
hard-copy control connector
hard-copy printer video output (25 images/s)
VCR video output (25 images/s)
monitor B video output (25 images/s)
monitor C video output (50 images/s)
monitor D video output (50 images/s)
VCR interface connector
VCR video input
connector for VCR read control
X5
X6
X7
X8
debugging strap (bus error)

DSAD/DSAD2 strap (DSAD2 between 1 and 2)
50/60 Hz strap (50 Hz between 1 and 2, 60 Hz between 2 and 3)
strap between 1 and 2: for PUT camera
strap between 2 and 3: for CCD camera
validation strap for CPU clock
debugging strap (watchdog) between 2 and 3
enable strap for automatic VCR read detection
analog system adjustment strap
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7
test failed
memory reset
video present in input
VCR input selected
12 V present
+12 V present
+5 V present
Leds
16-85
5 of 8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


APPLICATION STARTUP
Job Card VF 001
6 of 8
TABLE 2
FAULT ISOLATION UPON START-UP
TROUBLE
No beep start-up
PROBABLE CAUSE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
No DSM power
supply
. Correctly connect the line cable between the input distribution

system and the DSM power input.
. Set the DSM I/O switch to I.
DSAD2 Board power

supply failure
. Check the connections between.

Line module and power supply unit.
Power supply unit and J2 of DSAD2.
. Check that LEDs DS5 to DS7 are ON otherwise, incriminate:
Fuses.
Filter assembly
DSM power supply
No monitor image No monitor power

supply
No video output signal
On monitor:
. Connect the line.
. Set the switch to ON.
Check that LED DS4 is ON (Video IN present)
If DS4 is OFF, go into diagnostic mode D, I, A, G
Video input failure

. Check the camera-to-J8 of DSAD2 connections.
. DS4 OFF
. Incriminate:
(incorrect Video IN)
Camera signal.
ACQUISITION module (DSAD2).
CPU module (DSAD2)
Keyboard
inoperative
Remote control
inoperative (with
keyboard I/O key
ON)
Switchover to
maintenance
mode impossible
. No DSAD2
connection
. Correctly connect the 60-wire cable to keyboard and J1 of

DSAD2.
. Faulty circuits
. Incriminate
DSKB Board
60-conductor cable: DSAD2 (J1) to DSKB (J1)
DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
. No connection
. Correctly connect telephone connector to RECIR and J6 of DSAD
. Faulty circuits
. Change the remote control battery.

. Incriminate:
RECIR Board.
Remote control six-conductor cable.
Remote control.
Faulty keyboard or
CPU
. Incriminate:
DSKB Board.
16-86
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

APPLICATION STARTUP
Job Card VF 001
7 of 8
TABLE 2
FAULT ISOLATION UPON START-UP (CONTD)
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Hard disk
formatting fault
(DSM 600 IP/
DSM 600 IP SEQ
option)
. Faulty connections
. Check the connection of SCSI and power supply cables between

hard disk and DSID Board.
. Faulty components
. Incriminate:
Disk.
Cables.
DSID Board.
DSMP2 Board
DSAD2 Board (CPU module).
Faulty screen
dialog
. Faulty graphic
generation
. Incriminate DSAD2 Board (CPU module and screen).
. Keyboard board
. Replace DSKB Board.
. CPU dialog
. Incriminate DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
See Table 2
See Table 2.
After the self-test,

a message is
displayed
Note:
In all cases, use the maintenance mode to trace the fault origin.
16-87
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


APPLICATION STARTUP
Job Card VF 001
Blank page
16-88
8 of 8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Purpose:
Job Card VF 002

Version No.: 0
MONITOR MESSAGE AND POSSIBLE

REPLACEMENTS
Date: 08/93
Time:
Personnel: User
TABLE 1
ERROR MESSAGE
COMPONENT (S) TO BE REPLACED in order
MONITOR MESSAGE
DSMP2 TEST: MEMORY
1. DSMP2 Board (MEM module)

2. DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: TRANSVAG MEMORY

. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: RANDOM ACCESS DATA BUS
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: RAMDOM ACCESS ADRESS BUS
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: IMAGE SELECTION REGISTER
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: VAG MEMORY
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: SEQUENTIAL BUS ES
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: SEQUENTIAL BUS LS1
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: IMAGE MEMORY
DSMP2 TEST: PROCESSING
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: GATE SOUS LUTJ
1. DSMP2 Board (PROCESSING and MEM modules)

2. DSAD2 Board (CPU module)
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: RECURSIV MEMORY

. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: GATE SOUS ALU SUBSTRACTION
. DSMP2 TEST FAILED: ALU1 SUBSTRACTION
ALU2 SUBSTRACTION
IP TEST
. DSIP TEST FAILED: LUT OF IMS A 110
1. DSIP Board
2. DSAD2 Board
16-89
1 of 2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
MONITOR MESSAGE AND POSSIBLE

REPLACEMENTS
Job Card VF 002
2 of 2
TABLE 1
ERROR MESSAGE (CONTD)
MONITOR MESSAGE
COMPONENT (S) TO BE REPLACED in order
DSAD2 TEST: DISPLAY

. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: DAC REGISTERS
1. DSAD2 Board (DISPLAY and CPU modules)
. DASD2 TEST FAILED: DAC LUT MEMORY

. DSAD2 FM TEST FAILED: GRAPHIC MEMORY
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: VERTICAL RETRACE INTERRUPT
DSAD2 TEST: ACQUISITION
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: ANALOG DIGITAL CONVECTER
1. DSAD2 Board (ACQ and CPU modules)
DSAD2 TEST: FLIKER FREE DISPLAY

. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: FLICKER FREE DISPLAY MEMORY
1. DSAD2 Board
2. DSIP Board
. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: LINK IP. FLICKER FREE DISPLAY MEMORY

KEYBOARD TEST
1. DSAD2 Board
2. DSKB Board
3. 60wire cable if most keys are inoperative
. KEYBOARD NOT HERE

. DSAD2 TEST FAILED: REGISTER LED
DSID
. DSID TEST FAILED: RANDOM ACCESS TO MEMORY
1. DSID Board
2. DSMP2 Board
. DSID TEST FAILED: SEQUENTIAL ACCESS TO MEMORY

HARD DISK TEST
. DISK TEST FAILED: UNFORMATTED DISK OR HEADER ERROR
. DISK TEST FAILED: INIT ERROR
1. Hard disk
2. SCSI supply cables
3. DSID Board
. DISK TEST FAILED: WRITE READ AND COMPARE OF LAST

IMAGE ERROR
Note:
If no error message is displayed, check the basic version of the memory (DSM 8). If it is ok, add
the options one by one (hard disk and DSID, or DSIP) to find the faulty component as fast as possible.
16-90
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SECTION 3
DIAGNOSTIC
31
Transition into Maintenance Mode

See illustrations 32, 33.
To isolate any fault:
D
Select the manual mode by simultaneously pressing keys G, M and A or D, I, A, G of

the alphanumeric keyboard.
The test dialog shown by the illustration is displayed on the monitor.

311 DSM block diagram
The DSM block diagram (documented at the top of the screen) shows the logistic objects
(components) of theDSM configuration.
Each component is displayed with:
D
The associated designation (DSMP2, etc) wich is marked on the component and used
to identify the renewal P/N (See Chapter 5),
The associated letter (example: B for processing DSMP2 Board).

When this letter is entered at the keyboard, it triggers the component test: see sheet
VF003.
Note:
Triggering of x-rays is disabled when a test is in progress.
312 Manual mode controls

The control line, at the bottom of the screen, provides access to the other manual mode
controls, including:
D
0: EXIT : to exit,
1: ALL : Acceptance test (see sheet VF101),
2: BUG : this function ios not required for maintenance,
3: QI = Image Quality
This function makes it possible for a DSM-qualified inspector:
To check the image performance,
To adjust the monitors,
4: FORMAT: to format the disk,
5: LEVEL: change test screen (used for manufacturing).
16-91
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Remarks about Image Quality

In the Image Quality menu, triggering of x-rays is enabled.
The Image Quality menu includes the following commands:
D
R = ROI in order to:
Define a rectangular ROI (Region of interest).

Use:
arrows to move the cursor,
R to validate,
Z (as applicable) to clear the ROI.
Measure the noise and compute the MTF (Modulation Transfer Function).
P = PROFIL to display a density measurement along a vertical or horizontal profile

(segment).
Use:
32
arrows to move the cursor (the cursor is restricted to the top half of the screen),
R to validate,
Z (as applicable) to clear the profile.
The bottom half of the screen displays the density curve along the segment.
M = PATTERN Three test patterns are proposed (by selecting 1, 2 or 3).
A camera centering pattern to adjust the image position in relation to the DSM
acquisition window,
A density pattern designed to match a luminance meter. Press keys 0, 1 ...F

to change the density in 17 pitch increments. The density at the cursor
pixel is displayed at the top left of the screen,
An overall pattern designed for monitor adjustment: it is a checkerboard pattern

where each square has a different modulation.
K = CURSOR to change the cursor move rate (in 64-, 32- or 1 pixel increments),
V = VISU to display or not the latest acquired video image,
Z = CLEAR to delete graphics (example: ROI, PROFIL),
X = EXIT to return to the Manual Test Dialog screen.
Degraded Modes
For DSM 600 IP or DSM 600 IP SEQ options, a self-test-detected failure causes switchover
to degraded configurations under IP and/or disk functionality.
16-92
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
33

Corrective maintenance tools and equipment

Test software, described in this chapter.
Standard tools, including:
D
A FACOM tool kit.
A 2000-point multimeter.
A 20 MHz dual-trace storage oscilloscope.
Antistatic bracelet.
ILLUSTRATION 32
TEST DIALOG DISPLAY - FIRST LEVEL
DSAD2
DSMP2
IP
DSID
DISK
0:EXIT 1:ALL 2:QI 3:BUG 4:FORMAT 5:LEVEL
16-93
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 33
TEST DIALOG DISPLAY - SECOND LEVEL
DSAD2
BUS ACQ
BUS LS1
Acquisition
D
DSKB
LS2
LS3
DSMP2
DSMP2
Processing
ES Memory
DSAD2
Display
A
DSK G
DSAD2
DSIP
Cpu
BUS ES
0:EXIT 1:ALL 2:QI 3:BUG 4:FORMAT 5:LEVEL
16-94
DSID
F
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Purpose:
Job Card VF 003
1 of 2
Version No.: 0
MODULE TEST
Date: 08/93
Time: 0 h 10 min
Personnel: User
SECTION 1
None
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Illustrations 31, 32, 33.
Job Card VF002.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance operations are prohibited on energized equipment.
SECTION 4
PRELIMINARY STEPS
Start the DSM application; See sheet VF001.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Access to Maintenance Tests (Manual Mode)

After the DSM application is started, simultanously press keys G, M and A or D, I, A, G.
See Illustrations 32, 33: TEST DIALOG DISPLAY.
5.2
Module Test
To start a module test, type the associated control letter on the keyboard: the module window is entirely
shown in reversed video.
The test is automatically looped on itself 99 times. It displays the number of bad passes relative to the
number of passes performed in the Statistic Window.
16-95
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
MODULE TEST
5.3
Job Card VF 003
2 of 2
Errors
If errors are detected:
D
The Error Window displays the number of errors with the detail of the first five errors (with the
actual and theorical address values) from the beginning of the test.
The Control Window displays the error description(only for the second level by pressing on key
5).
Diagnostic
The error description pinpoints the module and, as applicable, the faulty links associated with this
module: inference rule (See also Job Card VF002 to determine the corresponding modules to be
replaced).
Example of the Inference Rule: The disk test cannot run correctly unless the memory is OK. If the disk
test results NOT OK, the memory test runs automatically.
To stop the module test in progress
D
Press any key (alphanumeric keyboard) to stop the test.
If the test has detected an error, the tested module remains in reversed video. The corresponding
description is displayed in the Error Window.
If a key is pressed again:
D
The error description disappears.
The module remains in reversed video.
If the test has detected no error, the tested module display is normal again.
16-96
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Purpose:
Job Card VF 004
1 of 2
Version No.: 0
DSM ACCEPTANCE TEST
Date: 08/93
Time: 0 h 10 min
Personnel: 1 GE qualified service engineer
SECTION 1
None
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
None
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance operations are prohibited on energized equipment.
SECTION 4
PRELIMINARY STEPS
Start the DSM application; See sheet VF001.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Access to Maintenance Tests (Manual Mode)

After the DSM application is started, simultaneously press keys G, M and A or D, I, A, G.
From the control inputs displayed at the bottom of the screen, select the digit 1 corresponding to
acceptance ALL and enter it at the alphanumeric keyboard.
All modules and links are sequentially tested:
D
Each module under test is shown in reversed video and blinks for the duration of the test.
The test of links between two modules is performed at the end of the second module test.
16-97
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
DSM ACCEPTANCE TEST
5.2
Job Card VF 004
2 of 2
Test sequence
The test loops 999 times, but is interrupted if a failure is detected.
The screen displays the error description (module and/or link).
To continue the test, press any key (alphanumeric keyboard): the error description is then deleted.
To stop the test, press any key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
At the end of the test, the main menu is displayed in the control window. If the test is positive, no module
is shown in reversed video. Otherwise, testing modules in detailed maintenance will pinpoint the failed
function.
16-98
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 17 - VCR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 17 - VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
17-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
59

COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
DSM PWB DSAD 2
Video IN
Monitor B
9PL2
Video IN
Monitor A
9PL1.
30/31
VCR SONY SVO 9500

Front view
VCR SONY SVO 9500

+ Interf. 34 pins
+ Remote Control.
Rear view
ROTATION
Monitor B
+
ROTATION
Monitor A
12
CCM 620 VISIPLEX

FILM IMAGER
Coax to UP910
or 75 E plug.
SONY UP 910
PAPER IMAGER
Switch
on 75 E
17-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
510

COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING.
LINE 1
LINE 2
17-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
17-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
17-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: Sony Operating Instructions, Model: SVBK-110, 34-pin Interface Board, Page 3
17-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
17-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: Sony Videocassette Recorder Operating Instructions, Model: SVO-9500MD, Page 7
17-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-16
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-25
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-27
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-32
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-33
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-34
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-35
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-36
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: Sony Remote Control Unit, Operating Instructions, Model: SVRM-100, Page 4
17-37
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-39
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-42
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-43
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-44
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-45
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

17-46
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 18 - CCD IMAGEUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: Video Cameras: Operation and Servicing, Page 57
18-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

18-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

18-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

18-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

18-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

18-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

18-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Title Page
Technical
Publications
2124131100
Revision 0
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD

for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000
asm
Advanced Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 1995 by General Electric Co.
18-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0
ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR SI LES
MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de scurit les plus svres, la source de rayonnement X reprsente un danger lorsque le
manipulateur est non qualifi ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entrane des dommages lorganisme.
Par consquent, toutes les prcautions doivent tre prises pour viter que les personnes non autorises ou non qualifies utilisent cet appareil crant
ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour ellesmmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifies et autorises se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de protection
tablies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 26 : Recommandations de la Commission Internationale sur la
Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
XRAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR
UNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful xray beam becomes a source of danger in the
hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to xradiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing themselves
or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the International
Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 26 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR
CUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato est construido segn las normas de seguridad ms estrictas, la radiacin X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado por
personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposicin excesiva a la radiacin X puede causar daos al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se debern tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas utilicen este
aparato, lo que sera un peligro para los dems y para s mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, debern informarse sobre las normas de
proteccin fijadas por la Comisin Internacional de la Proteccin Radiolgica, Anales No 26: Recomendacines de la Comisin Internacional sobre
la Proteccin Radiolgica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,
WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Hnden unbefugter oder
unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. bermige Rntgenbestrahlung ist fr den menschlichen Organismus schdlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmanahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche Gerte
bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen knnen.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien fr den gefahrlosen
Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfltiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen Kommission fr Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut machen:
Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission fr Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehrden.
18-12
GE Medical Systems

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page i
REV 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
TITLE
PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
v
THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
SECTION 1 PRESENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
SECTION 2 II TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
SECTION 3 EHV POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
SECTION 4 OPTICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
SECTION 5 CCD MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
SECTION 6 CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
SECTION 7 CCD VIDEO BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
71
Video signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
711
Video gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
712
Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
713
Video output stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
72
ABD signal generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
73
Control signal generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
SECTION 8 CCD INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
81
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
82
Remote control of EHV power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
83
Iris servocontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
84
Analog circular masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
DR 001 Imageur head disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
DR 002 Xray image intensifier tube disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
DR 003 EHV power supply disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
DR 004 Compact optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
DR 005 Board cage disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
DR 006 Printed wiring boards disassembly/reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
18-13
GE Medical Systems

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page ii
REV 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER
TITLE
PAGE
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
RG 001 EHV adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
RG 002 Compact optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
RG 003 CCD interface board adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
RG 004 CCD video board adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
RG 005 Xray image intensifier tube adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
LA 001 Imageur troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
LA 011 No image appears on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
LA 012 Video mask only visible on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
LA 013 Xray image out of focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
LA 014 Image is present but unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
LA 015 Image too bright or too dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
417
LA 016 Generator goes to maximum stop in automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
421
SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5i
18-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page iii
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
WARNING
D IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER

THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.
AVERTISSEMENT
D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE

LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES
DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
WARNUNG
D DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.
AVISO
D SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA

QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN.
D NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.
18-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page iv
ATENO
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA

DISPONVEL EM INGLS.
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
D NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA.
D O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA
DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS,
MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
AVVERTENZA
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE,
ALLUTILIZZATORE
ED
AL
PAZIENTE
PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
18-16
GE Medical Systems

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page v
REV 1
REVISION HISTORY
REV
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
July, 1995
Initial release
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE
NUMBER
REVISION
NUMBER
PAGE
NUMBER
REVISION
NUMBER
Title page
0
Safety Instructions 0
i thru vi
11 thru 126
21 thru 222
31 thru 336
41 thru 424
5i thru 5ii
51 thru 548
18-17
PAGE
NUMBER
REVISION
NUMBER
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 1
CHAPTER 1 THEORY
SECTION 1
PRESENTATION
The Heads of the Imageur 16 CCD* for Stenoscop and the Imageur 22 CCD* for Stenoscop
6000/9000 are compact, integrated units of attractive design (Ill. 11, 12, and 13),
comprising the following components:
D
Cover panels,
Mechanical mount (Ill. 12 and 13: Item 1),
Xray II tube (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 2):
Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD = TH9438HXH560
Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD = TH9449HPH506
High voltage power supply (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 3):
Thomson TH7191
Optical assembly with integrated motordriven Iris (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 4),
CCD sensor module (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 5),
Video processing module (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 6, and Ill. 14), including:
Compact rack (Item 1),
Backpanel board (Item 2),
CCD Power Supply Board (Item 3),
CCD Video Board (Item 4),
CCD Interface Board (Item 5).
Lead counterweight (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 7),
Dose rate preamplifier (Ill. 12 and 13, Item 8).
18-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 11
OPERATIONAL FLOWCHART
COMPACT
OPTICS
IRIS
II
CCD
MODULE
HV POWER
SUPPLY
VIDEO
INTERFACE
BOARD
BOARD
CCD VIDEO
BOARD
INTERCONNECTION
DOSE
MEASUREMENT
PREAMP
IMAGEUR MODULE
POWER SUPPLY.
BOARD IN 24 V (DC)
OUT +5 1.5V
INTERCONNECTION CABLE
STENOSCOP
18-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 12
IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP
5
4
7
1
8
18-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 13
IMAGEUR 16 CCD FOR STENOSCOP
8
7
18-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 14
VIDEO PROCESSING MODULE
18-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SECTION 2
II TUBE
Type
Thomson
TH 9438 HX H560 (3Field version, 22 cm)

TH 9449 HP H506 (1Field version, 16 cm)
Note:
Field 3 is not used on the Imageur 22.

Operating Principle
The II tube changes the xray image into a high intensity image with excellent contrast.
The relief information revealed by the radiation which travelled through the patient, first
passes through the tube input window, which is made up of aluminum foil with very low
absorption and very low diffusion properties. The relief information is then absorbed by the
detector screen behind the input window.
The detector screen changes the xray photons into luminous photons. A photocathode
attached to the detector screen is energized by these luminous photons and produces
electrons.
These electrons are then accelerated and focused by electrical fields. The electrons strike a
fluorescent screen (P20 type), forming a high intensity inverted image which is smaller than
the image entering the tube (ratio of 1:9).
The gain in brilliance is obtained from the energy of the accelerated electrons and from the
reduction of the image produced.
18-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
TABLE 11
PARAMETERS
TH9438HX (22 cm)
TH9449HP (16 cm)
Unit
Quantal detection efficiency
65
65
Typical conversion factor

(min.)
200
(150)
180
(140)
cd.m2
Typical contrast ratio

(min.)
30
(24)
20
(16)
Diameter of image produced
25.2 0.2
14.5 0.5
mm
Entry field at 1000 mm from focal point:

Normal Mode
Mag 1 Mode
215 min.
160 5
145 min.
mm
mm
Normal Mode:
At center
At 70% of diameter
At 93% of diameter
46
44
42
42
42
40
lp/cm
lp/cm
lp/cm
Mag 1 Mode:
At center
At 70% of diameter
At 93% of diameter
52
50
48
lp/cm
lp/cm
lp/cm
Normal Mode:
2 lp/cm
5 lp/cm
10 lp/cm
20 lp/cm
97
88
69
33
87
76
54
19
%
%
%
%
Mag 1 Mode:
2 lp/cm
5 lp/cm
10 lp/cm
20 lp/cm
97
90
73
40
%
%
%
%
Typical resolution limit.
Typical MTF at the center
Protection against xrays and the magnetic field in the Imageur is provided by a lead casing
combined with metal foil having high magnetic permeability.
Note:
II tubes have an automatic getter pumping device; this avoids the formation of an ion
spot which could cause loss of resolution and contrast. When the tube has not been in
service for a long time, it is necessary to allow it to regenerate. If the vacuum in the II
tube is not correct (getter current above 1 A), a red LED indicator light on the side of the
CCD Interface Board lights up. This light also goes on briefly when power to the
Imageur is switched on.
18-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 3
EHV POWER SUPPLY
D
The II tube HV power supply unit is designed for use with TH 9438 HX H560 (22 cm)
or 9449 HP H506 (16 cm) tubes.
The unit is 010 V programmable. The potentiometers for adjusting this voltage are
located on the edge of the CCD Interface Board (R1 thru R9).
The high voltage values VG1 (HV), VG2 (HV) and VG3 (HV) are obtained using the
low control voltages vg1 (LV), vg2 (LV) and vg3 (LV) on the basis of the following
relationships:
16 cm
22 cm
vg1 (LV) volts + 1 )
VG1(HV) 40
34.5
VG2(HV) 145
139
VG3(HV) 1300
1300
On 16 cm Imageur units, the G2 electrode of the II tube is connected to the G3 output of

the EHV power supply.
Note:
The 9449HP H506 II tube does not have the G3 electrode.

G1 controls the uniformity of focusing.
G2 controls focusing at the center.
G3 controls the diameter of the entry field (for 22 cm only).
FIELD
16 cm
VG2(HV) 1300
1300
Note:
NORMAL
MAG1
MAG2
TEST
POINT
vg1
R1
R2
TP4
vg2
R4
R5
TP3
vg3
R7
R8
TP2
vg1
R1
TP4
vg2
R7
TP2
LOW VOLTAGE
22 cm
VG1(HV) 40
34.5
Note:
On 22 cm Imageur Housing units, Potentiometers R3, R6 and R9 are inoperative.

On 16 cm Imageur Housing units, Potentiometers R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R8 and R9 are
inoperative.
Note:
The test points are on the CCD Interface Board. Make the measurement between the test
points shown on the table and the ground located at TP1 on the CCD Interface Board.
18-26
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Specifications
D
Size: 160 x 115 x 52.5 mm.
Power supply: 24 V +10/15%.
Consumption: 350 mA (max.).
Stability over 8 hours: 0.5%.
Temperature stability: 0.05% between +5 and +55C.
Detection of insufficient vacuum for getter current > 1 A.
Ripple: < 0.3% peak to peak.
Thomson reference: TH 7191

THIS POWER SUPPLY UNIT PRODUCES VERY HIGH VOLTAGES AND
SHOULD NOT NORMALLY BE ENERGIZED WHEN ITS OUTPUTS ARE
DISCONNECTED.
IF A TEST IS NECESSARY, STANDARD
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES MUST
BE OBSERVED TO AVOID THE POSSIBILITY OF ELECTROCUTION OR
DAMAGE TO THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT.
IN PARTICULAR, ENSURE THAT GROUNDING CONNECTIONS ARE
NOT OVERLOOKED AND CHECK THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE
CONNECTIONS ARE INSULATED CORRECTLY.
ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR THE
XRAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE PROVIDE A VERY GOOD
CONTACT WITH THE EHV CONNECTORS TO AVOID ANY DISRUPTIVE
DISCHARGE. REMOVE ANY TRACES OF DIRT OR ROUGHNESS ON
THE CONNECTOR CONTACTS.
WARNING
SECTION 4
OPTICAL SYSTEM
The new optical design from Rodenstock uses a single short focal lens working in
demagnification mode. The lens is common to all the image intensifiers; only the
demagnification factor is different, allowing several different mechanical adaptations. This
optical coupling mode provides an excellent MTF. The lens includes a motorized iris with
position repeater by potentiometer.
The lens mounting allows:
CAUTION
Focusing,
Centering,
Image alignment.
The type of optic depends on II size (16 or 22 cm),

and video standard (50 Hz/625 lines or 60 Hz/525 lines).
18-27
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

An Imageur CCD Stenoscop cannot be modified on site from 50 Hz/625 lines to

60 Hz/525 lines.
CAUTION
Special paper is used to clean the optics (Kodak 1546027).

SECTION 5
CCD MODULE
The CCD module includes:
D
A Sony Board carrying the CCD sensor and its electronic control system.
An Interface Board to which the CCD module is fitted. This Board includes connectors
and interfacing circuits.
These two Boards are paired (adjusted together).

The signals provided by the CCD module are:
D
Video signal (coaxial cable): CCD preamp output (Normal Mode) or

composite video (Test Mode), jumper selectable.
Synchronization signals:
Pixel clock (not used with Stenoscop),
Horizontal drive,
Vertical drive,
Synchro composite,
Field parity (not used with Stenoscop).
The signals are transmitted by a ribbon cable fitted with HE10 16contact connectors
hooked up to the backpanel board.
In the event of CCD sensor malfunction, the optical system/CCD Module tandem must be
replaced. Note, however, that the CCD sensor has an excellent MTBF (50 000 hours)
Sony CCD Module Specifications
There are two versions of this Board (they are not interchangeable).
1. CCB M27 BCE (50 Hz/625 L).
Number of pixels: 752 x 582 (H x V).
Dimension sensing area: 6.47 x 4.83 mm (H x V).
Pixel size: 8.6 m x 8.3 m (H x V).
2. CCB M27 B (60 Hz/525 L).
Number of pixels: 768 x 494 (H x V).
Dimension sensing area: 6.45 x 4.84 mm (H x V).
Pixel size: 8.4 m x 9.8 m.
18-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Sony CCD Module Settings
The Sony CCD module settings are made in the factory and need not be changed.
If a replacement is made, the gain setting only should be checked (R1 on the CCD module).
See Job Card RG 003.
SECTION 6
CCD POWER SUPPLY BOARD
D
The Power Supply Board uses the 24V voltage supplying the II assembly to provide
the three different voltages required to operate the rack boards:
+5 V
+15 V
15 V
This function is mainly performed by the PS1 DC/DC converter, which has the
following specifications:
Input voltage:
18 V to 36 V (dc)
+5 V (max. 5 A) 1 %
Output voltage:
+15 V (max. 1 A) 1%
15 V (max. 1 A) 1 %
Max. power:
55 W
Protection on the 24V supply side is provided by Fuse F1 (2AT).
Switch S1 is used to switch off the entire II assembly (including the EHV power supply
and the dose measurement preamplifier).
LED DS1 indicates presence of the 24 V voltage,

LED DS2 indicates presence of the +5 V voltage,
LED DS3 indicates presence of the +15 V voltage,
LED DS4 indicates presence of the 15 V voltage.
The Board also includes a thermal safety device designed to warn the user when the
temperature inside the casing becomes too high. This device consists of a buzzer (LS1)
linked to a temperature sensor (V3) which is placed in contact with the housing of the
DC/DC converter (PS1). This is a strictly passive device which does not inhibit
operation of the Imageur. Sensor V3 supplies a voltage of 10 mV/C. The reference
voltage for the V2 comparator is defined by the R5/R6 bridge and is selected so that
the buzzer is activated when the temperature reaches 80C.
SECTION 7
CCD VIDEO BOARD
This Board performs two main functions:
1. Processing of the video signal supplied by the CCD module.
2. Generation of the ABD (Average Brightness Detection) signal which is used by the
generator to control the luminance output.
The block diagram for the Board is given in Ill. 15.
18-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

The detailed block diagrams of the subfunctions are given in Ills 16 thru 111.
71
Video signal processing
711 Video gain

See Illustrations 15 and 16.
There are two methods of adjusting the video gain.
1. Manual Gain: The gain is set at a specific value using Potentiometer R1.
2. Automatic Gain: The level of the video signal is held constant by means of a control
loop. The regulation circuit uses the ABD signal. Generation of this signal is described
in Para 72.
Before the variable gain stage, during the vertical return, pulses (VTEST) are added to the
video signal with amplitude proportional to the ABD signal. The gain control circuit
responds only to the amplitude of the VTEST pulse. These pulses are sampled by U5 in each
frame using the STEST command. The direct current voltage supplied at the output of U5 is
used to control FET Q3 which is set up as a variable resistor via Amplifier AR6.
The ABD signal remains constant and the video gain is fixed for as long as the generator can
provide regulation. As soon as the generator reaches its limit, the amplitude of the ABD
signal decreases and at this point, the variable gain control comes in to keep the amplitude of
the VTEST pulses obtained from the ABD signal constant.
The gain control range is deliberately restricted to:
Max. gain = x 5
Max attenuation = 2
In Manual Gain Mode, the VTEST pulses have a constant amplitude of 1 V.
The AGCVALID signal is used to switch from Manual Gain to Automatic Gain (see Ill 16).
Automatic Gain Mode is possible only if the following conditions are satisfied:
D
Fluoroscopy Mode ON.
CLTV Mode ON.
A specific time has elapsed since the appearance of the xrays (typically 750 ms). This
time delay can be adjusted by R12/CCD Video Board.
712 Gamma correction

In order to preserve data which are present in areas of glare, video processing includes a
threeslope gamma correction function with HLDE (High Level Detail Enhancement) to
obtain a gamma value of around 0.45.
Gamma circuit improvement (Dynamic Gamma) can be selected by Jumper X2. The
principle of this circuit is as follows:
D
Given Vo as the video level on uniform image at the Do nominal dose. If the video
signal includes levels where V 10 Vo, the gamma factor is equal to 0.45.
18-30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

D
Note:
A peak detector made up of AR3, D3, C27, R62 and R63 measures the peak value of
the video signal and adjusts the gamma setting control. When the video level decreases,
gamma correction is reduced and this causes an improvement in contrast, especially on
low dynamic images. The signal provided by the peak detector is sampled at field
frequency by U3 and the SAMPLE command.
Dynamic Gamma is active in Fluoroscopy Mode only.
713 Video output stage

The video output stage includes two operating modes, which can be selected using
Jumper X4:
1. In Position 1, the signal output on J3 is a composite video signal for Stenoscop
applications (1 V peaktopeak, including 300 mV for synchronization pulse).
2. In Position 2, the signal output on J3 complies with the specifications of the CCD AV
Board A/D converter (2 V peaktopeak with no synchronization pulse), which is used
only in R/F applications.
Offset is adjustable by R4.
Level of black is adjustable by R3.
72
ABD signal generation

The Average Brightness Detection (ABD) signal obtained from the CCD module video
signal output is used by the generator to regulate luminance in Fluoroscopy Mode.
The video signal sampled prior to automatic gain control is first amplified by AR7 (5 to 6
gain), and then clipped by Q26, Q27 to a level twice the nominal dose.
D
Clipping is active in Automatic Gain Mode only,
Clipping can be made inactive using Jumper X5.
The resulting signal is sampled by the measurement window (AGCWIN signal). This
window is generated by the CCD Interface Board.
A threshold circuit made up of AR10 is used to exclude all portions of the video signals with
a level below the threshold defined by the R11 setting from the measurement window. The
circuit is used to eliminate the harmful effect of the collimation shutters, barite, etc., on
regulation.
The sampled video signal goes to the AR8 integrator, which is reset for each field by the
reset signal.
The logic signal defining the measurement window (corrected for dark areas) goes to a
second AR8 integrator, identical to the first one, which provides data proportional to the
area of the measurement surface.
The ABD signal is the result of the division by U10 of the integrated video signal by the
integrated measurement window to the size of an average value video signal. This signal is
sampled at field frequency by the Sample signal.
18-31
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

It is used:
1. To make the VTEST signal used in the AGC loop.
This signal is made up of test lines with an amplitude proportional to the ABD signal
and these are added to the video signal during field return (see Section 711).
2. For the generator regulation loop, there are two possibilities (selection by Jumper X6):
a. In Steno version, the nominal level supplied is +2.1 V.
b. In R/F version, the nominal level supplied is 1 V.
ABD output gain is adjustable by R6.
ABD output offset is adjustable by R13.
3. To make the REC logic signal.
Comparator AR10 switches over when the ABD signal falls below half the nominal
value. This occurs when the generator reaches its limit. Since AGC is in operation,
the image is noisier. The REC signal may be used by the DSM memory to switch over
to a stronger recursive table, in order to reduce the noise.
73
Control signal generation

The logic signals generated by the CCD Video Board are:
D
Synchronization signals used in the Video Board for video processing purposes (see
Timing, Ill. 112 and 113).
Test signal generator CAL GAIN signal which is used to perform calibration without
xray generation.
The test signal is made up of a uniform white square and a black porch. The test signal
level can be adjusted using R10.
18-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 15
CCD VIDEOBLOCK DIAGRAM
CBLK
VIDEO
IN
Preset Gain
LOW-PASS
FILTER
CAL
GAIN
SIGNAL
Black Level
Auto Gain
VIDEO
OUT
GAMMA
STEST
Fluoro
Rad
Offset
REGULATION
TEST LINES
CSYNC
V TEST
BLACK
LEVEL
THRESHOLD
AGC WIND
L TEST
AGC/ABD
WINDOW
AGC VALID
1V
-s
GAIN=6
ABD
OUT
B
S/H
A
B
RAZ
-s
ABD Gain
GAIN=-1
A
SAMPLE
VIDEO
SAMPLING
ABD offset
COMPARATOR
HD
RAZ
VD
SAMPLE
CIRC BLK
L TEST
BX RAYON
BCLTV
BPG1
BLACK LEVEL
THRESHOLD
S TEST
CONTROL
SIGNALS
CAL TEST SIGNAL

CLP1A
CLP2A
AGC VALID, AGC VALID
CBLK
BPG1
T/H
18-33
V Ref
REC
OUT
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 16
CCD VIDEO VIDEO INPUT AMPLIFIERBLOCK DIAGRAM
J2
Preset Gain
BPG1
L1, C7
R1
R2
Fluoro
X1
CAL
Rad
U1
Rejector
14 MHZ
Q1
CLPIA
AR1
+
_
Q18
Q20, Q21
L2, C19, C20
Clipping
Lowpass
Filter
Q19
Normal
R8
CAL
GAIN
Signal
CLP2A
AR11
CI
OFFSET
PRE-AGC
Video
DYNAMIC
CLAMP
Max
Gain R7
V TEST
STEST
AR6
AR6
S/H
U5
U6
AGC VALID
MANUAL AUTO
GAIN
GAIN
R5
V Ref
18-34
POST
AR2 AGC
VIDEO
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 17
CCD VIDEO DYNAMIC GAMMABLOCK DIAGRAM
BPG1
GAMMA ON/OFF
ON
X3
Gamma ON/OFF
U2
R9
-10 V
-10 V
Gamma
T/H
PEAK
DETEC
+10 V
X2
Gamma Dyn/normal
POST AGC
VIDEO
OFF
THRESHOLD 2
U3
Q5
AR3, D3,
C27,
R62, R63
AR3
S/H
V ref=1.8 V
THRESHOLD 1
GAIN = -0.15
SAMPLE
Q5
Q6
GAMMA OUT
L4
R46
HLDE
THRESHOLD 1
Q6
Q7
-15 V
-15 V
18-35
THRESHOLD 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 18
CCD VIDEO VIDEO OUT AMPLIFIERBLOCK DIAGRAM
AR4
Q10
Q11
GAMMA OUT
Q12
Q13
R3
BLACK LEVEL
GAIN=1,9
CLP1A
Q9
CBLK
Steno 1
CSYNC
B29/J1
R/F
_
X4
J3
VIDEO
OUT
1 GAIN= 1.15
2 GAIN=3.53
R4
Offset
ILLUSTRATION 19
CCD VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATION
BPG1
BX RAYON
Q
CLK
DELAY
AGC VALID
T/H
VD
BCLTV
18-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 110
CCD VIDEO AVERAGE BRIGHTNESS DETECTIONBLOCK DIAGRAM
AGC/ABD
WINDOW
AR7
U10
AR8
PRE AGC
Video
-s
A
A
B
RAZ
Q16
Q14
CLP1A
AGC VALID
U9
GAIN=5.6
-s
CLIPPING
S/H
U7
V Ref = 1 V
SAMPLE
AR8
L TEST
White clipping
ON
AGC Valid
X5
OFF
V TEST
U7
CHOPPER
AR9
U11
CLIPPING
LOW-PASS FILTER
INVERTER
COMPARATOR
HYSTERESIS
CLIPPING
Q26, Q27
GAIN=1
ABD Gain
R/F
Steno
GAIN=3
Offset R13
18-37
A19/J1
AR9
AR9
R6
REC
X6
ABD
B3/J1
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 111
CCD VIDEO CONTROL SIGNALSBLOCK DIAGRAM
R16
Clamp
R14
BPG1
CLP1A
Phase Blanking H
CLP2A
R15
Calibration signal
width
RAZ
VIDEO CONTROL
SIGNALS
(SEE TIMING DIAGRAMS,
ILL. 1-12, AND 1-13)
R10
Calibration signal
amplitude
SAMPLE
VD
L TEST
S TEST
CAL GAIN SIGNAL
X1
AGC VALID, AGC VALID
Calibration ON/OFF
T/H
A22/J1
CIRCBLK
A6/J1
BPG1
X7
GO TO BLACK ON/OFF
X8
BLANKING COMPOSITE
SIGNAL
GENERATION
CBLK
AGC WINDOW ON/OFF

A28/J1
HDCAM
A29/J1
VDCAM
AGC/ABD WINDOW
AGC WIND
Post AGC VIDEO
AGC VALID
R11
BLACK LEVEL
THRESHOLD
18-38
BLACK LEVEL THRESHOLD ADJUST
MONO1
VD CAM
VD1
VD2
RAZ =VD1 VD2
18-39
SAMPLE=VD1
VD2
VD2
MONO
BLK=(VD2
MONO1)IVDCAM
MONO2 X1 on B (Calibration)
MONO2 X1 on A (Normal)
LTEST X1 on A and on B
STEST X1 on A and on B
CAL GAIN X1 on B =
MONO2.BLK
GE Medical Systems
HDCAM
REV 1
ILLUSTRATION 112
RESET
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Dashed line: signal status during V Blanking
CLP1A
BLK
STEST (X1 in A or B)
MONO 2 (X1 in A)
MONO 2 (X1 in B)
MONO 1
HD CAM
Black pixels
VIDEO IN
ILLUSTRATION 113
18-40
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

SECTION 8
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
This Board combines four distinct functions:
1. Interface,
2. Remote control of the EHV power supply,
3. Iris servocontrol,
4. Generation of circular masks (for Stenoscop application only).
81
Interface
The interface manages and adapts the remotecontrol commands coming from the
Stenoscop:
D
HINV, VINV (not used with Stenoscop),
Rad Prep/Go To Black (not used with Stenoscop),
Xray ON,
Advantx Iris Command (not used with Stenoscop),
CLTV ON,
Dose 1/Dose 2 (Iris switchover in Fluoroscopy Mode),
Mag 1 and Mag 2 remote control (for 22 cm).
These signals are transmitted via Optocouplers V18 thru V21.

They are used to generate the following signals:
D
BCLTV
(CLTV ON, BCLTV = 1, CLTV OFF, BCLTV = 0)
BPG1
(Rad Prep ON, BPG1 = 1) (not used with Stenoscop)
BXRAY ON
(XRAY ON, BXRAY ON = 1)
BINV H and BINV V (not used with Stenoscop).

The default position of the sweep reversals when power is turned on can be altered by
Jumpers X3 and X4, on Imageur RF only.
CSYNC
BPG2 (not used with Stenoscop)

This signal indicates presence of xrays in Radiography Mode with Imageur 22 RF
CCD.
DOSE
IRIS
This signal determines the position of the Iris in Fluoroscopy Mode.
On the Imageur RF, this signal determines the position of the Iris depending
on whether in Fluoroscopy or Radiography Mode:
State 0 = Fluoroscopy,
State 1 = Radiography.
After a request for Rad Prep is made, the Iris Radiography state is maintained until the next
fluoroscopy.
On the Imageur for Stenoscop, the Iris remains in the fluoroscopy position during a
Radiography exposure (Jumper X1 in M position).
18-41
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
82

Remote control of EHV power supply

The EHV power supply control voltages are adjusted by Potentiometers R1 and R9 located
on the edge of the Board.
In Radiography Mode, the Imageur housing returns to Normal Mode, irrespective of the
status of the Mag commands.
The DS1 LED lights up if the vacuum is insufficient (getter current > 1 A).
83
Iris servocontrol
The CCD Interface Board contains the servocontrol circuits for the motordriven Iris.
Three Iris value settings are available, and these are determined by the status of the A0 and
A1 inputs of Analog Switch U6:
A0
DOSE 1
DOSE 2
Radiography
Radiography
A1
On condition that DOSE 1 < DOSE 2

The position of the Iris and the corresponding adjustment potentiometers (R10 thru R12) is
indicated by LEDs DS2 thru DS4.
Switch X2 is used to set up the Imageur for different uses:
D
X2 on T Iris Fluoroscopy in Dose 2 position when power is switched on (RF use).
X2 on U Iris Fluoroscopy in Dose 1 position when power is switched on (Stenoscop

use)
When Switch X1 is in the M position, it is used to inhibit changing over the Iris into
radiography position when a Rad Prep request is made.
This mode is used with the Stenoscop.
With the Imageur 22 RF CCD, Switch X1 must be set in the L position.
When Switch X5 is set in the P position, it is used to open the Iris in the position
corresponding to Dose 1 when the REC1 signal goes to 0. This is used to increase the
dynamics of the video signal when the generator can no longer provide regulation.
This function can only be active in Automatic Gain Mode (AGC VALID signal on 0). When
the Iris has switched over, it retains its position until the next fluoroscopy (Circuit U12).
18-42
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
84

Analog circular masks

These masks are used in the Stenoscop application only.
The line integrator is made up of Operational Amplifier U12 and the R/C components
associated with it. It is reset by the HDCAM signal and a part of the U7 analog switch. Its
output supplies a parabola signal at line frequencies aligned on a direct current voltage equal
to +3 V.
The field integrator is made up of Operational Amplifier U10 and the R/C components
associated with it. It is reset by the VDCAM signal and the other part of the U7 analog
switch. Its output supplies a parabola signal at field frequencies aligned on a direct current
voltage equal to +3 V.
The two parabolas are added together using Potentiometer R15 to adjust the H/V ratio. The
diameter of the video mask is adjusted using R16, and the diameter of the ABD sampling
window is adjusted using R17.
For Stenoscop applications, Jumper X7 is in E position and Jumper X8 is in G position.
For R/F applications, Jumper X7 is in F position and Jumper X8 is in H position. In this case,
the circular masks are provided by the digital CCDMT Board.
18-43
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-44
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 2-1/2
CHAPTER 2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
18-45
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-46
GE Medical Systems

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 2-3
REV 1
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 DR 001

Purpose:
1 of 2
Version No.:
IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY
Date:
Time: 15 min
Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Imageur 22 Stenoscop CCD or Imageur 16 Stenoscop CCD.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Hex socket Allen wrench set.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
THIS UNIT IS IN EMC COMPLIANCE WITH THE IEC 60112

STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY,
ENSURE THAT ALL THE SHIELDS ARE CORRECTLY
INSTALLED.
TAKE ALL USUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRONIC
BOARD MANIPULATION (I.E., MATS AND BRACELETS TO
PROTECT AGAINST THE ELECTRONIC DISCHARGES).
1. Be careful not to damage the grid on the front panel of the Imageur.
2. Set the column at its lowest position and lock its movement using the transportation rod (see SM of
Stenoscop, chapter 3).
3. Remove power from the Imageur.
4. Recover all mounting brackets.
5. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the Imageur Head,
to facilitate assembly and disassembly.
18-47
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
IMAGEUR HEAD DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
DR 001
2 of 2
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for the 16cm unit and two M5
screws for the 22cm unit).
2. Set the Stenoscop Carm in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest
surface.
3. Remove the stop rod (22cm unit).
4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Disassembly
1. Disconnect all cables coming from the Carm that are connected to the Imageur as follows:
a. Main cable (HE5 connector, 25contact).
b. Cable connected to the dose measurement preamplifier (two coaxial cables with Subclic plugs
and
supply cables).
c. Green/yellow security cable.
2. Remove the Imageur and position it on its temporary support (four M6 screws).
3. Route the Carm cables through the opening of the Imageur Chassis facing the Carm mounting.
5.2
Reassembly
1. Follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.
2. Check that the Imageur cable is properly clamped to ensure correct grounding of the strap with the
chassis.
18-48
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
1 of 6
Version No.:
XRAY IMAGE INTENSIFIER TUBE

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Date:
Time: 1 hour
Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
XRay Image Intensifier Tube 9438HX (22 cm) or 9449HP (16 cm).
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Job Cards RG 001 and RG 002.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

INSTALLED.
DANGER
DUE TO THE RISK OF IMPLOSION, SAFETY GLASSES

ARE MANDATORY FOR ALL II TUBE HANDLING.
1. Remove power from the Stenoscop.

3. Be careful not to damage the II tube external surface, especially the entry window.
18-49
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

DR 002
2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Because of the weight of the Imageur Head, prepare a flat surface on which to set the unit to facilitate
assembly and disassembly.
2. Set the Stenoscop in the horizontal position in order to bring the Imageur just above its rest surface.
3. Prepare an area for II tube disassembly.
4. Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Head (three M5 screws for 16 cm and two M5 screws for 22
cm).
5. Remove the Imageur Head.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Disassembly
1. Remove the shield from the optical system (Ill. 21 and 22, Item 1) and the lead ballast (Ill. 21 and
22, Item 14), if provided.
2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 21 and 22, Item 2).
3. Disconnect the J3 connector (Iris) from the CCD Interface Board (Ill. 23, Item 1).
4. On the CCD chip module, disconnect:
a. Subclic plug from the video coaxial cable (Ill. 21, Item 4).
b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 21 and 22, Item 5).
5. Remove the optical system as follows:
On 16cm units:
Remove the optical system (Ill. 22, Item 6) (three screws).
On 22cm units:
a. The two Boards comprising the CCD Module assembly(CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 21, Item 8)
and CCD Interface Module Board (Ill. 21, Item 9)are interconnected by a flexible board (Ill.
21, Item 10). Disconnect the flexible board from the CCD Sensor Board.
b. Remove the two screws securing the support angle that supports the CCD Interface Module
Board (Ill. 21, Item 11).
c. Remove the CCD Interface Module Board Support angle assembly.
d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 21, Item 6) (three screws).
6. Disconnect the high voltage cables which run from the II tube to the EHV power supply as well as the
cables connected to the EHV power supply ground terminal.
7. Unsolder the EHV contacts from the EHV cables.
18-50
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

DR 002
3 of 6
8. Install the EHV connectors and contacts on the replacement II tube High Voltage cables (observe
polarization).
9. Remove the II tube (Ill. 21 and 22, Item 3):
On 16cm units:
a. Remove the Imageur front cover (Ill. 22, Item 7) (three screws, Ill. 22, Item 8).
b. Remove the Imageur CCD rack temporarily to access the mounting screw of the II tube located
under the rack.
c. Remove the three screws securing the II tube to the chassis (Ill. 22, Item 9).
d. Remove the II tube from the front.
On 22cm units:
a. Remove the stop (Ill. 21, Item 12).
b. Loosen the II tube mounting clamps on the chassis (Item 13, Ill. 21), as well as the clamp screws
(Ill. 21, Item 15) on the mounts (Ill. 21, Item 16).
c. Remove the rear cover (Ill. 21, Item 7) from the Imageur (two screws, Ill. 21, Item 17) and
three pins attached to the mounts (Ill. 21, Item 16).
d. Remove the three mounting screws (Ill. 21, Item 18) securing the II tube to the chassis.
e. Remove the II tube from the front.
5.2
Reassembly
1. Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
2. Check that the optics and the II output window are clean. Clean them if necessary, using Kodak
Optical Paper, Ref. No. 1546027.
3. Perform the EHV Power Supply adjustment (see Job Card RG 001).
4. Perform the optical adjustments (see Job Card RG 002).
18-51
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

DR 002
4 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 21
IMAGEUR 22 STENO CCD
4
8
10
6
14
18
11
13
2
16
12
15
17
18-52
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

DR 002
5 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 22
IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD
14
6
8
10
3
18-53
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


DR 002
ILLUSTRATION 23
VIDEO PROCESSING MODULE
18-54
6 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY
Time: 10 min
1 of 2
Version No.:
Date:
Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Thomson TH7191 power supply.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Job Card RG 001.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the 22-cm
unit).
18-55
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
EHV POWER SUPPLY DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY
DR 003
2 of 2
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Disassembly
1. Loosen and disconnect all EHV connections which run from the EHV power supply to the II tube.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable connected to the EHV power supply.
3. Remove the EHV power supply (four M3 screws).
5.2
Reassembly
1. Recover the connectors and contacts to be soldered from the new power supply. These connectors
may be used to replace the II tube EHV connectors.
2. Secure the new power supply to the supporting metal plate (Imageur 16) or the chassis (Imageur 22)
with the four M3 screws.
3. Reconnect and tighten all the II tube EHV connections on the EHV power supply.
Note:
On the TH9449HP H506 16cm tube, the G2 electrode must be connected to the G3 terminal
of the EHV Power Supply.
4. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the EHV power supply.
5. On the CCD Interface Board, preadjust the control voltages to the minimum setting by turning
Potentiometers R1 thru R9 fully counterclockwise.
6. Restore power to the Imageur Chassis.
7. Perform the RG 001 adjustments.
18-56
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
1 of 6
Version No.:
COMPACT OPTICS
Date:
Time: 30 min
Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D
Compact Optics:
CAUTION
50 Hz/625 lines 22 cm,

60 Hz/525 lines 16 cm.
The optical system model is specific to each Imageur.

It is not possible to replace a 50 Hz/625 line optical system by a 60 Hz/525
line optical system.
The CCD sensor cannot be separated from the optical system. In case of
sensor malfunctioning, the CCD Module optical system assembly (the
two boards are coupled) must be replaced.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Job Cards RG 002 and RG 003.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

STANDARD. DURING ANY DISASSEMBLY/ REASSEMBLY,
INSTALLED.
1. Remove power from the Imageur Chassis.

18-57
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004
2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Tilt the Carm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.
2. Remove the Imageur Head rear cover (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5 screws for the
22-cm unit).
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Disassembly
1. Remove the shielding from the optics (Ill. 24 and 25, Item 1), as well as the lead counterweight
(Ill. 24 and 25, Item 14), if provided.
2. Remove the Imageur rack cover (Ill. 24 and 25, Item 2).
3. Unplug the J3 Iris connector on the CCD Interface Board.
4. On the CCD module, disconnect:
a. Subclic plug from the coaxial video cable (Ill. 24 , Item 4),
b. Ribbon cable (Ill. 24 and 25, Item 5),
5. Remove the optical system.
On the Imageur 16 cm:
Remove the optical system (Ill. 25, Item 6) (three screws, Ill. 25, 28 and 29, Item 3).
On the Imageur 22 cm:
a. The two boards comprising the CCD tandem (CCD Sensor Board (Ill. 24, Item 8) and CCD
Module Interface Board (Ill. 24, Item 9)) are coupled by a flexible board (Ill. 24, Item 10).
Disconnect them from the CCD Sensor Board.
b. Remove the two screws (Ill. 24, Item 11) securing the CCD Module Interface Board.
c. Remove the CCD Module Interface Board/support angle assembly.
d. Remove the optical system (Ill. 24, Item 6), (three screws, Ill. 24, 26 and 27, Item 3).
5.2
Reassembly
2. Refer to Job Cards RG 002 and RG 003 for the necessary adjustments.
CAUTION
The adjustment ring locking screw (Ill. 27 and 29, Item 5) must be
correctly tightened to avoid any play in the optical system.
18-58
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004
3 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 24
IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2
11
10
6
5
3
14
18-59
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004
4 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 25
IMAGEUR 16 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2
1
14
5
18-60
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004
5 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 26
COMPACT OPTICS IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000
4
3
4
1
2
3
ILLUSTRATION 27
COMPACT OPTICS IMAGEUR 22 CCD FOR STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000
1
4
2
5
5
1
18-61
P1
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COMPACT OPTICS
DR 004
6 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 28
COMPACT OPTICS IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD
4
1
2
3
ILLUSTRATION 29
1
4
2
5
5
3
18-62
P1
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
1 of 2
Version No.:
Date:
Time: 30 min
Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
Board cage.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Allen wrench set.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
1. Tilt the Stenoscop Carm aside to facilitate access to the Imageur.
2. Remove the Imageur rear cover from the Imageur (three M5 screws for the 16-cm unit and two M5
screws for the 22-cm unit).
3. Remove the Imageur rack cover (four M3 screws).
18-63
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
BOARD CAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
DR 005
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Disassembly
1. Disconnect all cables connected to the Imageur rack as follows:
a. Iris cable (connected to J3/CCD Interface Board).
b. Imageur cable (connected to J6/CCD Interconnection Board).
c. CCD Module cable (connected to J8/CCD Interconnection Board).
d. Dose measurement preamplifier cable (connected to J5/CCD Interconnection Board).
e. CCD Module coaxial video cable (connected to J2/CCD Video Board).
2. Remove the rack and dose measurement preamplifier assembly (four M4 screws).
5.2
Reassembly
Follow the disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
18-64
2 of 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY
Time: 10 min
1 of 2
Version No.:
Date:
Personnel:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D
CCD Power Supply Board.
CCD Video Board.
CCD Interface Board.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Job Cards RG003 CCD Interface Board and RG004 CCD Video Board.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

INSTALLED.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Remove the rear cover from the Imageur Housing (three M5 screws for the 16-cm and two M5 screws for
the 22-cm unit).
18-65
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY
DR 006
2 of 2
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Disassembly
1. Remove the rack cover (four M3 screws), leaving the lower screws in place.
2. Remove the board(s) that need replacing. To avoid error, colored tabs and handgrips show where
and in what orientation the boards are to be fitted on the rack.
5.2
Reassembly
2. Refer to Job Cards RG 003 and RG 004 for the necessary adjustments.
18-66
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

CHAPTER 3 ADJUSTMENT
18-67
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-68
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 RG 001

Purpose:
1 of 6
Version No.:
EHV ADJUSTMENT
Date:
Time: 15 min
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Digital voltmeter.
II Tube Technical Specifications.
Funk 23 Test Pattern.
Oscilloscope, 20 MHz minimum bandwidth.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The EHV power supply generates voltages of up to 30 kV (U5).
All the necessary operator and equipment safety precautions must be taken, including most importantly:
1. Check the ground connections.
2. Check the high voltage insulation.
3. Check the condition of the power supply/tube connection contacts.
4. Take all usual safety precautions for electronic board manipulation (i.e., mats and bracelets to
protect against electrostatic discharge).
5. Read the safety precautions concerning xradiation.
18-69
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001
2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The adjustments described in this Job Card should be performed when replacing:
D
II tube.
EHV power supply.
1. Remove power from the Stenoscop or from the board cage.

2. Remove the board cage cover.
3. On the CCD Interface Board, turn the R1 thru R9 potentiometers fully counterclockwise (min.
control voltage).
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
D
High voltage measurement with an EHV measurement box is not necessary for EHV power supply
adjustment.
The following equations are used to calculate VG1 (HV), VG2 (HV) and VG3 (HV) high voltages
from vg1 (HV), vg2 (HV) and vg3 (HV) low voltages:
TABLE 1
22 cm
vg1 (LV)volts
1 )
VG1(HV) 40
34.5
vg2 (LV)volts
1 )
VG2(HV) 145
139
vg3 (LV)volts
1 )
VG3(HV) 1300
1300
16 cm
1 )
1 )
VG1(HV) 40
34.5
VG2(HV) 1300
1300
Low voltages are adjusted on the CCD Interface Board using the R1 thru R8 potentiometers.
Voltages VG1 (HV), VG2 (HV) and VG3 (HV) are those indicated in the Inspection Acceptance
Report for the II tube.
Restore power to the Imageur Chassis.
Adjust the low voltages according to the following table:
18-70
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001
3 of 6
TABLE 2

FIELD
NORMAL
MAG1
MAG2
TEST
POINT
vg1
R1, Item 9
R2, Item 10
TP4, Item 5
vg2
R4, Item 12
R5, Item 13
TP3, Item 4
vg3
R7, Item 17
R8, Item 16
TP2, Item 3
vg1
R1, Item 9
TP4, Item 5
vg2
R7, Item 17
TP2, Item 3
Low Voltage
22 cm
16 cm
D
Note:
The test points are on the CCD Interface Board. Make measurements between the test points in the
table and ground, located at TP1 on the CCD Interface Board.
VG1 controls focusing uniformity.
VG2 controls center focusing.
VG3 controls the entry field diameter (on Imageur 22 cm only).
On the 16cm versions, low voltages for Magnifiers 1 and 2 must be set at minimum.
Adjustments can be optimized. Begin by adjusting VG3 (entry field diameter R7 and R8, Imageur
22 cm only) because this adjustment affects the other voltages.
The center focusing adjustment (VG2) can be optimized on the oscilloscope with the following
procedure:
1. Connect an oscilloscope probe at TP3/CCD Video Board (video output).

2. Place a Funk 23 Test Pattern on the input window of the Imageur (bursts in the vertical direction on
the screen), and run a fluoroscopy sequence at 50 kV with open field.
ILLUSTRATION 31
VIDEO OUTPUTTP3/CCD VIDEO BOARD
10 ms/div
50 mV/div
18-71
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001
4 of 6
3. Observe the modulation on one video signal line.

4. Optimize the VG2 adjustment (R4 and R5 on 22cm units, R7 on 16cm units) to obtain maximum
amplitude (A).
II tube supply high voltages and currents used in the Imageur are as follows:
TABLE 3
TH 9438 HX H560 (22cm) Tube
Normal
Magnifier 1
Magnifier 2
VG1
100 to 300 V
100 to 300 V
100 to 300 V
VG2
500 to 1100 V
500 to 1100 V
500 to 1100 V
VG3
3.0 to 4.5 kV
6.0 to 8.0 kV
10.0 to 12.5 kV
VG4
2.5 to 3.0 kV
2.5 to 3.0 kV
2.5 to 3.0 kV
VG5
30.0 kV
30.0 kV
30.0 kV
TABLE 4
TH 9449 HP H506 (16cm) Tube
Normal
VG1
50 to 150 V
VG2
1.8 to 2.3 kV
VG3
VG4
2.5 to 3.0 kV
VG5
30.0 kV
18-72
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001
5 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 32
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18-73
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

EHV ADJUSTMENT
RG 001
Blank page
18-74
6 of 6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
1 of 10
Version No.:
COMPACT OPTICS
Date:
Time: 20 min
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Two copper plates, 175 mm x 175 mm, thickness 1 mm.
Radcal 2025 AC dosimeter.
Ionization chamber 20 x 5 x 160 mm.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
Take all usual safety precautions for electronic board manipulation (i.e., mats and bracelets to
Read the safety precautions concerning xray equipment.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
These adjustments are performed when replacing the compact optics/CCD Module (consisting of the
CCD Sensor Board and Interface Module Board) assembly.
Note:
The two boards comprising the CCD Module are coupled. They must be replaced together.
18-75
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
2 of 10
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Configuration
Check that Jumper X1 (Ill. 9, Item 1) is in the V1 position on the CCD Module.
5.2
Adjustments
5.2.1
Centering and Orientation

The optical system is comprised of two main parts:
D
The mounting ring on the II tube (Ill. 36, 37, 38, and 39, Item 1).
The upper part supporting the CCD Module (Ill. 36, 37, 38, and 39, Item 2).
1. Check that the three ring mounting screws are tight (Ill. 36, 37, 38, and 39, Item 3). Do not
tighten the three screws (Ill. 36, 37, 38, and 39, Item 4) securing the upper part of the optical
system to the mounting ring.
2. On the CCD Interface Board, turn R16 completely clockwise to open the circular blanking window
to its maximum, and turn Potentiometer R10 and R11 completely clockwise to open the Iris wide.
3. Place a nonmetallic rule on the II tube input window, perpendicular to the Carm.
4. Run a fluoroscopy sequence using minimum parameters. Center the image in the memory display
window by using the mounting assembly of the optical system upper part. At the same time, ensure
that the image in the patient axis is correctly aligned by running a sweep reversal: The image of the
rule must remain vertical on the screen.
5. Once the centering and orientation correctly adjusted for all sweep reversal positions, tighten the
three screws (Ill. 36, 37, 38, and 39 Item 4).
5.2.2
Focusing
1. This adjustment must be performed with open Iris for good accuracy (on the CCD Interface Board,
turn Potentiometers R10 and R11 fully clockwise).
2. Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP3/CCD Video Board (video output).
3. Loosen the locking screw (Ill. 37 and 39, Item 5) on the adjustment ring (Ill. 36, 37, 38, and
39, Item 6).
4. Place a Funk 23 test pattern on the input window of the II tube, with the bursts perpendicular to the
Carm.
5. Run a wide open fluoroscopy with minimum parameters.
18-76
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
3 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 33
10 ms/div
50 mV/div
Principal time synchronization base = TP11/CCD Interface Board (VD) 20 ms/div.

Delay time synchronization base = TP12/CCD Interface Board (HD) 10 micro s/div.
6. Observe the modulation on one video signal line.
7. Optimize the focusing adjustment to obtain maximum amplitude (A) by turning the
adjustment ring (Ill. 37 and 39, Item 6).
8. Tighten the blocking screw.
9. Remove the Funk 23 Test Pattern.
CAUTION
5.2.3
The adjustment ring locking screw (Ill. 37 and 39, Item 5) and must be
correctly tightened to avoid any play in the optical system.
Circular Blanking
1. Circular Blanking:
Adjust the circular blanking window so that it is flush with the useful image of the output window of
the II tube. To do so, use the following potentiometers (see Illustration 310):
R13 = Horizontal centering (Item 31),
R14 = Vertical Centering (Item 30),
R15 = Horizontal/Vertical Ratio (Item 29),
R16 = Diameter (Item 28).
2. ABD window:
Check the diameter adjustment (50% of the useful image) by positioning Switch X8/CCD (Ill. 310,
item 25) Video Board to the S position. Adjust via Pot. R17 (Ill. 310, item 27), if required.
18-77
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
4 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 34
0.5 A
5.2.4
CCD Module Gain Adjustment Check

Connect an oscilloscope probe to TP2/CCD Video Board, using the same synchronization as in the above
paragraph.
The gain adjustment determines the maximum video level output of the CCD Module.
Readjust the gain as follows:
1. Turn R1 (Ill. 311, Item 7), on the CCD module, completely clockwise (gain adjusted to the
minimum).
2. Run a wide open fluoroscopy gradually increasing the parameters until video signal clipping at
TP2/CCD Video Board. Note the video level obtained under these conditions = V1 (A according to
Ill. 35).
ILLUSTRATION 35
Clipping Level A
Max useful Level B = 0.8 A

= 1.2 V after adjustment
A
B
18-78
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
5 of 10
3. Run a second fluoroscopy sequence while gradually decreasing the parameters, to obtain a value of
0.8 V1 (B according to Ill. 35).
4. Adjust R1/CCD module (Ill. 35, Item 7) to get 0.8 V1 = 1.2 V "50 mV,
Note:
5.2.5
The maximum useful level generated by the CCD Module is considered to be equal to 80% of the
clipping level (when near the saturation level, the CCD sensor is no longer linear).
Dose Adjustment
See Service Manual, Job Card RG 002.
18-79
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
6 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 36
4
3
4
1
2
3
ILLUSTRATION 37
3
4
2
6
P1
5
1
1
18-80
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
7 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 38
4
1
2
3
ILLUSTRATION 39
1
4
2
5
3
18-81
P1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
8 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 310
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
38
10
11
12
13
14
37
36
35
15
34
16
33
17
32
18
19
31
20
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
18-82
23
22
21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
9 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 311
CHIP MODULE CCD
V2
V1
TP1 TP3
X1
TP4
J2
TP6
4
TP5
J1
TP7
TP2
R1
6
TABLE 1
ITEM
Fuses
Switches
None
1
Leds
X1 V1 = preamp video output (NORMAL)

V2 = video output (test)
None
Potentiometers
R1 Video gain
Test points
2
6
3
4
5
9
8
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
Composite video output

0V
Video preamp output
9 V
+15 V
+7 V
+5 V
18-83
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

COMPACT OPTICS
RG 002
Blank page
18-84
10 of 10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
CCD INTERFACE BOARD ADJUSTMENT
1 of 6
Version No.:
Date:
Time: 30 min
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Digital multimeter.
Two copper plates, 175 x 175 mm, 1 mm thickness.
Radcal 2025AC dosimeter.
II Tube Technical Specifications.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
Take all usual safety precautions for manipulation of electronic boards (i.e., mats and bracelets to
Read the precautions necessary when working near xrays.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The adjustments described in this Job Card should be performed when replacing:
D
II tube.
EHV power supply.
1. Remove power from the Imageur.

2. Remove the board cage cover.
3. On the CCD Interface Board, turn the R1 thru R9 potentiometers (Ill. 312, Items 9 thru 17) fully
counterclockwise (min. control voltage).
18-85
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RG 003
2 of 6
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Configuration
Check the position of the switches on the new Board.
TABLE 1
Switch
Position
Mode
X1
IRIS command in Stenoscop Mode
X2
Dose command in Stenoscop Mode
X3
Preset Horizontal Inversion*
X4
Preset Vertical Inversion *
X5
IRIS/REC Coupling in OFF Mode
X6
A REC output in ON Mode
X7
ABD Window in Stenoscop Mode
X8
Circular Blanking in Stenoscop Mode
X9
Selection of PG Input in SAS Mode
X10
IRIS selection in Compact Mode
* Inactive
5.2
Adjustments
EHV Adjustment:
D
The command voltages of the EHV power supply must be adjusted on the new CCD Interface Board.
Perform the adjustments as shown on Job Card RG 001.
Perform the checks on the interface functions with the Stenoscop (see SM RG 001, Sec. 5 and
SM, RG 001, Sec. 7).
Dose Adjustment:
D
This is carried out via the CCD Interface Board, and must also be readjusted (see SM, RG 002).
Circular Blanking Adjustment:

D
Note:
Perform the adjustments described in Job Card RG 002, Para. 5.2.3.

R40 inactive with Stenoscop units.
18-86
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RG 003
3 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 312
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
38
10
11
12
13
14
37
36
35
15
34
16
33
17
32
18
19
31
20
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
18-87
23
22
21
GE Medical Systems
RG 003
4 of 6
TABLE 2
CCD INTERFACE
32
X1
IRIS COMMAND
L
M
R/F
Steno
22
X2
COMMAND DOSE SELECTION
T
U
R/F
Steno
21
X3
H SWEEP REVERSAL PRESET
A
B
Norm
INV
19
X4
V SWEEP REVERSAL PRESET
C
D
Norm
INV
24
X5
IRIS/REC
P
Q
ON
OFF
23
X6
AREC OUT
R
S
ON
OFF
26
X7
ABD WINDOW MODE
E
F
Steno
R/F
25
X8
CIRCULAR BLANKING MODE
G
H
Steno
R/F
20
X9
PG INPUT SELECTION
J
K
SAS
ADVX
X10
IRIS SELECTION
V
W
Anamorphote lens
Compact lens
SwitchesJumpers
Leds
Potentiometers
DS1
(red)
II tube vacuum default
38
DS2
(green)
DOSE 1
36
DS3
(green)
DOSE 2
34
DS4
(green)
DOSE RAD.
09
R1
VG1 N
10
R2
VG1 Mag 1
11
R3
VG1 Mag 2
12
R4
VG2 N
13
R5
VG2 Mag 1
14
R6
VG2 Mag 2
17
R7
VG3 N
16
R8
VG3 Mag 1
15
R9
VG3 Mag 2
37
R10
IRIS 1
35
R11
IRIS 2
33
R12
IRIS RAD
31
R13
H CENTERING
30
R14
V CENTERING
29
R15
H/V
28
R16
CIRCULAR
BLANKING
DIAMETER
27
R17
AGC WINDOW
DIAMETER
18
R40
BPG2 DELAY
18-88
ANALOG WINDOWS
ITEM
(not used in RF versions)
REV 1

GE Medical Systems
REV 1

RG 003
5 of 6
ITEM
1
TP1
0V
TP2
VG3
TP3
VG2
TP4
VG1
TP5
Iris command
TP6
REC 2
TP7
B XRAY ON
TP8
B CLTV
TP9
BPG1
TP10
BPG2
TP11
VD
TP12
HD
Test points
18-89
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

RG 003
Blank page
18-90
6 of 6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
1 of 10
Version No.:
CCD VIDEO BOARD ADJUSTMENT
Date:
Time: 30 min
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Digital voltmeter.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D
Take all usual safety precautions for manipulation of electronic boards (i.e., mats and bracelets to
Read the precautions to take when working near xrays.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
These adjustments are made when replacing the CCD Video Board.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
Configuration
Check the position of the switches on the new Board.
18-91
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RG 004
2 of 10
TABLE 1
Switch
Position
Mode
X1
Video Input in Normal Mode
X2
Gamma in Dynamic Mode
X3
Gamma in ON Mode
X4
Video Output in Stenoscop Mode
X5
ABD Clipping in ON Mode
X6
ABD Output in Stenoscop Mode
X7
Go to Black in ON Mode
X8
ABD Window visualized in OFF Mode
X9
AGC activated
1. Connect an ocilloscope probe at TP11/CCD Inteface Board (VD 20 ms/div): synchro principal time
base.
2. Connect an oscilloscope probe at TP12/CCD Interface Board (HD 10s/div).
5.2
Checks and Adjustments

Put the CCD Video Board on an extension board and perform the following checks:
5.2.1
Clamp Pulse
Test Point:
TP21/CCD Video Board
Duration:
A = 2.0 0.1 s
ILLUSTRATION 313
CLAMP PULSE
A
Adjustment: If necessary, use R16/CCD Video Board (Ill. 322, Item 22).
18-92
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
5.2.2
RG 004
3 of 10
Test Signal
Test Point:
TP35/CCD Video Board
Duration:
B = 40 1 s
ILLUSTRATION 314
TEST SIGNAL
Check the display test pattern.
1. Put X1/CCD Video Board in B position (Ill. 322, Item 26).
2. Disconnect the plug from J2/CCD Video Board.
The image should be as in Ill. 315.
ILLUSTRATION 315
Black
The white/black transition must be
located between the ABD window
and the circular blanking.
Circular blanking
White
ABD Window
3. Reconnect the plug to J2/CCD Video Board.
4. Put X1/CCD Video Board in the A position.
5.2.3
Horizontal Blanking
1. Open the video mask to its maximum (R16/CCD Interface Board completely clockwise).
2. Run a wide open fluoroscopy, with open shutters.
Test Point:
TP3/CCD Video Board
Duration:
C = 12 0.3 (625 lines/50 Hz)

C = 11.1 0.2 s (525 lines/60 Hz)
18-93
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RG 004
4 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 316
HORIZONTAL BLANKING
C
Adjustment: if necessary, use R14/CCD Video Board (Ill.9, Item 24).
Note:
Replacement Boards are preset for 625 lines/50 Hz. Adjustment must be redone for 525 lines/60 Hz.
3. Adjust the circular blanking and the ABD window. Refer to RG 002, Chapter 5.2.3.
5.2.4
Video Levels
These are adjusted in the factory. They can be controlled easily from the test signal generator on the
Board.
1. Test Signal Level
a. Unplug the J2/CCD Video Board coaxial cable.
b. Put the X1/CCD Video Board switch in the B position.
c. Check the Test Signal level
Test Point: TP2/CCD Video Board
Level:
A = 100 5mV
ILLUSTRATION 317
TEST SIGNAL LEVEL
Adjustment: If necessary, use R10/CCD Video Board (Ill. 322, Item 23)
18-94
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

RG 004
5 of 10
2. Preset Gain and Black Level (in Manual Mode)

a. Test the following using the Signal Test (see Ill. 318):
Level:
B = 250 5 mV
C = 50 +5 mV
ILLUSTRATION 318
PRESET GAIN AND BLACK LEVEL
B
C
D
Adjustment: If necessary, use R1/CCD Video Board (Ill. 322, Item 10) to adjust
Preset Gain B and R3/CCD Video Board (Ill. 322, Item 13) to adjust Black Level C.
b. Check the D Synchronization level (nonadjustable).
D = 300 20 mV (Ill. 318).
3. AGC Gain
a. Run a fluoro sequence in Automatic Mode (with Imageur, the xrays must be ON for the
AGC ON function to be activated).
b. Check the video level and the test signal.
Level:
B = 250 5 mV
ILLUSTRATION 319
AGC GAIN
B
C
D
18-95
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

RG 004
6 of 10
4. ABD Offset
a. Connect a voltmeter between TP1 and TP7/CCD Video Board.
b. Do not reconnect the coaxial cable to J2/CCD Video Board.
c. Place the X1/CCD Video Board switch in the A position.
d. No video signal is fed to the CCD Video Board input. Under these conditions, check the offset
of the ABD signal, without running an xray:
Test Point: TP1TP7/CCD Video Board
0 20 mV
Level:
5. ABD Gain
a. Put the X1/CCD Video Board switch in the B position.
b. The video signal now reenters the CCD Video Board. Under these conditions, check the ABD
signal.
Test Point: TP1TP7/CCD Video Board
2.1 V 50 mV
Level:
6. Gamma
To check the setting of the gamma corrector, the test signal level must be modified as follows:
Test Point:
Level:
TP2/CCD Video Board

A = 1000 20 mV
ILLUSTRATION 320
GAMMA (INPUT TEST SIGNAL)
Adjustment: If necessary, use R10/CCD Video Board.
18-96
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RG 004
Under these conditions, check the video output level.

Test Point:
TP3/CCD Video Board
Level:
B = 640 10 mV
ILLUSTRATION 321
GAMMA (OUTPUT TEST SIGNAL)
Readjust the level of the test signal with the nominal value.
Level:
A = 100 5 mV
Adjustment: Use R10/CCD Video Board (Ill. 322, Item 23).
7. Checking the ABD Offset
a. Reconnect the J2/CCD Video Board coaxial cable.
b. Put the switch X1 in the A position.
c. Under these conditions, check the ABD Offset (in Manual Mode).
Test Point
TP1TP7/CCD Video Board
Level
0 20 mV
8. Black Level Threshold
Refer to sm, Job Card RG 004. This adjustment is mandatory.
5.2.5
XRay ON Time Delay

Refer to sm, Job Card RG 003.
18-97
7 of 10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
RG 004
8 of 10
ILLUSTRATION 322
CCD VIDEO BOARD
10
11
12
13
1
4
1
5
28
1
6
27
1
7
26
1
8
25
1
9
24
2
0
23
22
18-98
21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

RG 004
9 of 10
TABLE 2
CCD INTERFACE
ITEM
Switches
Leds
Potentiometers
26
X1
VIDEO INPUT MODE
A = NORMAL
B = CALIBRATION
18
X2
GAMMA MODE
C = DYNAMIC
D = NORMAL
19
X3
GAMA
E = ON
F = OFF
16
X4
VIDEO OUTPUT MODE
G = R/F
H = STENO
27
X5
ABD CLIPPING MODE
I = ON (NORMAL)
J = OFF (CALIBRATION)
28
X6
ABD OUTPUT MODE
L = STENO
M = R/F
21
X7
X7 GO TO BLACK MODE
P = ON
Q = OFF
19
X8
ABD WINDOW DISPLAY
R = OFF
S = ON
17
X9
X9AGC
T = ENABLED
U = DISABLED
none
10
R1
Gain Preset (Fluoro)
09
R2
Gain Preset (Rad)
13
R3
Video Setup
14
R4
Video Offset
06
R5
AGC Gain
05
R6
ABD Gain
20
R9
Gamma
23
R10
Test signal level
12
R11
Black level threshold
02
R12
AGC Delay
03
R13
ABD Offset
24
R14
H Blanking
25
R15
Test Signal
22
R16
Clamp Pulse Width
18-99
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

RG 004
10 of 10
ITEM
11
TP1
0V
08
TP2
Video IN (low bandwidth)
15
TP3
Video OUT (low bandwith)
TP4
ABD video integrator OUT
TP5
ABD window integrator OUT
TP6
ABD divisor OUT
TP7
ABD OUT
TP8
Post AGC video OUT
TP9
Black level threshold ref
TP10
AGC VALID
TP11
Video preamp OUT
TP12
Post AGC Video OUT
TP13
Gamma peak detection OUT
TP14
Gamma threshold OUT
TP15
Gamma out
TP16
AGC command OUT
TP17
T/H OUT
TP18
REC OUT
TP19
ABD Video IN
TP20
Video OUT (high bandwith)
TP21
Clamp pulse OUT
07
04
Test points
18-100
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
1 of 2
Version No.:

ADJUSTMENT
Date:
Time: 30 min
Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D
Radcal 2025AC dosimeter.
II Tube Specifications.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Take all usual safety precautions for electronic board manipulation (i.e., mats and bracelets to protect
against electrostatic discharge).
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
These adjustments must be performed when replacing the II tube.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1
EHV Adjustments
1. Perform the adjustments described in RG 001, Section 5.
2. Set the vg1 (LV), vg2 (LV) and vg3 (LV) control voltages to obtain the high voltage values
corresponding to those indicated in the Inspection Acceptance Report for the II tube.
3. Try to optimize focusing on the oscilloscope; EHV settings will be optimized following the optical
focusing adjustment.
18-101
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

ADJUSTMENT
5.2
RG 005
2 of 2
Centering, Orientation and Optical Focusing

Perform the adjustments described in RG 002, Paras 5.2.1 and 5.2.2. Make sure the Iris is open before
starting.
5.3
EHV Setting Optimization

With the Iris still in the open position, optimize the EHV settings, especially the center focusing (vg2).
5.4
Dose
Perform the adjustments described in the SM, Job Card RG 002.
18-102
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults in the operation of the Imageur are easily traceable because each Imageur
subassembly has a well defined function.
The following Job Cards describe the typical problems which may occur on the Imageur.
Troubleshooting of the Imageur should always be followed by an adjustment, which may
require the use of specialized equipment as well as highly qualified labor.
Note:
In most cases, defective parts can be reconditioned in the factory. It is strongly

recommended not to discard or destroy any defective part.
18-103
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-104
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 LA 001

Purpose:
1 of 2
Version No.:
IMAGEUR TROUBLESHOOTING
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
SECTION 1
NECESSARY REPLACEMENT
None.
SECTION 2
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
D
Test pattern (or phantom).
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read the safety precautions concerning xray equipment.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Place a test pattern (or phantom) in the xray path.
Run a fluoro sequence in nominal conditions:
D
No image appears on the screen see LA011.
The video mask is present, but there is no image during xray emission see LA012.
There is an image, but it is out of focus see LA013.
There is an unstable image see LA014.
There is a clear image, but with the wrong brightness see LA015.
This manual describes the most common faults only. For other faults, the Field Engineer must decide the
course of action according to the complexity of the work to be done.
18-105
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

IMAGEUR TROUBLESHOOTING
LA 001
Blank page
18-106
2 of 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.:
NO IMAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
No image.
D
D
Video signal at
monitor(s) input?
No
Video signal at DSM output?
No
Video signal at DSM input?
No
No video mask.
No fluoroscopy symbol.
Yes
Defective monitor(s).
Yes
Defective DSM/Monitor
video connecting cable
Yes
Check DSM or DSM/

Stenoscop interface.
Remove rear cover from Imageur.
Composite video signal

at TP3/CCD video during
Fluoroscopy?
LA0 16
No
1
Check for presence of +24 V on

CCD Power Supply Board (DS1).
18-107
Yes
Defective Imageur/
Stenoscop interface
cable
1 of 4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 011
2 of 4
DS1/CCD Power Supply

Board lit?
Yes
No
Check Fuse F1 on
CCD Power Supply
Board
Fuse F1
OK?
Yes
Check Imageur/Stenoscop
Interface cable.
Check 24V Power Supply
on Stenoscop.
Check Switch S1/CCD
Power Supply Board
No
Replace F1.
Find cause of F1 burnout
Fuse
F1 burnout
again?
No
DS1/CCD
Power Supply
lit?
Yes
Replace CCD
Power Supply Board.
No
Yes
No
DS2, DS3, DS4 on

CCD Power Supply
Board lit?
Yes
Put CCD Video Board
on extension board.
Disconnect CCD Video and CCD

Interface Boards.
If at least one of the three LEDs stays
extinguished, replace CCD Power
Supply Board.
Observe composite
blanking signal on
TP36/CCD Video.
18-108
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 011
3 of 4
Signal on TP36/
CCD Video is permanently
at Logical State 1.
(+5V)
Yes
Go to Black Signal
on Pin 2 of Switch X7/CCD Video
is at State 1?
No
Yes
No
Observe CCD Video Board video input
signal in TP2/CCD Video during a
Fluoroscopy exposure.
Video signal
present?
No
Imageur/Stenoscop interface is
malfunctioning.
Check Go to Black command
(Pin 18 on the Imageur interface
cable).
This command must not be at
Logical State 0 in Fluoroscopy.
Yes
Replace CCD
Video Board.
The Imageur can operate by
disabling the Go to Black
function, which is not used
(Switch X7 in Q position on
the CCD Video Board).
Remove cover from optical system.
Observe CCD Module video output signal

(TP3/CCD Module), during a Fluoroscopy
exposure.
Check CIRC BLK

signal at A22
on Connector J1.
18-109
No
Yes
Image reappears
END
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 011
Video
signal present?
Yes
Replace coaxial
cable between
CCD Module and CCD
Video Board.
Yes
CIRC BLK
permanently at
Logical State 1?
No
Turn R16/CCD Interface

Board completely clockwise. If
no image appears, replace
No
Disassemble optical
system/CCD module
assembly. Observe
video signal in
TP3/CCD Module.
Yes
4 of 4
Video
signal present?
Check BLK signal

at TP31/CCD Video.
Yes
BLK at Logical
State 1 permanently?
Check HD (A28)
and VD (A 29) signal at
J1/CCD Video Board
No
No
Replace CCD
Video Board.
Signals OK?
Iris blocked in
closed position?
No
Check EHV Power Supply

connections (HV cables and
flat cable).
No
Redo the
connections
Yes
Yes
No
Remove power from
Imageur.
Attempt to unlock Iris
by directly turning gears.
Check the smooth operation
of Iris mechanism.
Restore power to
Imageur chassis.
Check Iris adjustment
functions (R10/R11 on
CCD Interface Board).
Replace
CCD Video
Board.
Check HD and VD
signals on CCD
Module.
HD = Pin 7/J1
VD = Pin 6/J1
Connections
OK?
No
No
Iris OK?
Yes
Signal OK?
Yes
Yes
Replace EHV
Power Supply.
Replace
CCD/optical
system
assembly.
Replace optical system/

CCD Module assembly.
END
18-110
Replace ribbon cable

between CCD Module
and backpanel.
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.:
VIDEO MASK ONLY VISIBLE ON SCREEN
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
Video Mask Only
Observe CCD Video Board video input

signal in TP2/CCD Video during a
Fluoroscopy exposure.
Video signal
present?
No
Yes
Replace CCD
Video Board.
Remove cover from optical system.
Observe CCD Module video output signal

(TP3/CCD Module), during a Fluoroscopy
exposure.
18-111
1 of 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 012
VIDEO MASK ONLY VISIBLE ON SCREEN
Video
signal present?
Yes
Replace coaxial
cable between
CCD Module and CCD
Video Board.
No
Disassemble optical
system/CCD module
assembly. Observe
video signal in
TP3/CCD Module.
Yes
Video
signal present?
No
Iris blocked in
closed position?
No
Check EHV Power Supply

connections.
No
Redo the
connections
Yes
Remove power from

Imageur.
Attempt to unlock Iris
by directly turning gears.
Check the smooth operation
of Iris mechanism.
Restore power to
Imageur chassis.
Check Iris adjustment
functions (R10/R11 on
CCD Interface Board).
Connections
OK?
No
Iris OK?
Yes
Yes
Replace EHV
Power Supply.
Replace
CCD/optical
system
assembly.
18-112
END
2 of 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.:
XRAY IMAGE OUT OF FOCUS
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
Remove rear cover from Imageur.
Place a Funk Type 23 Test Pattern or

equivalent on input window of II. Run
a wide open Fluoroscopy sequence at
Dose 1.
Go to Dose 2. Run a fluoro sequence

under same conditions.
Yes
Image sharper?
Readjust the focus.
See Job Card RG002
Para 5.2.2.
Yes
Image OK?
END
No
No
Check value of the +24 V on S1/CCD

Power Supply (+10/15%).
18-113
1 of 4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
LA 013
A
No
24 V OK?
Yes
Check 24 V power
supply on Stenoscop.
Check control voltage of II tube.

To do so use:
a. II tube Job Card,
b. Transformation formulas of Job
Card RG001 Section 5 and if
necessary,
c.
Focalisation optimization
adjustments of II tube (see Job
Card RG001 Section 5)
All voltages in
compliance?
No
Yes
Readjust voltages in
question.
Yes
OK after adjustments?
No
No
END
Unable
to readjust the voltage in
question? (It stays at 0
V for example.)
Yes
CAUTION:
On the 22 cm, Vg2 is adjusted
using R4 and R5.
On the 16 cm, Vg2
is adjusted using R7.
18-114
2 of 4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 013
3 of 4
Check ribbon cable

between CCD Interface
Board and EHV Power
Supply.
Disconnect the connector

from J2/CCD Interface.
No
No
Cable OK?
Still unable to
adjust the voltage?
Yes
Yes
Replace cable.
Check II tube high voltage

cable connectors.
No
High voltage cable

connectors OK?
Replace connectors or
redo cabling with the
faulty connectors.
Yes
Yes
No
OK ?
Disconnect the high voltage

connectors on the EHV
Power Supply, and measure
the output voltage of the EHV
Power Supply using the High
Voltage Measurement Unit.
END
No
Voltage OK?
Yes
Replace the EHV Power
Supply.
Replace the II tube.
18-115
Replace the CCD Interface

Board.
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 013
Blank page
18-116
4 of 4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
1 of 2
Version No.:
IMAGE IS PRESENT BUT UNSTABLE
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
Open Imageur
rear cover
Yes
No
Is DS1 red LED

lit or flashing?
Unstable Blowup.
High voltage arcing.

Disconnect high voltage connections
from II tube.
Red DS1/CCD Interface LED
stays lit or flashes. Noise characteristic
of arcing can be heard.
Check high voltage cable

connections of II tube on EHV
Power Supply.
No
Connections OK?
Correct the connections
Replace EHV Power Supply.
Yes
No
OK ?
END
Check stability of control

voltage of EHV Power Supply
on CCD Interface Board.
Replace
CCD Interface
Board.
Reconnect II tube and

carefully cable the connectors
No
Replace
II tube.
Voltage stable?
No
Yes
Yes
Replace
EHV Power
Supply.
18-117
OK ?
Yes
END
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

IMAGE IS PRESENT BUT UNSTABLE
LA 014
Blank page
18-118
2 of 2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
1 of 4
Version No.:
IMAGE TOO BRIGHT OR TOO DARK
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
Note: Before starting this

procedure, check that the
problem is not due to aging
of the image intensifier (see
sm, Job Card RG 007).
Yes
See LA016
Open rear cover of Imageur.
Generator goes to
maximum stop in
Auto Mode?
No
Check the video
adjustments using the
test signal (see Job Card
RG 004, Para 5.2.4).
OK?
No
Readjust.
Run a fluoro sequence in

Manual Mode with parameters
which give an acceptable image.
Switch between Dose 1 and Dose 2

to check the operation of Iris.
No
Iris switches?
(Video level changing)
Yes
Put CCD Interface Board on an

extension board. Check
Dose 1/ Dose 2 interface signal at
B9 of Connector J1.
Check gain adjustment of CCD

Module (see Job Card RG002,
Para. 5.2.4).
Note: To do this adjustment,
ensure that Iris opening
and parameters used allow
proper saturation of sensor.
18-119
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
No
LA 015
2 of 4
The signal switches

during Dose 1/Dose 2
change.
Adjustment OK?
Yes
No
Make compliant.
Check operation of
LEDs DS1 and DS2 on
CCD Interface Board:
Dose 1 Mode = DS2 lit,
Dose 2 Mode = DS3 lit.
Check interface
on Stenoscop unit.
Yes
Adjustments OK?
Yes
Yes
No
No
LEDs operated
OK?
Replace Compact
Optics/CCD Module
assembly.
Replace the CCD

Interface Board.
Yes
Check Iris connection cable
and connection at J3/CCD
Interface Board.
Check that Jumper X10/CCD
Interface Board is in W position.
No
Jumper,
cable and connections
OK?
Yes
Make the cable compliant.
Yes
END
OK?
Imageur
operates correctly?
No
18-120
Yes
END
No
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 015
3 of 4
Check dose adjustments

(see sm, Job Card RG 002
Para 5.2).
Disassemble Compact Optics

and CCD Module assembly.
No
Iris locked?
(with power supply
switched off)
Yes
Adjustments OK?
Yes
No
Make
compliant.
Attempt to unlock Iris by

directly manipulating gears.
Check for sticky areas and
correct operation of Iris.
OK ?
Check that aging of II

tube is not the problem (see SM
RG007).
No
OK ?
END
No
Yes
Check operation of Iris motor.
Disconnect connector at
J3/CCD Interface Board.
Send +5 V to motor terminals
(with both polarities).
END
Check CCD Video

Board
adjustments (see
Job Card RG004
Para. 5.2).
Yes
No
Adjustments OK?
No
Motor runs?
END
Replace the CCD
Video Board.
Replace Compact
Optics/CCD Module
assembly.
Yes
Replace the CCD

Interface Board.
18-121
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

LA 015
Blank page
18-122
4 of 4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.:
GENERATOR GOES TO MAXIMUM STOP IN

AUTOMATIC MODE
Date:
Time:
Personnel:
Remove rear cover of Imageur.
Place 2 mm of copper at xray

tube level. Run a fluoro sequence
in Automatic Mode.
No
Image present?
(glare)
Yes
See LA011
Display the ABD window by putting
X8/CCD Video Board in S position.
1
No
Mask displayed?
(50% of useful
Image.)
Yes
Check gain and offset
adjustments of ABD signal
using test signal (see Job
Card RG002, Para 5.2.4).
Yes
OK after
adjusting?
No
Replace the CCD
Video Board.
18-123
Yes
END
1 of 4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


AUTOMATIC MODE
LA 016
2 of 4
Image stays black.
Put CCD Video Board on extension

board. Check for presence of AGC WIND
signal from CCD Interface Board at A25
on J1/CCD Video Board.
(5V amplitude pulses).
Signal OK?
Yes
No
Replace the CCD Video Board.
Check configuration of
Jumper X7 on CCD Interface
Board (X7 must be on E).
Configuration
OK?
No
Put X7 on E
Yes
OK?
Yes
END
No
B
18-124
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


AUTOMATIC MODE
LA 016
3 of 4
B
No
Check for presence of
AGC WIND signal at 2 on
Switch X7.
No
Yes
Signal present?
Loose contact between

connector(s) and backpanel or,
Defective backpanel board.
Check ABD window

adjustments
on CCD Interface Board.
Ok after
adjustments?
No
Yes
END
Replace the CCD

Interface Board.
18-125
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


AUTOMATIC MODE
LA 016
Blank page
18-126
4 of 4
GE Medical Systems

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 5-i
REV 1
CHAPTER 5 SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATION
TITLE
PAGE
51
IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD 625 L 2123012 WIR REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
52
IMAGEUR 22 STENO CCD 625L 2111958 WIR REV. B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
53
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 60 HZ 2105603 SCH REV. A F 1/1 . . . . . . . 55
54
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 50 HZ 2105601 SCH REV. A F 1/1 . . . . . . . . 57
55
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 2105601 ADW REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
56
CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION 36003627 030 REV. B F 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
57
CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION 36003627 ADW REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
58
CARTE CCD INTERFACE 2120439 REV. A F 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
59
510
511
512
CCD INTERFACE BOARD 2120439 ADW REV. A F 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
513
CARTE VIDEO CCD 21036972 SCH REV. C F 1/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
CARTE VIDEO CCD 21036972 ADW REV. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
522
CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO 2120437 SCH REV. B F 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
523
CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO 2120437 SCH REV. B F 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
524
CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO 2120437 ADW REV. B F 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
18-127
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-128
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 51
IMAGEUR 16 STENO CCD 625 L
2123012 WIR REV. A
18-129
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
18-130
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 52
IMAGEUR 22 STENO CCD 625L
2111958 WIR REV. B
18-131
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 55
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD
2105601 ADW REV. A
18-132
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 53
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 60 Hz
2105603 SCH REV. A F 1/1
18-133
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 55
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD
2105601 ADW REV. A
18-134
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 54
CARTE MODULE ADAPTATION CCD 50 Hz
2105601 SCH REV. A F 1/1
18-135
GE Medical Systems

REV 1 Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page 5-13/14
ILLUSTRATION 57
CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION
36003627 ADW REV. A
18-136
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 56
CARTE CCD ALIMENTATION
36003627 030 REV. B F 1/1
J 1
5 V
T P 2
5 V
E D GE 6 2
5 V
T P 5
5
6 8
I + B
5 V
R 6
681
U2
l m3 1 1
7
V +
0 V
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A1 0
B1 0
A1 1
B1 1
A1 2
B1 2
A1 3
B1 3
A1 4
B1 4
A1 5
B1 5
A1 6
B1 6
A1 7
B1 7
A1 8
B1 8
A1 9
B1 9
A2 0
B2 0
A2 1
B2 1
A2 2
B2 2
A2 3
B2 3
A2 4
B2 4
A2 5
B2 5
A2 6
B2 6
0 V
O
V
3
1
U3
L M3 5 D
+ Vs
0 V
0 V
Vo u t
5 V
0 V
T P 1
P T 1
1
1 5 V
1
P S 1
24 T5 . 1 5K
C3
S E NS E _ + 5 V
47uF
2 35V
1uH
C 5
C 1
220uF
2 50V
R 2
3. 83K
Vi 1
Vi 2
0 V
0 V
0 V
0_15V
13
15V
12
CA S E
0 V
2 4 V
14
ON | OF F
R 1
4. 75K
0 V
+15V
0 V
L 3
0 V
2
3
100nF
50V
0 V
+ 1 5 V T P 3
1uH
0 V
0 V
L 4
0 V
1uH
D S 3
$5552303
GRE E N
2 mm
L 2
10
1
DS 1
$5552303
GRE E N
2 mm
1
C2
1uH
2
47uF
2 35V
R 3
2. 15K
2 AT _ 2 5 0 V
2 4 VI N
2
3
4
4
5
S E NS E _ 0 _ 5 V
+5V
+Vi 1
+Vi 2
0_5V
0 V
L 1
D S 2
$5552303
GRE E N
2 mm
11
2 4 V
0 V
GND
0 V
L S 1
T MB _ 0 5
R 5
4. 22K
F 1
5
0 V
0 V
S 1
1
D S 4
$5552303
GRE E N
2 mm
1
C4
47uF
2 35V
ON / OF F
1 5 V
T P 4
1
0 V
18-137
B2 7
A2 8
B2 8
A2 9
B2 9
A3 0
B3 0
A3 1
B3 1
0 V
2
R 4
2. 15K
A2 7
0 V
Ma l e
St r a i g h t
Ed g e
0 V
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 512
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW REV. A F 1/1
18-138
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 58
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 REV. A F 1/4
18-139
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 512
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW REV. A F 1/1
18-140
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 59
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 REV. A F 2/4
18-141
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 512
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW REV. A F 1/1
18-142
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 510
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 REV. A F 3/4
18-143
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 512
CCD INTERFACE BOARD
2120439 ADW REV. A F 1/1
18-144
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 511
CARTE CCD INTERFACE
2120439 REV. A F 4/4
18-145
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 521
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 ADW REV. A
18-146
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 513
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 1/8
+ 1 5 V
C6
R2 4 3
0 V
+ 1 5 V
C7
1 0 0 n F6 3 V
0 V
Q1 8
Q1
SO3 9 0 4
1
4. 7uH
27pF
63V
SS T 4 4 0
C1 2
R2 4 4
100nF
47nF
63V
T P 1 1
1
R2 6
R2 0 3
1K
R2 4 1
C1 5
150
100
R2 5
1 5 V
R2 4 0
R2 2
33
Q1 9
S ST 2 1 1
2
C1 1
4
S
1
150
R3 2
22
33pF
63V
0 V
+ 1 5 V
R3 6
150
C2 1
P OS T A GC1
R3 9
750
0 V
2
P OS T A GC2
4. 7uF 25V
C1 1 3
100nF
2K
VCC
5
O2 O
6
V + LT1223
7
A R2
220
33pF
63V
4. 7uF 25V
R3 1
O1
C2 0
R2 2 9
100
0 V
R2 0
220
1. 5uF
1
25V
I +
0 V
1. 5uF
2 25V
R3 4
3
C1 1 0
100nF 63V
R3 8
1K
V
2
L 2
4. 7uH
D E T V OL
4 8
Q2 1
3
0 V
4. 7uF 25V
C1 9
1 5 V
150
1
SO3 9 0 6
C1 6
1
C2 2
R3 7
0 V
2
1 5 V
1 5 V
1 5 V
S
1
V
4 8
R2 7
R2 2 2
100
C1 0
SU
1K
D
3
CL P 1 A
Q1 8
SS T 4 4 0
I +
R8
220
6
2
4. 7K
2K
2 2K
R2 2 3
A R1
LT1223
V +
6
O2 O
O1
5
1 5 V
R3 5
R2 2 7
2. 7K
+1 5 V
0 V
T P 1 2
2. 7K
4. 7uF 25V
R2 2 8
3K
Q2 0
SO3 9 0 4
R2 2 5
22
R2 2 4
+ 1 5 V
R2 3
33
63V
2
33
R2 4 6
2. 7K
+ 1 5 V
+1 5 V
C1 1 1
L 1
1
0 V
R2 2 6
100
+ 1 5 V
100
63V
1 5 V
U
0 V
1M
R2 3 2
R2 3 6
1K
B P G1 _
0 V
MA X
R3 0
1. 8K
1
R2 4 2
2K
Q3
S ST 1 1 2
10
C1 4
J 2
2
3
1 5
4
R2
200
200
2
1
100nF63V
C6 7
1
GRA P HI E
CL P 2 A
18-147
R1 4 3
2
3. 3K
C1 1 2
1. 5uF
0 V
47K
N ON
CAB L
CR1 9
$ BA R4 3
0 V
3
1 5 V
2. 2K
V T E S T
R1 4 5
10uF 16V
GA I NC ON T
Q1 5
S O3 9 0 4
R1 4 6
0 V
R2 3 5
100
25V
0 V
SS T 3 0 9
2. 2nF
63V
0 V
4. 7K
S COP I E
C1 1 5
1 5 V
0 V
C6 6
5. 6pF
63V
R1
R2 9
33K
Q2 2
R2 3 1
R1 4 4
100
CA L GA I N
I +
V
5 4
P RE A GC
R2 4 8
1K
R2 4 5
51
0 V
4. 7K
+1 5 V
R2 0 4
10
T P 2
0 V
A R1 1
7
l t 1012
V +
6
OO 2
O1
8
R2 3 0
DG4 1 9
0 V
4. 7uF
2 10V
1. 5uF 25V
R2 3 4
R2 8
100K
U1
C9
+ 1 5 V
R7
200
100
V I DEO
I N
1
GN
VL
C1 1 4
R2 3 3
GAI N
X 9
S1
3
5
0 V
V
V+
S2
7
4
R2 1
33
I N
1 5 V
C1
C1 1 6
8. 540pF
100V
33pF
63V
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 514
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 2/8
18-148
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 515
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 3/8
18-149
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 521
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 ADW REV. A
18-150
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 516
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 4/8
18-151
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 517
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 5/8
18-152
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 518
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 6/8
18-153
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 519
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 7/8
18-154
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 520
CARTE VIDEO CCD
21036972 SCH REV. C F 8/8
18-155
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 524
CARTE CCD INTERCO STENO
2120437 ADW REV. B F 1/1
18-156
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 522
2120437 SCH REV. B F 1/2
18-157
GE Medical Systems

ILLUSTRATION 523
2120437 SCH REV. B F 2/2
18-158
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 19 - ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
19-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000Job Card RG 10.a

Purpose:
KV CIRCUIT ( 3A12 R 216 ) DIAGRAM 23D

MEASURE WITH WISCONSIN CASSETTE.
Time: 2 H.
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
The use of Wisconsin test cassette is obligatory.
This measure device is small, constant and accurate.
This test cassette is also in current use by field servicemen.
Ref. WISCONSIN Xray test cassette. Model 101 or 015
Manufacturer:
RMI PO BOX 44 MIDDLETON
WISCONSIN 53562
A densitometer.
2 PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
Deenergize the mobile system.
3 PROCEDURE
The specification of the maximum voltage for the HF unit is 110 kV +/ 10% : this corresponds to a VHV
value between 99 and 121 kV.
In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that the
VHV is never higher than 114 kV.
Verify, with Wisconsin test, cassette that the VHV is between 104 and 114 kV : take into account the measure
ment error (relatively high) introduced by indirect measurement from the quality of the Xray radiation.
Use the calibration curve of the test cassette for triphase generator.
Use a densitometer.
If the measurements are not consistent, measure the voltage VD as follows :
Connect, to the ground (0 V of the PCB), pin 3 of 3A12 Op114.
Connect a digital voltmeter (10 ME input impedance) between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10.
Select DC mode.
Switch ON the unit.
Select MANUALFLUORO.
Select 110 kV 0.1 mA.
Initiate fluoro and note the value VD displayed on the voltmeter.
Remove the bridge between ground and Op114.3.
VD value must be between 52,5 and 55,5 volts.
If the results of the VD measure and Wisconsin test cassette are out of tolerances, the unit is faulty.
If the PCBs are correct, read just 3A12R216 in order to obtain 54,2 V. (VD).
With the Wisconsin test cassette, verify that the kV value is now within the tolerances.
See CHAP. 4 for TESTS CDRH compliance
19-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
19-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

STENOSCOP 2 Series 6000 and 9000Job Card RG 10.b

Purpose:
KV CIRCUIT ( 3A12 R 216 ) DIAGRAM 23D

MEASURE WITH KEITHLEY 35080
Time: 2 H.
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
Keithley 35080 kVp Divider, (or equivalent)
(32865C Filter Pack, 65 kV 135 kV)
Note : conversion factor for this pack : +.55V
Digital multimeter
Oscilloscope
Deenergize the mobile system
The specification of the maximum voltage for the H.F. Generator is 110 kV +/ 10%, 99 kV to 121 kV.
In order to reduce dielectric stress and increase reliability, it is the usual practice to make sure that 114 kV
is never exceeded! (Use Keithley to verify).
3 PROCEDURE
Temporarily place a jumper from 3A12 Op114 pin 3 to com.
Connect a DVM between 3A12PL1.7 and 3A12PL1.10 (5060 Vdc).
Turn unit on.
Select manual Fluoro, 110 kV, .1mA.
Initiate Fluoro and note voltage reading on DVM.
A value of 54.2 Vdc on the DVM should correspond to 110 kV on the Keithley, with a range of 52.5 Vdc to
55.5 Vdc.
Adjust 3A12 R216 to achieve if necessary
Remove jumper from Op114.
See chapter 4 for CDRH TESTING REQUIREMENTS
19-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

P
L1
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2
19-6
828 982 G015 / G025
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.: 00
TRAVEL SAFETY (3A19.R123 38B)
Date: May 1993

Time: 30 min.
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
Dual channel oscilloscope.
3 PROCEDURE
Connect an oscilloscope as follows:
Probe X10
Channel A
3A19.E125
Channel B
3A19.E172
Sweep
5 S/div, single shot
V/div
0.2 V/div
Trigger
channel A, DC external +
Energize the mobile system.
Select 40 kV, 0.1 mA, manual fluoro mode.
Adjust 3A19 R123 to obtain a delay of 30 S by commanding a fluoro operation.
19-7
1 of 1
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19-8
829 355 G035
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
FLUORO MA ADJUSTMENT 3A26.R9

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 81E
Time: 1 H.
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
DC milliammeter.
Extender cart
3 PROCEDURE
Remove the cover of the XRay head see sheet D/R 0
Remove the bridge at the divider PCB 6A1 and connect a DC milliammeter (10 mA full scale) to the current
measuring circuit.
CAUTION : CHECK CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
Position circuit 3A26 on the extender.
Connect the PCB ground to the ground of the card rack.
Select the fluoro manual mode.
Display 40 kV and 6 mA.
Initiate fluoro.
Adjust 3A26 R 9 so that 6,1 mA is read on the milliammeter (0.1 mA consumed in the HV divider).
Switch OFF the unit
Replace the bridge after adjustment.
Reinstall the cover of the XRay head.
See CHAP. 4 TESTS CDRH for compliance
19-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19-10
829 355 G035
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.: 00
FLUORO PREHEATING 3A26. R3

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 84D
Date: May 1993
Time: 30 min.
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
3 PROCEDURE
Probe X10
3A26.23A
Sweep
20 ms/div
V/div
20 mV/div
Trigger
external DC + to 3A26.24A
Ground
rack ground
Display 40 kV and 0.5 mA.
Fluoro mode (manual).
Command short fluoro sequences
Adjust 3A26.R3 to obtain a minimum rise time of the scope mA current.
The signal is triggered on the leading edge of the 85% kV signal. illustrations A, B and C.
Adjust until the correct signal is obtained (B).
See chap. 4 TESTS CDRH compliance
19-11
1 of 1
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
19-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
FLUORO TIMER DIAGRAM 103A
Date: May 1993

Time: 20 min.
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
3 PROCEDURE
Position the kVmA PCB 3A12 on the extender.
Connect the PCB ground to the ground of the board rack.
Probe X10
3A12.E3
Sweep
2 ms/divV/div
V / div
0.5 V/div
Trigger
Line
Ground
board rack ground
Apply voltage to the unit.
Select the Fluoro mode.
Display 40 kV 0.1 mA.
Initiate fluoro
Adjust 3A12.R217 to obtain a time T = 20 ms.
Reset Fluoro Timer 5 min.
Initiate a continuous sequence of Fluoro during 5 minutes and verify with the chronometer that the buzzer is
energised after 4 min 26 sec +/ 12 sec and that the XRay emission is stopped after 4 min 56 sec +/ 13
sec.
Readjust R217 if necessary and verify.
See chap. 4 TESTS CDRH compliance
19-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19-14
829 355 G035
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
RAD SAFETY FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 83D.
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Time: 15 min.
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
3 PROCEDURE
A : 7 SECONDS SAFETY
Remove 5A1.PL2 connector (PB PUISSANCE CHAUFFAGE).
Select the RAD mode.
Display 40 kV 160 mAs.
Adjust 3A26R7 so that the exposure is stopped after 7 +/ 0,2 seconds.
The adjustment is made by using the fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26.R7 so that
the exposure is stopped as soon as the number 7 appears.
Switch OFF the mobile
B : 11 SECONDS SAFETY
Switch 3A3.S133.B on ON position
Switch ON the unit
Select RAD mode, 40 kV, 160 mAs
Adjust 3A26.R8 so that the exposure is stopped after 11 +/ 0,5 seconds
The adjustment is performed by using the Fluoro timer display as reference and adjusting 3A26R8 so that
the
exposure is stopped as soon as the number 11 appears.
Switch OFF the unit
Switch 3A3.S133.B on OFF position
Connect 5A1.PL2 connector
19-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19-16
829 355 G035
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
RAD MA RAD PREHEATING 3A26.R4

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 84B
Time: 1 H. 30
1 of 2
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.
Check that the ground connections of the PWB are connected to the earth of the board rack.
3 PROCEDURE
Position 3A26 on extender boards.
Connect an oscilloscope to A26.a32
Vertical sensitivity
1 V/div.
External trigger
DC at 3A26.a31 (schematics 81D PRE signal)
Time basis
,20 ms/div.
Select radiography mode 100 kV 5 mAs.
Make a few exposures and adjust A26R4 to obtain a current of 20 mA (1V = 10mA) at the beginning
of the exposure. See oscillogram A to D.
NOTE : 20 mA Rad adjustment is performed with only 1 potentiometer and it is normal that tube current is too
low at the beginning of the exposure.
So, for 40 kV and 60 mA, the tube current at the beginning of the exposure is about 15 mA and reaches
60 mA after about 40 msec.
This situation is correct.
In all ways, kV and mA values are correct, only the time of the exposure is a bit longer but without
influence on the quality of the exposure.
19-17
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

PRECHAUFFAGE - PREHEATING
19-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 16
2 of 2
VERIFICATION OF TUBE CURRENT IN RAD MODE

Remove upper cover of XRay Head : see sheet D/R 03
Remove mA jumper on 6A1 and connect a milliamperemeter DC in current measure circuit : see RG 12
Caution : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT
kV
Current
40 kV
50 kV
60 kV
70 kV
80 kV
100 kV
60 +/ 3 mA
54,5 +/ 2,8 mA
47,2 +/ 2,4 mA
40,9 +/ 2,1 mA
32,2 +/ 1,7 mA
29,2 +/ 1,3 mA
NOTE : mA will be measured after tube current stabilisation

For US model :
. Switch 3A3 Sm133.B on ON position
. Perform the following measures :
40 kV
100 kV
35,3 +/ 1,8 mA
17,2 +/ 0,9 mA
. Switch 3A3.Sm133 A on OFF position

Remove 3A26 PB from the extender cart and reinstall it.
Remove the milliamperemetre DC and reinstall the jumper on 6A1.Tb24
See CHAP. 4 TESTS CDRH compliance
19-19
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19-20
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
RAD / FLUORO SWITCH CHECK.
Date: May 1993

Time: 20 min.
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
Dual channel oscilloscope 50 MHz.
Rad Preheating adjustment must be correct (see sheet RG 16)
3 PROCEDURE
The fluoroscopy/radiography switch must take place within a maximum of 1 second.
Check: connect an oscilloscope in differential mode to the terminals of 5A1CR5 (see diagram 90D) .
External trigger
DC + at A2636A
Sweep
0.5 sec/div
V/div
50 Vdc/div
Check that switches occur correctly in the Xray housing
Remove the cover and examine the focal spots.
Looking at the apparatus from in front of the control panel, fluoroscopy focal spot is on the left.
In fluoroscopy or radiography, only one focal spot must exist in stabilized conditions.
19-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19-22
829 355 G035
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
MAS INTEGRATORS 3A26.R5 3A26. R6

FILAMENT 4 DIAGRAM 82C
Time: 1 H.
1 of 1
Version No.: 00
Date: May 1993
Manpower: 1
1 TOOLS REQUIRED
mAs meter.
Wire grip.
3 PROCEDURE
Remove the Xray head upper cover. See sheet D/R 03.
Remove the bridge of divider circuit 6A1.
Insert an mAs meter into the current measuring circuit (adjustment of Fluoro output) on the divider PWB
6A1.
CAUTION : CHECK THE CONTINUITY OF THE CIRCUIT

Energize the unit.
Select RAD mode.
Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R5 (diagram 82C) to obtain a reading of 4 +/ 0,05 mAs
at the con
trol mAs meter.
Command a RAD exposure and adjust 3A26.R6 to obtain a reading of 80 +/ 0,05 mAs on the control
mAs meter.
Check the other positions of the mAs.
The tolerance on the mAs is 10% +/ 0.1 mAs over the entire range.
Disconnect the mAs meter from the measurement circuit and install the bridge on divider circuit 6A1 diviseur.
Replace the Xray head upper cover.
See CHAP. 4 for TESTS CDRH compliance
19-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

BA
P
L
1
BA
P
L
2
19-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
20-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
20-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: om 826 931 P735 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 and Series CCD, Rev. F, Page 1-1
1 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
11
111
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Mobile
Illustration 1
17
10
9
2
3
4
15
14
13
11
12
20-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

See Illustration 1 and Illustration 2 for reference.

1
Xray tube head with Xray tube and collimator.
Image receiver with image intensifier and CCD camera.
Patient protection (according to local regulations).
Locking for Carm orbital movement.
Locking for Carm rotation.
Locking for Carm longitudinal movement.
Locking for transverse movement (wigwag) of Carm support.
Carm maneuvering handle (removable, the handles are fitted and removed by pressing on the center of the
handle).
Steering handle.
10 Maneuvering handles.
11 Front castor.
12 Rear castors.
13 Brake pedal for mobile Carm support.
14 Xray control pedal with support and cable storage.
15 Xray control handle.
16 Control panel for mobile.
17 Infrared remote control support.
20-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Illustration 2
20
16
10
8
4
18
19
18 Connection cable between mobile and monitor support, cable holder.

19 Connector for IEC additional earth wire.
(Depending on local regulations).
20 Cassette holder (Option).
Fastened at the level of the input face of the image intensifier.
20-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
112

Monitor Support
5
4
6
7
14
13
3
8
2
9
10
1
11
11
12
Illustration 3
See Illustration 3 for reference.
1
Line power cord.
Accessory connector (Stand alone Option).
On/Off switch
Located on the rear face of the monitor support.
20-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
CAUTION

Having stopped the system, wait about 10 seconds before restarting to allow the
electronic circuits to stabilize.
Xray emission indicator.
Display monitor (1 or 2 depending on the configuration).
Infrared sensor for remote control.
Touch screen or alphanumeric keyboard (according to configuration).
Videocassette recorder SVHS (Option).
Film reprograph (Option).
10 Paper reprograph (Option).

11 Brakes.
12 Semidirectional castor.
13 Connector with Carm support.
14 External video connector (Only with DSM digital option).
15 Computer diskette drive (with the MDA digital option only).
20-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
12

DESCRIPTION OF C-ARM SUPPORT MOBILE COMMANDS
121
Positioning the Mobile
CAUTION
Check that the movements of the mobile can be carried out safely and that nothing
obstructs the required movements.
Direction lever for rear casters. (9, Illustration 1).

Illustration 4 DIRECTION LEVER

1
20-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Position 1: Forward/backward displacement.
Position 2: Lateral displacementtraveling.
Intermediate position 3: Diagonal displacement.
Carm support mobile brake pedal.

(13, Illustration 1).
Illustration 5 BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION A
POSITION B
Position A, pedal to the rear: In this position the brakes are locked.
Position B, pedal horizontal: In this position the brakes are released.
20-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
122

Positioning the C-Arm
See Illustration 1, Illustration 2 and Illustration 6 for reference.

CAUTION
Note:
Check that the movements of the Carm support can be carried out safely and that
nothing obstructs the required movements.
All the brakes are locked by pushing the levers forward (towards the Carm) and unlock by
pulling the levers backwards (towards the control panel).
Orbital Movement
D
Unlock the orbital movement brake (4, Illustration 1).
Slide the Carm to the required position. The removable handles can be used (8, Illustration 1).
Lock the orbital movement brake (4, Illustration 1).
Rotating the C-Arm

D
Unlock the Carm rotation brake (5, Illustration 1).
Turn the Carm to the required position.

CAUTION
If the C-Arm Support is in the low position, the Imageur cover can strike the base of the
Stenoscop during this movement.
Lock the Carm rotation brake (5, Illustration 1).
Vertical Movement
The motorized vertical movement is controlled from the control panel
D
To raise the Carm, press one of the keys (3, Illustration 6).
To lower the Carm, press one of the keys (4, Illustration 6).
20-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
CAUTION

If the Imageur is in the low position and the C-Arm is brought close to the Stenoscop
Console, the Imageur cover can strike the base of the Stenoscop during the movement.
Longitudinal Movement
D
Unlock the longitudinal movement brake (6, Illustration 2).
Move the Carm to the required position.
Lock the longitudinal movement brake (6, Illustration 2).

CAUTION
If the Imageur is in the low position, the Imageur cover can strike the base of the
Stenoscop during this movement.
Transverse Movement (Wig-wag)

D
Unlock the transverse movement brake (7, Illustration 1).
Move the Carm to the required position.
Lock the transverse movement brake (7, Illustration 1).
20-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
123
Console
Illustration 6 CONSOLE
Stenoscop
1
8
7
22
15
23
10
16
11
21
25
19
13
14
18
Triggering Xrays.
Note:
24
17
12
20
The Xrays can also be triggered using the handheld remote control (15, Illustration 1) or the
footswitch
Starts fluoroscopy or radiography depending on the mode chosen.
During Xray emission the buttons light up.
During Xray emission, the indicator lamp (4, Illustration 3) lights up.
Thermal overload Indicator.

Does not automatically interrupt Xray emission.
20-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Raise Carm command.
Lower Carm command.
Powerup indicator lamp.

The machine is on when the lamp is lit.
Stop mobile.
Can be used as an emergency stop.
Resets timer to 5 minutes.

D
The key flashes (with intermittent buzzer) after 4 min 30 sec fluoroscopy.
The timer stops the fluoroscopy after 5 minutes.
Xray exposure timer.

Counts the real Xray emission time in minutes and seconds up to 99 minutes.
Resets the counter.

Note:
When the machine is switched on, the counter is automatically reset.
10 Standard radiography film radiography.

11 Electronic radiography, single pulse fluoroscopy.
12 High resolution fluoroscopy.
13 Pulsed fluoroscopy.
14 Standard fluoroscopy.
15 kV display.
16 kV selection.
17 Fluoro mA display or rad mAs display.
18 mA or mAs selection.
20-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

19 Manual adjustment of mA and kV in fluoroscopy.

20 Image rotation on Monitor A.
21 Image rotation on Monitor B.
22 Choice of image intensifier field.
Select 16cm field on 22cm image intensifier
(On Stenoscop 9000 Series only).
23 Collimation by opaque shutters.
24 Collimation by semitransparent shutters.
25 Rotation of collimation shutters.
20-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
13
DESCRIPTION OF MONITOR SUPPORT COMMANDS
These commands depend on the digital option of the machine.

Note:
The MDA module with disk option can be used to store 200 to 5000 images, according to the options
installed.
The MD10 module without disk option can be used to store ten images.
The DR4 module can be used to store four images.
131
Cables and Connections

D
Line power cord (1).

The cable can be stored around its support at the back of the trolley when not used.
Stand alone connector (Option) (2).

Allows the monitor support trolley to be used on its own, without the mobile, to review the images in combination
with an archiving or videocassette recorder option (Only possible with MDA option).
On/Off switch (3).

Located on the rear face of the monitor support.
Connector to the Carm support (13).
20-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
132
Mechanical Movement Command

D
Brakes (11).
To lock the monitor support trolley, lock the brakes on the two front castors.
Note:
The brakes lock each castor independently.
Semidirectional castor (12).

For easy movement through the corridors, the rear left castor of the monitor support trolley is semidirectional.
It locks to facilitate straightline movement.
To unlock it, rotate the monitor support trolley.
Monitors (5)
They can be turned to suit the operator.
20-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
14
MDA DESCRIPTION
DANGER
141
1411
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION CHECK THAT AVAILABLE MEMORY IS

SUFFICIENT TO RECORD THE NUMBER OF IMAGES REQUIRED FOR THE
APPLICATION.
Display Screens
Monitor A

Displays the x-ray image or stored images. Displays patient information, system parameters, and measurements.
Illustration 7
20-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1412
Monitor B
Display of stored images and mini-images.

Illustration 8
Note:
The left-hand miniimage column corresponds to Monitor A. The right-hand column

corresponds to Monitor B.
The large image displayed on the monitors is the same as the small image displayed in the
miniimage locating square.
20-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
142
Control Screen
Allows control of acquisition and image processing parameters, management of patient files, printing, and system
configuration.
1421
User interface after Poweron: viewer function
Appears when power is applied, after initialization.
Illustration 9
11.10.1995
18 : 30
Viewer
MANIPULATION IMAGE
Geometry
Mesure
Patient
Data Base
Patient Info
Zone 1
Message Window
Zone 2
FHR
Edge
Window
Level
Reset
IMAGE
Image
Number
Acq/
Review
Inverse
Video
Annota
tions
Video
Aux.
A > B
Transfer
Screen
Compo.
VCR
STORAGE
Zone 3
Image
Number
SEQUENCE
Note:
System
Setup
Help
Auto
Save
VASCULAIRE
Sub
traction
Opacif.
Maximum
Road
Map
Print 1
Print 2
Screen Appearance:
Screen appearance changes according to system status, current function, options present, and
user interface appearance selections. The screens described here cover all the options
available with the MDA digital option.
20-19
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1422
D
Control Screen Description
Zone 1: Selection of Main Functions
Display Date and Time

Timer. (See para. 242).
Viewer
Image acquisition and handling. (See para. 243).
Patient Data Base

Management of patient and image database, and image transfer.
(See para. 244).
Patient Information
Entry of patient information. (See para. 245).
Help
Calls up the Help function. (See para. 246).
System Setup
Configuration of the system. (See para. 247).
Note:
Access a function by pressing the corresponding key.

To exit a function, press the function key again.
The system switches to the Viewer function.
You can return to the basic screen (Viewer) at any time by pressing <Viewer>.
If x-ray emission is triggered during a function, the system interrupts the function and switches
to Viewer.
Appearance of Keys:
Ready to be activated: black with white markings.
Activated: white with black markings (except the Viewer key).
Deactivated: gray with white markings.
20-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Zone 2: Selection of Active Monitor, and Help Message Display
The monitor selection keys are identical in appearance to the Zone 3 keys.
Zone 3: Action Keys of Functions
Appearance of Keys:
Ready to be activated: white with black markings.
Activated: gray with black markings.
Deactivated: black with white markings.
Note:
A key that calls up a control window contain a small triangle in the bottom right corner.
20-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
143
Viewer Control Screen
Note:
The system switches to this screen during x-ray emission.
Note:
Not all functions are active during x-ray emission.
1. Monitor A
If this key is selected, any action affects the image displayed on this screen.
2. Monitor B
If this key is selected, any actions affect the image displayed on this screen.
3. Geometry
Calls up Geometry submenu. (See para. 2431).
Note:
This is opened automatically during x-ray emission.
4. Measurements (Option)
Calls up Measurements submenu. (See para. 2432).
Note:
This is closed automatically during x-ray emission.
5. Reset
Returns image parameters (Contour, Inverse video, Orientation, Zoom, Rotation) to the values they had when
the image was saved. Returns the Light and Contrast values to an average value, and removes magnification
and borders.
6. Recursive Filter
Increases or decreases the recursive filtering value during x-ray emission.
Note:
Operates on dynamic images during x-ray emission only.
Note:
The higher the filter value, the greater the image noise reduction. On the other hand, motion
blurring increases.
Motion blurring can be reduced by adjusting the automatic movement detection parameter.
(See System Setup, para. 247).
20-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

7. Contour
Increases or decreases the edge enhancement value.
8. Light
Adjusts image brightness. Operates on stored images only.
Note:
To change the image during emission, adjust the kV and mA.
9. Contrast
Changes image contrast. Operates on stored images only.
Note:
To change the image during emission, adjust the kV and mA.
10. Inverse video

Inverts the image Black and White levels.
Note:
In this Mode, the light variation operates as follows:

When the light value displayed increases, the image darkens on the screen.
When the light value displayed decreases, the image brightens on the screen.
11. Annotations
Calls up the Annotations submenu. (See para. 2433).
12. Next/Prior Image
Displays the next or previous image.
Note:
The mini-image corresponding to the displayed image is displayed in the mini-image locating
square.
13. Finding an Image by Number

Displays a numeric keypad on which you can enter the number of the desired image. When you press the <OK>
key, the image appears on the monitor selected.
Note:
To cancel the numeric keypad, press the Image Number key again.
20-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14. Manual Recording of an Image

Stores the image displayed on Monitor A.
Note:
This function is active during x-ray emission.
15. Automatic Recording of Images

If this function is activated, the image frozen on Monitor A at the end of x-ray emission is automatically stored.
16. Automatic Image Transfer from Monitor A to Monitor B
Copies the image from Monitor A to Monitor B.
If this function is activated, the image frozen on Monitor A is automatically transferred to Monitor B before new
dynamic images are displayed during x-ray emission.
To inhibit this transfer, press the key again.
17. Dynamic Sequence Acquisition and Review (Option)
Calls up the sequence-control subwindow. (See para. 2434).
18. Selection of Next Sequence/Prior Sequence (Option)
Displays the first image of the previous or next sequence.
Displays the first mini-images of the sequence on Monitor B in the column corresponding to the selected monitor.
The first image of the sequence appears in the locating square.
19. Subtraction (Option) (See para. 2435).
20. Maximum Opacification (Option) (See para. 2436).
21. Road Mapping (Option) (See para. 2437).
22. Videocassette Recorder (Option) (See para. 2439).
23. Selection of Auxiliary Video Input
This function switches the system to the Auxiliary Video Input. If a video signal is present on this input, the resulting
image is displayed on Monitor B.
This image can be recorded using the videocassette recorder, or printed.
Note:
If the input signal has a color component, this component is transmitted to the videocassette
recorder to be recorded in color.
Image manipulations can be performed and saved.
20-24
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

24. Screen Composition (See para. 2438).

25. Printing an Image on Printer 1
Prints a copy of the selected screen on the reprograph connected to the Printer 1 output.
26. Printing an Image on Printer 2
Prints a copy of the selected screen on the reprograph connected to the Printer 2 output.
20-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
144
MDA Remote Control
Illustration 10 MDA MEMORY REMOTE CONTROL
1441
10
11
12
13
18
14
19
15
20
16
21
17
Precautions for Use
Do not use the remote control if several Stenoscop systems are present in the Examination Room.
If the remote control is out of use for a considerable time, remove the battery.
20-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Replace the battery with an equivalent long-life battery if the MDA system no longer responds correctly to remote
control commands.
CAUTION
Signals emitted by the remote control can interfere with the operation of other devices
which use an infrared remote control. In case of doubt, stop using the MDA system
remote control.
CAUTION
Signals emitted by remote control units for other equipment can interfere with MDA
system operation.
In case of doubt, deactivate the remote control unit.
1442
Note:
Description (see Illustration 10)

The active function of the remote control unit is displayed on Monitor A, to the left of the image
in the bottom third of the screen.
Subtraction
Calls up the Subtraction submenu
D
The Up/Right and Down/Left arrows are used to vary the Landscape function coefficient.
The Right arrow is used to activate and deactivate the subtraction function.
Max Op
Function equivalent to that of the Maximum Opacification key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9).
Road Map
Function equivalent to that of the Road Mapping key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9).
Image Inversion: Up/Down

Function equivalent to that of the
key in the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
20-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
A > B Transfer
Function equivalent to that of the <A > B> Transfer key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9),
Image Inversion: Right/Left

Rotation: Left
key of the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
A/B
Selects Monitors A and B in turn.
Note:
key in the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
The monitor selected is indicated by a vertical broken white line on either side of the displayed
image.
Rotation: Right
key of the Geometry function (see Illustration 18).
10 Edge
Allows you to adjust the edge enhancement.
D
Use the Up/Right and Down/Left arrows of the remote control after pressing this key.
11 Print
Function equivalent to that of the <Print 1> key in the Viewer menu
(see Illustration 9).
12 Recursive Filter
Allows you to adjust the level of noise reduction.
D
20-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

13 Image Selection
Displays the previous or next image.
D
14 Sequence Selection
Displays the previous or next sequence.
D
The right arrow key starts the review and speeds it up.
The left arrow key slows down the review speed.
15 Zoom
Allows you to change the enlargement factor and move the image on the screen.
D
Press the key once to change image size.

Press a second time to move the image on the screen.
Use the Up/Right and Down/Left arrows.
16 M Man
Function equivalent to that of the <Manual Recording> key in the Viewer menu (see Illustration 9).
17 Sequence Function
Calls up the Sequence submenu
D
The Up and Down arrows change the sequence acquisition or review speed.
The Right arrow key starts the review and increases its speed.
The Left arrow key slows down the review.
18 19 20 21 Direction Arrows
Allow you to change the parameters defined in the selected function.
20-29
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
15
MD10 DIGITAL
This digital option allows ten images to be stored in RAM.

Note:
The images are lost when the machine is switched off.
This digital option operates with an infrared remote control and/or a keyboard option.
DANGER
151
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION CHECK THAT AVAILABLE MEMORY IS

APPLICATION.
Display Screen
Screen A or B
Illustration 11
1511
Tuesday May 28 1996
Hospital
Note:
14 : 25 : 45
Patient
The annotations displayed can be changed using the remote control or keyboard option.
20-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
AB2031
152
MD10 Remote Control Functions
Illustration 12 MD10 memory remote control
10
12
11
13
16
15
14
17
1521
18
Precautions for Use
Do not use the remote control if several Stenoscop systems are present in the Examination Room.
If the remote control is out of use for a considerable time, remove the battery.
Replace the battery with an equivalent long-life battery if the MD10 system no longer responds correctly to remote
control commands.
CAUTION
which use an infrared remote control.
20-31
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
CAUTION
1522
1
Active on Monitor A or B depending on whether Key 10 or 11 is selected.
Recursive filter
D
Used to modify the recursive filter value: use the Up/Down arrow keys.
Note:
The active noise coefficient is displayed on the monitor.
Note:
The higher the weighting coefficient, the greater the noise reduction. On the other hand, the
motion blurring increases.
Note:
If noise reduction is modified without x-ray emission, the effect of the new value will not be seen
until the next x-ray emission sequence.
Reprography
Transfers the image from Monitor A to the reprograph.
D
Throughout the reprography sequence, the other functions are deactivated.
Note:
Edge Enhancement
D
Signals emitted by remote control units for other equipment can interfere with M10
system operation.
With the MD10 option, the print key on the reprograph cannot be used (a black image would be
printed).
Erase Memory Key

D
Press this key briefly to return the memory to the first stored image.
Press and hold this key to erase all the images memorized. The key must be pressed for two seconds to
confirm erasure. A double BEEP is emitted at the start and end of this action.
20-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Locking
Locks a memorized image to prevent its accidental erasure.
D
A number is assigned to the locked image to help locate it.
Unlocking
Unlocks a previously locked memorized image.
Two-Image Mode
Displays two images on one monitor. The left part of the image corresponds to Monitor A, and the right part
to Monitor B. Each image can be handled individually when selected using Keys 10 and 11.
The images displayed are halfimages, i.e., half of the image centered horizontally.
Not active during x-ray emission.
Used to display or delete the image information.

D
Functions independently on Monitors A and B.
An image is stored in memory during x-ray emission.

Note:
A double BEEP is emitted when the image is saved.
10 Selection of Monitor A
Once selected, it is possible to change the image displayed using Keys 12 through 15, to modify the image
orientation using Keys 17 and 18, to zoom using Key 16, and to carry out edge enhancement using Key 1.
11 Selection of Monitor B.
Once selected, it is possible to change the image displayed using Keys 12 through 15, to modify the image
orientation using Keys 17 and 18, to zoom using Key 16 , and to carry out edge enhancement using Key 1.
20-33
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
12 13 14
D
15 Arrow Keys
According to the key previously pressed, they are used to select the image to display on Monitor A or Monitor
B, to change the noise reduction coefficient, or to move the zoom window over the image.
16 Zoom
This function zooms the central area of the image by a factor of two. The zoomed image can be moved in the
screen by using the arrow keys (Keys 12 through 15).
D
Zoom cannot be used during x-ray emission.
Zoom is compatible with the Two-Image Mode.
The zoomed image can be reprographed and remains active for the current image until deselected.
To change the image displayed on screen during a zoom, press Key 10 or 11, then one of the arrow keys
(12 through 15).
17 Image Inversion: Up/Down

D
Compatible with the Two-Image Mode.
18 Image inversion: Right/Left.

D
Compatible with the Two-Image Mode.
20-34
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Keyboard Option
153
Illustration 13 MD10 MEMORY KEYBOARD

ESC
F1
!
1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
)
0
+
=
Q
CAPS
LOCK
SHIFT
CTRL
S
Z
D
X
F
C
G
V
H
B
J
N
O
K
:
;
L
<
,
{
[
>
.
?
/
PAGE PAGE
UP DOWN
DEL
}
]
ENTER
|
\
INS
ALT
The following keys on the Keyboard have the same functions as the corresponding keys on the Remote Control:
PF1:
Edge Enhancement (Key 1)
PF2:
Noise Reduction (Key 2)
PF3 :
Locking (Key 5)
PF4:
Unlocking (Key 6)
PF5:
Two-Image Mode (Key 7)
PF6:
Image Save (Key 9)
PF7:
Image Annotations (Key 8)
PF8:
Selection of Monitor A (Key 10)
PF9:
Selection of Monitor B (Key 11)
PF10:
Zoom (Key 16)
PF11:
Image Inversion: Up/Down (Key 17)
PF12:
Image Inversion: Right/Left (Key 18)
PAGE UP:
Reprography (Key 3)
Arrow keys: (Keys 12, 13, 14, 15)
20-35
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
16
DR4 DIGITAL
This digital option allows four images to be stored in RAM.

Note:
The images are lost when the machine is switched off.
This digital option operates with an infrared remote control.

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY OPERATION, CHECK THAT AVAILABLE MEMORY IS
APPLICATION.
DANGER
161
Display Monitor
1. Screen A or B
Note:
Monitor A displays three memory locations plus the temporary memory.

Monitor B displays the three memory locations only.
Illustration 14
20-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Note:
162
An empty memory location is represented by a small square.

An occupied memory location is represented by a large square.
DR4 Remote Control Function
Illustration 15 DR4 MEMORY REMOTE CONTROL
3
5
1621
7A
8A
11
10
12
Precautions for Use
Do not use the remote control if two or more Stenoscop systems are present in the Examination Room.
If the remote control will be out of use for a considerable time, remove the battery.
Replace the battery with an equivalent long-life battery if the DR4 system no longer responds correctly to remote
control commands.
CAUTION
which use an infrared remote control.
20-37
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
CAUTION
1622
1
Signals emitted by remote control units for other equipment can interfere with DR4
system operation.
Edge Enhancement
Operates on a stored image only.
Note:
This function applies a permanent change to the stored image. (Represented by a large white
square in the upper left-hand part of the screen.)
Pressing the key a second time applies the change to all images displayed.
(Represented by a large white square with a small dark square at its center in the upper left-hand
part of the screen.)
If the displayed image has not been processed in this way, the square in the upper left-hand part
of the screen is dark.
Recursive filter
Pressing this key changes the recursive filter value.
Note:
The higher the noise reduction coefficient, the greater the noise reduction. However, motion
blurring increases.
There are four possible values of this coefficient.
The selected coefficient is displayed briefly, and is indicated by four squares arranged in a
vertical line. The selected value is represented by a large square.
The minimum coefficient corresponds to the top square, and the maximum corresponds to the
lowest square.
If the noise reduction is changed without x-ray emission, the effect of the new value will not be
seen until the following x-ray emission.
20-38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Reprography
Transfers the image from Monitor A to the reprograph.
Throughout the reprography sequence, the other functions are deactivated.
With the DR4 option, the print key on the reprograph cannot be used (a black image would be printed).
Lock a Stored Image

Represented by a white square.
Note:
Pressing this key a second time for a previously locked image will cause this image to be
displayed at the end of x-ray emission (represented by a dark square at the center of a white
square).
Unlock a Locked Stored Image

Authorizes the replacement of this image if necessary at the end of x-ray emission.
Storage of Image in Memory during X-Ray Emission

Note:
A double BEEP indicates that the image has been saved.
and 7A: Stored Image Search and Display on Monitor A

This function finds a previously stored image and displays it on Monitor A.
and 8A: Stored Image Search and Display on Monitor B

This function finds a previously stored image and displays it on Monitor B.
Image Inversion: Up/Down on Monitor A.
10 Image Inversion: Right/Left on Monitor A.

11 Image Inversion: Up/Down on Monitor B.
12 Image Inversion: Right/Left on Monitor B.
20-39
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
17
171
PRINTER AND VIDEO

Film Printer (Option)
The reprograph is available in Full Format, 2-Image, or 4-Image versions, and uses 8 x 10 monolayer films. The
reprograph is used to obtain a hard copy of screen A on film.
The reprography command can be carried out from the memory keyboard (on MDA and MD10 only), the printer
keyboard (not active with DR4 or MD10), or from the infrared remote control.
D
I/O: On/Off.
The film reprograph must be warmed up for about one minute.
CAUTION
EXP: Film exposure.

The system automatically prevents double exposure.
Note:
This key must not be used with the digital options DR4 and MD10, since a black image will be
obtained.
POS/NEG: The picture can be made on black (POS) or white background (NEG).
1/2/3/4: Preadjustment.
Allows four different users to have customized photographic settings.
RESET: Calibration.
This procedure is automatic after introducing a new cassette
PROGRAM: Used to see the selected menus.

The display window indicates FMT and a cursor is placed in the display window, beside the function to be modified.
Note:
Refer to the reprograph instruction manual for more information.
FORMAT: Choice of print format.

Depends on the type of reprograph purchased.
This function is used to choose between modes 1 and 4 images for the 4/1 reprograph.
20-40
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Display window.
This window displays the operator choices and the error messages.
Note:
172
Loading and removing a cassette
Insert the cassette gently into the slot until a click is heard.
Remove the protection plate which is the furthest inside, and put it back after exposure.
To remove the cassette, push it slightly to the left and pull.
173
Paper Printer (Option)
This option is used to obtain a copy of the image displayed on Monitor A.

Note:
The print key on the reprograph must not be used with the digital options DR4 and MD10 since
it will print a black image.
Note:
20-41
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
174
Videocassette Recorder (Option)
It is recommended to use only type SVHS cassettes.

Note:
This option can only be used with the digital MDA option.
CAUTION
Recording is automatically triggered during x-ray emission by default. To prevent

recording during the x-ray emission, eject the cassette or switch off the videocassette
recorder (VCR), or disable the Auto Record option. (See para. 2439).
If the recording begins at the start of x-ray emission but does not stop afterwards, the
videocassette recorder is probably badly programmed.
Refer to the videocassette recorder instructions.
If the fault remains, consult AfterSales Service.
20-42
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 21 - OM PRACTICAL USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
21-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

2 PRACTICAL USE
21
TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION
211
Transport
CAUTION
The mobile unit weighs about 250 kg, and the monitor support about 190 kg. Not
respecting the precautions during displacement could cause the apparatus to strange
out of control and cause injury to the operator and other persons.
Always:
D
Check for obstacles in your path.
Move the apparatus slowly.
Use at least two people when moving over sloping floors.
To move the mobile from one place to another, proceed as follows:

1. Put the C-arm in its lowest position (do this before switching off the mobile).
2. Switch off (before unplugging the cables).
3. Unplug the monitor support ac supply cable and wind it around its support (1, Illustration 3).
4. Unplug the mobile from the monitor support and store the connecting cable on the cable support (18, Illustration
2).
5. Store the x-ray control pedal and its cable
6. Store the handheld x-ray command (15, Illustration 1).
7. Put the X axis vertical, intensifier up, and lock the orbital movement brake and the Carm rotation brake.
8. Center the wigwag movement and lock the brake.
9. Bring the Carm as far as possible towards the console and lock the brake.
21-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Connections and Switching On
212
2121
Note:
Connections
Warmingup time.
When the system is switched on, a minimum of 12 seconds is required for the machine to selftest and become
operational. During this period, x-ray emission is not possible.
The monitors also require a warmup period of about 1 minute before the image is fully stabilized.
The film reprograph (Option) requires warmingup for about 1 minute, during which reprography is prohibited. A
BEEP is emitted when the device is ready.
Generally, a warmingup period of 15 minutes is recommended for optimum system performance. If possible,
therefore, switch on 15 minutes before taking the first image.
1. Insert the rectangular connector of the connection cable (18, Illustration 2) in the socket located on the rear face
of the monitor support (13, Illustration 3).
D
The cable output must be directed towards the ground.
IMPORTANT: Screw the red wheel clockwise as far as possible (about 7 turns). The connector could suffer
excessive wear if the wheel is not fully turned home.
CAUTION
The monitor support trolleys for Stenoscop series 6000 and 9000 are not
interchangeable with other Stenoscop models. If, however, two monitor supports
should be accidentally exchanged (on a site where there are one or more machines of
the same type), no damage would result; it would simply be impossible to use the
equipment.
2. Plug the power cable for the monitor support into the mains (1, Illustration 3).
21-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
CAUTION

Check that the socket is compatible with the current required to power the Stenoscop.
Respect the voltage and the frequency that the unit is intended for. If in doubt, contact
the AfterSales Service.
3. Power up the unit on with the switch (3, Illustration 3).

D
If green indicator lamp is on (5, Illustration 6) the device is powered.
4. Extra ground wire (IEC) (19, Illustration 2).

D
This conductor must be connected between the systems additional protective ground terminal and an
external protective system.
2122
Positioning the Carm
DANGER
DANGER: AVOID ALL CONTACT BETWEEN A PATIENT AND THE X-RAY TUBE HEAD.
THE TUBE HEAD TEMPERATURE CAN REACH ALMOST 60C IN SOME PLACES.
Once the mobile is in position, it is recommended to lock the brakes if later movement is unlikely during the
examination.
1. Position the mobile close to the operating table according to needs using the steering handle (9, Illustration 1)
and the maneuvering handles
2. Raise the Carm to the required position.
3. Pivot the Carm to the required position.
2123
Sterile drapes
The internal part of the Carm, the x-ray tube head and the image intensifier can be covered with sterile drapes which
are attached using spring clips.
2124
Cassette holder (Option)
If during the examination a radiography is planned, fasten the cassette holder beforehand on the intensifier (20,
Illustration 2).
Note:
The cassette holder can be attached directly onto the intensifier beforehand, or onto the sterile
drapes.
21-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
22

IMAGE GENERATION: X-RAY EMISSION
CAUTION
During the examination, the operators must wear lead protective gloves and aprons
and keep as much as possible behind a lead glass protective screen.
Overview
221
2211
Triggering X-Rays
Triggering x-rays can be done in three different ways:

D
By pressing on the x-ray control pedal (14, Illustration 1).
By pressing on the x-ray hand switch (15, Illustration 1).
By pressing one of the two x-ray control buttons on the mobile panel (1, Illustration 6).
Release of the x-ray control immediately interrupts x-ray emission in continuous fluoro when the equipment
is configured to comply with CDRH (USA) requirements.
Release of the x-ray control does not immediately interrupt x-ray emission in continuous fluoro when the
equipment is not configured to comply with CDRH (USA) requirements. X-ray emission is maintained for the
period of time necessary to obtain a good quality image.
In Pulsed Fluoro and Electronic Rad Modes, x-ray emission is maintained after release for the period of time
necessary to obtain a good quality image.
The lamp above the monitors comes on to indicate x-ray emission and an audible signal is emitted during the
radiography.
CAUTION
During the x-ray emission command, image display returns to nominal mode (direct
image and full field).
21-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

x-ray emission is prohibited:

CAUTION
During the system initialization phase.
During a reprography.
Since image acquisition is a priority task, some keys will be inactive.
CAUTION
However, if the system is in the process of saving images when xray emission is
commanded, the command will not be carried out until the image save is complete.
2212
Emergency stop
If there is a problem, or to stop the apparatus, press on the emergency stop button (6, Illustration 6) to cut the
power.
The On/Off switch on the monitor support trolley can also be used as an emergency stop (3, Illustration 3).
21-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
2213
D

Dose Control
General principle.
Since x-rays are a form of ionizing radiation it is recommended to try to limit their emission as much as possible,
and to reduce as much as possible their power during use. The Stenoscop is fitted with a regulation system that,
in automatic mode, permanently controls the x-ray dose emitted and limits it to 5 Roentgen per minute in normal
fluoroscopy and to 10 Roentgen per minute in high resolution fluoroscopy.
In order to further reduce the emitted dose it is recommended to follow the advice given below:
Use the collimation shutters to limit the zone of interest and reduce the x-ray flux as much as possible.
Work in pulsed fluoroscopy as much as possible.
During pediatrics examinations, use manual mode and reduce the mA to minimum (0.1 mA) and control the
image quality with the kV (85 kV for example).
Work in manual at kV values greater than 60 kV so as to reduce x-ray absorption by the patient and reduce
the diffused Xradiation.
Dose measurement (Option).

This option is used to measure in mGy x cm2 the Xradiation emitted during an examination. Some regulations
require this value to be recorded with the patients file. For further information about this option, refer to Chapter 5.
21-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
2214

Control Timer
The Stenoscop is fitted with an x-ray emission control timer to provide a permanent check on the elapsed x-ray
emission time.
D
Fluoroscopy counter to 5 minutes.
The timer incorporated in the Stenoscop counts the total x-ray emission time.
Reset the timer to zero after a fluoroscopy of 5 minutes

(Key 7, Illustration 6).
An indicator lamp flashes and a buzzer sounds to warn you about 30 seconds before the end of this period.
Fluoroscopy is interrupted after 5 minutes if the counter has not been reset.
Total emission time.
The total radiation duration is permanently displayed (8, Illustration 6).
It can be reset to zero (Key 9, Illustration 6).
2215
Thermal Security
A red indicator lamp (2, Illustration 6) symbolizing a thermometer flashes when the maximum thermal capacity of the
source is about to be reached.
Fluoroscopy in reduced dose is still allowed until the x-ray tube head maximum dilatation safety device is activated.
At this point x-ray emission is no longer possible and the tube must be allowed to cool sufficiently before restarting
x-ray emission.
21-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
2216

Beam Limiter
Two pairs of shutters, separately controlled, are fitted to the collimator.

One pair is semitransparent.
The shutters can be used in radiography and in fluoroscopy.
D
In fluoroscopy mode.
The field covered is limited to match the image intensifier format.
In radiography mode.
The field covered is limited to a circle of 30 cm or 9.5 (depending on local regulations).
CAUTION
On 16cm field.
On passing from fluoroscopy to radiography, the field size covered in fluoroscopy is maintained
and the keys open diaphragms flash to warn the operator.
By pressing these controls the shutters open immediately to full cassette format and the open
diaphragms keys light up permanently.
On 22cm field.
On passing from fluoroscopy to radiography, the field size covered in fluoroscopy is maintained
and the keys open diaphragms flash to warn the operator.
To obtain full cassette format keep pressing on the open diaphragm controls until maximum
opening, intermediate positions being authorized.
Maximum opening is indicated by the 2 open diaphragm keys lighting up permanently.
2217
Image Quality: Distortion
CAUTION
The technology used in the image intensifier tubes makes them sensitive to the earths
magnetic field. It is therefore possible that in some positions a rectangular object
appears slightly curved.
21-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
2218

Monitors
The Stenoscop uses high resolution Flicker Free monitors to give the operator optimal visual comfort. An ambient
lightning sensor automatically adjusts image brightness according to the lighting of the work environment.
The monitors can be oriented towards the operator.
D
Image rotation.
Image rotation is done from the Carm support mobile panel
(20 and 21 Illustration 6).
Rotation is 170 with respect to the middle position with the DR4 and MD10 options, and continuous with the
MDA option.
Note:
To assist positioning, rotation stops temporarily at the middle position during rotation with the
DR4 and MD10 options.
Image orientation.
Image orientation can vary depending on the position of the Carm around the patient and on the position of the
image amplifier.
The reference position was defined on the Stenoscop as being: Carm support on the left of the patient and image
amplifier tube under the table.
In this position, the image appears oriented normally on the monitor.
If another position of the Carm or of the tube is used, the image appears inverted or reversed. It can then be
reoriented using the image orientation inversion keys.
21-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Radiography Mode
222
2221
Overview
The Stenoscop can record an x-ray image on radiographic film. To do this, the system requires the cassette holder
option.
WHENEVER THE MACHINE IS USED IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE, THE OPERATOR MUST
CHECK THAT:
DANGER
D
The cassette holder is correctly attached.
A film suitable for the application is in the cassette.
The cassette is suitable for the application and is placed in the cassette holder before taking the x-ray.
2222
Preparation for Taking an Image
1. Place the cassette holder on the front face of the image intensifier (with or without grid).
2. Put the cassette with film into the cassette holder, making sure it is correctly oriented (20, Illustration 2).
3. Choose the radiography mode on the control panel (Key 10, Illustration 6).
The mAs indicator lights up.
D
Choose the kV with keys 16 on the control panel (Illustration 6).
Choose the mAs with keys 18 on the control panel (Illustration 6).
Open the collimator fully by keeping buttons 23 and 24 pressed until the flashing stops (Illustration 6).
Note:
If required, the radiography can be carried out with reduced open field.
Lack of collimator opening does not prevent taking an image.
CAUTION
21-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
2223

Taking an Image
1. Press on an x-ray command (control panel keys, pedal, handle).

2. Keep pressing until the end of the exposure is signaled with the indicator lamp 1 going out.
Note:
If pressure is released before the end of the exposure, exposure is immediately stopped.
21-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
223
Single Image Mode: Electronic Radiography

2231
Overview
This mode is used to record a single image.

2232
Automatic Mode
Choose the electronic radiography mode on the control panel (key 11), kV and mA adjustment is done automatically if
key 19 is unlit.
In automatic mode keys 16 and 18 of the control panel are inactive.
D
Standard resolution.
This mode is selected by default on power up.
High Resolution.
Select this mode by pressing key 12 on the control panel.
2233
D
To select manual mode, press key 19 on the control panel.

Key 19 lit:
Manual choice of kV/mA.
Key 19 unlit:
Automatic choice of kV/mA.
Note:
Manual Mode
The last kV and mA of automatic fluoroscopy are kept in manual fluoroscopy when changing
from automatic mode to manual mode.
Adjust the mA and kV according to the type of examination by using keys 16 and 18 on the control panel.
21-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
224
Continuous fluoroscopy

2241
Overview

If necessary:
D
Diaphragm the image with the collimation shutters (keys 23 and 24).
Press the image inversion keys.
Turn the monitors (keys 20 and 21).

Note:
2242
Rotation can be made on either monitor.
Automatic Mode
The system is in automatic mode if key 19 is unlit.

In automatic mode keys 16 and 18 of the control panel are inactive.
The kV and mA are automatically chosen to provide optimum image quality. The selected values are permanently
displayed and the last parameters used are memorized and stay displayed when x-ray emission stops.
When x-ray emission stops the last image is frozen on screen A.
D
Standard Resolution.
High Resolution.
DANGER
WHILE USING CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PERFORM

PULSEDLIKE ACQUISITION BY DOING REPEATED SHORT PULSES WITH THE
FLUORO CONTROL.
AS THIS COULD OVER STRESS THE UNIT, THE SYSTEM MAY STOP AND IT WILL BE
NECESSARY TO RESTART IT.
PULSED IMAGES SHALL ONLY BE ACQUIRED BY USING APPROPRIATE MODE :
ELECTRONIC RADIOGRAPHY OR PULSED FLUOROSCOPY.
21-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2243
Manual Mode
CAUTION
D
In manual mode the cameras automatic gain control is not active. Manual mode can
therefore not be used for examination of a region offering high x-ray attenuation.
To select manual mode, press key 19 of the control panel.

Key 19 lit:
Manual choice of kV/mA.
Key 19 unlit:
Automatic choice of kV/mA.
Note:
The last kV and mA of automatic fluoroscopy are kept in manual fluoroscopy when changing
from automatic mode to manual mode.
Adjust the mA and kV according to the type of examination by using keys 16 and 18 of the control panel.
Trigger the x-rays and adjust the mA and kV if necessary.

Note:
To return to automatic intensity control, press again on the manual selection button (19).
21-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
225
Pulsed Fluoroscopy

2251
Overview
Operation in this mode is identical to that of continuous fluoroscopy mode.

The difference with this mode is that the x-ray emission is pulsed, which reduces the emitted x-ray dose and permits
prolonged use since tube heating is reduced.
D
Select the pulsed fluoroscopy mode by pressing on key 13.

Note:
Pulsed fluoroscopy can be used in standard or high resolution mode, and in automatic or
manual mode.
Operation is identical to that of continuous fluoroscopy mode.
21-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
23
231
STORAGE AND IMAGE MANIPULATION

Overview
Memorization and manipulation of images depends on the systems digital option. The table at the end of Chapter
4 shows the available functions with these different options.
24
241
PRACTICAL USE OF MDA

Switch-On, Starting up the System
The MDA option has been designed to display, in emergency, x-ray images from start-up even if system boot is not
completed.
D
Operating Mode.
Following system switch-on, the following pattern is displayed on Monitors A and B.
Illustration 16
21-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
You can now display x-ray images by using the x-ray exposure controls. If exposure is stopped, the image is frozen
on Monitor A.
Note:
This image can be reprographed by using the Print button located on the front panel of the
desired printer.
CAUTION
242
This image cannot be saved in the system memory before the memory boot has
completed.
Timer Function
Calling up the Timer

Press the key displaying the date and time in the viewer menu.
(See Illustration 9)
To display the control window.
1. Control Window
Illustration 17
TIMER
12:45:23
CLEAR
Start/
Stop
2. Method of Operation
D
To start the timer, press <Start/Stop>.
To stop the timer, press <Start/Stop> again.
To reset the display, press <Clear>.
Closing the timer

To close the timer window, press the key displaying the date and time again.
Note:
This action automatically stops the timer function.
21-19
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Imaging Function
243
2431
D
Geometry
Geometry Window
Press the Geometry key in the Viewer Menu to display the control window (see Illustration 9).
Illustration 18
Black
Borders
Image
Move
Rotation
Zoom
Orient.
Overview
Handles dynamic or stored images.
Image Belonging to a Sequence

Changes performed on this image are automatically applied to all images in the sequence.
Note:
D
Enlarge
If an image of the same sequence is displayed on the other monitor, it is changed accordingly,
except concerning the zoom function.
Image Rotation
Rotates the displayed image to the right or left.
Note:
This function remains in effect for the image concerned, and images in the same sequence,
even if the sequence is no longer displayed.
21-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Image Orientation
Displays the image according to the displayed anatomy.
Note:
This function remains in effect for the image concerned, and images in the same sequence,
even if the sequence is no longer displayed.
Zoom
Enlarges the image.
Note:
Zoom is not active during x-ray emission. However, if the last acquired image was zoomed, the
zoom factor will be reapplied to the displayed xray image when xray emission stops. To
suppress this zoom, press <Reset> on the Viewer screen (Illustration 9).
Enlargement
Varies from 1 through 8.
Note:
The resulting image is interpolated.

Zoom remains active for the image concerned as long as it is displayed, and the images in the
same sequence, even if that sequence is not displayed.
The enlarged image can be printed.
Enlarge
Enlarges a position of the displayed image by a factor of 2.
Press this key to display the enlarge positioning window.
21-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Illustration 19
CLEAR
OK
Press on the region corresponding to the part of the image you wish to enlarge.
Note:
The enlarged portion of the image in not displayed interpolated.
To deactivate magnification, press <Clear>.
To exit this function, press <OK>.
Note:
This function is not active during x-ray emission.

The image can be printed as it appears on the screen.
Black Borders
Surrounds the visible region of the image with black borders.
Note:
This function is not active during x-ray emission.

Use the collimator blades to limit the field visible during x-ray emission.
21-22
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Use of Black Borders

G
Note:
A control window appears, allowing borders to be opened or closed.

This function is active on Monitor A only.
Illustration 20
CLEAR
OK
Borders close or open two by two (Up/Down, Right/Left). To close Black Borders, use the Up/Right
arrows. To open, use the Down/Left arrows.
When the desired result has been obtained, press <OK>.
Note:
The Black Borders remain active for all the images of the same patient.
<Clear> deletes the black borders.
Note:
Black borders are deleted when the measurement functions are called up.
21-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Moving the Image

A control window appears, allowing the image to be moved.
Illustration 21
CLEAR
OK
Moving the Image

Use the direction arrows, and press <OK>.
Use the direction arrows, and press <OK>.
Note:
This function is not active during x-ray emission. However, if the last acquired image was
moved, this displacement will be reapplied to the displayed xray image when xray emission
stops. To suppress displacement, press <Reset> on the Viewer screen (Illustration 9).
<Clear> positions the center of the image at the center of the screen.
The change of position remains active for the image concerned and for all images in the same
sequence even if that sequence is not displayed.
21-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2432
D
Measurement
Measurement Window
Press <Measure> on the Viewer Menu to display this window
(see Illustration 9 for reference).
Illustration 22
Stenosis
Angle
Calibration Distance
Erase
Overview:
CAUTION
CAUTION
Ellipse
Measurements performed using MDA must not be used in diagnosis, but for research
purposes only.
The accuracy of measurements performed on x-ray images may be subject to error by
as much as 50% or more, because an x-ray image is a twodimensional representation of a three-dimensional volume, and not an anatomical
section.
Calibration
Allows the image to be calibrated with respect to a displayed object of known dimensions.
Definition of calibration segment:

G
Place the first X at one end of the reference object by moving a finger on the positioning block, then press
<SET>.
Place the second X at the other end of the reference object.

The value of this segment in pixels appears in the message window.
21-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
G
Note:
Enter the actual value of the calibration segment in mm.
Press <OK>. The calibration takes effect.

The calibration applies to the displayed image and to all images in the same sequence.
Recalibration
Calibration can be repeated.
Note:
D
The first point can be changed before pressing <OK>, by pressing <SET>.
Pressing <SET> allows each end of the measured segment to be changed in turn.
Definition of Calibration Value

When both ends of the calibration segment have been confirmed, an alphanumeric keyboard appears on the
user interface screen.
Note:
To confirm this calibration segment, press <OK>.
The last calibration performed becomes the active calibration.
Distance Measurement
Note:
Two different segments can be measured.

Results appear in Fields D1 and D2 on Monitor A.
If more than two measurements are performed, the oldest measurement is deleted.
Place the first X at one end of the segment to be measured, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
Place the second X at the other end.
Press <OK>. If calibration has been performed, the measurement result appears in mm or, if not, in pixels.
Note:
The first point can be changed before pressing <OK>, by pressing <SET>.
Pressing <SET> allows each end of the measured segment to be changed in turn.
21-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Percentage, Stenosis Measurement

Measures a ratio between two distances.
Perform two distance measurements.
Note:
Press <Stenosis>.
G
Calibration is not required before a percentage measurement.
The resulting ratio between the smaller and larger distance appears on Monitor A, expressed in %.
Angle Measurement
Measures an angle on the image. The result is given in degrees.
Note:
Calibration is not required before an angle measurement.
Note:
Two different angles can be measured. The results appear in Fields A1 and A2 on Monitor A.
If more than two measurements are performed, the oldest measurement is deleted.
Place the X on the screen at one end of the angle, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
Place the second X at the vertex of the angle, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
Place the third X at the other end of the angle, and press <OK>.
Note:
The points of the angle can be changed by pressing <SET> before pressing <OK>.
21-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Marker
Used to display on the screen a flag line that remains displayed for the duration of x-ray emission.
Place the first X at one end of the flag, and confirm by pressing <SET>.
Place the second X at the other end of the flag, and confirm by pressing <OK>.
Note:
The first point can be changed by pressing <SET> before pressing <OK>.
To remove the flag, open the Flag subwindow and press <CLEAR>.
Erase
Erases the measurements and all results.
Note:
This action does not erase the marker.
21-28
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2433
D
Annotations
Annotation Window
Press <Annotations> in the Viewer Menu to display this window
(see Illustration 9 for reference).
Illustration 23
Library 1
Library 2
Library 3
Library 4
Library 5
Keyboard
CLEAR
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Word
Delete
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Add
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Library
Name
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Valid
SEQ.
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Comments
Valid
IMAGE
Overview
Creates annotations on the image.
Creating Annotations
You can use words already stored in libraries, or enter text.
Libraries
Five dictionaries of 30 medical terms are available. To open the desired dictionary, press the corresponding
key.
Note:
All terms can be changed by the user.
Use of a Pre-Programmed Text

Press the corresponding key.
Corrections
<Word Delete> deletes the last word.
21-29
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Allows free text to be entered.
Illustration 24
Library 1
Library 2
!
1
Tab
W
A
LOCK
SHIFT
#
3
Library 3
E
S
D
X
b
6
$
5
Library 4
T
F
&
7
Y
G
Library 5
%
8
U
H
N
I
J
(
9
)
0
O
K
Keyboard
<
,
Comment
Delete.
Word
Delete
P
:
;
L
>
.
~
O
SHIFT
+
=
Add
Library
Name
Valid
SEQ.
Valid
IMAGE
Lowercase Characters
To enter a lowercase character or lower character shown on a key, press the corresponding key.
Uppercase Characters
To enter an uppercase character or upper character shown on a key, press <Shift> and the corresponding
key.
To enter a string of uppercase characters, press <Lock>.
To deactivate this function, press <Lock> again.
Note:
G
The keyboard is locked in uppercase characters by default.

Accented Characters
To create an accented character, press the desired accent followed by the character. If the accented
character is known to the system, it will be displayed.
21-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Corrections
deletes the last character.

<Word Delete> deletes the last word.
Confirm Annotations
G
<Valid IMAGE> confirms the annotation for the displayed image. The annotation appears on the display
screen.
<Valid SEQ.> confirms the annotation for all images in a sequence. The comment appears on the display
screen.
Positioning of Annotations on Screen

The text appears on the image. A control window allows it to be moved.
Positioning of Annotations
Place the annotation at the desired location on the screen by sliding your finger on the positioning block.
CAUTION
The MDA system uses an automatic contrast process that ensures the annotation text
is visible whatever the background color of the image. In some exceptional cases,
however, annotation text may be difficult to read in areas of the screen. We recommend
that you move such text to more suitable areas of the screen.
Press <OK> to confirm this position.
Placing an Annotation with addition of an arrow.

1. Create the text, and confirm.
2. Place the text in the desired location.
3. Press <SET>.
This draws an arrow from the text to the center of the image.
4. Move the tip of the arrow using the positioning block.
5. Press <OK>.
21-31
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Note:
Pressing <SET> allows the text and the arrow to be moved in turn.
Erasure of Annotations
Open the Annotations screen, and press the <Clear> key twice.
Note:
The text and arrow can be moved before <OK> is pressed by pressing <SET> again.
If the comments were applied to a sequence, they are erased from all the images concerned.
User Library
Annotations can be created and stored in each of the libraries.
Creating an Annotation
1. Call up the Annotations Menu.
2. Select the desired dictionary.
3. Call up the alphanumeric keyboard.
4. Enter the desired text.
5. Press <Add>.
Note:
If the user library is full, an error message appears.
Deleting an Annotation
1. Open a library.
2. Press <Clear>.
3. Press on the annotation to be deleted.
21-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2434
D
Sequence
Sequence Window
Pressing <Acq/Review> in the Viewer Menu (See Illustration 9) opens the Function subwindow if this selection
was enabled in the system configuration. (See System Parameters para. 247).
Illustration 25
4 I/S = V
Loop
Start/Stop
First
Last
2546
128
33
Note:
The appearance of this window depends on the current mode, and on system configuration.
(See System Parameters para. 247).
Overview
If <Acq/Review> is pressed during x-ray emission and while the Sequence window is closed, images are
recorded at the displayed speed.
Note:
The default speed is that of the last acquisition performed.

If the Sequence window is not displayed, the images are recorded at a speed of four images per
second.
When there is no x-ray emission, press <Acq/Review> to open the window.
21-33
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Recording of Sequences
Pressing <Acq/Review> automatically starts x-ray image recording..
Pressing the Stop/Start key during x-ray emission starts the recording if the Sequence window is open.
The storage speed is displayed. The speed can be changed before x-ray emission begins.
Note:
Maximum acquisition speed depends on system configuration.

Storage capacity depends on system configuration, acquisition speed, and the number of
images already stored.
G
Note:
The number of images and time remaining are displayed on Monitor A.

When x-ray emission stops, image storage is automatically interrupted.
Pressing <Acq/Review> or <Start/Stop> also interrupts acquisition and closes the Sequence
window.
CAUTION
G
Note:
G
Before beginning an acquisition, ensure that there is enough available memory space
for the application concerned.
When there is no space remaining, the system displays an error message.

This action does not interrupt x-ray emission.
Some data must be erased from the memory before creating a new recording (see Patient Database
Function para. 244).
21-34
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Image Numbering
Images are numbered sequentially for a given patient for a given date.
Image are numbered in the following format: I: xxx. This information is displayed on the monitors.
Images within a sequence.

The screen indicates the sequence number and the total number of sequences for the patient, along with
the number of the image within the sequence and the total number of images within the sequence.
The format is as follows: S: zz/kk
I: vvv/ttt
Dynamic Sequence Review

When there is no x-ray emission, press <Acq/Review> to open the sequence control window.
Note:
If the displayed image is not part of a sequence, the Sequence window keys are disabled.
To display another sequence, press the sequence selection arrows.
To begin the review, press <Start/Stop>.

To end the review, press <Start/Stop> again.
Note:
A review cannot be started if Monitor B is selected.
Display speed can be changed by pressing the Up/Down speed control arrows.
Note:
The display speed is also expressed as a factor of the acquisition speed.

The maximum display speed depends on system configuration.
If <Loop> is enabled, the records are displayed continuously.
The first and last images of the dynamic review can be selected using the corresponding arrows.
If the review is stopped, the image selection arrows can be used to display another image.
21-35
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2435
D
Subtraction
Subtraction Window
Press <Subtraction> in the Viewer Menu (see Illustration 9) to open this window if this selection was enabled in
the system configuration.
(See System Parameters para. 247).
Illustration 26
SUBTRACTION
Pixel
Shift
Sub
Disable
Subtraction = 90%
Mask
Select
Overview
Controls subtraction during acquisition or post-acquisition processing.
Acquisition of Subtracted Images
Mask Acquisition
G
Trigger x-ray emission.
When the acquired image can be used as a mask, the system displays the message Ready for Subtraction
on Screen A.
Stop x-ray emission.
Note:
D
The recursive filtering value can be changed during mask acquisition.
Acquisition of Subtracted Images
Restart x-ray emission. The mask is transferred to Monitor B, if the A > B Transfer is selected and the
subtracted images appear on A.
Note:
If x-ray emission is interrupted, a new subtraction mask must be acquired.
21-36
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Recording of Subtracted Images
Saving an Image
Save the displayed image on disk by pressing <Manual Save>. The corresponding subtraction mask is also
stored in memory to allow post-processing of the image.
Note:
Two images are created on the disk.

The last subtraction image is also saved if the Auto Save key is activated.
Saving an Image Sequence

G
Calls up the Sequence function after the beginning of subtraction.

Pressing <Acq/Review> during x-ray emission automatically starts the saving of subtracted images. The
mask is stored as the first image in the sequence.
Recording can be interrupted by closing the Sequence window.
Note:
G
Call up the Sequence function before the beginning of subtraction.
If the Sequence window is open when mask acquisition takes place, press <Start/Stop> after restarting xray
to acquire subtracted images. This will start saving the images. The mask is saved as the first image of the
sequence.
G
Note:
D
The recording of images stops when x-ray acquisition stops.
Recording can be interrupted by closing the Sequence window.

Stopping the x-ray emission automatically stops the recording of images.
Processing of Subtracted Images during X-Ray Emission
End of Subtraction
Return instantaneously to the non-subtracted x-ray image by pressing <Sub. Disabled>.
G
To display the subtracted image again, press the key again.
Landscape
Display the anatomy as a background to the subtracted image.
G
Press the arrows to see the anatomy more or less in the background.
21-37
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Post-Acquisition Processing of Subtracted Images

Note:
An image or sequence of images acquired as subtracted images is displayed subtracted by

default.
The image processing functions available in real time are accessible for post-acquisition processing. In addition, the
following processing functions are available:
Change of Mask
By default, the mask is the first image in the sequence. Another subtraction mask can be defined.
G
Disable subtraction by pressing <Sub. Disabled>.
Display the desired image using the image search keys.
Press <Select. Mask>. The image becomes the mask.
Reactivate subtraction by pressing <Sub. Disabled>.

It is automatically disabled when you exit the Subtraction function.
Moving the Mask

If the patient has moved between mask acquisition and subtraction, the image can be adjusted using the
Pixelshift function.
1. Press <Pixelshift>.
2. Move the mask with respect to the image using the direction arrows.
3. Press <OK>.
4. To return to the original position, press <Clear>.
Sequential Review of Subtracted Images in Sequence
A series of subtracted images acquired in sequence can be reviewed in sequence.

To do this, open the Sequence window, and start the review.
21-38
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Note:
Only the following processing functions are active during the sequential review of subtracted
images.
Landscape Function,
Deactivated Subtraction Function,
Brightness/Contrast,
Inverse video,
Edge enhancement.
2436
Maximum (or Peak) Opacification (See Illustration 9)
Overview
Allows a network to be displayed at maximum opacification.
Real-Time Maximum Opacification Acquisition

1. Press <Max. Op.>.
2. Begin fluoroscopy.
3. Inject the contrast medium when the INJECT message appears on the monitor.
4. Stop fluoroscopy when the desired mapping is completed.
Note:
Subtraction Mode can be selected at the same time as Maximum Opacification.
5. Begin x-ray emission after pressing <Max. Op.> and <Subtraction>.

This allows mask acquisition.
6. Stop x-ray emission when the mask is satisfactory.
7. Restart x-ray emission.
The Maximum Opacification function is applied in Subtraction Mode.
In this case, only the contrast medium is visible.
D
Real-Time Recording of Maximum Opacification Images
The entire Maximum Opacification sequence can be recorded using the Sequence function.
The result of a Maximum Opacification can also be recorded using the <Manual Save> key when x-ray
emission is complete.
21-39
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Creation of Maximum Opacification during Post-Acquisition Processing

A Maximum Opacification image can be created based on a previously recorded sequence of images.
1. Open the Sequence Menu, and select the desired sequence.
Change the first and last image if necessary.
2. Press <Max. Op.>.
3. Press <Start/Stop>.
The system calculates the Maximum Opacification on all selected images, and displays the result on the
screen.
Note:
2437
When the Sequence review is stopped, the resulting image is automatically saved at the end
of the images already saved for the patient.
Road Mapping (See Illustration 9)
Overview
Performs a subtraction on a Maximum Opacification.
Road Mapping Acquisition

1. Press <Road Map>.
2. Start the fluoro, and inject the contrast medium to carry out a Maximum Opacification image acquisition.
3. Stop fluoroscopy when Maximum Opacification is reached.
The screen displays the message: Ready for Road Mapping.
4. Restart Fluoroscopy.
The Maximum Opacification image is transferred to Monitor B, and the real-time road mapping image appears
on Monitor A.
Note:
If fluoroscopy is interrupted and restarted without exiting the Road Mapping function, Road
Mapping remains active with the acquired mask.
To exit the Road Mapping function, press <Road Map> again.
Real-Time Processing of Road Map Images

If the Subtraction Menu was active during the road mapping x-ray exposures, all processing functions available
in subtraction are also available during road mapping.
21-40
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2438
D
Screen Composer
Screen Composer Window

Press the <Screen Composer> in the Viewer Menu to display this window (see Illustration 9).
Illustration 27
SCREEN COMPOSER
Overview
Generates sophisticated screen formats.
CAUTION
Due to restrictions of size and format, image annotations and borders are not displayed
in Screen Composer.
Mode of Operation
Press <Screen Composer>.

The last screen format used is selected by default, and the Monitor B display changes according to this format.
G
The first image displayed in this format is the image displayed on Monitor A when the function was called
up. The other images are the subsequent images in the database.
Select another screen format if necessary.
Select Images to be Displayed

The active region (surrounded by a white square) can be changed using the direction arrows in the Screen
Composer window.
G
Use the image selection keys or the sequence selection keys to select an image. The selected image
is displayed in the active region.
21-41
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Note:
Change the active region using the direction arrows, and select another image.
Repeat this operation as many times as necessary to display the desired images.
To exit from Screen Composer, press <Screen Composer> again.
Note:
Videocassette Recorder (See Illustration 9)
Overview
Allows access to the main VCR functions.
Note:
When you exit the Screen Composer function, the image of the active zone is displayed on
Monitor A, and Monitor A is selected.
Printing the Screen Format

You can print the screen format as it appears.
2439
D
You can change the appearance of this image using the functions in the Geometry Menu, or the
Edge key.
The other functions are accessible via the VCR control panel when the VCR window is not
displayed.
VCR Control Window

Press the VCR key in the Viewer Menu to display this window.
Illustration 28
VCR
Stop
Pause
Auto
Record
Rewind
Play
Fast
Forward
Record
21-42
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Mode of Operation
Auto Record
The interface between the VCR and MDA was designed to allow x-ray images to be saved automatically if
this key is selected when the VCR is powered and a cassette has been inserted.
Note:
Auto Record is selected by default when power is applied to the machine.

To disable this mode, press <Auto Record>.
Play
Plays the video tape. The image is displayed on Monitor B.
Pause
Stops the tape temporarily.
Press this key again, or press <Play> to continue play.
Fast Forward
Winds the tape forward at high speed.
G
Pressing this key during play makes the tape advance at high speed with image display.
Fast Rewind
Rewinds the tape at high speed.
G
Pressing this key during play makes the tape rewind at high speed with image display.
Stop
Stops the tape.
Record
Records images as they are displayed on Monitor A.
Note:
This function is independent of x-ray emission.
21-43
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
244
Patient Database Function
2441
Overview
Allows database display and selection of images to be displayed.

CAUTION
Note:
D
Check that the data recorded in the system are compatible with local regulations
concerning the management of patient files and the confidentiality of medical
information.
If necessary, access to patient information can be protected by creating a password to
limit access to the Patient Database function.
Monitor selection is not active in the Patient Database function.
Displaying Images from Two Different Patients

Images from two different patients can be displayed on the two monitors.
21-44
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Control Screen
Illustration 29
2442
11.10.1995
18 : 30
Viewer
PATIENT NAME
Patient
Database
Patient Info
Help
System
Setup
Message Window
ID NUMBER
DATE
DOCTOR
PROCEDURE
DOSE
PATIENT
DELETE
DATE
TIME
REFERENCE
FORMAT
TYPE
OK
IMAGE
ERASE
2443
D
Floppy
Disk
Mode of Operation
Patient Database
The upper window displays the information concerning four patients. The highlited patient is the one whose
information is displayed on the selected monitor.
Patient Selection
Press the line containing information on the patient you want to select.
G
To display the next or previous patient files, press the Up/Down arrows.
Patient Sorting
Press the heading of the column corresponding to the desired sorting criterion.
Note:
Dates are sorted in reverse chronological order.
21-45
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Deleting a Patient
G
To delete all information concerning a patient from the Database, select the line corresponding to the
patient, and press <Patient Delete>. You are asked to confirm. To do this, press <OK>.
When patient information and images have been deleted, they cannot be recovered.
CAUTION
Patient Information
Displayed in the upper window. Information can be entered and changed using the Patient Information
function. (See para. 245).
G
Patient Name
As entered, or the default name generated by the system.
ID Number
Patient identification number.
Date
Generated automatically by the system. Contains the date on which the first image for the patient was
acquired.
Doctor
Name of practitioner who carried out the procedure.
Procedure
Contains the type of procedure performed on the patient.
Dose
Contains the cumulative x-ray dose received by the patient, as measured by the dose measurement
option if present in the system.
Image Database
Selection of Images for a Patient

The lower window displays the information corresponding to three images or series of images (dynamic
sequences) for the selected patient.
G
To display information relating to the previous or following images, press the Up/Down arrows.
Deletion of Images for a Patient

G
To delete an image or a series of images for a patient from the database, select the corresponding line,
and press <Image Erase>. You are asked to confirm. To do this, press <OK>.
21-46
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
When patient images have been deleted, they cannot be recovered.

CAUTION
Image Information
The following information is displayed in the lower window.
Date
Image acquisition date.
Time
Image acquisition time.
References
Recorded item type: image (I), or sequence (S), and number of images in sequence.
Format
Indicates image format.
Type
This field indicates image type.
Displaying Images from Two Different Patients
Mode of Operation
G
Select Monitor A in the Viewer function.
Enter the Patient Database function.
Select a patient.
Return to the Viewer function.
Select Monitor B.
Enter the Patient Database function
Select another patient.
Return to the Viewer function.
Note:
G
If x-ray emission is resumed after this operation, and more images are recorded, the new images
are associated with the patient displayed on Monitor A.
This allows new images to be added to the record of an existing patient in the Database.
21-47
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
CAUTION
D
Apply extreme caution when using this function, to avoid associating images from two
different patients under one name.
Image Transfer
Note:
Images are transferred to diskette in BMP format.
Sending an Image
G
Select the image to be sent on the patient file management control screen.
The selected image appears on the selected monitor.
Press <Floppy Disk> followed by <OK>.

The image is sent.
Note:
For reasons of privacy, only the image is transferred (i.e., patient data and annotations are not
transferred).
21-48
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
245
D
Patient Information Function
Overview
Allows entry of patient information in the database.
Note:
The system offers to change the information for the patient whose images are displayed on
Monitor A.
Note:
Monitor A is selected automatically when you enter this function.
Patient Numbering by Default

For direct access to viewer functions when the machine is powered up, without the need to enter patient
information beforehand, the system generates a default patient name on powering up.
This code has the following structure: Def JJ/MM-HH:MM.
Note:
This default name can be replaced.
21-49
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Control Screen
Illustration 30
Patient Name
!
1
Tab
W
A
LOCK
SHIFT
#
3
ID Number
E
S
D
X
b
6
$
5
Doctor
T
F
&
7
Y
G
Procedure
%
8
U
H
N
I
J
(
9
)
0
O
K
Comments
<
,
P
:
;
L
>
.
~
O
SHIFT
+
=
OK
NEW
PATIENT
RESET
DOSE
Operating Mode
New Patient
Creates a new patient using the automatic numbering method.
Note:
This action resets the dose counter.
Reset Dose
Resets the dose counter.
G
This may be necessary if x-ray emissions were performed before the patient was placed in the x-ray field,
to ensure that only the dose actually emitted to the patient is recorded in the patient file.
21-50
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Patient Name
Allows the name of the patient to be entered in place of the system-generated default name.
G
The name in the memory is inserted on the second line of the message window.
Enter the new name via the alphanumeric keyboard. The text entered appears on the third line. To correct
any keystroke errors, use the < key.
Once the name is entered correctly, press <OK>. The patient name appears on the monitors.
Also allows you to change the patient name entry if a typing error has occurred previously.
CAUTION
Apply extreme caution when using this function, to avoid assigning an incorrect
patient name to a series of images.
Identification Number
Allows an identification number to be entered.
Doctor
Allows a name to be entered for the doctor carrying out the procedure.
Procedure
Allows a name to be entered for the procedure performed.
Comments
Allows the entry of text as comments.
21-51
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
246
Help Function
Overview
The MDA system generates messages to inform the use of current actions and possible problems.
In addition, the Help function allows the user to obtain detailed help messages concerning MDA system operation.
Control Screen
Illustration 31
11.10.1995
18 : 30
Viewer
Patient
Database
Patient Info
Help
System
Setup
Explanatory notes
Mode of Operation
Automatic Help
The MDA system automatically displays an information document according to the system status when
<Help> is pressed.
Note:
Help text can be scrolled paragraph-by-paragraph or page-by-page via the scrolling arrows.
Help on MDA Functions

Press the key corresponding to the function in the Help subwindow.
Note:
Help text can be scrolled paragraph-by-paragraph or page-by-page via the scrolling arrows.
21-52
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
System Parameters Function
247
D
Overview
Used to modify the presentation of the user interface, permanent data and user preferences of the MDA system.
Control Screen
Illustration 32
PRESET 1
PRESET 2
PRESET 3
PRESET 4
PRESET 5
DAP
Test
Full
Annotation
Audio
Feedback
SHUTDOWN
Setup
Preset
Permanent
Data
Remote
Control
Operating Mode
Selection of Preferred User Interface

The MDA system allows to configure the user interface and presentation of the control screens. Certain
groups of keys are can be suppressed if they are not required for the medical application, or certain
subwindows can be suppressed if the user wishes to work in Automatic Mode (for example, advanced
functions for controlling dynamic sequences or subtraction).
The MDA system can define five different operating modes.
G
Press the key of your choice to select the user interface operating mode. The system returns to Viewer,
and the operating mode of the screen is adapted to the configuration selected.
21-53
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Modification of User Interface Preferences.

You can modify the operating modes of the user interface preadjustments.
G
Press <Setup Preset>. The active and inactive functions for preadjustment appear on the screen.
Illustration 33
Setup
Preset
PRESET 1
PRESET 2
PRESET 3
PRESET 4
PRESET 5
VCR
Annotations
Sequence
Function
Vascular
Function
Screen
Composer
Video Aux.
Measure
Function
Sequence
Menu
Subtraction
Menu
Help
Menu
OK
Print 2
Geometry
SubMenu
Review
Submenu
Road Map
Menu
FNR
Type 1
PRESET
NAME
Dose
Measurement
Test
Full
Annotation
Audio
Feedback
Remote
Control
Permanent
Data
Select the preadjustment to be modified.
Select the functions that you wish to appear in this operating mode by pressing the corresponding keys.
If one function is present, it will appear in Gray.
If a function is absent, it appears in White.
If no function can be selected because it depends on an inactive function, it appears in Black.
21-54
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Modification of the movement automatic detection level value.

Automatic detection prevents the effects of motion blurring when displaying the structures in movement.
G
Press the key to modify the value. At each key press, the value is incremented. Values are 1 through
3, where 1 is the lowest level and 3 the highest level. You can adjust this parameter as a function of the
medical application. The default value is 1.
Note:
If motion blurring is disturbing in the type of examination being made, increase the value.
Confirmation of the parameters of this preadjustment.

Press <OK> to confirm your selection.
Changing the preadjustment name.

Your can change the name that appears on the key.
Press <PRESET NAME>.
Enter the desired name and press <OK>
Modification of permanent data.

G
Control Window.
To display this window, press <Permanent Data>.
Illustration 34
Hospital
Name
!
1
Tab
W
A
LOCK
SHIFT
#
3
Date
E
S
D
X
b
6
$
5
Time
T
F
&
7
Y
G
%
8
U
H
N
PREVIOUS
MENU
Language
I
J
(
9
)
0
O
K
<
,
P
:
;
L
>
.
~
O
SHIFT
+
=
21-55
OK
SERVICE
MENU
Database
Password
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
G
Name of Hospital
Used to enter the name of the Hospital.
Date
Used to change the date in the system clock.
Time
Used to change the time in the system clock.
Language
Call up a subwindow used to select the language in which the MDA user interface operates.
Access to Service Menu

Access to this menu is reserved to Field Engineers of GE Medical Systems and is password-protected.
Database Password
Note:
This function is available only if it has been enabled at system installation.

Used to enter a password that is requested at access to the Patient File function. This ensures the
confidentiality of the information contained in the Patient Database.
Without the password, you can create images for a new patient, store and display the images. However,
you cannot access the Patient Database to display the images of another patient.
After the creation of a new patient, the data of the previous patient are no longer accessible without
accessing the Patient File (i.e., without entering the password for this function).
If a password is already active, the system requests you to enter it before allowing you to enter a new
password.
G
Enter the new password once. You can remove access by password by pressing <OK> at this stage.
The system requests you to enter the new password a second time as confirmation.
Note:
Forgotten your password? Because you cannot access the MDA system without your
password, you must call the local Service Office of GE Medical Systems to have the system
reinitialized.
Dose Measurement Test
Used to activate the dose measurement test. The value sent by this option for the test is displayed.
21-56
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Choice of annotation level on Monitor A screen

You can reduce the number of annotation that appear on the the Monitor A screen.
G
If <Full Annotation> is activated, all the annotations are displayed. To limit the number of annotations,
disable the key. Only the annotations for Date and Time, Patient Name, Patient ID, and Image Numbers
will remain continually on-screen. The other annotations will be displayed only when they are modified.
Return to the Viewer screen to work on the reduced number of annotations.
Press <Full Annotation> again to display all the annotations continually.
Note:
The system memorizes your choice at system shutdown.
Audio Feedback
The system can give a short beep each time a key is pressed.
G
If this key is activated, a beep will occur at each action on the control screen. To cancel the beep, disable
the key.
Press the key to hear the beep again.
Remote control
You can deactivate the infrared remote control of the MDA system. This may be necessary in the event of
a defect in the remote control, or if you suspect interference with other remote control units used in the
Examination Room.
G
If <Remote Control> is activated, commands sent via the remote control will be carried out by the MDA
system. To deactivate the remote control, disable <Remote Control>.
Press <Remote Control> again to return the key to service.
Note:
The system automatically return the remote control to service at startup.
21-57
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Stopping the MDA system

Because the MDA system is controlled by a microcomputer and contains databases, it is strongly
recommended not to stop the system abruptly by removing powerimportant information may be lost.
G
2471
Pressing this key checks the integrity of the data in the system memory and stops the MDA system. Once
the system is correctly stopped, a message informs the user when he/she can remove power from the
Stenoscop.
Using the monitor support without the mobile
This is only possible with a disk or VCR (VideoCassette Recorder) option.

D
In the housing of the rear face of the monitor support trolley insert the plug (2, Illustration 3) in place of the mobile
plug (13, Illustration 3).
Switch on the monitor support.

The monitor support can now operate autonomously without the mobile, so that images previously recorded on
disk or VCR can be examined and reprographed.
21-58
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
248
MD10
2481
Storing images
See Illustration 12 and Illustration 13.

Memorization is made according to the available space in the image memory:
D
Automatically after x-ray emission.
By pressing on <M MAN> during x-ray emission.
When available memory is full, the system deletes the oldest image, unless it has been locked, to make space for
the new image.
2482
Locking an image
Display the desired image. Press the Image Lock key (5, Illustration 12).
2483
Deleting an image
Unlock key (6): Authorizes replacement of the image displayed on the monitor.
2484
Realtime image processing
The following processes are carried out in real time during x-ray emission
(see the key descriptions).
D
Recursive filter.
Image inversion.
Edge enhancement.
2485
Processing a memorized image
The following processes are carried out on memorized images

D
Image inversion.
Zoom.
2-Image mode.
Edge enhancement.
21-59
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
2486
Entry and modification of image annotations
To access the menu, press quickly the <Reset> key (4, Illustration 12) and then the <Annotations> key (8,
Illustration 12).
D
To select a parameter to be modified, use the Up/Down arrows.
To access a desired field, press the Right arrow.
You can modify the content of the selected field as follows:
Using the keyboard option:

G
Note:
Enter the desired text and correct the last character entered by pressing the <Backspace> key.
<Home> places the cursor at beginning of field.
<End> places the cursor at end of field.
<Ins> inserts a space.
<Del> deletes the character at the cursor.
<Enter> confirms the entry.
<Esc> is used to exit from this function.
Using the remote control:

G
Select the character to be modified using the Left/Right arrows.
Modify the character selected using the Up/Down arrows.
To exit from the field, press <A/B>.
To exit from the Modification Menu, press the <Clear> key.

Note:
The parameters entered are saved at system shutdown except for Field No. 1, Patient Name.
Note:
To change the language of the help messages in this menu, select the desired language in the
last field.
21-60
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
249
DR4
2491 Storing images

Memorization is made according to the available space in the image memory:
D
Automatically after x-ray emission.
By pressing on <M MAN> during x-ray emission.
When available memory is full, the system deletes the oldest image, unless it has been locked, to make space for
the new image.
2492
Deleting an image
Unlock key (5): authorizes replacement of the image displayed on the monitor.
2493
Realtime image processing
The following processes are carried out in real time during x-ray emission
D
Recursive filter.
Processing a memorized image

2494
The following processes are carried out on memorized images
D
Image inversion.
Edge enhancement.
21-61
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
21-62
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 22 - OM MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
22-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3 MAINTENANCE
31
SERVICING
To ensure the machine continues to operate perfectly, a program of preventive maintenance must be carried out.
It is the operators responsibility to provide this maintenance.
32
321
CLEANING
Cleaning the Mobile
This unit needs frequent cleaning, particularly after corrosive chemical products have been used.
Monthly cleaning of the bearings should be carried out to remove accumulated dirt.
Use a soft cloth and soapy water to clean the control panel, dry with a cloth moistened with a little clean water.
Other parts of the unit are cleaned with a clean damp cloth, with a product that does not attack enameled metal
surfaces.
Do not use cleaner or solvent which could damage the finish or erase the notices.
CAUTION
Do not use a wax containing solvents.
Do not use wax on the display windows.
22-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
322

Cleaning the Anti-Glare Screens on the Monitor
The screen is cleaned with a special product designed for antiglare screens and special optical paper.
High quality products for cleaning photographic lenses may be suitable. Carry out a test on a small area in the corner
of the screen. Use only a small amount of the product.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the screen.

Fingers leave greasy marks that are difficult to remove.
The antiglare comes from an extremely thin, fragile metallic coating on the monitor
screen.
The use of abrasive products or ones containing solvents could permanently destroy
the antiglare layer.
323
Cleaning the Sterilizable Drapes
When the drapes are new, they cannot be treated at high temperature.
For the first cleaning, proceed as follows:
Soak for two hours in cold water.
Wash at medium temperature (30 to 40C).
Wash at 100C.
For later cleaning, wash and sterilize normally (134C).
The drapes can be treated at the same time as surgical clothes (the same cloth is used), once the first cleaning
has been done as described above.
22-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
33
331

MAINTENANCE
Overview
The unit is delivered new in condition guaranteeing maximum safety for operator and patient.
This safety is guaranteed by respecting the most stringent safety standards, that the unit is certified to be in
conformity with.
Nevertheless, incorrect use is likely to reduce the level of safety.
Whenever the unit is used, the operator must check that the unit is in good condition, particularly:
That the surface condition of the mobile parts is undamaged and that there are no sharp parts or projections.
That the transport components, particularly the castors, are in good condition and that their attachments offer
no danger, and that there is no wear.
If in doubt, the operator must inform immediately the appropriate technical department and only use the unit with
the greatest care before any repairs required are carried out.
332
Checks
Check the condition of the cables and connections at least once a week.
They must be replaced if worn or damaged.
The vertical movement assembly, castor operation and Carm movement must be checked annually, as regards
components such as gears, chains, pinions, bearings, mechanical stops, switches and locks.
Suitable lubricants must be applied or added yearly.

This servicing must be carried out by a qualified Field Engineer.
CAUTION
333
Periodic Maintenance
The maintenance schedule must be strictly respected.

See chart at the end of this chapter.
Operator checks:
The operator can perform these checks and keep a record; any repairs will be done by qualified personnel.
22-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
34

CORRECT OPERATION TESTS

Preliminaries
341
These straightforward tests require no tools.

They can be performed by the operator or by the Field Engineer.
D
By the operator:
During acceptance of the mobile or in case of breakdown to establish possible causes to assist the Field Engineer.
By the Field Engineer:

To check after repairs that the mobile is in good working order.
The correct operation tests are the last stage in the preventive maintenance.
Mobile Unit
342
3421
Checking the brakes
Lock the floor brake of the mobile then pull on the mobile: it should not move.
Unlock and lock the brake again.
3422
D
Checking the movements of the Carm
Check the locking and unlocking of the various Carm movements:
Orbital movement.
Rotation movement around the horizontal axis.
Forward/backward movement.
Lateral movement (wigwag).
Switch on the mobile and check the up and down movements of the Carm.
22-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
343
3431

X-Ray Generation
Checking the collimator
Always wear suitable protective clothing (lead apron and gloves).
CAUTION
Check that noone is in the diffused radiation area.
D
Select manual fluoroscopy, minimum kV and minimum mA.
Close, then half open the semitransparent shutters.
Close, then half open the opaque shutters.
Give a rotate collimator command.
Choose radiography type (without x-rays).

Check that the open collimator shutters pushbuttons flash.
Open fully the collimator shutters.

Check that the flashing stops
22-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
3432

Checking the X-Ray Modes
Switch on the mobile and check that the choice of mode operates correctly, and that the mobile does not trip the
contact breaker when x-ray command is given.
Close the collimator to carry out the above tests.
CAUTION
Use the smallest radiation field that allows operation to be checked.
Always wear suitable protective clothing (lead apron and gloves).
Check that nobody is in the diffused radiation area.
D
Carry out the fluoroscopy in manual mode at different kV and mA values.
Carry out a radiography above 50 kV.
Carry out a pulsed fluoroscopy.
Carry out single pulse fluoroscopy (electronic radiography).
22-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
3433

Checking the various displays
Select manual fluoroscopy.
Change the kV and mA values, check that the display changes every time the keys are pressed.
Check that the display changes if the keys are kept pressed.
Check that pushbuttons light up correctly.
In radiography mode, check that the buzzer works.
In manual mode, do a continuous fluoroscopy.

Check that x-ray indicator lamp on the monitor support lights up.
Check at the timer that the indicated value is correct.

Reset the timer.
344
3441
Image commands
kV, mA
In manual mode, carry out a fluoroscopy with test pattern and change the kV and mA parameters.
Check that they affect the image contrast and brightness.
In automatic mode, carry out a fluoroscopy with test pattern.
3442
D
Inversions and rotations
Give image inversion and rotation commands.

Check that these commands affect the image displayed on the screen.
345
Image processor
Place a test pattern in the x-ray field.
Select automatic fluoroscopy.
Carry out successively several fluoroscopies and memorize several images.
Check all the functionalities of the image processor by pressing the keys on the keyboard and/or the remote
control.
For a description of the image processor functions, see Chapter 2, Practical Use.
CAUTION
22-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
35

HANDLING ERRORS
351 Overview
The Stenoscop is protected against possible handling errors, particularly with respect to power and overload, due to
automated controls and alarms. The few cases of nonoperation due to operator error are described below.
352
Handling Errors
3521 Unit does not Power Up

If the unit does not power up when the ON switch (on the monitor support) is pressed, check that the wall outlet is
correctly supplied and that the power cable is correctly plugged in at the back of the monitor support trolley.
3522
No Image
Check that the collimator is not completely closed.

3523
No X-Rays with Intermittent Buzzer
The intermittent buzzer (with timer button flashing) indicates that a period of 5 minutes fluoroscopy has elapsed. The
x-ray controls are now inactivated.
Reset the timer (Press on the 05 minutes pushbutton, 7, Illustration 6) to allow further x-ray operation.
3524
Thermal Overload Indicator On
The limiting temperature of the X-ray housing has been reached; wait for a few minutes to allow the temperature to
drop.
3525
Remote Control does not Operate
Put in a new battery.

Check that the remote control being used is actually the one supplied with the unit.
3526 Problem with Videocassette Recorder (Sony SVO9500)
Recording starts with x-ray emission, but does not stop afterward.
The videocassette recorder is probably badly programmed.
Read the VCR instructions.
If the fault persists, consult the After-Sales Service.
22-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ACTION
MONTHLY
BI
ANNUALLY
ANNUALLY
REALIZATION
Operator
Check the numbers and that the

labels are in place.
Technical
X
MECHANICAL.
Monitor support sheet: wear control,
screw condition and lubricate the axle.
Paint Screws Condition of cables

Outlets.
Clean the control console.
X
X
X
X
Column drive axle (clean).
Bearings (clean).
Adjust brakes and locking of

movements.
Replace brake pads (if necessary).
Replace leveling castors

(if necessary).
Check the up/down movement belt.
Check the Carm up/down

movement gas spring.
Check the condition of the castors on

the mobile and monitor support trolley
(wear, play, brakes).
Check the cable glands (replace if

necessary).
Clean the mobile.
22-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
ACTION
MONTHLY
BI
ANNUALLY
ANNUALLY
REALIZATION
Operator
Technical
Limit and align the x-ray field and

cassette holder.
Limit and align the x-ray field and

image system.
Check the bearings.
ELECTRICAL.
Check the skin dose and x-ray
emission quality.
Displays, pushbuttons, buzzer.
Fluoroscopy mA precision.
kVp precision.
mAs precision.
Fluoroscopy timer precision.
Fluoroscopy kV/mA range.
Check correct operation before each

surgical intervention
(correct operation tests para. 34).
Fluoroscopy footswitch cleaning.
Check that the x-ray emission

indicator lamp above the monitors
comes on.
Film repro: Replace memory protection battery (every 3 years).
22-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 23 - OM TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
23-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
41
OVERVIEW
Classification
411
Type B device with suitable degree of protection against electric shock, particularly with respect to
412
Admissible current leaks (<2 mA)
Reliability of protective ground connection
Precautions Before Use

See warning at the start of this manual
The Carm, Xray tube head and imager are certified AP.
This means that only these items of equipment can be used between 5 and 25 cm from a closed gas chamber
intended for medical use.
413
Protective Ground
23-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
414

Identification Labels
E
B
F
CG
X-ray tube head assembly.
Image intensifier.
C Xray control assembly.

D Cassette holder.
E
Warning.
Warning.
G CE Marking Label.
23-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
EnglishFrench Translations of Identification Plates
415
4151
Product identification plates
MANUFACTURED
LOCATION
TYPE
S.N
4152
4153
DATE DE FABRICATION
LIEU DE FABRICATION
TYPE
MATRICULE
Housing insert specification plate
HOUSING
NOM. VOLTAGE
INH. FILTR.
ADD. FILTR.
INSERT
FOCAL SPOT
GAINE
TENSION NOM.
FILTR. INHERENTE
FILTR. ADDITION
TUBE
FOYERS
Generator specification plate
AMP MOMENTARY
AMP LONG TERM
42

AMP INSTANTANE
AMP NOMINAL
COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
STENOSCOP 828490 CEI 60127/1986

Complies with DHHS radiation performance standards 21 CFR subchapter J (North American)
UL CSA (North American)
NF 74100102111 CEI 60127
Standards concerning electromagnetic compatibility.
421
Ground Current Leak
Complies with standards IEC 60127 (Class 1 Type B) and NFPA (US)
23-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
43
431
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Overview
CAUTION
432

The unit is supplied with a power cable of suitable length.

Replacing this cable by a longer cable could cause non-respect of certain standards
and change the ground leak current.
Using an extension cable is not recommended: if one must be used temporarily, it must
have wires of minimum 2.5 mm2 and a ground connection.
The impedance of the line specified applies to the end of the extension cable (female
socket side).
Voltage Supply
The Mobile is compatible with one of the following voltage supplies:

100V,
108V,
120V,
200V,
208V,
228V,
240V
selected at installation.
D
Tolerance : 10%
Line voltage variation: automatic compensation.
Current: 50/60 Hz single phase.
433
Maximum Line Impedance
100
0.14
108
0.16
120
0.20
200
0.33
208
0.36
220
0.40
228 240 Volts

0.44 0.48 Ohms.
23-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
434

Line Current
The consumptions below apply to a mobile fitted with two TV monitors and a reprograph (the tolerances lie within a
range of 20%.
Note:
Fuses of values greater than those recommended could be required in certain countries.
For 208V AC, 50 or 60 Hz with a line resistance of 0.36 Ohms.
Line regulation 6%, 20A fuses type T.T. (Slow blow).
Fluoroscopy 90 kV
5,5 mA
I line = 8 A max.
Radiography 49 kV
60 mA
I line = 38 A max.
Radiography 110 kV
30 mA
I line = 38 A max.
For 120V AC, 50 or 60 Hz with a line resistance of 0.20 Ohms

(Reduced power).
Line regulation 6 o/o, 15A fuses type T.T. (Slow blow).
Fluoroscopy 90 kV
5,5 mA
I line = 12 A. max.
Radiography 49 kV
24 mA
Iline = 30 A max.
Radiography 110 kV
12 mA
Iline = 30 A max.
435
Protective Fuses
All the protective fuses are internal and can be accessed only by the Field Engineer
23-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
436

Environment
Complete equipment, all options included.

D
Operating temperature:
10C to 40C without condensation.
Variation in operating temperature:

up to 10C/hour
Storage temperature:
Transport temperature:
Pressures during operation:

700 to 1060 mbar.
Storage and transport pressures:

500 to 1060 mbar.
Humidity:
During storage and transport: 10 to 100% relative humidity.
In operation:
30 to 75% relative humidity.
437
Dissipation
Maximum heat dissipation in ambient air.

Surgical mobile with 2 TV monitors and a reprograph.
D
At idle:
In fluoroscopy (110 kV 4.5 mA): 1250 W
In radiography:
475 W
5800 W
23-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
44

MOBILE UNIT
Overview
441
Dimensions and movements
4411
See Illustration 35, Illustration 36, Illustration 37.
Mass
4412
D
With 16cm imager: 243 kg
With 22cm imager: 244 kg
Stability
4413
Displacement on inclined surface:

in the worst conditions, the mobile becomes unstable on a slope of more than 5.
X-Ray Tube Head and Collimator
442
4421
D
Overview on measurements and accuracy
Maximum differences.
Note:
The maximum differences given in this paragraph are supplied in compliance with the
standards of the North American market.
Factor
Range
Deviation
Measurement principle
kVp rad
4055 kVp
55110 kVp
20%
10%
Direct measurement
of kVp is not possible
mAs rad
0.16160mAs (10% +0.2mAs) mAs meter
kVp fluoro
4055 kVp
55110 kVp
20%
10%
mA fluoro
0.16 mA
(10%+0.2mA) mA meter
Fluoro time
4min.30
15%
Direct measurement
of kVp is not possible
Chronometer
23-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Illustration 35 STENOSCOP 6000

Outline Dimensions of C-Arm Support
Note:
Dimensions are for the Stenoscop 6000 without laser option and dose measurement unit.
23-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Illustration 36 STENOSCOP 9000

Outline Dimensions of C-Arm Support
Note:
Dimensions are for the Stenoscop 6000 without laser option and dose measurement unit.
23-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Illustration 37 STENOSCOP 6000 AND STENOSCOP 9000

C-Arm Lateral Movement
23-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Note:
In radiography mode, all the mA values are typical values.
Note:
The tolerance is 20% after a transition period of less than 0.2 sec.
Conditions of application for the given values.

1. Machine switched on for 30 minutes.
2. Line voltage: (see para. 43).
3. Machine installed and adjusted according to instructions in the technical manual.
4. Preventive maintenance carried out by the operator as specified.
Measurement bases.
Kilovolts (kVp): measured with a kVp meter based on the Xradiation spectral measurement (see technical
manual).
Xray tube current (mA): obtained by direct measurement in the secondary coil of the high tension transformer
located in the Xray tube head (see technical manual).
In fluoroscopy, the set current is displayed on the control panel. In fluoroscopy and in radiography, this current
is used in a regulation loop which controls the filament heater current. The calibration is checked with an
external device. The measurements must be corrected according to the procedure in the technical manual.
Product of exposure time by current (mAs): the product is measured using an mAs meter connected to the
secondary coil in the high tension circuit.
Correction must be made to take account of the high tension capacitor charge (see procedure in the technical
manual).
Fluoroscopy time: the continuous fluoroscopy time between a timer reset and the buzzer sounding.
23-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4422
D
X-Ray Tube Head
Characteristics
The HD281 Xray tube is mounted in a Stnix housing with the following characteristics:
Specifications Characteristics.
Width
16.5cm (6.5)
Height
42.5cm (16.7)
with 22cm shield
52.5 cm (20.7)
with 32cm shield
(USA and Canada)
Length
39.8 cm (15.7)
Anode type
Fixed
Focus
0.5 x 0.5 mm
1.8 x 1.8 mm
Focal mark
Red spot on the Xray tube head
Technical leak factor 110 kVp 1 mA

Filtering CDA = 2.65 mm Al minimum at 71kV
(equivalent to 3 mm Al minimum)
D
Performance and Charge Rate.

In fluoroscopy, 500W maximum up to triggering of the temperature warning, 150W up to thermal cutoff by the
dilatation compensator.
Maximum permitted in continuous radiography fluoroscopy regime: 3.600 mAs to 110 kV in 1 hour.
Rest time between Xrays: 30 seconds. At this rate, and depending on the ambient temperature, the position of
the Xray block and the sterile drapes, the thermal cutoff might trigger.
23-14
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4423
D
X-Ray Emission
Radiography.
0.16,
1.3,
10,
80,
Radiography mAs values selectable.

0.20,
1.6,
13,
100,
0.25,
2.0,
16,
130,
0.32, 0.40,
2.5,
3.2,
20,
25,
160 mAs.
0.50,
4.0,
32,
0.63,
5.0,
40,
0.80,
6.3,
50,
Radiography kVp and mA values selectable.

G
Maximum power
Nominal electrical power 3 kW
(100 kV 30 mA 0.1 s).
mA linked to kVp (1 kVp step) as below:
40 to 49 kVp
50 to 59 kVp
60 to 69 kVp
70 to 79 kVp
80 to 99 kVp
100 to 110 kVp
60 mA
55 mA
47 mA
41 mA
33 mA
30 mA
Reduced power
Nominal electrical power.
mA linked to kVp (1 kVp step) as below:
40 to 49 kVp
50 to 59 kVp
60 to 69 kVp
70 to 79 kVp
80 to 99 kVp
100 to 110 kVp
24 mA
22 mA
19 mA
16 mA
13 mA
12 mA
23-15
1.0,
8.0,
63,
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Products of current x reference time (mAs).

4 mAs
3.2 mAs
3.2 mAs
Note:
D
70 kV
100 kV
110 kV
41 mA
30 mA
30 mA
0.0975 s
0.1067 s
0.1067 s
The charge time results from integration of the mAs product.
The main circuit breaker may trip if operating parameters greater than those below are selected in radiography
mode:
110 kV
88 kV
70 kV
50 kV
80 mAs
100 mAs
125 mAs
160 mAs
For operation with larger parameters, the mobile must be used with mains of about 120V (reduced power) or about
200, 220, 240 V (nominal power).
D
Fluoroscopy.
kVp fluoroscopy.
G
Manual adjustment from 40 to 110 kVp in steps of 1 kVp
Automatic adjustment from 40 to 110 kVp in steps of 0.5 kVp.
The kVp are linked to the mA according to the graphs on Illustration 38, and are adjusted initially with the
amplitude of the TV camera video signal.
The video signal is measured in a circular window of factorycalibrated diameter.
Two mA levels can be selected, one for normal fluoroscopy, the other allowing highquality fluoroscopy.
Ripple:
The Xray generator generates constant voltage with ripple lower than 4% at 110 kVp in fluoroscopy and
nominal mains voltage.
23-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Fluoroscopy mA.
G
Manual Adjustment:
In manual mode, the full ranges of kV and mA values can be selected independently, and are limited by
Graph 3 on Illustration 38.
At high kVp, the mA are automatically adapted to keep the maximum dose rate less than 0.087 Gy/min
(10R/min), and the power to a value below 500W.
Selecting the Normal Fluoroscopy or High quality mode affects only the compromise between the
imager input dose and the background noise. When High quality mode is selected or deselected,
the kV and mA must be readjusted.
Automatic Adjustment.
The mA values are connected to the kVp values according to Graphs 1 or 2 on Illustration 38.
Selecting High quality or Normal dose has a double effect: the imager input dose is selected, and
the rates go from Curve 1 to Curve 2.
Table of typical dose rates in automatic fluoroscopy measured at the input of the image intensifier for
the widest field depending on the type of intensifier and the choice High Quality or Normal dose.
Normal dose
High Quality
6000
0.39 mGy/s
(45 mR/s)
0.78 mGy/s
(90 mR/s)
9000
0.195 mGy/s
(22,5 mR/s)
0.39 mGy/s
(45 mR/s)
In automatic and manual modes, the parameters are limited by Graph 4 when the temperature limit
in the tube housing is reached.
G
Fluoroscopy Timer.
The unit is fitted with a 05 minute electronic timer, with buzzer at end of cycle and reset button.
23-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Illustration 38 kV/mA GRAPH

Stenoscop 6000 and Stenoscop 9000
kV/mA GRAPHS
mA
7.0
6.
0
3
2 /3
5.0
2
2 /3
4.0
3.85
3.0
4
2.0
1.0
3.9
2.7
2.3
1.4
1
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
kV
Illustration 39 Key to kV/mA GRAPH

Note:
In Normal Mode, Graphs 3 and 4 are envelopes. The other graphs show the relations between
kV and mA.
CURVE
MODE
FOR
POWER
Normal Mode Auto Fluoro
6000 + 9000
253 W
High Quality Mode Auto Fluoro
6000 + 9000
500 W
Manual Mode Fluoro
6000 + 9000
500 W
Thermal Safety Fluoro
6000 + 9000
154 W
23-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Illustration 40 HEATING GRAPHS

K Joules
ANODE HEATING AND COOLING GRAPHS
56
48
40
32
24
16
8
0
10
Time in minutes
Illustration 41 HEATING AND COOLING

Joules
HV TANK HEATING/COOLING
800 000
640 000
480 000
320 000
160 000
0
0
25
50
75
100 Time in minutes
23-19
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
443
Image Intensifier
Image intensifier.
High stability solid state power supply.
Characteristics.
Specifications
II 16 cm
II 22 cm
No. of fields
1 field
2 fields
Field value
16 cm
22 cm
Magnifier Conversion factor
150
180
Contrast ratio
20/1
21/1
21/1
Input field diameter
15 cm
22 cm
16 cm
Typical central resolution
44 pL/cm
52 pL/cm
58 pL/cm
Grid incorporated
90L/inch
90L/inch
90L/inch
8:1
10:1
10:1
30 kV
30 kV
30 kV
Anode voltage
Radiation safety screened
4431
Loop 16 cm
Fully
CCD Camera
Characteristics
Specifications.
Type
Sensor matrix
Scanning
Interlace
Interline Transfer type CCD sensor.

752 x 582 pixels.
525/625 lines (50/60 Hz).
2:1.
Bandwidth
Mask
Video output
11 MHz 3dB.
Circular.
1 Volt peaktopeak, 75 Ohms.
23-20
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
444
Radiography Cassette Holder and Grid
Four grid types are available for all combinations of image intensifier (16 cm or 22 cm) and cassette holder (24 cm x 30
cm or 9.5x 9.5).
A radiography grid can be supplied on option:
Ratio 8:1, 70 Lpi
for cassettes 24 cm x 30 cm.
Ratio 10:1, 112 Lpi
for cassettes 9.5 x 9.5.
Note:
The cassette holders are compatible with cassettes complying with standard CEI 406.
Note:
For the USA market, CDRH compliance means that 9.5x9.5 cassettes must be used.
23-21
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
45
MONITOR SUPPORT
451 Dimensions
452
Mass
The mass is measured without reprography option.

D
With 1 monitor and MD10 or DR4 digital: 156 kg.
With 2 monitors and MDA digital: 194 kg.

CAUTION
453
The output connectors of the mobile are not for customer use.
Monitors
Technical characteristics.
Specifications
Horizontal scanning
Vertical scanning
Interlace
Screen diagonal
Adjustment to ambient lighting
Dimensions
Mass
454
Characteristics.
525/625 lines (50/60 Hz)
100/120 Hz (50/60 Hz)
2:1
48 cm
Automatic
l = 47.5 cm
h = 36.8 cm
p = 37.6 cm
20 kg
External Video Output (With MDA Option only)
Video standards:
D
CCIR 625 lines /50Hz*.
EIARS170 525 lines /60Hz*.
Output impedance: 75 Ohms
* According to country.
23-22
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Illustration 42 STENOSCOP 6000 AND STENOSCOP 9000

Dimensions of Monitor Support with Two Monitors
23-23
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Image Intensifier
16 cm or 22 cm
6000 or 9000
System
Digital Option
DISPLAY
Monitor 1: TV, 51 cm (100Hz/120Hz)
Monitor 2: TV, 51 cm (100Hz/120Hz)
DR4
MD10
MDA
Option
Option
IMAGE PROCESSING
Adjustable noise reduction
Edge enhancement
DR4: On stored image
MD10/MDA: In real time and on stored
image
Subtraction
Maximum opacification
Road mapping
Pixel shift
Landscape
Mask selection
Contrast and brightness adjustment
Inverse video
Image inversion: up/down, left/right
Image transfer from Monitor A to B
Multiple images on one monitor
Image rotation
Zoom (Maximum) with movement
Image annotation
Measurement
x2
23-24
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
2 thru 16
x8
Option
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Image Intensifier
16 cm or 22 cm
6000 or 9000
System
Digital Option
ACQUISITION MODES
DR4
MD10
MDA
A/D Converter
Image Matrix
Last Image Hold (LIH)
Image sequence
8 bits
10 bits
8 bits
576 x 576
10
Option
8 Fps
5000
Option
IMAGE REVIEW MODES

Image Selection
Sequential Review
Maximum sequence speed (Option)
Maximum storage capacity
PATIENT DATABASE
Entry of patient name
Selective erasure of data
Image storage on diskette
Saving images when power is removed
from the machine
CONNECTIVITY
VCR recording and review
Auxiliary video input
Option
23-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
23-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 24 - OM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
24-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
24-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

5 OPTIONS
51
511
DOSE MEASUREMENT
Overview
Dose measurement is an integrated option that is located under the Xray housing cover.
This option is used to record the dose emitted during an examination in mGy x cm2 (milligray x centimeters squared)
at the x-ray tube output.
512
Practical Use with MDA Memory
Note:
A warmingup period of about 8 to 10 minutes after power up is required to reach nominal

accuracy and stability.
1. Reset the dose measurement.

2. Perform the examination.
3. The cumulative dose is displayed on Monitor A and recorded in the patient file.
Record the dose at the end of the examination in the patient file.
4. Reset the dose measurement for the next patient.
Note:
The dose is automatically reset when <New Patient> is pressed.
24-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
513

Description (DR4 and MD10 Memories)
Illustration 43 DOSE MEASUREMENT WITH DR4

AND MD10 MEMORIES
1
Digital display.
Reset button.
Test button.
514
Practical Use with DR4 and MD10 Memory
Note:
A warming-up period of about 8 to 10 minutes after power up is required to reach nominal

accuracy and stability.
1. Reset the chamber display for every new patient by pressing button 2.
2. Perform the examination.
3. After the examination read the value on display 2 and record it in the patient file.
4. Reset the display ready for the next patient.
Note:
The display is automatically reset when the unit is switched off.
24-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
515

Maintenance
Respect the same precautions as when cleaning Stenoscop.

CAUTION
The ionization chamber and the display are protected against liquid infiltration with
leakproof gaskets. It is, however, not recommended to use a large amount of liquid
when cleaning.
24-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
52
521

LASER CENTERING UNIT

Laser Centering Unit Built-In Option
DANGER
LASER RADIATION.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE LASER, MAKE SURE THAT NOBODYS EYES,
INCLUDING THOSE OF THE PATIENT, WILL BE EXPOSED TO THE LASER BEAM.
LASER LIGHT
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
DIODE LASER
1.0 MILLIWAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
670 +/ 10 mm WAVELENGTH
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
522
Overview
The built-in laser option provides a laser beam showing the central axis of the x-ray beam.
523
Description
The built-in laser option is placed under the cover of the x-ray tank.
A transparent window in the cover allows the laser beam to pass through.
24-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
524

Practical Use
1. Activate the laser using the control button located on the side of the x-ray control handle.
Illustration 44
X-ray control
Laser control
2. A laser dot appears, allowing the central x-ray beam to be located. An X which is opaque to x-rays is shown on
the image in real-time to allow perfect alignment for any C-arm position.
3. To switch off the laser, press the control button again.
24-7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
53

ORTHOTRAC EXTERNAL LASER OPTION
DANGER
LASER RADIATION.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THE LASER, MAKE SURE THAT NOBODYS EYES,
INCLUDING THOSE OF THE PATIENT, WILL BE EXPOSED TO THE LASER BEAM.
LASER LIGHT
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
DIODE LASER
1.0 MILLIWAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
670 +/ 10 mm WAVELENGTH
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
531
Overview
The Orthotrac laser delivers a laser beam showing the central axis of the Xray beam.
24-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
532

Description
Illustration 45 LASER CENTERING UNIT

6
2
1
Orthotrac Laser.
Supporting bracket for assembly on the image intensifier.
Locking system for supporting bracket.
Orthotrac laser adjustment screw.
On/Off switch.
Battery compartment.
24-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
533

Installation
PAY CAREFUL ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE BEFORE USING THE
ORTHOTRAC LASER.
DANGER
Note:
This procedure must be carried out during the first installation of the Orthotrac laser.
1. Position the mobile and the Carm in the position that will be used during the procedure, and lock the brakes.
2. Find the central emission point of the Xray beam from the focal point on the side of the tube chamber.
CAUTION
This operation must be done by a Maintenance Field Engineer or a Field Engineer on the
operating site.
3. Locate the central point on the image intensifier, to establish the central axis of the Xray beam.
4. Attach the target reticule at the center of the Xray beam on the tube side. This reticule gives a permanent
indication of the center of emission for future laser alignment.
5. Attach the laser support on the input face of the image intensifier.
6. Switch on the laser.
Find the laser point on the reticule.
7. Adjust the position of the laser point by turning the adjustment screw so that the laser point is perfectly centered
on the reticule.
8. To allow fast repositioning during later installation, place on the laser support and on the imager the marking
stickers supplied with the option. See Illustration 45.
9. After use, switch off the laser, remove the laser support and the laser from the image intensifier.
24-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
534

Positioning
1. Attach the laser support and the laser on the input face of the image intensifier so that the two marks coincide.
2. Put the Carm in the position that will be used during the examination.
3. Switch on the laser.
4. If needed adjust the position of the laser point by turning the adjustment screw so that the laser point is perfectly
centered on the reticule.
CAUTION
535
If the position of the Carm is changed during the examination, the position of the laser
point must be readjusted.
Maintenance
The Orthotrac laser uses a standard 9 volt battery. It can be replaced by sliding back the plastic cover of the battery
compartment.
Do not sterilize the Orthotrac laser.
CAUTION
24-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
24-12
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 25 - OM ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
25-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
25-2
GE Medical Systems

Source: om 826 931 P735 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 and Series CCD, Rev. F
REV 1
ILLUSTRATIONS REMPLACEES PAR DES PHOTOS NUMERISEES

ILLUSTRATION 7
Patient Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . /
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMSSTENOSCOP
Patient ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . /
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . /
Hospital Name . . . . . . . . . .
Doctor . . . . . . .
Comments . . . /
/
/
dd/mm/yyyy
I: i i i i i
hh/mm
D: yyyyyyyymGyxcm2
S:nnn/yyy
I:iiiii/jjjjj
Sub
M: i i i
Filter: x
Filter: x
Zoom: x
Edge: xx
Win: xxx
Lev: yyy
C : XXXX pix
D1 : yyymm
D2 : xxxmm
S : xxo/o
REMOTE FUNCTION
A1 : xxxo
A2 : yyyo
USER MESSAGE
E : xx.x cm yy.y cm
E : xxxx cm2 yyyyy cm3
?????????
xxxx
Max time
xxxx s
Neg Ret Inv
ILLUSTRATION 8
Patient Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . /
Patient ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . /
hh/mm
dd/mm/yy
yy
S:nnn/yyy
I:iiiii/jjjjj
Sub
M:iiiii
I:iiiii/jjjjj
Zoom : x
Edge: xx
Neg Ret Inv
Win.: xxx
Lev.: yyy
25-3
Mon. A
Mon. B
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
25-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION

INTERCONNECTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 26 - STENOSCOP/MDA INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
26-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
26-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: sm 826 921 P615 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. - M.D.A., Rev. 1, Page 3.1
3 INSTALLATION
2.
31
RECEPTION OF THE MOBILE SURGICAL UNIT
311
INTRODUCTION
312
The STENOSCOP 2 is supplied ENTIRELY FACTORY MOUNTED AND CALIBRATED, so it needs NO

ADJUSTMENT ON PUTTING INTO SERVICE.
The procedure given below makes it possible to check the reception of the various components and set the
system going.
RECEPTION OF THE STENOSCOP 2
See chapter 2 PREINSTALLATION to check both the conformity of the site for installation and the
composition of the equipment to be received.
3121 DETERIORATION DUE TO TRANSPORT
On the delivery of the equipment, all the packages will be examined to make sure that they have not been
damaged during transport.
If damage is observed, immediately notify the transport service and the transport insurance service of the
factory.
The same will apply for nonapparent damage due to transport discovered when unpacking the material or
during installation, UP TO 15 DAYS MAXIMUM AFTER DELIVERY.
A transport service will generally not pay a bill for non apparent damage unless an inspection has been
demanded within 15 days after delivery.
If damage is discovered, immediately contact the services concerned, specifying the type of apparatus, the
serial number and the order number if possible, and describe the nature of the damage.
3122 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
See chapter 2 PREINSTALLATION for checking the conformity of the delivery and of the equipment
ordered.
313
The unpacking of the components of the apparatus before it is transported into the room will be made only if
necessary for checking damage occurring during transport.
The packages will be minutely examined during installation, in order not to overlook parts of small dimensions
or envelopes containing screws, washers, etc.
IDENTIFICATION AND COMPATIBILITY
The STENOSCOP 2 is identified by labels giving the following information :
. Date and place of manufacture
. Serial number
. Model type and number
. Type approval and compliance with standards.
In addition, to meet HHS requirements (USA) concerning RX radiation, mAs accuracy, filtration and
sourceskin distance, the different components concerned carry a label COMPLIES WITH RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
Other labels are also supplied separately for specific compliance with prevailing local regulations.
26-3
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

E
E
B
A
26-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
ITEM

DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE
FRAME CONTROL CONSOLE
828 490 G055
ZF0XCST2
X R HEAD
828 520 G015
ZH0HTST2
COLLIMATOR for IMAGER

16 cm (6)
828 751 G 025
Z0A16ST2
828 752 G 025
Z0A22ST2
22 cm (9)
D
MODELE
(USA)

24 x 30 cm
830 534 G 015
9,5 x 9,5
830 535 G 015
Z0L16ST2
314
IMAGER
24 x 30 cm
830 536 G 015
9,5 x 9,5
830 537 G 015
Z0L22ST2
16 cm (6) CCD 50Hz
860 926 P 075
ZCCD16ST
22 cm (9) CCD 50Hz
860 926 P 095
ZCCD22ST
16cm (6) CDRH 60Hz
860 926 P 085
ZCCD16ST
22cm (9) CDRH 60Hz
860 926 P 105
ZCCD22ST
MONITORS CART
Travel conditions
To move the mobile unit from one place to another, respect the following conditions :
vertical CArm imager upwards
wigwag movement centered
CArm retracted as far as possible toward the console
column low position
movements locked
ratchet the direction handle in order to have the back wheels parallel to the chassis
foot brake released
CAUTION
THE MOBILE UNIT IS NOT EQUIPPED WITH NEGATIVE ACTION BRAKES.
FOR TRAVELLING ON A SLOPE, THE OPERATOR HAS TO BE IN FRONT OF THE MOBILE UNIT AND
THE MONITOR HOLDER, AND, IF NECESSARY A SECOND PERSON MUST BE AVAILABLE TO HELP.
26-5
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
832 502 G015
26-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
32
CONNECTION THE SUPPLY

The mobile is factory wired for :
228V/50Hz single phase networks (Europe)
OR
120V/60Hz single phase networks (U.S.A.)
A frequency adaptation on site requires adaptations in the mobile but also in the imager, memory and monitor
For the mobile, proceed as specified hereunder.
321
NETWORK ADAPTATION OF THE MOBILE

ATTENTION : The Imager frequency is not adaptable on site. The complete CCD Camera must be changed
if the frequency has to be modified.
3211 9TR1 TRANSFORMER

The network adaptation is made at the transformer 9TR1 (diagram 110)
Connect wires marked A and B, and jumpers marked C and D as shown in the hereunder chart according to the
mains voltage and frequency.
MAINS SUPPLY
FREQ
240V
228 V
220 V
208 V
200 V
120V
108 V
100V
Marqued wire
9TR1 TERMINALS
Frequency
Adaptation
50Hz
60Hz
Voltage
Adaptation
Jumper C
45
46
47
46
47
48
48
48
Jumper D
22
22
22
22
22
15
26
37
*For the networks 120, 108 and 100V, it is obligatory to switch the machine over to REDUCED POWER.
The REDUCTION OF POWER is programmed at the CI 3A3 DIAPHRAGMS 2 using the switch S133.B (27)
(diagram 117F)
S133.B OFF
Normal power
S133.B ON
Reduced power
*For the networks 120V 108V and 100V, it is also obligatory to connect in parallel on 9R1 an additional
resistor 9R2, see diagram 110b2A
Connect the jumper from 9R2 to 9R1.
220V to 240V Mains
1
1
9R1
9R2
100V to 120V Mains
2
2
9R1
9R2
Jumper
26-7
Jumper
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Locking rood
Transportation
lock bar (rod)
9Sm1
ON / OFF
9PL1
26-8
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
322

SUPPLY CABLE
For the mobile units wired for 120V(USA), the supply cable is delivered from the factory with its plug.
For the mobile units wired for 228V (Europe), the supply cable is delivered without a plug.
According to local regulations, connect a plug (min 16A single phase + earth) as follows :
blue wire : 228V
brown wire : 228V
33
yellow/green wire : earth

INTERCONNECTION
Connect the cable coming from the mobile unit to the plug 9PL1 situated on the back of the monitor holder.
Screw the fixing device in a clockwise direction.
Connect the supplementary equipotentiality cable to the earth terminal bar (CEI only).
34
Connected the network supply cable to the socket provided at the installation.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
341
Put the apparatus under tension with the switch at the back of the monitor cart.
UNBLOCKING THE COLUMN
For transport, this equipment is fitted with a bar which immobilizes the column. This bar is placed in a sheath
situated under the chassis and accessible from near the right rear wheel.
The bar must be removed to allow the column to move.
To remove the bar, activate for a short instant the button controlling the descent of the column.
This action has the effect of unblocking the bar which can then be removed.
ATTENTION!
It is absolutely necessary to keep this bar and put it back in place if the equipment has to be transported.
To avoid losing it, it is suggested that the bar be fixed on the monitor cart (behind the monitor).
26-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
35

Source: sm 826 921 P615 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. - M.D.A., Rev. 1, Page 3.8/3.9 (blank)
CDRH CERTIFICATION
The unit is completely assembled and tested for CDRH compliance in the plant except for video imager, which
for certain markets, is associated in the field.
In order to make sure that the installed unit complies, the following tests have to be made :
1. Check that all mounting bolts for the XRay head and image intensifier are tightened.
If a loose bolt is found, perform the beam alignement in Rad and Fluoro.
2. Check operator display, operation of pushbutton and of buzzers.
See chap 6 RG 40 PWB swiches position.
3. Verify Fluoro mA
4. Verify Rad mAs
5. Verify Fluoro mA kVp range in manual and automatic mode
6. Make a quick test of the Fluoro ABC loop.
With 2 mm copper on the Xray head, in normal fluoro automatic mode, the kVpmA normally stabilize
for the 6 II
for the 9 II, large field :
Low Dose
High Dose
KV
65/67
65/67
mA
1.7/1.9
3.2/3.4
Low Dose
High Dose
KV
68/70
68/70
mA
1.9/2.0
3.6/3.9
If this test fails, make a complete kVp test.
26-10
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
36

DR4 / MD10 COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.

DR4 / MD10
DR4 / MD10
FRONT PANEL
REAR PANEL
R.X. CONTROL
DSM
DB 15 Male
R.X. CONTROL
DR
HARD COPY
VIDEO
DB 15 Female
BNC
Only in DR4
SCREEN A SCREEN B
OUT
OUT
BNC
CAMERA
IN
BNC
POWER
DB 9 Male
BNC
HARD COPY
CONTROL
BNC
I.R. REMOTE
DB 9 Male
Monitors
A or B
C or D
MD10 Option
or
26-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
37

MDA COMPONENTS INTERCONNECTIONS.
26-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
38

COMPONENTS POWER SUPPLY WIRING.
9A1 TRANSPANEL
PL4
+12V
8
K37
10
9
26-13
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
39

CCM 620 Photography parameters setting

This procedure is a summary of this one available in the camera documentation (furnished with the unit).
391
Brightness, contrast and density adjustment.

Values to be set:
BRT
CRT
Positive
Negative
020
250
025
200
Density
50 Hz
60Hz
056
064
a Switch ON the Video Imager.

b The message windows indicates the warm up cycle time (60 sec.)
WARMUP 60
WARMUP 59
WARMUP 58
WARMUP 00
c At the end of warm up, you will hear a short beep, followed by the messages here after.
SELF TEST
CALIBRATING
IMG 1/1 USR1 POS
d Hit the PROGRAM button and check the displayed message.
>FMT4 USR1 POS

cursor
26-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

POS. or NEG. Selection.

Hit the buttons to set the cursor on the left side of POS .
POS
NEG
1
3
Then hit the buttons to select POS or NEG
2
4
RESET
1
3
>B00 C00 D00
Press once the key in order to diplay
2
4
Adjust the BRIGHTNESS with the keys
RESET
>B020 C00 D00
Hit once the key to select the CONTRAST with the keys
Then adjust the contrast with the keys
1
3
>B020 C250 D00
1
3
Press the button
2
4
and set the appropriate DENSITY ( 50 or 60 Hz )
Store these new values with the PROGRAM button.
Refer to the CCM 620 manual for more details over these
adjustments.
26-15
RESET
>B020 C250 D050
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
26-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 27 - MDA THEORY/ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
27-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
27-2
GE Medical Systems

Source: sm 826 921 P615, Rev. 1, Page 6.3
REV 1
62
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
621
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
6211 XRAY PROTECTION

During an operation involving Xray emission, put a lead apron between the Xray head and the image
intensifier of the mobile system.
6212 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Differential electrical measurements taken with the oscilloscope (in particular, thyristor trigger voltages) must
be taken with the oscilloscope in differential mode.
Measurements taken in common mode with an earthed oscilloscope may destroy components.
6213 CONNECTOR PL1 OF PWB 3A19 COMMANDE SCR
Never remove this connector while the mobile system is energized.
The thyristor trigger protection currents are on PWB 3A19 and there is a risk of accidental triggering if PL1 is
disconnected.
6214 GROUNDING OF BOARDS ON EXTENDERS
Dont forget to ground the boards (with an extension wire with FASTON terminals).
6215 BOARD REPLACEMENT
Deenergize the mobile system when replacing or extending a board.
622
BOARD INTERCHANGEABILITY
6221 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

The standard troubleshooting technique consists in replacing the boards.
The interchangeability criteria for the boards are listed below in three groups:
1) Noninterchangeable boards.
2) Readily interchangeable boards.
Boards without adjustment or boards which have been calibrated in the factory.
3) Interchangeable boards which require adjustments.
NOTE : Make sure that the required procedure is at hand before proceeding with adjustments.
In some instances, it will be necessary to repair the mobile system on site and to recalibrate it.
All the information needed for this is given in the paragraph 4 of this chapter : Adjustments sheet RG...
6222 NON INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
DIVIDER 6A1 PWB
In factory, the divider PWB 6A1 is calibrated with the Xray head, on which it is mounted.
This calibration requires specific tools which are not available on site.
After accidental destruction of the 6A1 circuit, it is, however, possible to recalibrate a circuit with similar
characteristics. This can be done in the factory only.
27-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6223 READILY INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS
1A1
MOTEUR ARCEAU PWB (Carm motor)
2A1
MODULE G2 (control console) PWB

Switches position : see adjustment sheet RG 213
2A3
MODULE D2 (control console) PWB
3A3
DIAPHRAGMES 2 (collimator) PWB

3A7
AD/kV PWB
Check the presence of bridge W10 (See sch 53A)
3A9
CONSIGNE kV/mA2 (kV/mA reference) PWB

Check the presence of W245 bridge (See sch 092D)
CAUTION : EPROM
Check agreement: name, position, revision
3A12 kV/mA PWB
Adjustment of kV measurement: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 201 or RG 202)
Adjustment of FLUORO TIMER: may have to be corrected (see adjustment sheet RG 206)
Check bridges presence W107, W109, W220, W231, W244, W245.
3A19 COMMANDE SCR2 (SCR control) PWB
Check bridge presence W16
4A1
SCR No1 PWB
4A2
SCR No 2 PWB
5A1
PUISSANCE 4 PWB (Heating power)
7A1
FROTTEUR PWB (contact brush)
7A2
DISQUE PWB (Disk) Complete adjustment of collimator
9A1/9A2 Relais PWB (relay)

9A4
PRISE PWB
27-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A1
INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G 035 STENOSCOP 2

This board is also used for DR4 and DR7 memories.
This board is fully factory calibrated.
If an accidental uncalibration occurs, refer to adjustment sheet RG212.
6224 INTERCHANGEABLE BOARDS WHICH REQUIRE ADJUSTMENTS

3A5
Timer PWB (Minuterie 2.)

Adjustment of ABC video (adjustment sheet RG 211).
3A26 Filament heating PWB (Chauffage filament 4)

Adjustment of fluoro mA (adjustment sheet RG 204)
Adjustment of fluoro preheating (adjustment sheet RG 205)
Adjustment of RAD preheating (adjustment sheet RG 208)
623
FUSES REPLACEMENT
The unit is internally protected by fuses inaccessible by the user.
During corrective procedure, it is OBLIGATORY to replace a blowed fuse by means of the SAME MODEL
OF FUSE.
A plastic bag with spare fuses is provided in the unit in the module 3. See D/R 1 sheet for access.
This bag countains :
2 Fuses ABC 1A 250V
1 Fuse ABC 3A 250V
1 Fuse ABC 5A 250V
1 Fuse ABC 8A 250V
1 Fuse MDA 3A 250V
1 Fuse FNQ 1A 500V
code 854 352 P 025

code 854 352 P 045
code 854 352 P 055
code 854 352 P 075
code 854 352 P 425
code 854 362 P 315
It is possible to order this Maintenance bag with the code number 828 731 G 015.
6231 FUSES LIST
NAME
MODEL
LOCALIZATION
1A1F5
MDA 3A 250V UNIT
see sheet
1A1F8
ABC 3A 250V
MODULE 1
D/R 2
5F2
ABC 3A 250V
UNIT
see sheet
5F3
ABC 8A 250V
MODULE 5
D/R 1
9F1
ABC 1A 250V
MONITOR CART
see sheet
9F2
ABC 1A 250V
9F3
ABC 5A 250V
MODULE 9
D/R 90
9F4
FNQ 1A 500V
27-5
ACCES
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
6232 REMARKS RELATING TO FUSES REPLACEMENT
Replacement of 1A1 F5 fuse

MODEL MDA 3A 250V
When 1F5 fuse blows, verify the UP/DOWN motion system
Check the wear of the driving shaft and roller plates of the column.
Check cleanliness of the roller plates
Verify that the motor current is lower than 2.5A when column is on mechanical stop.
63
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SHEETS
631
GENERAL
Each sheet gives the list of tools and equipment needed, preliminary precautions and part disassembly
and reassembly procedure.
The part numbers of the hardware mentioned in this chapter are given in chapter 9, Renewal Parts.
27-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
INSERT STENOSCOP MDA ADVANCED SERVICE MANUAL HERE
27-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
27-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 28 - MDA SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
28-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
28-2
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
1
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. M.D.A Job Card D/R 90 1 of 2

Purpose:
DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF MONITOR

CART COVERS.
Time: 10 min.
Version No.: 00
Date: April 1995
Manpower: 1
Touch screen
front panel
Cover B
1
Cover A
Cover C
28-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Job Card D/R 90 2 of 2

1. TOOLS REQUIRED
Cross tip screwdriver
2. PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
Switch OFF the unit
Remove Mains plug from the outlet
3. COVERS REMOVAL
Remove 9PL1 plug (item 1)
COVER A
Remove the 10 screws CTFH M4x8.
Remove the cover
COVER B
Unscrew the 3 screws.
Remove the cover (for more detail see Job Card D/R 50 SM DSM).
COVER C
Unscrew the 2 screws.
Remove the cover pulling it out.
4. REASSEMBLY PRODEDURE
Carry out the previous operations in reverse order
28-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.: 0
MIDAS BOARD.
Date:
Time:
Manpower:
28-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTION
1. Turn the power OFF.
2. All the precautions for electrostatic discharges have to be taken.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90 page 6.190)
2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 page 6.190)
3. Unscrew and remove the four screws holding the PC brackets to the cart.
4. Remove the PC.
5. Remove the top cover from the PC.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).
7. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board (item 2).
8. Replace the defective board by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.
CAUTION
MIDAS takes place on the PCI bus.
28-6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.: 0
AVIAS BOARD.
Date:
Time:
Manpower:
2
1
28-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
4. Remove the PC.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable between AVIAS and MIDAS boards (item 1).
CAUTION
AVIAS takes place on the ISA bus.
28-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
Version No.: 0
RS 232 BOARD.
Date:
Time:
Manpower:
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart cover. (see D/R 90 ).
2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90 ).
4. Remove the PC.
7. Check the board configuration following the table here after.
8. Jumper JP9 5 / JP10 10 / JP11 5 / JP12 5.
1
SW5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SW1
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW2
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW3
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
28-9
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

9. Replace the defective board (item 1) by the new one and proceed in reverse order for the installation.
28-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
Version No.: 0
VGA BOARD.
Date:
Time:
Manpower:
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
4. Remove the PC.
6. Unscrew the appropriate bracket and remove the board.
7. Check the board configuration with the drawing (see Ill. 1).
28-11
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

ILLUSTRATION 1
28-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.: 00
TOUCH SCREEN ASSEMBLY
Date: October 1996

Time:
Manpower: 1
VGA display
J1
Grounding plug
J2
Touch screen interface

Take care of the position of this connector
28-13
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)
2. Disconnect the cables from the display and the touch screen interface.
3. Unscrew the four screws holding the touch screen assembly.
4. Replace the defective touch screen assembly by the new one taking care of the position.
(Connector : back side)
5. Carry these operations in reverse order.
6. Switch the unit On and check the functionnalities of the unit.
7. For touch screen calibration, see Advanced Service Manual.
28-14
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
Version No.: 00
HARD DISK
Date: October 1996

Time:
Manpower: 1
28-15
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
D
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the monitor cart back cover. (see D/R 90)
2. Remove the monitor cart front cover. (see D/R 90)
4. Remove the PC.
6. Unscrew the two screws holding the hard disk assembly located on the back side of the PC frame.
( See item 1 on opposite page )
7. Remove the power supply cable ( item 2 ) and the ribbon cable ( item 3 ) from the disk.
8. Remove the disk assembly.
9. Unscrew the four screws holding the disk on its frame.
10. Replace the disk by the new one carrying these operations in reverse order.
11. Switch the unit On and verify the fuctionnalities of the unit.
Note:
Hard disk is loaded with low tier configuration

Insert the floppy containing the customer configuration : this one is located
inside an envelopped on the PC cover.
Switch the memory ON.
The touch screen displays a key Restore; by hitting this key, the customer
configuration is automatically loaded on the hard disk.
See ASM for customer option configuration if customer configuration
floppy is missing.
28-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 29 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATIC DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

NOTE: THE SCHEMATICS INCLUDED ARE NEW/UPDATED VERSIONS FOR THE
STENOSCOP MDA
29-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
29-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: sm 826 921 P615 STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. - M.D.A., Rev. 1, Page A-1
SYNOPTIC
MODULE 8
IMAGER
D.A.P.
Electronic Module
TV MONITOR
Memory
System
9A1
Transpanel
TV CAMERA
REPROGRAPH
(Option)
3A19 Minuterie
MODULE 6
MODULE 7
COLLIMATOR
IMAGE
INTENSIFIER
X Ray Head
Ion
Chamber
mA
Hysteresis ABC
Measure
Analogic / Digital
Conversion
KV
G90
Magnitude comparator
ADC
FC 110
Lim. 110
3A9 CONSIGNE KV / mA
Digital / Analogic
Conversion
G20
G21
G68
4585
Reference voltage
A<B
G108
G126
4585
G18
G19
4585
G67
BCD to Decimal Decoder

C
G22
Counter
G4
8
G3
14516
Logic BP
KV
Clock
Counter
G138
G125
UP / Down
2 x 4 Bit latch
Digital / Analogic
Conversion
G94
MODULE 4
Measure
Sec. GR
5A1
Heating
Power
3A26
Filaments
Heating
mA
mA
Reference voltage mA
DAC
SC
G97
4508
KV
Reference voltage mA
4028
G69
4508
2A1
MODULE G
EPROM
BUS KV/20 Code C0 C7
G120
4516
HOLD KV
Stop
mAs
7447
Dis. KV
Converter
G138
G172
EPROM
3A19
SCR
CONTROL
2A1
MODULE G
BCD to 7 Segments Decoder
Lim. 40
A
3A12
KV / mA
KV / 20
DAC
FC 40
A>B
mA
G137
G136
SC
7447
EPROM
2 x 4 Bit latch
mA / mAs
Counter
G66
G89
G90
4516
3A7 AD / KV
F KV/mA
EPROM
Bin. Dec.
MODULE 5
Alimentation
FC0
FC1
FCGR
Power supply
FC1 FCGR
5TR1
mA(S) UP
Logic BP
mAmAs
EPROM
A= B
2 x 4 Bit latch
G118
EPROM
G65
2A1
MODULE G
5R
500W
2 x 4 Bit latch
4585
SC
mA(S) UP
ER HLC TH
Clock
G134
G135
4516
Counter mA mAs
29-3
DAC
Cons. mAs
G133
4508
SC
G132
G119
4508
G87
G88
MODULE 9
mA mAs
G121
ER HLC TH
FC0
BCD to 7 Segments
Decoder
Reference voltage mAs
Interface
9TR1
Mains
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

MODULE 5
9PL1
MALE
MODULE 9
FEMELLE FEMALE
1PS1
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
PL1
D.A.P.
Interface
C1
F2
F4
F3
LV SUPPLY
Tb3
TR1
29-4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

MAINS AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES

MODULE 9 INTERFACE
9R2
1E 25W
Only for 100,

108, 120 Mains
1
9R1
2E2 25W
9Sm1
9Tb3
2 LINE1
LOAD
1
C1
0MF47
MAINS
228V
LINE2
3
AUX. COIL
9PL1
13 14
43 44
7
A
Jum
per
D
LOAD
2
K1
A1
3C
A2
2
275
V
11
155
V
10
55V
3
2
1
9
0V
4
3
2
9
Monitor 1
541A
33 34
541A
9F4
1A
120V
220V
53
54
55
0V
Rev.
A
0
1
2
c
b
d
17
18
19
4Tb1.
a
PL4
4Tb1.5
15
MODULE 3 CARDS RACK
4Tb1.6
23
031B
33 34
24
25
26
48
49
50
9E3
27V
3PL5
40
27
D24
26
39
K26
15K4
2
+12V
007B
3A3.
a36
5
K1
36
230V
0V
X 901
3
275V
1E1
5F2
3A
6
1
MODULE 3
OUT 1
5,05V/10A
5E20
16
127
V
CHAUFFAGE FILAMENTS
FILAMENTS HEATING
21
7
50Hz
6 A
560Hz
50Hz
60Hz
4
3
2
D
1 B
001
220V
228V
7
6 A 50Hz
5 60Hz
4
3
2 D
1 B
208V
8
200V
8
7
6 A 50Hz
5 60Hz
C
4
3 B
2 D
1
120V
8
7
6 A 50Hz
5 60Hz
C
4
3 B
2 D
1
002
7
6 A 50Hz
5 60Hz
C
4
3
2
1
108V
8
7
6 A 50Hz
5 60Hz
D
4
3
2
1
003
29-5
22
100V
8
27V
122C
7
6 A 50Hz
5 60Hz
C
D
4
7
6
5
3 B
2
1
3
2
1
23 5E2022
19
21V
3PL3
201B
3A3. a1
b1
a1
b1
3PL1.M
E2
10
004C
1E2 1E1 5
3A1.a35
3PL1.F
E2
14
1
+ 5,05V
+ 5,05V
0V
+ 24V
16
5
E2
3A12
3A26
+12 V
a1
b1
a1
3A19a1 a1
017A
0V
201B
114F
3A7
3A9
3A12
3A19
3A26
a3
b3
a3
b3
a3
b3
a3
a3
a3
3A5
3A7
3A9
3A12
3A19
3A26
a4
b4
a4
b4
a4
b4
a4
a4
a4
3A3.
3A5
3A7
3A9
3A12
3A19
3A26
a2
a2
b2
a2
b2
a2
b2
a2
a2
a2
3A3. a3
b3
0V
3A1.a13
12
2 12
15
3A9
3PL1.B 016D
3A5
3A7.b35
3A7 a1
b1
3PL1.S
9PL124
3PL1.H 017A
121B
3A5
1A1.PL1.2
122A
SENSE
0V
OUT 4
24V/2
A
090D
17
0V
3A1.a3
+ 12V
SENSE
002B
0V
OUT 3
1 12V/1A
004C
11
10
4
5
6
21 22
9A1 TRANSPANEL
240V
5Tb1.
1
SENSE
119D
5Tb1.3
007B
9Tb1.1229
27V
D25
F31
1A
37
9Tb1.7 24
0V
PL4
R30
+
C32
470MF 1K5
122A
X 902
OUT 2
7
12,1V/2A + 12,1V
13
SENSE +
7
12
R29
1A1.PL1.1
DALLE 1
LOW VOLTAGE PS
1E8
R28
100E
3PL3.X
3PL5.B
PL11
Mod
.
+ 12V
K27
Avt.
5TR1
1
Serial No
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
1
DR4
DR7
Stenoscop 2 Series 6000 / 9000

C.C.D. M.D.A.
011B
K1 61
8
1
Gnd
4E10
4CR7
9Tb1.5
10
11
Monitor 2
20
21
22
275
V
9F3
5A
9Tb1.
MODULE 4 CONVERTER
58
59
60
9Tb1.6
12
21 22
3B
9TR1
6
5
4
33
32
9F2
1 1A 2
M
3A3. a4
b4
12 V
1E2
12 E2
11
31
2
1A1.Tb3
1
122C
+5 V
ALIM. 90W
861371P015
Tb2.
CARD RACK GROUND
1E5
1A1
MOTEUR
1 ARCEAU
121/130
Tb3.
20
004
005
MODULE 5
006
007
008 / 010
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

PANELS 1 3 4 5
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
832 502 G015
MODULE 1
E1
E2
E3 E4
E5
E7
E10 E11
E13
ALIM.
B.T.
A
A
A
A
A
A
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
L.V.
P. SUP
MODULE 3
1
R1
1
R2
C3
C4
1C1
Tb1
1
R3
1
R4
MODULE 4
R5
R6
R8
R10
R9
R11
C3
MODULE 5
R5
R6
R7
R8
29-6
C4
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3PL1
PL1 PL3
3A19
1R3
3PL3
a17
a16
036B
2
2 4Tb1
0MF47
4DS1
4A1
4C1
PL1
5MF
4R2
4CR2
4Tb18
470
K
4C3
4CR5
2MF
3x
0E68
50W
E1
4C4
PL1
CR7
1
2
SKT12
F10DS
4R3
5MF
6 5
PL2
4A2
R10
R11
22E
22E
4E7
50
W
4A2
PL2
1
2
C35
2x100M
2500pF
4R4
007C
CR1
B
D
F
PL1
C365N
R
CR2
H
CR3
FA
100
K
2 x 22K
VC
IN
Tb24 E6
2
W33
CR4
R8
3K6
5
3K6
5
3K6
5
8
9
10
021D
VC
VC
OUT
E2
1K
1
0
R10
3K6
5
6
mesure
mA SC
021E
C6
100
K
100E0
4
3
PL2 1
15
0.5
10
3PL1S

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Avt.
6SaTh2
013
29-7
11
Mod
.
3PL3W
031C
SEC. BELLOWS
+ 12 V 008B
3A9.b7
071A
b15
R507
R509 3
47K
2K2
R506
100K
014
3A19
a22
TH
MODULE 8
IMAGEUR IMAGER
012
mesure
mA Gr
6Sa1
1E4
Rev.
A
0
1
2
HD281
2
3PL1
Serial No
021F
1.8
5A1
PUISSANCE
CHAUFFAGE
081090
6A1
CI DIVISEUR
3X
30S6
035BE
3A19
COMMANDE SCR
011
C34
R5
2K2
R7
16
10
C27
R4
3
4
AC
mesure kv
7 VA
C9
130450pF
2500pF
MAIN SCR
200
R17K
10K
FC
6
11
E4
R12
PL1
MAIN SCR
R13
2200p
F
200
K
2200p
F
C11
2500pF
4A2
R14
C19
2x100M
OUT
AA
10K
E1
100
K
PL2
R18
R15
5
S
4x
470E
7W
E3
VA
OUT
C16
7
8
3A12
kV/mA
PL1
1K
2K2
130450pF
CAPA PREPO
C28
4A1
SELECT. CAPA
AUX.
E5
IN
7
4CR6
VA
IN
2500pF
L3
005B
007B
6PL1
2
4
6
7A2
LASER
CONTROL
0V
+12V
P
1R1
4CR4
L
A
C
E
G
1R2
4A1
3/5
4C5
4000MF
2~
4x
470E
7W
L1
4TR1
4CR3
5Tb2
11R4
C365N
237K
005A
2 x 22K
4CR1
5
6
4C2
2MF
1
3
5
7
9
MODULE 6
CUVE RX X RAY HEAD
6PL1
1C1
4TR2
4E10
~
+
4C6
4C7 1
220K
4CR7
220
2A4
031B
+12V
008B
X RAY
Hand Switch
MODULE 4
ONDULEUR CONVERTER
3PL3
LASER P.B.
4K7
50W
015
+ 12 V
3A26.a1
008C
016
a11
C508
10K
G166.B
4
R504
470E
832 502 G015
b16
3A7.a16
C505
TH
054F
a29
10K
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
a12
3A3
a22
a23
3A5
b17
b18
3A7
SECURITE PRESENCE CI
PB PRESENT SAFETY
017
a21
a22
3A9
031F
a32
12 V CI
3A19
a20
a19
3A26
018 019
/ 020
a28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
14
4011
13
12
11
10
GND
7
VCC
4040
16 15 14
VCC
Q11
Q10
13
Q8
12
11
10
Q9 Reset Clock Q1
12 Bit Binary counter

40106
14 13
VCC
29-8
12
11
10
Q12 Q6
Q5
Q7
Q4
Q3
Q2
GND
GND
7
GE Medical Systems
REV 1
3A19.a18
SEXP

a14
220K
a3 E6
0V
Card rack
12V
R60
10MF
C179
10MF
a4
C176
C56
100K
C130
100K
C178
100K
C57
100K
C204
100K
C129
100K
C501
100K
C205
100K
+12V
R64
4K7
10K
+12V
D65
42K2
100K
R45
3A19.b5
CONSIGNE kV/20
a12
098A
R11
R12
2K2
2K2
R10
C13
100K
10K
A152.B
a6
R6
OX
10K
031A
G31
G30.A
10
R40
4K7
G32.B
G33.C
33K
a15
C8
+12V
10K
220K
R76
+12V
+12V
D224
R9
3A19.a29
PRI
CLOCK
R140
a35
Va
3
Mesure kV
Gnd 4
R302
953K0
C303
R216
100pF
2K
6
A315
9
10
018B
R186
R185
46K4
953K0
LF356
2K2
LF356
R232
kV COMPOSITE
4M7
027E
R103
R91
R93
Rev.
A
0
1
2
15K4
15K4
A102
3
LF356
R100
30K1
10K
3
A313
D99
R105
11K0
R317
R306
23K7
R197
R96
95K3
95K3
1M
12
10K0
10
E4
13
R117
R115
11K0
A114.C
R116
R118
6K8
A114.B
R173
4K7
D325
D507
R172
1K
2K2
R127
2
100K
LM32
4
100K
D119
A114.A
LM32
4
CONSIGNE kV/20
A122
13
12
A114.D
14
R120
G34.A
6K8
R128
G34.B
4
2K2
a18
3A19.a19
DEM X
031D
D125
R121
10K
E2
R124
+12V
R162
100K
R155
5K36
LM32
4
D174
R126
4K7
10K
R156
10K
R16
47K
100K
10K
R508
R123
024D kV COMPOSITE
R500
+12V
10K0
10K0
LM32
4
023B
R171
R170
Mod
.
LF356
95K3
R110
Avt.
A97
R113
022B
Serial No
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
12V
R321 C323
10K
12V
2K2
+12V
1K
A314
G34.F
301K
D324
LF356
R96
R320 C322
1M
1K
8
20K5
LF356
31K6
R112
R307
C95
71K5
Q92.B
R98 6
301K
R104
CONSIGNE kV/20
R319
A160
3
R158
R161
R163
15K
2K2
D159
G34.C
5
10K
a16
A26.a24
kV 85 o/o
081D
D164
10K0
R157
1K
30K1
R195
9
C198
D194 D193
100K
Mesure mA Sc
018D
R202
C199
100K
R201
95K3
95K3
R210
R209
95K3
Mesure mA Gr
R215
95K3
187K0
A192
A152.C
a27
10
a8
D207 D206
2
3
R213
LF356
187K0
13
187K0
A203
A152.D
a7
14
12
LM32
4
R153
R151
10K0
95K3
120 kV
3A19.a23
Mesure mA Sc
081E
R208
95K3
3A19.a28
031C
LM32
4
LF356
187K0
C211
C212
4K7
R214
2
3
R200
4K7
121K
11K0

C.C.D. M.D.A.
2Q92.A
R111
R318
F 018D
G34.D
10K
10K
23K7
C137
4K87
R311
R316
G33.A
71K5
C78
D88
+12V
1M
LF356
R300
1K
A312
121K0
A180
A138
R136
R131
10K0
10K0
2
R135
LF356
R310
R184
E7
1
1
4K7
10K0
1M
10
R89
R101
D134
6
A132
R309
R308
LF356
R305
100pF
Vc
4
2
10K
121K0
C301
All unmarked diodes are 1N6263
6K8
R181
R304
555
2K2
R87
829 825 G025
Q79
6
22K
E8
46K4
1K
3A12 CI kV / mA 2
R133
220K
R189
10MF
2K2
E5
R141
PL1
220E
C77
C82
R84
D139
4K7
031E
6A1
PL2
C85
1
K
040B
3A19.a34
D83
100
K
R80
G33.B
10E
12K
1
+12V
R86
G32.C
220K
a11
RX REQ
+12V
R81
D4
5082
H
2K2
R5
3A26.a32
Mesure mA Gr
081C
10K0
A152.A
a10
(Mesure mA Gr)
3
LM32
4
021
INT 4 CLQ
3K3
10
D43
R41
G30.B
3A19.a26
B
11
G30.C
TROU CLQ
031C
R3
a9
Q3
4040
C42
R7
10
LF356
D48
G32.D
16
G32.E
12 11
13
2K2
12V
025D 028E
G32.F
R50
33K
CONSIGNE kV/20
10K
3A19.a5
40K2
A46
D49
R47
3A19.a25
031D
47K
5K62
1K87
a5
+12V
470K
R51
R44
R58
D53
C54
R52
1M
12V
+12V
4K7
R61
100K
PRX
116C
3A3.b12
R14
G32.A
6K8
R62
A55
R59
C500
100K
R63
LF356
100K
a13
13
E1
+12V
+12V
C177
103B
11
a1
+12V
G33.D
12
R15
035B
022
023
29-9
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

14 13
VCC
4012
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
4023
40106
PL1
2
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
12
11
10
4093
Dual D Flip Flop

14 13
Vcc
4013
CL
GND
6
7
Dual MONOSTABLE
4538
13 12
R/C
CD
R/C
CD
+TR TR
11
+TR TR
10
T =RX X CX
Q
1 : High level
16 15 14
Vcc
GND
8
29-10
0 : Low level
X : Dont care
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2
828 982 G035
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

+12V
R25
a13
3A12.a26
4 57
12
R4
201C
D8
D10
BPCL
47K
007B +12V
100K
10K
47K
100K
007C
+12V
47K
STOP mAs
INT 4 CLQ
a23
030B
a26
+12V
033E
Q1
033E
100K
3A12.a18
R33
a19
+12V
R41
TROU CLQ
a25
10K
R47
LF356
6K8
a27 R45
R98
2K2
G120.
D 11
4K7
D97
Avt.
G119.B
E166
470
K
100
K
+12V
G120.B
G115.E
G118.D
11 11
G114.
B
4
C129
R208
4K7
Q210
10K0
G161.F
DEM X
C104
021C
032D
R200
TROU CLQ
C196
10MF
C211
3A26.a20
12 V CI
a32
10K
032A
R68
SX
G216.D
1K
R192
G121.B
C
Q
R
R177
4K7
D186
G122.D
E260
G161.E
11
R258
10K
Q1
G216.
10 E
11
R72
R194
R195
47E
220K
47E
C67
4K7
G216.A
1
R106
10K
1K
C108
G216.B
4K7
C197
R105
100pF
G161.D
D267
BZX85C12
4 5
G216.C
6
13
G216.F
1
2
R284
2N222
2
2N2222
220K
032
10K
10K
C103
10K
11
1
0
2
2
10E
D341
R317
R318
BZX83C6V
D315 2
R343
BZX83C3V
220
3
E
220
E
220
E
D270
1N506
1
10K
C328
220
K
100N
F
2N506
4
3
1
11
R273
10E
220
E
D329
R274
BZX83C6V
2
R331
D271
220
BZX83C3V
E
3
220
E
C277
4CR6
22K
012C
10
C333
MAIN SCR
100N
F
D290
R294
IT235
R288 C287
100
E
Q298
TR291
15E
4
10K
D292
1N506
1
C297
1N506
1
10034
220
K
2N506
4
3
1
10E
D335
BZX83C6V
D2932
R337
BZX83C3V
220
3
E
7
2
R295
R296
220
E
220
E
C299
22K
Q189
2N2222
034
012C
Q330
R272
IT235
C275
12V(C)
033
4CR4
22K
R190
4K7
C321
MAIN SCR
TR269
C328
R102
220
K
2N506
3
1
4
BD140
D289
Q178
012C
15
100N
F
R286
3K3
4CR7
22K
220
E
100N
F
Q278
R283
10MF
R50
C319
1K5
220
E
4K7
G113.E
018D
1N506
1
10K
R279
R280
BZX83C3V
3
Q320
D314
R266 C265
100
12V(C)
+12V(A)
Q281
220
E
R325
D2502
C327
15E
4
10K
D323
BZX83C6V
C255
BD140
BZX85C12
R217
R264
D107
R252
R316
IT235
R310 C309
100
10K
E282
16
2
SELECTION CAPA
AUXILIAIRE
TR313
15E
4
Q256
4K7
12
10E
100N
F
1K5
220
E
13
2N506
3
1
4
C339
R263
R262
10
220
K
100N
F
R257
Q259
2N222
2
R285
G122.A
C253
1N506
1
10
BZX83C6V2
R181
2K26
R51
29-11
4K7
R187
11
470E
031
10K
11
10K
12V(C)
+12V(A)
R261
1K5
12V
031E
47E
C198 R188
12
C340
13
D180
R179
SYX GR
10K
Q324
R251
1N506
1
1N506
1
Q1
2N2907
C193
Clock
D312
031E
Q185
D182
R215
D311
BZX85C12
12
10MF
a11
C18
470
E
PL1
D249
R245 C244
100
R308
3K3
6K8
4K7
1K
a21
R17
BD140
D268
R183
21K5
041D
PREPOSITIONNEMENT
CAPA
IT235
Q300
220
E
+12V
033C
330E
G112.C
10
TR248
15E
4
1K5
R305
R S
12
13
G121.A
D
Q
R306
R302
2N2222
100
K
4538
11
14
10
Q235
R301
Q303
R154
G155.B
021A SEXP 116A

3A3.a17
3A12.a14
3A5.b8
D31
10K
100N
F
C322
100
14
5
K
13 T1B
T 2B
Q
031D
+12V
10K
C85
C344
1N506
1
4K7
+12V
10K
Clock
10K
G161.
5C
C153
R307
G122.B
555
2
6
033C
D191
a34
6
8
12V(C)
+12V(A)
+12V
G113.D
R140
10
2N2222
R199
D246
BZX85C12
10K
9
13
RAD
3A12.a35
G113.C
5
R243
3K3
G128
C162
10MF
D139
Clock
330
E
BD140
R240
E304
038A
1K5
220
E
828 982 G035
C126
619E
0D220
12
C209
2N2222
3A19 CI COMMANDE SCR2
Clock
R218
3K6
5
R163
W165
G120.
8
C
10
SEXP
220E
Mod
.
G161.A
12
a18
47K
1K
D247
Clock
2K0
5
R221
BZX83C6V2
R52
SEXP 032D
R84
G114.D
R70
2K2
R237
4K7
R175
6K8
R127
G122.C

C.C.D. M.D.A.
4K7
10K
031E 032C
R207
22K
2M2
D157
081D
10K
11
10
R214
R130
10K
46K4
R205
R201
R212
12 V
C99
R206
R241
1K
22K
2K2
E164
035A
+12V
R242
E124
R219
3
4
5
031D
A204
C176
220
K
R100
2K2
TROU CLQ
033C
R44
Serial No
1K
13
Clock
13
G114.C
R236
Q238
D174
10E
G119.A
12
Q
R
PRE
3A26.a31
+12V(A)
R101
C94
+12V
032E
+12V
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
2K2
D54
R53
R110
10K
039B
Rev.
A
0
1
2
4K7
C19
470
E
4538
TR
+12V
DEM X
D156
a10
G155.A
E239
220
K
+12V
10K
C109
2K2
2
1
8
5
6
RAD
R71
+12V
C213
G161.B
R184
PRI
f max
R96
032D 033D
+12V
R111
3K3
030B
R43
a28
032D 033D
R92
038A
R95
10K
TROU CLQ
100K
3A12.a5
2K2
G118.B
220
K
C93
100
K
220
K
G115.
6
C
G117.A
2K2
2K2
G120.A
R146
R38
R46
10K
030D
4K7
100
K
100
K
032D
E
R145
116C
SYX SC
3A26.a28
081F
10K
1 3
R91
R39
Clock
R32
DEM X
030E
1 2MF2
T
T
2
1
+TR
+12V
220
G117.B
10K
a22
085D
R144
10K
a20
016E
13
C28
D158
330
K
10K
a15
470
E
+12V
R159
C160
C147
D143
G115.B
2
3
4
5
R42
3A12.a9
Q1
+12V
+12V
G113.A
R27
10
C89
R40
3A26.a21
3A12.a27
120 kV
a36
2K2
100
K
G112.B
G118.A
2K2
PL1A
SEC BELLOWS
a35
4K7
R36
1K
C74
S76.B
3PL6L
+12V
5E21
R79
2
8
R90
100K
10K
10
9
R37
C14
R63
5Tb1
1
RAD
R16
R15
a9
1 G116.A
100K
038A
D87
2
+12V
R80
C66
10K
2K2
C86
10K
8 G118.C
S76.
C
2K2
R65
2A4
RAD
R69
R11
a12
4K7
100K
038A
3
1
D57
G119.C
038A
R88
+12V
R77
2K2
RAD
G114.A
11
12
R35
13
12
11
10K
1
2
13
2K2
R55E
10K
10K
1 G112.A
3
C6
R64
PL1 PL3 3PL3
RAD R5 S76.D
220
10K
G112.D
R48
G113.F
R58
+12V
R34
100K
R7
a7
R56
9
10
R78
D9
038A
3A7.a34
PEDALE DE SCOPIE
FLUORO FOOT SWITCH
10K
R62 032F +12V

1K
Hand
switch
220
K
SX
066A
X RAY
C59
C60
13
2K2
R3
G113.B
11
R61
1K
a6
116F
3A7.b8
102C
S76.A
3A1.a17 3A3.b28
OX
100
K
22K
2K2
a5
051A 021B
3A3.b18
R49
C22
106B
201E
+12V
R21
47K
a30
3A1.a15 3A7.a7 3A12.a6
OX
R24
100
K
035
4CR1
012C
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

PL1
3A19 COMMANDE SCR 2
29-12
828 982 G035
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3
+12V
R20
A
GR
3A7.a29
100
K
a14
R73
R26
3K3
1K
G115.A
a8
R12
081E
C13
C75
066C
3A26.a36
RAD
470E
10K
10K
RAD 032B 033C

034B
3A12.a32 3A3.a8
103D
3A1.a22
111D
G115.F
12
13
RAD 032B
032A
+12V
DETECTION I
013A
4L1
+12V
4Tb1 PL3
R167
10K0
R168
4TR1
1b
a16
E1
2b
E172
R123
4A1
1
+12V
10K0
+12V
D29
R81
R83
10K
a17
R30
10K
12 V
R149
R152
A135
4K7
G115.D
9
D133
6K8
6
R171
a29
R173
A137
4K7
R132
D151
2K15
R138
C136
C134
10K0
22pF
PRI
031D
1K
R142
3A12.a11
PRI
021C
2K2
D170
1M
10K0
R169
2
10K0
2K26
R148
R141
R131
6K8
LF356
6
4L3
E125
R150
2
D82
1E
2W
50K
237K0
+12V
W350
+12V
+ 12 V
a1
12V
W351
R226
+12V(A)
10E
0V
12 V
a3
C231
C229
C202
100K
10MF
100K
W354
C224
10M
F
E233
C222
100K
C342
100K
a4
C232
C230
C203
100K
10MF
100K
W352
R228
W353
10E
C326
100K
C332
100K
C338
E234
100K
C225
C223
10MF
100K
L227
12V(C)
100mH
12V
3A 19 COMMANDE SCR2
828982G035
MASSE CARD RACK

12V
All unmarked diodes are 1N6263

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
036
037
29-13
038
039
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial No
Avt.
Mod
.
040
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
828 980 G025 / G035
3A9 CONSIGNE kV/mA 2

PIN
MAN 71A
1
14
a
2
3
13
b
g
11
c
10
DP
Cathode a
2
3
Cathode f
Commun Anode
6
7
NC
Cathode e
Cathode d
DIS kV
828229 P305
9
10
Cathode DP
Cathode c
11
Cathode g
13
14
Cathode b
Commun Anode
PL1
4 Bit Magnitude Comparator

4585
16
15 14
A3
13 12
B3 A > B A B A B3
X
X
X
Cascading Inputs
A3=B3 A2>B2
X
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1>B1
X
X
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0>B0
AB
1
AB
1
X
X
X
X
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0=B0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1=B1 A0<B0
A3=B3 A2=B2 A1<B1
A3=B3 A2<B2
A3<B3
29-14
7447
16 15 14
VCC
13
12
11
10
1
2
A
L
H
L
B
L
L
H
C
L
L
L
D
L
L
L
a
L
H
L
b
L
L
L
c
L
L
H
d
L
H
L
e
L
H
L
f
L
H
H
g
H
H
L
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
LT
a
BI/
RBO
RBI
GND
8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
072A
R105
2K87
C92
100K
R81
10K0
3A9 CONSIGNE kV / mA 2 828980G035
R82
5K62
G94
R80
10K0
3A7.b6
C7
G84.E
a23
10
+5 V
G36.A
C0
FC40
G36.B
A69
D26
D23
D25
D24
C70
100K
C93
100K
G36.F
13
12
11
G36.D
+5 V
058E
C7
+5
V
G22
G18
D28
D27
G36.E
11
10
G36.C
+5 V
R37
1K
C50
10K
R35
1K
C34
10K
1K
C72
10K
100 / 110 kV
40 / 49 kV
50 / 59 kV
60 / 69 kV
70 / 79 kV
80 / 99 kV
081A
2A1 MODULE G2
R30
1K
30 mA
60 mA
55 mA
47 mA
41 mA
33 mA
a6
a5
a8
a9
a7
R31
C73
10K
PL1
R29
1K
R205
10K
C33
10K
CONSIGNE kV / 20
3A2
6
a10
a16
a10
a14
a12
a8
b36
R32
1K
021B
3A1
2
a12
b5
+5 V
C74
10K
a1
b2
DISPLAY kV
PL3
+5V
+5 V
DS25
R225
G19
+5 V
C0
FC110
3A7.b5
12
R204
10K
G67
G84.F
a24
+5 V
C7
+5 V
C7
Q241
2N2222
Q240
R185
R220
R221
R219
R224
R222
R223
G138
2N2222
R203
10K
DIS
kV
13
058D
+5 V
R206
10K
R226
2 x 150E
+5V
7 x 150E
a20
a21
100
+5 V
a18
a13
a14
a12
a19
a15
a17
DS24
010
+5 V
G21
R214
R216
R215
R212
R217
R213
R218
G172
+5 V
110kV
C0
+5 V
E3
G121
W245
E4
+5 V
E5
105K
G20
074C
a21
+ 12 V
0 V
12 V
Q234
Q236
+ 12 V
C162
10MF
a/b3
091
2N2222
C159
100K
C158
10MF
a/b4
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Q237
2N2222
+5 V
G137
C161
100K
R201
10K
074B
Avt.
22E
R184
R183
R181
R180
R209
R188
R186
R45
R46
R44
R47
R42
R43
DS41
6x
100E
b18
b15
b14
b12
b11
b16
b23
b17
+5 V
DS40
7 x 150E
R182
R202
10K
C157
100K
Serial
No
b25
R187
C160
10MF
12 V
b24
R190
2N2222
G120
Rev.
A
0
1
2
Q235
+5 V
a/b1
001
+5 V
DISPLAY mA / mAs
R189
2 x 22E
R197
10K
a/b2
DS23
7 x 150E
2N2222
22E
Q239
2N2222
Q238
2N2222
R200
10K

C.C.D. M.D.A.
2N2222
R194
10K
R198
10K
C0
+5 V
Q233
2N2222
R199
10K
BUS kV /
20 071C
a22
Q232
R191
10K
R195
10K
C7
PWB Presence
R192
10K
R196
10K
C0
018D
R193
10K
a11
a6
a5
a2
a7
a3
a10
Mod
.
b13
+5 V
+5 V
G136
R177
R176
R174
R173
R179
R175
R178
b8
b7
b3
b1
b10
b5
b9
DS39
7 x 150E
092
093
29-15
094
095
096
097
098099 / 100
081B
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A12 kV mA 829 825 G025
4012
14 13
VCC
11
10
40106
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
4023
12
4040
16 15 14
VCC
Q11
Q10
13
Q8
12
10
Q9 Reset Clock Q1
12 Bit Binary counter
Q12 Q6
Q5
Q7
Q4
Q3
Q2
11
10
GND
7
16 15 14
Vcc
13 12
11
10
Dual MONOSTABLE
GND
6
7
11
12
4538
14 13
VCC
GND
8
29-16
R/C
CD
R/C
CD
+TR TR
+TR TR
T =RX X CX
GND
8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+12V

C.C.D. M.D.A.
A
Rev.
A
0
1
2
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
R17
+12V
R66
46K4
Mod
.
G35
10e
R143
R217
100K
R71
100K
PL1
RAZ MINUTERIE SCOPIE

FLUORO TIMER RESET
a 33
b 15
045A
G36
2
3
4
5
G36
R130
Q141
150E
PL1
Sm7
+5 V
BP COMMANDE CLICHE
X RAY CONTROL BP
2N2222
15
10
Q12 1
G37
4040
Q10 14
Q2
11
Q1
CLK
9
7
11
a 26
R154
a 26
470K
a 19
3A19 - a30
031A
10K
051C +12V
b 16
3A5
CI MINUTERIE
Sm26
PL5
PL2
a 34
a13
042B +12V
G35
PRX
R153
4K7 a 26
a 33
G74
+12V
1
150E
5
+12V
BP Cl 3A19 - a7
C223
27 VAC
29
RAD
PL4
9
XRAY ON
7
R38
100E
PL11
0 VAC
24
9Tb1.7
9A1 TRANSPANEL
832 782 G055
D624
1N5359
102
29-17
R627
4K7
G74
+12V
R106
11
220K
10
+12V
13
R/C
13
12
13
Q625
R504
10K
104
10
Q142
DS175
W220
G75
W230
+12V
G75
2N2222
11
10
G39.B
4538
-TR
G74
9
W231
2N2222
103
10K
14
12
+TR
R503
22E
3PL6
101
220K
W107
12
a 36
R108
220K
R623
22
003C
+12V
003C
W109
K37
G74
CR221
+12V
27
15
D42
-TR
+12V
G39.A
4538
R27
9PL1
+TR
040A
C39
220K
R/C
a 32
3A19 - a8
003C
10
10MF
16
CD
100K
031B
9Tb1.12
+12V
R222
2A3 MODULE D
9PL1
C
4
a29
b1
470K
470K
R152
3A12 kV mA 2
829825G025
R28
C29
R155
b33
041A
11
+12V
9
10K
a36
3A5 - a5
G35
026A
Q140
2N2222
131A +5 V
10
PRX.CP (50Hz)
426
R132
150E
a3
4K7
457
a 30
C23
R131
111C
13
2K2
a4
9
10
11
1
2
3A3 - a10
054F
R22
+12V
045A
+12V
16
CR20
G35
100K
a 21
CLIGN
a 23
100K
+12V
CLK
+12V
R21
G35
R24
CR26
16
G37
4040 Q11
10
PL1
E3
3A7 AD kV
Sm14
CR25
C68
+12V
12
3A7 - a19
10K
100K
2A1 MODULE G
R73
5
470K
G35
2 13
1M
10K
G69
555
C19
R72
C70
C67
10MF
100K0
+12V
R18
1M
3
4
5
CD
13
105
107
106
/ 110
108109
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Dual D Flip Flop

4013
14 13
Vcc
CL
12
11
10
GND
7
R
0
X
X
1
X
X
X
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
Q
0
1
0
Q
1
0
1 : High level
4016
14 13
VCC
Contr.
12
0 : Low level
11
10
Contr.
8
Out
Out
Out
2
In
Contr.
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
13 12
11
10
Out
832 502 G015
X : Dont care
In 1
4023
In
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
3 In
Contr.
Dual MONOSTABLE
4538
PL 1
40106
16 15 14
Vcc
C
R/C
CD
R/C
CD
14 13
VCC
12
11
+TR TR
+TR TR
10
T =RX X CX
GND
8
BA
M 1.1
PL1
E2
E3
7A1 FROTTEURS
4093
14 13
VCC
GND
6
7
12
11
10
GND
7
3A5 MINUTERIE
832 501 G015
BA
PL2
29-18
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
b30
b31
PL5
PL12
3A3 CI DIAPHRAGMES 2
b9
R245 b31
b5
C246
R8
121A
Rev.
A
0
1
2
100
K
47E
7W
a4
+12V
b6
12V
+12V
a8
b33
a5
a14
a35
G156.E
R56
4K7
R4
R52
4K7
2K2
G166.E
a22
10
11
C51
a3
b34
R18
100
K
G157.C
3
4
5
1
2
G164.E
G168.D
1
1
G157.B
4
6
2N2222
XX
R20
100
K
13
13
12
13
12
BPF2
13
12
3A19a8
RAD
G164.E
G157.B
4
W85
G157.A
100
K
RAD
CLIGN
R14
4K7
+12V
2N222
2
R62
4K7
040A
G164.C
R58
G164.B
BPF2
RAD
2K2
3
1
FC GR2
C57
G163.A
10K
112E
5
G163.B
5
4
3
2A3 PUPITRE
MODULE D 2
a21
b27
R135
112E
G180.B
FC GR2
RAD + Z
828 970 G015
MONO OFF
+12V
+5V
78F
2N222
2
b2
a30
b26
1K
R500
G167.C
S501.B
MONO OFF
47K
1
6
100
K R34
R84
4K7
828 970 G015

828 777 G015
R502
+12V
G167
2 3
2K2
C83
10K
Q
Q
D
4
112D G178.C
RAD
100
K
10
G167.D
+12V
G178.B
4
G164
C113
D110
1N91
4
+12V
11
R121
100
K
D125
T1A
+TR
R122
R123
4K7
2K2
1
3
+12V
12
4MF7
R126
+12V
100
K
R114
10K
G165.B
C
9
4013
RAD
C128
C124
220
KR127
Q
Q
12
D111
100
K
1N91
4
10K
R11
2K2
4K7
R72
R23
2K2
4K7
R80
R29
2K2
4K7
R115
D117
100
K
1N91
4
G178.A
RAD
C120
+12V
T1A
+TR
D118
100
K
1N91
4
12
FC Sc1
7Sa1
NO
+12V
R12
a9
100
K
FC GR1
7Sa3
NO
FC Sc2
7Sa2
+12V
R24
a16
100
K
NO
+12V
R30
a18
100
K
1
0
FC GR2
7Sa4
NO
7A1 CI
FROTTEURS
2N2907
7A2 CI
DISQUE
4K7
R247
680
E
a20
R244
20K
5
Q246
R240
2N290
7 R243
680
E
4K7
R253
100
E
C254
Q241
R242
100
K
D255
300
E
BZX83
C2V7
+
7M2
VOLETS INFERIEURS
LOWERS BLADES
D256
BZX83
C2V7
2N2222
1K
G181.C
10
12V
G172.B
4
+12V
D50
2
R203
R201
13K
3
10K
R196
8
47E
G176.C
R204
10
G176.B
40K
2
R202
10
A175.A
D193
R231
a23
Q190
BD14
0
12V
R195
1N5061
RAD
D49
T2A
QA
G155.B
13K
3
G177.B
G177.C
4
6
R208
40K
2
10
R206
1
2
1
3
11 13
a24
BD140
D194
R228
47E
G172.F
12
12V
R76
470
E
R229
100
E
C230
M.1.1 115A
4
9
C74
CHAMP/FIELD 16
1 FIELD II
CHAMP/FIELD 22
2 FIELDS II
+
7M4
0V(12V)
100
K
Q192
12V
R232
G178.D
Q191
BD139
LM324
A175.B
4K7
10K
100
K
20K
5
+12V
RAD
9
UNIQUEMENT EN
BICHAMPS
ONLY WITH 2
FIELDS II
100
E
+12V
R227
47E
G172.D
7M5
R198
R205
10K
CHAMP/FIELD
16
+
R207
G177.A
12V
11
C199
47E
G172.C
+12V
Q189
BD139
LM324
20K
5
+12V
G172.E
11
+12V
G176.A
T2A
QA
-TR
QA
CD
113
Q249
2N222
2
4538
R119
a6
100
K
10K
4K7
10MF
+12V
1K
3
112
29-19
Q251
G181.B
-TR
QA
CD
10
111
R60
10
K
G162.A
3
+12V
33K
C116
G167.B
2
13
4K7
R6
C71
R252
G168.
R245
10
C
220
K
C104
G172.A
1
1
0
G155.A
R105
G167.F
1N914
R250
4K7
G180.C
10K
112B 113A
113D
10
11
12
13
10
4538
R112
G167.E
+12V
G181.A
1N5061
+12V
+12V
2K2
10K
4K7
G179.C
12
11
13
+
7M3
VOLETS SUPERIEURS
UPPER BLADES
BZX83
C2V7
R248
10MF
R108
4013
C109
14
1
13
220
K
C109
10K
G165.A
3
4
5
+12V
R106
+12V
R33
a2
FC Sc2
300
E
G179.A
G179.B
8
2
1
12
11
13
RAD
4K7
S501.A
Sm17
119C
R137
Q142
150
E
8
2
1
4
3
2
C78
BP02
Z1
12
FC GR2
RAD
118E
R5
C59
BPF2
BP02
RAD 112B 112E
10K
R10
100
K
G156.B
G162.B
G180.A
8
2
1
RAD
FC GR2
CLIGN
C61
R9
11
FC Sc2
4K7
2K2
R54
+12V
G163.
9
R138 10C
100
K
10
K
FC GR2
2
BP02
Q141
G156.C
G156.F
+12V
FC Sc2
112E Z
10
D226
C53
FC GR1
10
11
FC Sc2
150
E
100
K
a8
FC Sc1
BP02
R36
R13
M.1.1
2N2222
12V
G156.E
G158.A
154
E
BZX83
C2V7
C224
Q211
R212
10
7M1
R16
D225
100
E
680
E
4K7
FC Sc1
R223
R210
1K
RAD
RAD
G158.F
1
2
2K2
+12V
106A
33K
FC Sc1
FC GR1
+12V
R86
BP02
R68
Q216
2N290
7 R213
FC Sc2
G164.F
G166.F
a28
a10
115F
a21
680
E
RAD + Z
4K7
C65
10K
10K
R215
10
10
R217
2N222
2
R214
G168.A
G160.C
Q222
4K7
M.1.2
2N2907
4K7
11 G169.C
10K
3A12a23
CLIGN
11
12
13
3 G169.B
BP01
C67
a16
R221
10
BZX83
C2V7
Q218
FC GR1
R144
2K2
4K7
a33
G160.A
5
4
G159.C
12
11
13
2
8
1
G160.
B FC GR1
10 1
3
11
G161.B
Q140
G164.A
R66
4K7
R19
a14
4K7
BPF2
R17
+12V
FC GR1
R219
ROTATION
3PL1 PL1
D90
100
K
R220
G158.E
150
E
Sm14
112E
BP01
R35
10K
a13
BPF1
G159.B
3
5
4
G158.B
+12V
b36
112B
BPF1
G168.B
RAD
RAD
BP01
3A5
MINUTERIE
b7
BP01
2K2
10K
100
K
Sm13
Mod
.
G156.D
10
11
C55
R3
a1
RAD
BZX83
C2V7
C92
G159.A
112E Z
G169.A
1
2
8
XX
R8
100
K
Sm16
b35
FC Sc1
FC Sc1
BPF1
R7
a7
+12V
+5V
Avt.
+12V
Sm15
131A
Serial No
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
8
2
1
D89
100
E
+12V
BP01

C.C.D. M.D.A.
47E
7W
Sm12
BPF1
832 502 G015
Sm11
R39
007C
b19
3A1.a19
1K
114
115
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2
4093
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
40106
29-20
832 502 G015
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3A19.a18
SEXP
R26
4K7
a17
R75
2K2
C73
10K
R25
100K
035B
SC
a19
051D
3A7.b31
ER
R31
100K
R32
4K7
R82
2K2
R38
4K7
C81
10K
R88
2K2
+12V
b29
R37
100K
3A7.a8
AUTO
R22
4K7
a15
3A7.b5
FC110
3A19.a15
SYX Sc
b18
R77
4K7
117F
R41
4K7
3A12.a13
C91
10K
PRX
C63
10K
030A
G158.C
R129
1K
G158.D
6
Q512
H11A5100
R532
100K
Q132
H11A5100
Sm 21
R99
2K2
R48
4K7
C97
10K
R101
2K2
+12V
PL2
PL5
b15
a32
a6
a35
PRESENCE
CI
016D
a9
2A3 PUPITRE
MODULE D
E
R46
4K7
+ 5v
Z1
112D
+12V
3A5
0V
(12V)
MINUT.
12V
R47
100K
13
12
R153
2K2
3A7
PL1
PL2
b4
PL1
a35
b17
AD / kV
a17
a16
b16
PL1
3A26.
a1
7
081A
a1
3
3A5
MINUT.
+5V
3A19.a6
OX
a/b2
C182
100K
C185
10MF
+
C187
10MF
C184
100K
C186
100K
C200
100K
C197
100K
b13
C183
10MF
ON = POWER DERATING
S133.B
ER
C102
10MF
R27
100E
1.18
b20
BEAM MAX
1.15
C131
220K
b32
R517
47K
18
15
116
117
29-21
X RAY ON_
+ 24V
2N2907
R96
1K
R136
4K7
R44
1K
C98
220K
b33
ZOOM
10
3PL2
W 1.11
1.7
R518
2K2
a36
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial No
Avt.
Mod
.
MODE 1
G177.D
9
8
13
G176.D
12
13
11
301
A175.D
R174
100K
G162.E
14
12
R520
1K
C521
10K
11
12
10
118
a25
3A5.b10
041C
A175.C
a29
3A9.b6
077C
119
ABD
MODULE 8
IMAGER
SYX Sc
117C
9A1 (K27)
Transpanel
004C
Auxiliary coil
R173
100K
RAD
112D
G161.C
3PL5
A
OX HLC
C519
100K
031A
2A1 PUPITRE
MODULE G
GO TO BLACK
126C
Q149
R150
10K

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
117B
+12V
b28
+5V
R516
100K
a27
C515
220K
832 502 G015
C103
100K
b17
7
3A5.b9
Cde RX
041D
12V
Sm 4
R514
1K
2N2222
G155.16
a/b1
a/b4
CCD
Interconnect board
Q152
+12V
E188
CLTV_
0V (24V)
CAG
3A3 DIAPHRAGMES 2/CCD
a12
a/3
16
1.
9
G163.D R154
11
10K
C100
10K
a11
R151
100K
Q209
4016
+12V
R45
100K
a33
S133.A
R130
100E
Q145
H11A5100
a34
a32
126D
8
R513
1K
R511
2K2
BEAM
S133.C
J6 423
3PL2
2N2222
S133.D
G166.C
13
C147
220K
Q148
G166.C
R503
100K
GOTO BLACK
R64
2K2
+12V
R93
2K2
SYX Sc
117F
R16
4K7
R15
100K
C235
10MF
R43
1K
R70
2K2
C79
10K
b12
R238
10K
+
+12V
R40
100K
+12V
R236
10K
ER
R134
2K2
035A
G171.A
R239
200K
+12V
R28
100K
12
Q145
H11A5100 2
R94
3K3
R42
4K7
D237
1N6263
R143
6K8
G162.F
a31
058D
13
+12V
C69
10K
R21
100K
051A
G171.B
5
6
G161.A
C87
10K
065B
11
13
+12V
3A7.a10
R139
10K
G161.D
12
R95
1K
G171 5V POWER SUPPLY
120
to
440
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

40106
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
4093
32
TB2
F5
34
22
24
12
32
14
34
11
31
21
K34
22
24
12
14
11
21
31
K44
PL1
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC

TB3
29-22
F18
832 359 G015
W62 W62
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
111B
+12V
2A3
PL5
PL2
Sm23
PL1
MINUTERIE
PUPITRE MOD. D
3A5
+12V
006B
006D
b3
a31
b4
b32
Sm22
C36
3PL3
E
C37
10MF
0V
R10
47K
100K
PL1
G16.A
R11
G16.B
2
2K2
C8
R24
3A7
PUPITRE MOD. G
AD kV
R14
47K
R15
2K2
R13
C12
100K
D7
Tb2
21
F5
3
A
12
1
3
23
5TR1
19
005D
1
0
11
3
2
R29
0V (24V)
11
31
X902 11
006C
Not
connected
20 E232
24
12
22
24
21
301
R50
R49
46E4
46E4
34
D22
32
32
C48
4MF7
31
3PL6.c
124E
4Tb1
6E87W
D20
+24V
4 x MR752
F18
10
R51
D21
3
A
W42
18VAC
+24V
4a
W41
0V (24V)
X902 12
J6
3PL2
124
125
126
3A3.b32
3A9.b32
b
127
128
129
0V (24V)
3a
3PL4
c
d
c
d
119C
080B
3PL6.W
124E
3A9.b35
MODULE 9 INTERFACE
To Monitor :
VIDEO Board
J2-1 523B
9PL1
080B
3A3.a33
BNC/BNC
423
+24V
0V
CCD
INTERCONNECT
BOARD
3PL3.T
119A
30
31
Video
DR4/MD10 memories only

mGycm2
9A1
TRANSPANEL
MDA
MEMORY
Sub-D
COM 3
DAP
INTERFACE BOARD
Sub-D
Nr 1
PL1
SK1
PL13
PL11
21
20
3PL6
42
37
MODULE 7 COLLIMATOR
BNC/BNC Plug
+24V
125C
( 3PL4-Y )
0V (24V) 125D
( 3PL4-c )
ION
CHAMBER
0V +24V
2
Blue
121
122
29-23
23
57
22
47
123
124
J4
427E
White
SGNL
H.T.
ELECTRONIC
DAP
MODULE
3PL2
440
C ARM
UP / DOWN
MOTION MOTOR
1M1
22
34
31
to
21
Tb3
MODULE 8 IMAGER
14
11
27VAC
5E20
PL1
14
12
D23
Mod
.
0V (24V)
1K
0V
(12V)
2x
1N5061
Avt.
K44
10K
K6
1
Serial
No
Q30
H11A5100
1N5061
22
G16.E
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
D45
1N5061
2N2907
10K
D3
D4
G16.F
0V (24V)
Q33
R31
G17.A
+24V
1K5
b36
2A1
R32
Sm9
b7
+12V
a32
Rev.
A
0
1
2
K34
10K
H11A5100
0V (24V)
+12V

C.C.D. M.D.A.
832 359 G015
Q25
1K
10K
Sm5
b11
D35
2N2907 1N5061
R26
G17.B
1A1 MOTEUR ARCEAU DC
Q28
1K5
+12V
007B
b35
b6
R27
100K
0V
(12V)
R9
PL1
+24V
+12V
SG.DAP
Test
Pulses
125
White
Red
126
129
/ 130
127128
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

BA
PL1
S32
3A5 MINUTERIE
832 501 G015
BA
PL2
CL
Dual D Flip Flop

4013
14 13
Vcc
Q
12
11
10
GND
6
7
R
0
1 : High level
40106
14 13
VCC
29-24
12
11
10
4023
GND
7
14 13
VCC
0 : Low level
X : Dont care
12
11
10
GND
7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+5V
051F
101C
111B
046B
111E
PL5
PL2
a7
+5V
R248
150E
a11
G140.A
2
R25
100E
+5V
Q195
+5V
+5V
R256
100K
S322
R255
4K7
b16
R203
2K2
R257
100K
R101
470E
R205
2K2
Not connected

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
G140.C
5
R29
100E
+5V
G140.E
11
10
R105
470E
R28
100E
a26
C31
470K
a27
Not connected
Not connected
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
Mod
.
Not connected
a28
Q57
4N32
C204
10K
a25
Q55
4N32
G106
4013
R258
4K7
b17
G140.B
C202
+5V 10K
S321
G140.D
9
R24
100E
C27
470K
2N2907
Sm10
3A5 MINUTERIE :
H/V Sweep Inversions TV Monitors Coil Rotation
H / V SWEEP INVERSIONS
Sm9
R24
7
150
E
+5V
a10
+5V
G140.F
12
13
PL5
Q194
2N2907
R167
100K
+5V
D164
1N6263
R156
2K2
C165
10MF
b14
R252
4K7
G163.B
Sm6
R249
100K
b8
Sm5
R25
0
4K7
C196
10K
K36
R149
470E
R266
2K2
G163.C
5
Q151
2N2222
R21
2
100
K
D210
1N6263
D211
1N6263
R21
3
2K2
D264
1N6263
R33
2K2
G163.E
11
10
PL1
2 4
R43
1K
D44
R153
22E
b25
31
34
27
9A1 TRANSPANEL
43
Q156
2N2222
D157
1N5359B
+ 12V
R168
22E
R169
470E
MONITOR 1
K35
D152
1N5359B
R154
470E
PL6
b24
33
36
+
12V
45
Q171
R170
10K
+5V
a24
9PL
1 38
47
R155
10K
G163.D
3PL
5 M 35
2N2222
D172
1N5359B
R47
1K
R173
22E
R174
470E
2N2222
K34
5
b26
38
41
MONITOR 2
7
R45
1K
50
Q176
R175
10K
D48
D177
1N5359B
D40
K33
8
Q59
2N2222
Not connected
R265
100K
R197
2K2
RAZ
ROTATION
b23
D46
5
R148
22E
R150
10K
D263
1N6263
R20
9
2K2
C208
10K
a5
+5V
C26
+5V 1
10K
R41
1K
R262
2K2
b12
R199
2K2
C198
10K
Sm7
G163.A
1
TV MONITORS COIL ROTATION
Sm8
R251
100K
+
12V
C58
1MF
R34
1K5
MODULE 9 INTERFACE
a17
b11
b13
042C
b10
R193
150E
a2
3A5 MINUTERIE
832 501 G015
2A3 MODULE D2
a21
131
132
29-25
133
134
135
136 137138139
/ 140
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
v.
2926
With MDA Memory
With DR4 & MD10 Memories
2 172 555
29-26
2 172 563
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
3PL5
MONITOR CART INTERFACE

C.C.D. M.D.A.
A
Rev.
A
0
1
2
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
Mod
.
MODULE 3 CARD RACK

3A1 a8
X PERM
+
N.U.
3A1 a9
3A1 a14
N.U.
3A1 a24
MG
+
VISU +
3A1 a25
3A1 a26
MEMO +
3A1 a28
3A1 a30
Common
3A1 a20
X PERM
3A1 a27
MF +
N.U.
3A1 a35
3PL6
9PL1
PL11
PL12
26
27
34
36
38
41
9A1 TRANSPANEL :
2 172 555 : MDA
2 172 563 : DR4 & MD10
PL10
5
7805
11
16
14
14
14
13
17
10
12
18
11
18
10
15
17
15
12
16
31
126D
0mF47
0mF47
Video OUT
49
1E8
MODULE 9 INTERFACE
9E3
50
9Tb1
24
5Tb13
53
54
55
29
5F2
1
2
9TR1
59
4E10
RX LAMP and DR4 / DR7

POWER SUPPLY
58
MDA
COM1
To Monitor :
VIDEO Board
J2-1 523B
48
IR
RECEIVER
PL7
3
30
Video camera
from module 8 Imager
4Tb1.7
PL11
PL12
60
61
4Tb1.6
141
142
29-27
143
144
145
147
146
/ 150
148149
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4012
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
12
11
10
4023
4093
40106
Dual D Flip Flop

4013
14 13
Vcc
Q
CL
GND
7
4538
R/C
CD
R/C
CD
+TR TR
11
+TR TR
10
0 : Low level
X : Dont care
3A1 INTERFACE DSM

T =RX X CX
Dual MONOSTABLE
13 12
1 : High level
16 15 14
Vcc
GND
8
29-28
828 988 G035
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
+12V
3A1 INTERFACE DSM

+12V
+12V
R107
100E
R150
200K
SP
204D
OX*R1
204B
T1
T4
203B
3
5
2
4
G82.A
C112
4MF7
G105.A
11
+12V
C619
10K
C613
10K
E12
1
R617
100K
SP
+12V
STOP HYST
G104.A
203B
ON RESET + MCH
208D
STOP DSM
G600.C
+12V
T5
208B
D632
13
G104.A
3
G105.E
10
11
12
G500.A 13
3
13
G104.D
C29
10MF
G106.B
R28
1K
R27
100K
OX OUT
+12V
R13
100K
202C
206C
R44
2K2
R12
G81.C
G81.D
10
11
D OX
3A19a6
a17
3A19a8
RAD
SP
066B
4K7
a22
C43
10K
R50
2K2
R17
R18
100K
040A
3A7b30
R10
R11
100K
031A
R42
2K2
4K7
a6
C51
10K
R36
2K2
R3
R4
100K
4K7
G78.F
13
12
G78.B
3
G100.D
9
4K7
G78.E
10
11
OX
RAD
G78.D
11
RAD
SP
G105.C
6
SP
C37
10K
R501
100E
G600.B
G80.D
9
1
10
G77.A
3
G78.A
203F
N
ON RESET + MCH
S602.A
203B
C603
10K

C.C.D. M.D.A.
G79.B
2
R54
R56
2K2
2K2
C57
10K
C45
10K
G77.B
203D 207C
OX OUT
202D
E
R
3A7b31
066B
3A5a13
HYST
045C
+12V
100K
202D
207C
209D
041D
G106.F
13
12
R20
100K
a23
RAD
X PERM
R32
470E
13
11
ACP
12
13
SP
T1
G101.A
201A 201F 202C

209B
202D
12
9
11
10
ON RESET
OX
ACP
+12V
201C 203E
G80.E
R69
100
K
13
R604
200K
C607
10MF
208C
10
11
STOP HYST
D68
1N914
R611
ER
202B 203B
201
SP
202E
ER
202
29-29
RAD
202D
2K2
2K2
C74
10K
202E
47K
R610
8
1
2
G116.A
9
G118.A
1
SN
R84
2K2
2K2
C91
10K
OX*R2
2K2
C612
100K
+12V
C135
1MF
C633
10K
G116.C
6
209B 209C
R634
100K
+12V +12V
ACP
201F
204B
203D
T2
T1
R637
100K
5
40
6
G601.B
C636
10K
208D
STOP DSM
206C
OX OUT
G115.A
D638
1n914
201B 204C
208C 209A
203
204
C67
10K
D137
E12
2
T3
207C
+12V
G119.B
G642.D
E60
8
+12V
R136
61K9
T3
D635
1N914
D605
ACP
Mod
.
12
13
OX*
205B
G115.B
Avt
.
201A 204A
208A
OX*R1
204C
10
+12V
Serial
No
R609
100K
SN
R606
100K
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
G100.F
R92
+12V
207B 208C
209B
G99.C
202D
R35
G100.C
G101.B
202F 209C
C70
1K
G106.A
R34
D83
1N914
202C
204E
204B
12
201B 202F 208C
202D
G81.A
G105.F
12
S602.B
3
C73
1K
G80.F
C53
100K
G116.E
10
13
11
Rev.
A
0
1
2
203B 205C
D33
1N914
G116.F
3
4
5
2
T1 + T2
4K7
a33
R52
2K2
R19
R641
470E
E
R
E
R
G106.D
OX*
G103.B
OX
204E
C72
10K
C640
1K
3A5a13
HOLD kV
R71
2K2
R14
a31
a18
AC
P
R31
100K
+12V
G79.D
201C 202E 202F 203D
G601.D
G116.B
+12V
13
G103.A
12
13
40 2
114F
G601.C
40
SP
G79.E
11
+12V
S502.A
ON RESET
1
2
10
201C
203D
202E
11
G600.A G600.D
ON RESET
D629
1N914
12
6
9
202B 202C
D26
1N914
13
G500.D
208D
ON RESET + MCH
G643.A
T2
205C
208A
208B
209C
G500.B
G105.B
3
12
STOP DSM
G80.C
G117.A
11
11
T2
E12
4
12
G601.A
204C
D139
G105.B
OX*
R140
187K0
10
G104.D
+12V
G622.A
+12V
G643.C
D626
1N914
a19
201B
208B
+12V
201B
201F
205C
208C
209A
E12
7
G622.A
10
11
E12
3
+12V
T1
G117.B
T5
G105.D
10
R631
220K
+12V
204D
12
C627
10K
G622.A
G105.E
D621
RAD
202D
OX*R1
D145
+12V
D143
C138
4MF7
C630
10K
R628
100K
R146
187K0
202E
+12V
+12V
E12
6
+12V
T4
202E
D618
1n914
R625
100K
C144
4MF7
STOP HYST
+12V
R142
100K
+12V
G81.B
+12V
E
202E
R
+12V
D149
G622.A
C616
10K
C624
10K
202D
R148
68K
G106.C
E12
5
D615
1N914
+12V
3A19b19
C147
4MF7
13
11
R614
100K
+12V
C141
4MF7
+12V
S
203F
N
12
10
9
11
G119.A
G116.D
C109
100K
R620
220K
R152
100K
G82.B
R114
100K
R113
100E
T4
X PERM
Q110
555
R111
470E
T1
+12V
209D
+12V
C108
10MF
R132
150K
202D
+12V
R151
200K
R66
100K
D65
1N914
205
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
4012
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
14 13
VCC
12
11
10
GND
7
12
11
10
GND
6
7
4023
4093
40106
Dual D Flip Flop

4013
14 13
Vcc
CL
13 12
R/C
CD
R/C
CD
+TR TR
11
+TR TR
10
0 : Low level
X : Dont care
3A1 INTERFACE DSM 828 988 G035

T =RX X CX
1 : High level
16 15 14
Vcc
Dual MONOSTABLE
4538
GND
8
29-30
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
G642.E
3A1 INTERFACE DSM

828 988 G 035
204D
11
OX*R1
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
203B
13
11
12
E59
10
PL12
4
11
T5
G102.C
13
T5
SP
OX*R2
11
OX OUT
D
OX OUT
2K2
T4
2K2
+ 12 V
0V
007C
205C
R9
470E
R90 1N914 R98
209D
2K2
1
G77.C
10
OX
RAD
G99.D
202D
11
T1 + T2
202D
14
E
R
SP
a27
15
a30
18
a8
11
MG +
R25
1K
4
6
MF +
C61
10K
G104.B
COMMON
C129
100K
10
C130
100K
9
8
OX*R2
S
N
T1
204B
T2
205B
D87
12
G76.C
+ 12 V
+ 12 V
2K2
C95
10K
R38
220
E
204D
202A 203D
207C
203F
X PERM
E49
G116.E
10
11
C5
10MF
16
X PERM.
C6
100K
X PERM. +
C62
10K
G79.A
12
D64
1N914
G79.F
12
R16
470E
13
R63
100
K
R46
2K2
C43
10K
G80.B
a21
C48
1K
C55
10K
203E
RAZ ROTATION
3A5b23
13
202B 203B
205C
Not used
R21
1K
10
2K2
C97
2K2
STOP DSM
11
SN
E13
1
Card rack
202D
S502.B
a3
a35
202E
R639
100K
2K2
C653
100K
2K2
C128
10MF
E
R
2K2
C93
10K
R88 1N914 R96
007C
203B
203E
+ 12 V
G76.B
G106.E
R652 1N914 R651
G500.C
X PERM
a24
VISU +
C22
10K
D89
a15
C41
1K
13
12
G76.A
031A
13
202D
3A9.a5
202E
R86 1N914 R94
D650
T3
14
D95
2
1
G76.D
203B
G99.A
10
G77.D
203E
S
N
6
11
R23
1K
12
OX OUT
a25
MEMO +
E58
G99.B
202C 205D
12
10
11
3
2
4
5
10
G102.D
204D
17
202D
G79.C
12
G75.B
a26
C60
10K
G102.B
13
G100.A
13
PL11
S
N
T2
R24
1K
S
N
203F
205B
G118.C
T1
204B
3PL6
G643.B
203E
G75.A
9A1 TRANSPANEL
Mod
.
9
10
12
11
MODULE 9 INTERFACE
6
5
T2
205B

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
9PL1
10
G80.A
2
R39
2K2
C40
10K
206
207
29-31
208
R14
4K7
R15
4K7
a20
10
15
a9
17
A/B+
a14
R7
4K7
209
R8
4K7
16
14
A/B
210
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
29-32
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
SECTION 30 - MAGNETEK MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
30-1
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
30-2
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


Purpose:
DISSASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY OF BOARDS

FROM THE MONITOR
Time:
Version No.: 0
Date: January 1997
Manpower: 1
ILLUSTRATION 1
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR WITH
CARDS LOCATION
1 : B.T. Power supply

2 : Deflection board
3 : A.T. Power supply
4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
6 : Light sensor board
7 : Yoke
8 : CRT
ILLUSTRATION 2
SIDE VIEW
30-3
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
POWER REMAINS ON THE MONITOR FOR 2 - 3 SECONDS
AFTER SWITHING THE TERMINALS PS OFF .
WARNING
VERY HIGH VOLTAGES ARE GENERATED IN THE MONITOR

( FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOCUS ELECTRODE IS IN THE REGION
OF 8 KV AND THE EHT IN THE REGION OF 23 KV ).
Capacitance discharge.
Note:
The screwdriver handle must be insulated.
When disconnecting the EHT cap (final anode) or performing a task requiring the CRT to be handled,
the CRT buld capacitance.
A safe method to do this follows :
D
Disconnect the monitor from its power source.
Connect one end of a wire to the shaft of a screwdriver (handle insulated) and connect
the other end of the wire to the CRT conductive braiding.
Hold the screwdriver by its insulated handle, then insert the tip under the EHT insulation
cal so the tip shorts the final anode to ground.
Take care not touch the screwdrivers metal shaft and not scratch the tube glass.
Phisical handling.
In addition to the safety precautions due to the presence of high voltage, the following guidelines
must also be observed :
D
Never attempt to remove or straighten the mounting lugs or reposition the outer rimband of the tube.
When it is necessary to remove the CRT from the monitor, never apply leverage to the glass bottle
or support handle or carry it by the neck (Wear safety glasses at all times when handling).
30-4
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
For the removal of boards from the monitor follow these instructions :.
1. Remove the plastic cabinet.
2. Remove the upper part of the metal cabinet.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
D
LV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 1 ).
Remove the screw supporting the plastic guide.
Remove the connection with the input AC connector.
Remove connector J2.
Remove connector J1 from the video board.
Remove the screw of the ground connection.
Remove the board from its position and replace it.
Carefully insert the new board in exactly the same position as the one removed.
Install the screw of the ground connection without tightening it.
Reinstall the plastic guide and tighten the appropriate screw.
Replace all connectors in the right position.
Reinsert the input AC connector.
Tighten the ground screw.
Deflection board ( illustration 1 : item 2 ).
Unscrew the metal support and remove it from the cabinet.
Unplug all the following connectors : J1 J2 J4 J5 J6 J7 W2.
Unplug connector J2 from the BT power supply board.
After removing the screws, remove the board from the metal support, then replace it.
Secure the new board on the metal support with the screws.
Plug the connectors on the deflection board and on the BT power supply board.
Screw the board support to the side panel of the metal cabinet.
30-5
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

D
HV power supply board ( illustration 1 : item 3 ).
Remove the connector of the anode voltage from the CRT and the TB2
of the video board.
Remove connector J6 from the deflection board.
Remove the screw placed to the left of the container and then carefully remove
the HV power supply.
Repace the HV power supply mounting it in the appropriate holding hole.
Reinstall the screw placed on the left.
Plug the power supply, anode voltage and TB2 connectors.
Video board ( illustration 1 : item 4 ).
Remove connectors J1 J2 J3 and TB2.
Remove connector J5 and W2 from the deflection board.
Remove the board from the CRT socket.
Replace the board.
Plug all connectors previously removed.
Connect the central socket to the CRT.
Selection board ( illustration 1 : item 5 ).
Remove the rear metal part with the adjustment potentiometers.
Remove connector J1.
Remove the light sensor connector.
Remove the two screws and replace the board.
Install the new board paying attention to the position of the led and of the trimmers.
Secure the metal plate to the frame.
Light sensor board ( illustration 1 : item 6 ).
Remove the connector placed along the wiring.
Remove the mounting screw of the board from the plastic frame.
Replace the board carefully placing the light sensor in the appropriate hole.
Secure the board with screws and insert the connector.
30-6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

D
CRT and deflection Yoke ( illustration 1 : item 7 & 8 ).
Remove the plastic rear part.
Remove the upper part of the metal chassis.
Remove the light sensor connector.
Remove the plastic front frame.
Disconnect the clip of the anode voltage from the CRT.
Remove the video board.
Remove the two yoke connectors from the deflection board.
Remove the CRT from the metal chassis by unscrewing the four mounting nuts
placed in the corners.
Remove the yoke from the CRT.
Replace the CRT and reinstall the yoke previously removed.
Execute all mounting procedures in the opposite order.
30-7
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
30-8
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
64
ADJUSTMENT SHEETS
641
GENERAL
The adjustment sheets given in this chapter comprise all possible preventive or corrective maintenance adjustments.
The first group consists of mechanical adjustments. The second group consists of electronic adjustments.
Before making any electronic adjustments, read the following instructions carefully.
CAUTION :
1) It is forbidden to remove or to replace a PWB when the unit is ON.
2) When a PWB is placed on an extender board, check the continuity of the earth connection with the extension
wire supplied. The omission of this earth connection causes malfunction of the unit.
NOTE : With the exception of the adjustments which are part of the replacement of the Xray head, of the
filament heating PWB 3A26, or of the timer PWB 3A5, all potentiometers have been calibrated in the factory
and do not have to be readjusted. A recalibration might be necessary in the case of the replacement of a
component on site. Before adjusting a potentiometer, check that the corresponding procedure is at hand.
In this case, follow the procedure described below for the respective adjustment.
THIS SIGN INDICATES THAT TO PERFORM ADJUSTMENTS, XRAY ARE

TO BE PRODUCED AND THEREFORE CARES AGAINST RADIATION HAZARDS
ARE TO BE TAKEN.
30-9
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
30-10
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 C.C.D. M.D.A Job Card RG 290 1 of 6

Purpose:
MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 100 HZ.
Version No.: 00
Date: June 1996
Time: 30 min.
Manpower: 1
ILLUSTRATION 1
CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
ILLUSTRATION 2
PARTIAL REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH ADJUSTMENT AND
CONNECTED
30-11
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Job Card RG 290 2 of 6

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
Oscilloscope Multimeter.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

Note:
D
Phisical handling.
D
30-12
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 290
ILLUSTRATION 3
DEFLECTION BOARD IN PLACE FOR THE
ADJUSTMENTS
30-13
3 of 6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Job Card RG 290

SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
Turn the unit off before removing the cover.
SECTION 4
PROCEDURE
D
Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.
Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).
Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 3 for
the adjustment.
Use a crosshatch image.
Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 100 Hz. (See ill.2)
Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.
Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.
Switch on the monitor.
Drive the monitor with a 100 Hz signal.
30-14
4 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


DEFLECTION BOARD
Location of regulations, Connectors and Test points
Description of the regulations

L4 : Horizontal linearity
R24 : C Vertical linearity 100Hz
R36 : Vertical shift
R41 : Vertical focus
R42 : Vertical frequency 100Hz
R43 : Vertical linearity 100Hz
R60 : Horizontal frequency
R62 : Vertical amplitude 100Hz
R72 : Brightness
R73 : Horizontal focus
R76 : Master focus
R81 : Horizontal phase
R156 : Horizontal blank
30-15
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


1.1
Vertical Frequency Adjustment.

Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust trimmer R42
to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.
1.2
Horizontal Frequency Adjustment.

Connect a multimeter betwen TP19 and TP20 of the
integrated circuit U2 on the deflection board and adjust
R60 to measure 0mV +/-5 mV.
1.3
Vertical Size Adjustment 100 Hz.

Adjust trimmer R62 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/1.5 mm.
1.4
Horizontal Size Adjustment.

Adjust R59 on the Power Supply Board so that the horizontal size measures 337 mm +/1.5 mm.
1.5
Vertical Linearity Adjustment (100Hz).

Adjust R43 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom
half of the image ( +/ 1.5 mm ).
Adjust R24 so that the size of the rectangles in the center equals the size of the rectangles
in the top and bottom parts of the image.
If necessary set the vertical size to 270 mm with trimmer R62.
Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R42.
Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.
1.6
With a nonmagnetic tool adjust L4 so that the width of the right half of the image equals the width of the left
half of the image ( +/ 2 mm); if necessary set the horizontal size to 337 mm with R59 on the B.T.
power supply board.
1.7
VERTICAL CENTERING
Adjust R36 so that the image is centered vertically inside the monitor bezel.
1.8
HORIZONTAL CENTERING
Adjust R81 so that the image is centered horizontally inside the monitor bezel.
30-16
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
MONITOR ADJUSTMENT IN 120 HZ.
Version No.: 00
Date: June 1996
Time: 30 min.
Manpower: 1
ILLUSTRATION 1
CARDS LOCATION
Position and cards description

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
ILLUSTRATION 2
PARTIAL REAR VIEW OF MONITOR WITH ADJUSTMENT AND
CONNECTED
30-17
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING

Note:
D
Phisical handling.
D
30-18
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Job Card RG 291
ILLUSTRATION 3
DEFLECTION BOARD IN PLACE FOR THE
ADJUSTMENTS
30-19
3 of 6
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
Job Card RG 291

SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
D
Remove the plastic cover: two screws on the monitor back side.
Unscrew and remove the metallic top cover (ten screws).
Remove the screw holding the scanning board and put it in place as showed in illustration 2
for the adjustment.
Use a crosshatch image.
Set the selector placed on the rear part of the monitor to position 120 Hz. (See ill.3)
Set the contrast and brightness controls to middle position.
Darken the light sensor placed on the front part of the monitor.
Switch on the monitor.
Drive the monitor with a 120 Hz signal.
30-20
4 of 6
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


DEFLECTION BOARD
Description of the regulations

L4 : Horizontal linearity
R36 : Vertical shift
R41 : Vertical focus
R60 : Horizontal frequency
R72 : Brightness
R73 : Horizontal focus
R76 : Master focus
R81 : Horizontal phase
30-21
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


2.1
Vertical Frequency Adjustment.

Connect a scope to TP9 and adjust R167 to obtain a sawtooth of 4V amplitude.
2.2
Vertical Size Adjustment.

Adjust trimmer R82 so that the vertical size measures 270 mm +/1.5 mm.
2.3
Vertical Linearity Adjustment (120 Hz).

Adjust R64 so that the height of the top half of the image equals the height of the bottom
half of the image ( +/ 1.5 mm ).
If necessary, use R82 to adjust the vertical size to 270 mm.
Correct the vertical linearity by adjusting trimmer R167.
Repeat the procedure for vertical linearity adjustment.
30-22
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

Purpose:
Version No.: 00
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND BLANKINK

ADJUSTMENT.
Date: June 1996
Time: 30 min.
Manpower: 1
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
DEFLECTION BOARD
30-23
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

SECTION 1
TOOLS REQUIRED
Standard tool kit.
SECTION 2
PRELIMINARY PRECAUTIONS
None.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
3.1
BLANKING
Use a crosshatch image and make sure that the light sensor is not active. Connect a probe to TP109
of the video board and adjust R54 to obtain a square wave with an ON time of about 30 ms.
Adjust R156 on the Deflection Board to obtain the correct blanking on the left side of the monitor.
Use R54 to adjust blanking on the right side if necessary.
VIDEO BOARD
R19 : Clamp
R29 : Cont.
30-24
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

DEFLECTION BOARD
VIDEO BOARD
R19 : Clamp
R29 : Cont.
30-25
GE Medical Systems

REV 1

3.2
BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST

The BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST controls are located under a door, on the back of the Monitor.
The controls have been preset when the monitor was installed and should not need to be changed : a light
sensor located on the front of the monitor adjusts the brightness and contrast of the image automatically,
according to the ambient light.
Use a white image with an input level of 250 mV of video signal.
Connect a probe to TP107 of the video board and adjust R19 so that the clamp pulse is 50 mV as the black
level of the video signal.
Connect a probe to TP102 and use R19 to adjust the signal variation to 30 V.
Verify that, when adjusting contrast, the black level does not change, otherwise use R19.
Eliminate the white image and leave only the black level.
Adjust R72 on the deflection board to obtain 9Cd/sqm in darkroom conditions with maximum external
adjustments.
3.3
FOCUS
Display an alphanumeric image with a video signal of 0.7 V and adjust the black part of the image to 0.3 Cd
with the external brightness adjustment; use the contrast control to adjust the white part of the image to about
120 Cd/sqm.
Use R76 to adjust the focus in the center of the image, R41 to adjust the vertical focus and R73 to adjust the
horizontal focus.
Use these three adjustment controls to obtain the best possible focus.
30-26
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
65
LIST OF USED MEASURING EQUIPMENT.

NOTE :
651
The hereunder given list is only for information.

Measurement devices with equivalent caracteristics can be used.
RADIATION MEASUREMENTS
Manufacturer:
Type:
Ionization chamber:
Capintec Model 192

Dosimeter
PM 30
Perform calibration before each measurement, by using the standard provided with the instrument.
652
ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS
Type:
milliamperemeter
Mfr:
Glossen
Mod:
PQM3
Scale:
10 mA
Precision: 1.5%
Annual calibration in comparison with a DVM.
Type:
Digital voltmeter
Mfr:
Norma
Mod:
D1216
Scale:
1 kV and 20 V
Precision: 0.2% + 1 digit
Oscilloscope
Mfr:
Tektronix
Mod:
564
Precision: 3%
Chronometer
Mfr:
Huer
Scale:
30 min.
Precision: 0.2 s
mAs meter
Mfr:
Fluke
Mod:
8000A
Scale:
2 20 200 mAs
Precision: 1%
Annual calibration by the supplier.
Multimeter
Mfr:
AVO
Mod:
9 MK11
Scale:
1 mA and 10 mA
Precision: 1%
30-27
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
30-28
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

Source: asm 2124131-100 IMAGEUR 16/22 CCD for STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000, Rev. 0, Page A-67
SCHEMATICS : MONITOR
BLOCK DIAGRAM
H. YOKE
LIGHT
SENSOR
BOARD
BRIG. 220K
SELECTION
BOARD
W1
100 / 120 Hz
W6
W7 120/100 Hz
W8
NC
1
J1
1
4
J4
H. COIL
GND
V. INP
1
2
3
4
OUT
V. COIL
J2
BLK
HS
G1
0V
0V
5V
J6
0V 27V
W8 W7
4 3 2 1
62V
W6
12V 95V
W5 W3
IN
1
2
VIDEO IN
J2
1
2
3
4
GND
CONT.
10K
J5
DEFLECTION
BOARD
J1
W4
W2
CONT 12V
0V
NC BR
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6
C VID
J7
GND
FR
W3 W2
6
5
4
3
2
1
W11
W5
J1
W4
W2
W3
F1
K
FOCUS
G2
G1
W6
W7
W9
W2
W1
F2
VIDEO
BOARD
8
7
4
3
2
1
CRT
YOKE
GND
TB1
J3
W8
FOCUS
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB2
G2
2 3 4 5 6 7
27V
HPV 0V
J2
H.V.
POWER
SUPPLY
L.V.
POWER
SUPPLY
W2
W1
95V
0V
W5
W6
6.3V
+12V
W8
W7
NC
W9
GP1
VAC
ANODIC V
30-29
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

DEFLECTION BOARD
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION

1 : L.V. Power supply
3 : H.V. Power supply
4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-30
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

From L.V. Power supply

549A
545E
Brightness control
549B
549C
549B
DEFLECTION BOARD
( 1/2 )
508
509

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
501
502
503
30-31
504
505
506
507
508
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
509
Avt.
Mod
.
510
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

DEFLECTION BOARD
TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-32
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

DEFLECTION BOARD
( 2/2 )

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
Mod
.
511
512
513
30-33
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
VIDEO BOARD

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-34
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

B
122D
or
144C
VIDEO BOARD

C.C.D. M.D.A.
E
Rev.
A
0
1
2
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
Mod
.
521
522
523
30-35
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

TOP VIEW OF MONITOR

WITH CARDS LOCATION
H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-36
GE Medical Systems
REV 1


C.C.D. M.D.A.
H.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

Rev.
A
0
1
2
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt.
Mod
.
531
532
533
30-37
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

L. V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

TOP VIEW OF MONITOR
WITH CARDS LOCATION

4 : Video board
5 : Selection board
30-38
GE Medical Systems
REV 1

MODULE 9 INTERFACE
9Tb1.
A
220 VAC
from
9TR1
002B
4
or
11
2
or
9
1
or
8
L.V. POWER SUPPLY BOARD

C.C.D. M.D.A.
Rev.
A
0
1
2
541
542
543
30-39
544
545
546
Date
15/07/96
10/10/96
09/01/97
Serial
No
Avt
.
547
Mod
.
548
549
550
GE Medical Systems

REV 1
30-40

Stenoscop Technical Supplement 1173 PG

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Stenoscop Technical Supplement 1173 PG

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

e

Stenoscop Technical Supplement

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Day One - Monday . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6 STUDENT EVALUATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

2-1 RADIATION SAFETY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 STATIC CONTROL - ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3 BLOOD BORNE PATHOGENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT (LOTO) AT GEMS EDUCATION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5 HAZCOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3-1 APPLICATION & DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 MOVING THE STENOSCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5 - DESCRIPTION & OPERATOR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

6-1 DSM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

DSM 200 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2 ADDITIONAL OPERATING MODES & EQUIPMENT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

6-3 DSM 200 - IMAGE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

7-11-1 Auto Fluoro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

7-12 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7-13 3A26 FILAMENT CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

7-15 3A3 COLLIMATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

7-16 3A3 BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-19 LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

SYNC AND MASK BOARD (PL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-26-1 Smoothing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-27 ELECTRONIC ADJUSTMENT LAB EXERCISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

PWB SWITCHES JOB CARDS RG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RG 21 3A1 INTERFACE DSM PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION 9 - STENOSCOP SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1 SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2 FRENCH TO ENGLISH LEXICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-3 ENGLISH METRIC CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 10 - TV CAMERA SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

SECTION 11 - MONICON 3 TV CAMERA CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

12-4 STENOSCOP 6000/9000 DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11

16-2 DSM 200 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

SECTION 17 - VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

SECTION 20 - STENOSCOP/MDA OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

STENOSCOP 2 6000/900 Series

This page intentionally left blank.

STENOSCOP 2 6000/9000 Series

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 GEMS EMPLOYEE PROPRIETARY AGREEMENT/AUTHORIZATION . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 COURSE COMPLETION CERTIFICATE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 GEMS HARASSMENT GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTENT vs. IMPACT"

I didn't mean to offend..." is not an excuse for any form of harassment.